XC60 OwnersManual MY18 en-GB TP23035 PDF

OWNER'S MANUAL
VÄLKOMMEN!
We hope you will enjoy many years of driving pleasure in your Volvo. The In order to increase your enjoyment of your Volvo, we recommend that
car has been designed for the safety and comfort of you and your pas- you read the instructions and maintenance information in this owner's
sengers. Volvo is one of the world's safest passenger vehicles. Your manual. The owner's manual is also available as a mobile app (Volvo
Volvo is also designed to meet applicable safety and environmental Manual) and on the Volvo Cars support site (support.volvocars.com).
requirements.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION SAFETY
This is how you find owner's information 14 Writing characters/words by hand on 53 Safety 56
the screen
Digital owner's manual in the car 15 Safety during pregnancy 56
Navigating in the digital owner's manual 16 Whiplash Protection System 57
Owner's Manual in mobile devices 18 Seatbelt 58
Volvo Cars support site 19 Seatbelt tensioner 59
Reading the owner's manual 19 Fastening/unfastening a seatbelt 60
Recording data 22 Door and seatbelt reminder 61
Important information on accesso- 23 Airbags 63
ries, extra equipment and diagnostic
socket Driver and passenger airbags 63
Volvo ID 23 Activating/deactivating the passen- 65
ger airbag*
Drive-E - cleaner driving pleasure 25
Side airbag 68
IntelliSafe-driver support 28
Inflatable curtain 68
Sensus - online connectivity and 29
entertainment Safety mode 69
The owner's manual and the environment 32 Starting/moving the car after safety 70
mode
Windows, glass and mirrors 32
Child safety 71
Overview of the centre display 33
Child seats 71
Operating the centre display 36
Upper mounting points for child seats 74
Navigating in the centre display's views 40
Lower mounting points for child seats 74
Symbols in the centre display's status bar 45
Table for location of child seats 76
Change settings for the centre display 46 using the car's seatbelts
Function view with buttons for car 47 i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points 78
functions
Table for location of ISOFIX child seats 79
Using the keyboard in the centre display 49
Table for location of i-Size child seats 82
2
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Instruments and controls, left-hand 84 Voice recognition control of radio 116 Active bending lights* 138
drive car and media
Front fog lamps/cornering lights* 138
Instruments and controls, right-hand 85 Voice recognition control of climate 117
drive car control Rear fog lamp 139
Driver display 88 Voice recognition and map navigation 118 Brake lights 140
Driver display settings 92 Manual front seat 119 Hazard warning flashers 140
Indicator symbols in the driver display 93 Power front seat* 120 Using direction indicators 141
Warning symbols in the driver display 95 Adjusting the power front seat* 120 Passenger compartment lighting 141
Outside temperature gauge 96 Using the memory function in the 121 Home safe light duration 144
Clock power front seat* Approach light duration 144
97
Fuel gauge Multi-functional front seat* 122 Using windscreen wipers 145
97
License agreement for the driver display Adjusting functions in the multi-func- 122 Activating/deactivating the rain sensor 145
98 tional front seat*
Application menu in the driver display 103 Windscreen and headlamp washers 146
Adjusting the passenger seat from 124
Using the application menu in the 104 the driver's seat* Rear window wiper and washer 147
driver display Power windows 148
Adjusting the head restraints in the 125
Messages in the driver display and 105 rear seat Operating power windows 148
the centre display
Lowering the backrests in the rear seat 126 Adjusting the door mirrors 149
Managing messages in the driver 107
display and the centre display Steering wheel 129 Interior rearview mirror 151
Managing messages saved from the 108 Adjusting the steering wheel 130 Compass* 152
driver display and centre display Lighting control 131 Calibrating the compass* 153
Head-up display* 110 Headlamp levelling 132 Panorama roof* 154
Voice recognition 113 Position lamps 133 Operating the panorama roof* 155
Using voice recognition 114 Daytime running lights 134 HomeLink®* 158
Settings for voice recognition 115 Dipped beam 134
Programming HomeLink®* 159
Voice recognition control of the phone 116 Activating/deactivating main beam 135
Trip computer 161
3
CLIMATE CONTROL
Show trip data in the driver display 163 Climate control 176 Activating/deactivating heating of 199
steering wheel*
Show trip statistics in the centre display 164 Climate control - sensors 177
Parking climate* 200
Settings in the centre display 165 Perceived temperature 177
Categories in the settings menu Air quality Starting/stopping preconditioning* 201
166 178
Changing system settings in the set- Passenger compartment filter Timer for preconditioning* 202
168 179
tings menu Setting the timer for preconditioning* 202
Clean Zone Interior Package* 179
Resetting settings in the settings menu 169 Activating/deactivating the timer for 204
Interior Air Quality System* 179
Driver profiles 169 preconditioning*
Climate controls 180
Selecting driver profile 170 Starting/switching off climate com- 204
Climate controls in the centre display 181 fort retention*
Editing a driver profile 171
Climate controls at the rear of the 182 Symbols and messages for parking 206
Linking remote control key to driver 172 tunnel console* climate control*
profile
Auto-regulating the climate 183 Heater* 207
Changing settings for apps 173
Activating/deactivating air conditioning 184 Parking heater* 208
Resetting user data for change of 173
ownership Regulating the temperature 185 Additional heater* 209
Regulating the fan level 187
Activating/deactivating defrost of 188
windows and door mirrors
Activating/deactivating air recirculation 191
Air distribution 191
Changing the air distribution 192
Opening/closing and aiming the air vents 193
Table of air distribution options 195
Activating/deactivating heating of 197
the seats*
Activating/deactivating ventilation of 198
the seats*
4
LOADING AND STORAGE LOCKS AND ALARM
Passenger compartment interior 212 Remote control key 230 Type approval for the remote control 260
key system
Tunnel console 212 Remote control key range 232
Electrical sockets 214 Red Key - Restricted remote control key* 233
Using the glovebox 218 Antenna locations for the start and 234
lock system
Sun visors 219
Locking/unlocking from the outside 235
Cargo area 219
Indication on locking/unlocking the car 237
Recommendations for loading 219
Locking/unlocking from the inside 239
Load retaining eyelets 221
Deadlocks* 241
Bag hooks 221
Locking/unlocking the tailgate 242
Through-load hatch in the rear seat 222
Using private locking 244
Cargo cover* 222
Detachable key blade 245
Safety net* 224
Locking/unlocking with the detacha- 246
Safety grille* 226 ble key blade
Power operated tailgate* 247
Opening/closing the tailgate with 250
foot movement*
Replacing the battery in the remote 252
control key
Immobiliser 255
Child safety locks 256
Alarm* 257
Automatic arming/rearming of the alarm* 259
Disarming the alarm* without work- 259
ing remote control key
Detection of unknown car component* 259
5
DRIVER SUPPORT
Speed-dependent steering force 270 Limitations of Distance Warning* 289 Symbols and messages for Pilot Assist* 320
Stability system 270 Adaptive cruise control* 290 Radar unit 322
Electronic Stability Control ESC 271 Activating and starting the Adaptive 294 Limitations of the radar unit 324
Sport mode for electronic stability control cruise control*
272 Type approval for radar units 328
Symbols and messages for elec- Managing the speed of the Adaptive 295
273 Camera unit 332
tronic stability control cruise control*
Limitations of the camera unit 333
Speed limiter* Setting the time interval for the 296
275 adaptive cruise control* City Safety 336
Activating and starting the Speed limiter 276 Deactivating/activating the Adaptive 298 Setting the warning distance for City 339
Managing speed for the Speed limiter 276 cruise control* Safety
Deactivating/reactivating the Speed 277 Overtaking assistance with adaptive 300 Detection of obstacles with City Safety 340
Limiter cruise control* or Pilot Assist*
City Safety in cross traffic 342
Switching off the speed limiter 278 Change of target and automatic 301
braking with the Adaptive Cruise Control City Safety with evasive manoeuvres 343
Automatic speed limiter* 279
Limitations of the adaptive cruise control* 302 City Safety when evasive manoeu- 345
Activating/deactivating the automatic 280 vres are prevented
speed limiter Change between Cruise control and 303
adaptive cruise control* Limitations of City Safety 346
Changing the tolerance for the Auto- 281
matic speed limiter Symbols and messages for the Messages for City Safety 348
305
Adaptive cruise control* Rear Collision Warning 349
Cruise control 282
Activating and starting the Cruise control Pilot Assist* 307 BLIS* 349
283
Managing speed for the Cruise control Activating and starting the Pilot Assist* 311 Activate/deactivate BLIS* 351
284
Deactivating/reactivating the cruise 285 Managing the speed for Pilot Assist* 313 Limitations of BLIS* 351
control Setting the time interval for Pilot Assist* 314 Cross Traffic Alert* 352
Deactivating Cruise Control 286 Deactivating/activating the Pilot Assist* 315 Activate/deactivate Cross Traffic Alert* 353
Distance Warning* 287 Change of target and automatic 317 Limitations of Cross Traffic Alert 354
Activating and setting the time inter- 288 braking with Pilot Assist*
Messages for BLIS* and Cross 356
val for Distance warning* Limitations of Pilot Assist* 319 Traffic Alert*
6
STARTING AND DRIVING
Road Sign Information* 357 Symbols and messages for Park 383 Alcohol lock* 402
Assist Pilot*
Sign display with Road Sign Information 358 Bypass of the alcohol lock* 402
Park assist camera* 384
Road Sign Information with Speed 360 Before starting the engine with the 402
Warning and Settings Park assist lines and fields for the 386 alcohol lock
park assist camera*
Road Sign Information with Speed 361 Ignition positions 403
Camera Information* Starting the Park assist camera* 388 Starting the car 404
Limitations of Road Sign Information* 362 Limitations for park assist camera* 389 Switching off the car 405
Driver Alert Control 363 Symbols and messages for Park 391 Steering lock 406
Activate/deactivate Driver Alert Control assist camera*
364 Using jump starting with another battery
Park Assist Pilot* 406
Limitations of Driver Alert Control 365 393
Gearbox 407
Lane Keeping Aid Parking with Park Assist Pilot* 394
365 Gear positions for automatic gearbox 408
Activate/deactivate Lane Keeping Aid 368 Limitations of Park Assist Pilot* 397
Manual gearbox 410
Symbols and messages for lane 369 Messages for Park Assist Pilot* 400
assistance Gear shift indicator* 410
Assistance upon risk of collision 371 Gear selector inhibitor 412
Symbols and messages for assis- 372 Changing gear with steering wheel 413
tance upon risk of collision paddles*
Steering assistance upon risk of lane 373 Start/Stop 414
departure Using the Start/Stop function 414
Steering assistance upon risk of 375 Conditions for the Start/Stop function 416
head-on collision
Drive modes* 418
Steering assistance upon risk of 376
rear-end collision* Drive mode ECO 421
Park Assist* 378 Level control* and shock absorption 423
Activating/deactivating Park Assist Pilot* 380 All-wheel drive* 425
Limitations of Park Assist Pilot* 381 Brake functions 425
Foot brake 425
7
AUDIO AND MEDIA
Emergency brake lights 427 Towing bracket* 444 Audio and media 456
Brake assistance 427 Extendable/retractable towing brackets* 445 Apps 456
Auto braking after a collision 428 Towing bracket specifications* 447 Audio settings 457
Parking brake 428 Driving with a trailer 448 Radio 458
Using the parking brake 429 Trailer lamps 449 Changing and searching radio stations 458
In the event of a fault in the parking 431 Trailer Stability Assist* 450 RDS radio 460
brake
Towing eye 452 Digital radio 461
Hill start assist 431
Towing 453 Linking between different radio 461
Automatic braking when stationary 432 bands FM and DAB
Recovering the car 454
Low speed control* 433 Settings for radio 462
Hill descent control* 434 Media player 463
Driving in water 435 Media playback 463
Overheating in the engine and drive 436 Gracenote® 466
system
Searching media 466
Overloading the starter battery 437
CD player* 467
Preparations for a long trip 437
Media via Bluetooth® 467
Winter driving 438
Connecting a device via Bluetooth® 468
Opening/closing the fuel filler flap 439
and refuelling Media via USB port 468
Handling of fuel 440 Connecting a device via USB port 468
Petrol 441 video 469
Diesel 441 Audio settings for media 469
Empty tank and diesel engine 442 TV* 470
Diesel particulate filter 443 Using the TV* 470
Economical driving 443 Apple CarPlay* 471
8
WHEELS AND TYRES
Using Apple CarPlay* 472 Terms and conditions for services 501 Tyres 504
and Customer Privacy Policy
Settings for Apple CarPlay* 473 Tyres' rotation direction 505
Android Auto* 473 Tread wear indicators on the tyres 506
Settings for Android Auto* 475 Checking the tyre pressures 506
Technical specifications for media 475 Tyre monitoring* 507
Phone 477 Checking tyre pressure with the tyre 509
monitoring system*
Connect phone 478
Rectifying low tyre pressure with tyre 510
Connecting/disconnecting the phone 479 monitoring*
Managing phone calls 480 Calibrating tyre monitoring* 511
Managing text messages 481 Emergency puncture repair kit 512
Managing the phone book 482 Using the emergency puncture repair kit 513
Settings for phone 483 Inflate tyres with the compressor 516
Settings for text messages 483 from the emergency puncture repair kit
Bluetooth® settings 483 When changing wheels 517
Online car* 484 Removing a wheel 518
Connecting the car 484 Fitting the wheels 519
Sharing Internet via Wi-Fi hotspot 486 Wheel bolts 520
No or poor connection 487 Spare wheel* 520
Remove Wi-Fi network 488 Winter wheels 521
Wi-Fi technologies and security 488 Tool kit 522
Settings for car modem* 488 Warning triangle 523
Downloading, updating and uninstal- 489 Jack* 523
ling apps First aid kit 524
License agreement for audio and media 491 Dimension designation for wheel rim 524
9
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Dimension designation for tyre 525 Volvo service programme 528 Support battery 553
Car status 528 Fuses 554
Book service and repair 528 Replacing a fuse 555
Remote updates 531 Fuses in engine compartment 556
System updates 531 Fuses under glovebox 559
Raise the car 533 Fuses in cargo area 563
Opening and closing the bonnet 535 Cleaning the exterior 567
Engine compartment overview 536 Polishing and waxing 569
Engine oil 537 Rustproofing 570
Checking and filling with engine oil 539 Cleaning the interior 570
Topping up coolant 540 Cleaning the centre display 572
Servicing the climate control system 542 Paint damage 573
Bulb replacement 542 Repairing paint damage 573
Replacing the dipped beam bulb 544
Replacing the main beam lamp 545
Replacing daytime running light 545
bulb/position lamp bulb, front
Replacing the front direction indica- 546
tor bulb
Bulb specifications 546
Wiper blades in service position 547
Replacing a wiper blade 548
Filling washer fluid 549
Starter battery 550
Symbols on the batteries 552
10
SPECIFICATIONS ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Type designations 576 Alphabetical Index 593
Dimensions 579
Weights 581
Towing capacity and towball load 582
Engine specifications 584
Engine oil — specifications 585
Adverse driving conditions for engine oil 586
Coolant — specifications 587
Transmission fluid — specifications 587
Brake fluid — specifications 587
Fuel tank - volume 588
Air conditioning — specifications 588
Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions 590
Approved tyre pressures 591
Performance 592
11
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
This is how you find owner's The car's centre display1 Printed information
information In the centre display, drag down There is a supplement to the
Owner's information is available in several differ- the top view and tap on owner's manual1 in the glove-
ent product formats, both digital and printed. Owner's manual. Available box that contains information
The owner's manual is available in the car's cen- here are options for visual navi- on fuses and specifications, as
tre display, as a mobile app and on the Volvo gation with exterior and interior well as a summary of important
Cars support site. There is a Quick Guide and a images of the car. The informa- and practical information.
supplement to the owner's manual available in tion is searchable and is also There is also a Quick Guide available in printed
the glovebox, with specifications and fuse infor- divided into categories. format that helps you to get started with the most
mation, amongst other things. A printed owner's commonly used functions in the car.
manual can be ordered. Mobile app
In App Store or Google Play, Depending on equipment level selected, market,
search for "Volvo Manual", etc. additional owner's information may also be
download the app to your available in printed format in the car.
smartphone or tablet and select
A printed owner's manual and associated supple-
the car. Available in the app are
ment can be ordered. Contact a Volvo dealer to
video tutorials and options for
order.
visual navigation with exterior
and interior images of the car. It is easy to navi- Changing the language in the car's
gate between the different sections in the centre display
owner's manual and the content is searchable. Changing the language in the centre display may
Volvo Cars support site mean that some owner's information does not
Go to support.volvocars.com correspond to national or local laws and regula-
and select your country. Here tions. Don't change to a language that's difficult
you can find owner's manuals, to understand, it may then be difficult to find your
both online and in PDF format. way back in the structure on the screen.
On the Volvo Cars support site
there are also video tutorials
and further information and
help regarding your Volvo and your car owner-
ship. The page is available for most markets.
1A complete printed manual is included with the car for markets without owner's manual in the centre display.
14
INTRODUCTION
IMPORTANT Digital owner's manual in the car the owner's manual. One way is from the top
A digital2 version of the owner's manual is availa- menu, with a tap on .
The driver is always responsible that the vehi-
ble in the car's centre display.
cle is driven safely in traffic and that applica-
ble laws and regulations are followed. It is Symbols and their meaning in the owner's
also important that the car is maintained and manual menu
handled in accordance with Volvo's recom- Leads to the start page of
mendations in the owner's information. the Owner's Manual.
If there should be a difference between the
information in the centre display and the prin-
ted information then it is always the printed
information that applies.
Articles grouped by cate-
Related information gory. The same article may
• Digital owner's manual in the car (p. 15) appear in several catego-
• Owner's Manual in mobile devices (p. 18) The digital owner's manual is accessed from the top
ries.
• Volvo Cars support site (p. 19) view.
• Reading the owner's manual (p. 19) To open the digital owner's manual - drag down
the top view in the centre display and tap on Leads to a Quick Guide
Owner's manual. page with links for a selec-
tion of articles that can be
NOTE particularly useful to read.
Provides answers to com-
The digital owner's manual is not available
mon questions about the
while driving.
car.
There is a range of different options for finding

information in the digital owner's manual. The
options can be reached from the start page of
2 Applies for most markets. }}
15
INTRODUCTION
|| Symbols and their meaning in the owner's Symbols and their meaning in the owner's Navigating in the digital owner's
manual menu manual menu manual
The digital owner's manual can be accessed
Exterior and interior over- Leads to short video tutori- from the centre display in the car. The content is
view images of the car. Dif- als for different functions in searchable and it is easy to navigate between
ferent parts are designated the car. different sections.
with hotspots that lead to
articles about those parts
of the car.
Indicates what version of

the Owner's Manual is
available in the car and pro-
vides other useful informa-
tion.
All articles that have been

favourited are compiled Related information
here. • Navigating in the digital owner's manual
(p. 16) The digital owner's manual is accessed from the top
view.
Open the digital owner's manual

– To open the digital owner's manual - drag
down the top view in the centre display and
tap on Owner's manual.
There is a range of different options for finding
information in the digital owner's manual. To
access the owner's manual menu – press in
the upper bar of the owner's manual.
16
INTRODUCTION
Searching using categories 1. Press and then select Exterior/ Favourites

The articles in the owner's Interior. Located here are the articles
manual are structured into > Exterior/interior images are shown with that have been saved as
main categories and subcate- so-called hotspots in place. The hotspot favourites. Tap on an article in
gories. The same article can be leads to articles about the corresponding order to read it in its entirety.
found in several appropriate part of the car. Swipe horizontally over the
categories in order to be found screen to browse among the images.
more easily.
2. Tap on a hotspot. Saving/deleting articles as favourites
1. Press and then select Categories. Save an article as favourite by pressing at the
> The title of the article about the area is
> The main categories are shown in a list. shown. top right when an article is open. When an article
has been saved as a favourite the star is filled in:
2. Tap on a main category ( ). 3. Tap on the title to open the article. To go
back, press the back arrow. .
> A list of subcategories ( ) and articles
To remove an article as a favourite, press the star
( ) is shown. Learn about the car's most common again in the current article.
3. Tap on an article to open it. To go back, functions with the Quick Guide
press the back arrow. Leads to a page with links for a Video
selection of articles that can be Leads to short video tutorials
Hotspots for exterior and interior particularly useful to read in for different functions in the
Exterior and interior overview order to get to know the most car.
images of the car. Different common functions of the car.
parts are designated with hot- The articles can also be
spots that lead to articles about accessed via categories, but
those parts of the car. are collected here for quick access. Tap on an
article in order to read it in its entirety. Information
Tap on the symbol to obtain
information about which version
of the owner's manual is availa-
ble in the car as well as other
useful information.
}}
17
INTRODUCTION
|| Start page Owner's Manual in mobile devices in the owner's manual and the content is search-
Tap on the symbol to go back The owner's manual is available as a mobile able.
to the start page in the owner's app3 from both the App Store and Google Play.
manual. The app is adapted for smartphones and tablets.
Using the search function

1. Tap on in the top menu of the owner's
manual. A keyboard appears in the lower part
of the screen.
2. Type in a keyword, such as "seatbelt".
> Suggestions for articles and categories
are shown while letters are being entered.
3. Tap on the article/category to access it.
The owner's manual can be
Related information
downloaded as a mobile app
• Digital owner's manual in the car (p. 15)
from the App Store or Google
• Using the keyboard in the centre display Play. The QR code provided
(p. 49) here takes you directly to the The mobile app is available from both the App Store and
Google Play.
app. Alternatively, you can
search for "Volvo manual" in Related information
the App Store or Google Play. • Reading the owner's manual (p. 19)
The app contains a video along with exterior and • Volvo Cars support site (p. 19)
interior images where different parts of the car
are highlighted with so-called hotspots, which
lead to articles about the area in question. It is
easy to navigate between the different sections
3 For certain mobile devices.
18
INTRODUCTION
Volvo Cars support site ments and warranties. Here there is also informa- Reading the owner's manual
More information on your car is available on the tion about accessories and software adapted for A good way of getting to know your new car is
Volvo Cars website and support site. your car model. to read the owner's manual, ideally before your
first journey.
Support on the Internet Related information
• Volvo ID (p. 23) Reading the owner's manual is a good way to
Go to support.volvocars.com to visit the site. The
become familiar with new functions, get advice
support site is available for most markets.
on how best to handle the car in different situa-
It contains support for functions such as web- tions and learn how to make the best use of all
based services and functions, Volvo On Call*, the the car's features. Please pay attention to the
navigation system* and apps. Videos and step- safety instructions contained in the owner's man-
by-step instructions explain different procedures, ual.
e.g. how to connect the car to the Internet via a Development work is constantly underway in
mobile phone. order to improve our product. Modifications may
Downloadable information mean that information, descriptions and illustra-
tions in the owner's manual differ from the equip-
Maps ment in the car. We reserve the right to make
For cars equipped with Sensus Navigation, there modifications without prior notice.
is the facility to download maps from the support
page. Do not remove this manual from the car - if prob-
lems should arise then the necessary information
Owner's manuals as PDF about where and how to seek professional help
Owner's manuals are available for download in will be missing.
PDF format. Select car model and model year to
download the manual as required. © Volvo Car Corporation
Contact Options/accessories
The support site contains contact details to cus- In addition to standard equipment, the owner's
tomer support and your nearest Volvo dealer. manual also describes options (factory fitted
equipment) and certain accessories (retrofitted
Log in to Volvo Cars website extra equipment).
Create a personal Volvo ID and log in to
All types of option/accessory are marked with an
www.volvocars.com. When you have logged in it is
asterisk: *.
possible to get an overview of service, agree-
}}
* Option/accessory. 19
INTRODUCTION
|| The equipment described in the owner's manual Message texts Risk of property damage
is not available in all cars - they have different There are displays in the car that show menu and
equipment depending on adaptations for the message texts. In the owner's manual the
needs of different markets and national or local appearance of these texts differs from the normal
laws and regulations. text. Examples of menu texts and message texts:
In the event of uncertainty over what is standard Phone, New message.
or an option/accessory, contact a Volvo dealer.
Decals
Special texts The car contains different types of decal which
are designed to convey important information in a
simple and clear manner. The decals in the car
WARNING have the following descending degree of impor-
Warning texts appear if there is a risk of tance for the warning/information.
injury.
Warning of personal injury
White ISO symbols and white text/image on
black or blue warning field and message field.
IMPORTANT
Used to indicate the presence of danger which, if
"Important" texts appear if there is a risk of the warning is ignored, may result in damage to
damage. property.
NOTE
NOTE texts give advice or tips that facilitate
the use of e.g. features and functions.
Footnote
The owner's manual contains information in cer-
tain locations in the form of a footnote at the bot- Black ISO symbols on yellow warning field, white
tom of the page or at the end of a table. This text/image on black message field. Used to indi-
information is an addition to the text that it refers cate the presence of danger which, if the warning
to via a number. If the footnote refers to text in a is ignored, may result in serious personal injury or
table then letters are used instead of numbers fatality.
for referral.
20
INTRODUCTION
Information bered in the same way as the corresponding Images

illustration. Illustrations used in the owner's manual are
Lists of letters appear adjacent to the series sometimes schematic and are intended to pro-
of illustrations where the order of the instruc- vide an overall picture or example of a certain
tions is not significant. function. Illustrations may deviate from the car's
appearance depending on equipment level and
Arrows appear numbered and unnumbered
market.
and are used to illustrate a movement.
Arrows with letters are used to clarify a To be continued
movement when the relative order is of no }} This symbol is located furthest down to the
relevance. right when an article continues on the following
If there is no series of illustrations for step-by- page.
step instructions then the different steps are
Continued from previous page
|| This symbol is located furthest up to the left
numbered with normal numbers.
White ISO symbols and white text/image on
black message field. Position lists when an article continues from the previous
Red circles containing a number are used in page.
NOTE overview images where different components
are pointed out. The number recurs in the
Related information
It is not intended that the decals illustrated in • Digital owner's manual in the car (p. 15)
the owner's manual should be exact replicas position list featured in connection with the
of those in the car. They are included to show illustration that describes the item. • Owner's Manual in mobile devices (p. 18)
their approximate appearance and location in
Bulleted lists
• Volvo Cars support site (p. 19)
the car. The information that applies to your
A bulleted list is used when there is a list of
particular car is available on the respective
points in the owner's manual.
decals for your car.
Example:
Procedure lists • Coolant
Procedures where action must be taken in a cer- • Engine oil
tain sequence are numbered in the owner's man-
ual: Related information
Related information refers to other articles con-
When there is a series of illustrations for
taining closely associated information.
step-by-step instructions each step is num-
21
INTRODUCTION
Recording data driving conditions. Similarly, the system never Volvo will not contribute to the above-described
As part of Volvo's safety and quality assurance, registers who is driving the vehicle or the geo- information being disclosed to third parties with-
certain information about the vehicle's operation, graphic location of the accident or near-miss sit- out the vehicle owner's consent. To comply with
functionality and incidents are recorded in the uation. However, other parties, such as the police, national legislation and regulations, Volvo may be
car. could use the recorded data in combination with forced to disclose information of this nature to
the type of personally identifiable information the police or other authorities who may assert a
This vehicle is equipped with an "Event Data routinely collected after a traffic accident. Special legal right to access such. Special technical
Recorder" (EDR). Its primary purpose is to regis- equipment and access to either the vehicle or the equipment which Volvo and workshops that have
ter and record data related to traffic accidents or EDR is required to be able to interpret the regis- entered into agreements with Volvo have access
collision-like situations, such as times when the tered data. to is required to be able to read and interpret the
airbag deploys or the vehicle strikes an obstacle recorded data. Volvo is responsible that the infor-
In addition to the EDR, the car is equipped with a
in the road. The data is recorded in order to mation, which is transferred to Volvo during serv-
number of computers designed to continually
increase understanding of how vehicle systems icing and maintenance, is securely stored and
check and monitor the function of the car. They
work in these types of situations. The EDR is managed and that its management complies with
can record data during normal driving conditions,
designed to record data related to vehicle relevant legal requirements. For further informa-
but in particular register faults affecting the vehi-
dynamics and safety systems for a short time, tion - contact a Volvo dealer.
cle's operation and functionality, or upon activa-
usually 30 seconds or less.
tion of the vehicle's driver support function (e.g.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record City Safety and the auto brake function).
data related to the following in the event of traffic
Some of the recorded data is required to enable
accidents or collision-like situations:
service and maintenance technicians to diagnose
• How the various systems in the car worked and remedy any faults that occurred in the vehi-
• Whether the driver and passenger seatbelts cle. The registered information is also needed to
were fastened/tensioned enable Volvo to satisfy legal requirements laid out
in laws and by government authorities. Informa-
• The driver's use of the accelerator or brake
tion registered in the vehicle is stored in its com-
pedal
puter until the vehicle is serviced or repaired.
• The travel speed of the vehicle
In addition to the above, the registered informa-
This information can help us better understand tion can be used in aggregate form for research
the circumstances in which traffic accidents, inju- and product development with the aim of contin-
ries and damage occur. The EDR only records uously improving the safety and quality of Volvo
data when a non-trivial collision situation occurs. cars.
The EDR does not record any data during normal
22
INTRODUCTION
Important information on Volvo ID

accessories, extra equipment and Volvo ID provides access to a wide range of per-
diagnostic socket sonalized Volvo services4 online.
Incorrect connection and installation of accesso-
ries, extra equipment or software/diagnostic It is possible to create a Volvo ID from the car,
tools may have a negative effect on the car's volvocars.com or Volvo On Call app5. Certain
electronic system. functions and services require that the car is reg-
istered to a personal Volvo ID. Registering the
Certain accessories only function when associ- Volvo ID to the car makes a wide range of Volvo
ated software is installed in the car's computer services available directly from the car.
system. Volvo therefore recommends always
Examples of services:
making contact with an authorised Volvo work-
shop before the installation of accessories or Data link connector OBDII is under the instrument panel • Volvo On Call* - Volvo ID is used when log-
extra equipment that are connected to or affect on the driver's side ging in to the Volvo On Call app.
the electrical system.
• Send to Car - Makes it possible to send an
address from an Internet map service directly
Connection of equipment to the car's
to the car.
diagnostic socket
• Book Service and Repair - Register your pre-
ferred workshop/dealer at volvocars.com to
WARNING
be able to book service directly from the car.
Volvo Cars accepts no liability for the conse-
quences if unauthorised equipment is con- Creating a Volvo ID
nected to the On-board Diagnostic socket It is possible to create a Volvo ID in different
(OBDII). This socket should only be used by ways. If the Volvo ID is created at volvocars.com
trained and qualified Volvo service techni- or with Volvo On Call app, the Volvo ID must also
cians.
be registered to the car to enable use of the vari-
ous Volvo ID services.
4 The services available may vary over time and vary depending on equipment level and market.
5 If you have Volvo On Call*. }}
INTRODUCTION
|| With the Volvo ID app 3. Follow the instructions that are automatically Advantages of Volvo ID
1. Download the Volvo ID app from Download sent to the specified email address. • One user name and one password to access
Centre in the centre display's app view. > A Volvo ID has now been created. Read online services, i.e. only one username and
below to learn how to register the ID to one password to remember.
2. Start the app and register a personal email
address. the car. • If the username/password for a service (e.g.
Volvo On Call) is changed, then it is also
3. Follow the instructions that are automatically Registering your Volvo ID to the car changed automatically for other services.
sent to the specified email address. If you created your Volvo ID via the web or the
> A Volvo ID has now been created and Volvo On Call app, register it to your car as fol- Related information
automatically registered to the car. lows: • Downloading, updating and uninstalling apps
Volvo ID services can now be used. 1. If not done already, download the Volvo ID (p. 489)
On Volvo Cars website app from Download Centre in the app view. • Connecting the car (p. 484)
1. Go into www.volvocars.com and log in6 using
the icon at the top right. Select Create Volvo NOTE
ID. To download apps, the car must be con-
2. Enter a personal email address. nected to the Internet.
3. Follow the instructions that are automatically
sent to the specified email address. 2. Start the app and enter your Volvo ID/your
> A Volvo ID has now been created. Read email address.
below to learn how to register the ID to 3. Follow the instructions that are automatically
the car. sent to the email address linked to your
With Volvo On Call mobile app7 Volvo ID.
1. Download the latest version of the Volvo On > Your Volvo ID is now registered to the car.
Call app from a smartphone, via e.g. App Volvo ID services can now be used.
Store, Windows Phone or Google Play.
2. Choose to create a Volvo ID from the app's
start page and enter a personal email
address.
6 Available in certain markets.

7 If you have Volvo On Call*.
24 * Option/accessory.
INTRODUCTION
Drive-E - cleaner driving pleasure products and solutions in order to reduce the
Volvo Car Corporation is constantly working on negative impact on the environment.
the development of safer and more efficient
Environmental care is one of Volvo Cars’ core val- inside a Volvo is, for example, cleaner than the air Fuel consumption
ues and influences all operations. The environ- outside thanks to the climate control system. Since a large part of a car's total environmental
mental work is based on the whole life cycle of impact stems from its use, the emphasis of Volvo
Your Volvo complies with stringent international
the car and takes into account the environmental Cars' environmental work is on reducing fuel con-
environmental standards. All Volvo's manufactur-
impact it has, from design to scrapping and recy- sumption, carbon dioxide emissions and other air
ing units must be ISO 14001 certified, and this
cling. Volvo Cars' basic principle is that every new pollutants. Volvo cars have competitive fuel con-
supports a systematic approach to the opera-
product developed must have less impact on the sumption in each of their respective classes.
tion's environmental issues, which leads to con-
environment than the product it replaces. Lower fuel consumption generally results in lower
tinuous improvement with reduced environmental
Volvo's environmental management work has impact. Holding the ISO certificate also means emission of the greenhouse gas, carbon dioxide.
resulted in the development of more effective that environmental laws and regulations in force
and less polluting drivelines Drive-E. Personal are complied with. Volvo also requires that its
environment is also important to Volvo - the air partners must also meet these requirements.
}}
25
INTRODUCTION
|| Contributing to a better environment type of waste should be discarded - an author- Interior

An energy-efficient and fuel-efficient car not only ised Volvo workshop is recommended. The material used in the interior of a Volvo is
contributes to a reduced impact on the environ- carefully selected and has been tested in order to
ment, but also means reduced costs for the Efficient emission control be pleasant and comfortable. Some of the details
owner of the car. As the driver, it is easy to Your Volvo is manufactured following the concept are hand-made, such as the seams of the steer-
reduce fuel consumption and thereby save "Clean inside and out" – a concept that encom- ing wheel that are sewn by hand. The interior is
money and contribute to a better environment - passes a clean interior environment as well as monitored in order not to emit strong odours or
here is some advice: highly efficient emission control. In many cases substances that cause discomfort in the event of
the exhaust emissions are well below the applica- e.g. high heat and bright light.
• Plan for an effective average speed. Speeds ble standards.
above approx. 80 km/h (approx. 50 mph) Volvo workshops and the environment
and below 50 km/h (approx. 30 mph) lead to Clean air in the passenger Regular maintenance creates the conditions for a
increased energy consumption. compartment long service life and low fuel consumption for
• Follow the Service and Warranty Booklet's A passenger compartment filter prevents dust your car. In this way you also contribute to a
recommended intervals for service and main- and pollen from entering the passenger compart- cleaner environment. When Volvo's workshops
tenance of the car. ment via the air intake. are entrusted with the service and maintenance
• Avoid letting the engine idle - switch off the The Interior Air Quality System (IAQS)* ensures of your car it becomes part of Volvo's system.
engine when stationary for longer periods. that the incoming air is cleaner than the air in the Volvo makes clear demands regarding the way in
Pay attention to local regulations. traffic outside. which workshop premises shall be designed in
order to prevent spills and discharges into the
• Plan the journey - a lot of unnecessary stops The system cleans the air in the passenger com- environment. The workshop staff have the knowl-
and uneven speed contribute to increased partment from contaminants such as particles, edge and the tools required to guarantee good
fuel consumption. hydrocarbons, nitrous oxides and ground-level environmental care.
• Use preconditioning* before starting in cold ozone. If the outside air is contaminated then the
conditions - it improves starting capacity and air intake is closed and the air is recirculated. Recycling
reduces wear in cold weather. The engine Such a situation may arise in heavy traffic, Since Volvo works from a life cycle perspective, it
reaches normal operating temperature more queues and tunnels for example. is also important that the car is recycled in an
quickly, which decreases consumption and IAQS is a part of the Clean Zone Interior Pack- environmentally sound manner. Almost all of the
reduces emissions. age (CZIP)*, which also includes a function that car can be recycled. The last owner of the car is
allows the fan to start when the car is unlocked therefore requested to contact a dealer for refer-
Also remember to always dispose of environmen-
with the remote control key. ral to a certified/approved recycling facility.
tally hazardous waste, such as batteries and oil, in
an environmentally safe manner. Consult a work-
shop in the event of uncertainty about how this
INTRODUCTION
Related information
• Drive modes* (p. 418)
• The owner's manual and the environment
(p. 32)
• Economical driving (p. 443)
• Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions
(p. 590)
• Air quality (p. 178)
INTRODUCTION
IntelliSafe-driver support pedestrians, cyclists or larger animals. If the driver • City Safety (p. 336)
IntelliSafe is the Volvo Cars concept concerning does not react to the warning and the risk of col- • Lane Keeping Aid (p. 365)
car safety. It comprises a number of systems, lision is imminent then City Safety can automati-
cally brake the car. • Stability system RSC1 (p. 270)
both standard and optional, that contribute to
making a car journey safe, to the prevention of Lane Keeping Aid (LKA)* is another example of a • Seatbelt (p. 58)
injuries and to the protection of passengers and function that helps to prevent accidents by warn- • Safety (p. 56)
other road users. ing the driver and giving corrective steering inter- • Airbags (p. 63)
ventions if the car is about to cross a lane side
Support
line.
• Pilot Assist* (p. 307)
There are systems incorporated in IntelliSafe that • Steering assistance upon risk of lane depar-
help the driver to drive the car in a safe manner. Also available is the steering assistance function, ture (p. 373)
The driver support functions incorporated in the whose purpose is to reduce the risk of the car
car include e.g. adaptive cruise control*, which unintentionally leaving the road and actively steer • Whiplash Protection System (p. 57)
ensures that a constant distance is held between the car back onto the road.
the car and the vehicle in front.
Protection
Pilot Assist* helps the driver to keep the car To protect the driver and passengers, the car is
between the lane's edge markings, combined equipped with seatbelt tensioners which can ten-
with maintaining a preset time interval to the sion the seatbelts in critical situations and in col-
vehicle ahead. lisions. It also has airbags and inflatable curtains,
Park Assist Pilot* helps the driver park the car by as well as Whiplash Protection System (WHIPS)
sensing the area around it. which protects against whiplash injuries.
Other examples of systems that help the driver Related information

are the Active main beam, Cross Traffic Alert • Adaptive cruise control* (p. 290)
(CTA)* and Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* sys- • Park Assist Pilot* (p. 393)
tems.
• Activating/deactivating main beam (p. 135)
Prevention • Activate/deactivate Cross Traffic Alert*
An example of a function that helps to prevent (p. 353)
accidents is City Safety. The function warns the
driver of risks of collision with another vehicle, • BLIS* (p. 349)
1 Roll Stability Control
INTRODUCTION
Sensus - online connectivity and Information when it is needed, where it

entertainment is needed
Sensus makes it possible to surf the Internet, The different displays in the car provide informa-
use different types of apps and make the car a tion at the right time. The information is shown in
Wi-Fi hotspot. different locations based on how it should be pri-
oritised by the driver.
This is Sensus
Sensus offers an intelligent interface and online

connectivity with the digital world. An intuitive
navigation structure makes it possible to receive
relevant support, information and entertainment
when it is necessary, without distracting the
driver.
Sensus covers all solutions in the car that are
connected with entertainment, online connectiv-
ity, navigation* and the user interface between
driver and car. It is Sensus that makes communi-
cation possible between you, the car and the out-
side world.
}}
INTRODUCTION
||
Different types of information are shown in different displays depending on how the information should be prioritised.
Head-up display* speed information and navigation* information. Driver display

Road Sign Information and incoming phone calls
are also shown in the head-up display. The dis-
play is operated via the right-hand steering wheel
keypad and via the centre display.
12-inch driver display.

The head-up display shows selected information
that the driver should deal with as soon as possi-
ble. Such information includes traffic warnings,
INTRODUCTION
Many of the main functions of the car are con- • Driver display (p. 88)
trolled from the centre display, a touch screen • Voice recognition (p. 113)
which reacts to touch. The number of physical
buttons and controls in the car is therefore mini- • Online car* (p. 484)
mal. The screen can even be operated while • Audio and media (p. 456)
wearing gloves.
From here, for example, you can control the cli-
mate control system, the entertainment system
and seat position*. The information that is shown
in the centre display can be acted on by the
driver or someone else in the car when the
opportunity arises.
Voice recognition system
The driver display shows information on speed The voice recognition system
and e.g. incoming calls or song tracks being can be used without the driver
played. The display is operated via the two steer- needing to take his/her hands
ing wheel keypads. off the steering wheel. The sys-
Centre display tem can understand natural
speech. Use voice recognition
to, for example, play back a
song, call someone, increase the temperature or
read out a text message.
For more information about all functions/

systems, see the relevant section in the owner's
manual or its supplement.
Related information
• Operating the centre display (p. 36)
• Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 40)
• Head-up display* (p. 110)
INTRODUCTION
The owner's manual and the Windows, glass and mirrors • Windscreen and headlamp washers (p. 146)
environment The car contains controls for windows, glass
The Owner's Manual is printed on paper origi- and mirrors. Some of the windows in the car are
nating from controlled forests. reinforced with lamination, which makes the pas-
senger compartment more soundproof, amongst
The Forest Stewardship Council (FSC)® symbol other things.
shows that the paper pulp in a printed owner's
manual comes from FSC®-certified forests or Laminated glass
other controlled sources. The windscreen and panorama* roof have lamina-
ted glass. The glass is reinforced, which provides
better protection against break-ins and improved
sound insulation in the passenger compartment.
Laminated glass is available as an option for cer-
tain other glass surfaces.
The symbol is shown on the windows where the glass is

laminated9.
Related information
• Drive-E - cleaner driving pleasure (p. 25) Related information
• Panorama roof* (p. 154)
• Power windows (p. 148)
• Activating/deactivating defrost of windows
and door mirrors (p. 188)
• Interior rearview mirror (p. 151)
• Adjusting the door mirrors (p. 149)
• Using windscreen wipers (p. 145)
9 Does not apply to the windscreen or panorama roof* which are always laminated and thus do not have this symbol.
INTRODUCTION
Overview of the centre display

Many of the car's functions are controlled from
the centre display. Presented here is the centre
display and its options.
}}
33
INTRODUCTION
||
Three of the centre display's basic views. Swipe right or left to access the function or app view respectively10.
Function view - car functions that are acti- tions are also so-called trigger functions, ting options. Examples of such are Camera
vated/deactivated with a press. Certain func- which means they open a window with set- and parking functions. Settings for the head-
10 The views are reversed for right-hand drive cars.
34
INTRODUCTION
up display* are also made from the function Extra subview - recently used apps/car func-
view, but adjustments are made using the tions that do not belong in any of the other
steering wheel's right-hand keypad. subviews. Tap on the subview to expand it.
Home view - the first view that is shown Climate row - information and direct interac-
when the screen is started. tion to set temperature, seat heating level*
Application view (app view) - apps that have and fan speed. Tap on the symbol in the cen-
been downloaded (third-party apps) and tre of the climate row in order to open the
apps for embedded functions, such as FM climate view with more setting options.
radio. Tap on an app icon to open the app.
Related information
Status bar - the activities in the car are • Operating the centre display (p. 36)
shown right at the top of the screen. Net-
work/connection information is shown on the
(p. 40)
left-hand side of the status bar, while media-
related information, the clock and indication • Function view with buttons for car functions
about on-going background activity are (p. 47)
shown on the right. • Changing settings for apps (p. 173)
Top view - drag the tab down in order to • Symbols in the centre display's status bar
access the top view. Settings, Owner's (p. 45)
manual, Profile and the car's saved mes-
• Settings in the centre display (p. 165)
sages are accessed from here.
Navigation - leads to map navigation, with
e.g. Sensus Navigation*. Tap on the subview • Media player (p. 463)
to expand it. • Phone (p. 477)
Media - recently used apps associated with • Climate controls in the centre display
media. Tap on the subview to expand it. (p. 181)
Phone - the phone function can be reached • Cleaning the centre display (p. 572)
from here. Tap on the subview to expand it.
INTRODUCTION
Operating the centre display views, marking objects, scrolling in a list and mov- IMPORTANT
Many of the car's functions are controlled and ing apps can be performed by touching the
screen in different ways. Do not use sharp objects on the screen as
regulated from the centre display. The centre
they may scratch it.
display is a touch screen that reacts to touch. An infrared film enables the screen to detect a
finger that is just in front of the screen. This tech-
Using the touch screen functionality in nology makes it possible to use the screen even
The table below presents the different proce-
the centre display with gloves on.
dures for operating the screen:
The screen reacts differently depending on Two people can interact with the screen at the
whether you press, drag or swipe across it. same time, e.g. to adjust the climate for the driver
Actions such as browsing between different and passenger side respectively.
Procedure Execution Result

Press once. Highlights an object, confirms a selection or activates a function.
Press twice in quick suc- Zooms in on a digital object, such as the map*.
cession.
Press and hold. Grabs an object. Can be used to move apps or map points on the map*. Press and hold your finger against
the screen and at the same time drag the object to the desired location.
Tap once with two fingers. Zooms out from a digital object, such as the map*.
INTRODUCTION
Procedure Execution Result

Drag Changes between different views, scrolls a list, text or view. Hold depressed and drag in order to move
apps or map points on the map*. Drag horizontally or vertically across the screen.
Swipe/drag quickly Changes between different views, scrolls a list, text or view. Drag horizontally or vertically across the
screen.
Drag apart Zooms in.
Drag together Zooms out.
}}
INTRODUCTION
|| Turn off the screen and reactivate it 2. Reactivate the screen - briefly tap on the NOTE
home button.
In home view standard mode - briefly press
> The view that was displayed before the
the home button. An animation that describes
screen was switched off will be shown
access to the different views is shown on the
again.
screen.
NOTE
Moving apps and buttons for car
The screen cannot be deactivated when a
functions
prompt to perform an action is shown on the
The apps and buttons for car functions in the app
screen.
view and function view respectively can be moved
and organised as desired.
NOTE 1. Tap on an app/button and hold depressed.
Home button for the centre display.
The centre display deactivates automatically > The app/button changes size and
When the centre display is switched off, the when the engine is off and the driver's door is becomes slightly transparent. It is then
screen is dimmed so as not to be disruptive opened. possible to move it.
whilst driving. The climate row will still be visible,
and apps and other functions connected to the 2. Drag the app/button to a vacant space in the
screen will continue to run. Returning to home view from another view.
view The maximum number of rows available for use in
1. Give a long press on the physical home but-
1. Briefly press the home button. order to position apps/buttons is 48. To move an
ton below the screen.
> The last position of the home view is app/button outside the visible view, drag it to the
> The screen goes dark except for the cli-
shown. bottom of the view. New rows are then added,
mate row, which continues to be shown.
2. Briefly press again. where the app/button can be located.
All functions continue to run, such as cli-
mate control, audio, guiding* and apps. In > All subviews of the home view are set to An app/button can thus be located further down
this mode, the screen can be cleaned with their default mode. and is then not visible in the normal mode for the
the cloth supplied; see the section view.
"Cleaning the centre display". Swipe across the screen to scroll upward/down-
ward in the view.
INTRODUCTION
NOTE Using the controls in the centre display • Downloading, updating and uninstalling apps
(p. 489)
Hide the apps that you rarely or never use by
moving them to the bottom, off the visible • Using the keyboard in the centre display
(p. 49)
screen. This way it will be easier to find the
apps you use more often. • Change settings for the centre display
(p. 46)
Scrolling in a list, article or view
When a scroll indicator is visible in the screen, it
is possible to scroll downward or upward in the
view. Swipe downwards/upwards anywhere in the
view.
Temperature control.
The control is used for many of the car's func-
tions. Regulate e.g. temperature by means of one
of the following:
• drag the control to the desired temperature,
• tap on +/− in order to raise/lower the tem-
perature gradually, or
• tap on the desired temperature on the con-
trol.
The scroll indicator appears in the centre display when it Related information
is possible to scroll in the view. • Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 40)
• Sensus - online connectivity and entertain-
ment (p. 29)
• Remote control key range (p. 232)
39
INTRODUCTION
Navigating in the centre display's An app/car function selected from the app/func- NOTE
views tion view starts in the respective subview of the
home view. For example FM radio starts in the The first time the car is used, some of the
There are five different basic views in the centre
Media subview. home view's subviews have no content.
display: home view, top view, climate view, appli-
cation view (app view) and function view. The The extra subview contains the last used app/car
screen is started automatically when the driver's function that is not associated with any of the NOTE
door is opened. other three areas. In home view standard mode - briefly press
The subviews show brief information about each the home button. An animation that describes
Home view different app. access to the different views is shown on the
Home view is the view that is shown when the screen.
screen is started. It consists of four subviews:
Navigation, Media, Phone and an extra sub-
view.
40
INTRODUCTION
Expanding a subview from default mode
Standard mode and expanded mode of a subview in the centre display.
}}
41
INTRODUCTION
|| Expanding a subview: When a new subview is opened in full-screen home view's standard view from full screen mode
mode, no information from the other subviews is - press twice on the home button.
– For subview one, two and three: Press any-
shown.
where on the subview. When a subview is Status bar
expanded, the fourth subview in the home In expanded mode, open the The activities in the car are shown at the top of
view is temporarily forced away. The other app in full screen - press on the screen. Network/connection information is
two are minimised and only certain informa- the symbol. shown on the left-hand side of the status bar,
tion is shown. When the fourth sub view is while media-related information, the clock and
pressed, the other three subviews are mini- indication that background activity is in progress
mised and only certain information is dis- are shown on the right.
played.
Press on the symbol to go back Top view
The expanded view provides access to the to the expanded mode, or press
basic functions of the app. the home button at the bottom
Closing an expanded subview: of the screen.
– The subview can be closed in three different

ways.
• Tap on the upper part of the expanded
subview.
• Tap on another subview (that subview will
then open in expanded mode instead).
• Briefly press the physical home button
below the centre display.
Top view dragged down.
Opening/closing a subview in full screen
mode A tab is located in the centre of the status bar at
The extra subview and the subview for the top of the screen. Open the top view by
Navigation can be opened out in full screen pressing on the tab or by dragging/swiping from
mode, with even more information and more set- the top downwards across the screen.
ting options. Home button for the centre display.
There is always the option to go back to home
view by pressing the home button. Go back to the
42
INTRODUCTION
In the top view, access is always available to: view. Press on the contextual setting to Application view
access settings that are related to the con-
• Settings tent that is shown on the screen. E.g. press
• Owner's manual Navigation Settings - settings that are
• Profile related to navigation are shown.
• The car's saved messages. • When the contextual owner's manual is avail-
In the top view, access is given to the following in able, it is shown to the right of Owner's
some cases: manual in the top view. Press on the con-
textual owner's manual to access articles in
• Contextual setting (e.g. Navigation the digital owner's manual that are related to
Settings) the content that is shown on the screen. E.g.
• Contextual owner's manual (e.g. Navigation press Navigation Manual - an article that is
Manual). related to navigation opens.
Exit the top view - press outside the top view, on This only applies to some of the apps in the car.
the home button or at the bottom of the top view For third party apps that are downloaded, it is not
and drag upward. The underlying view is then visi- possible to access app-specific articles or set-
ble and available for use again. tings, for example.
Climate view
NOTE The climate row is always visible at the bottom of
The top view is not available during starting/ the screen. The most common climate settings
shutdown or when a message is shown on can be made directly there, such as setting tem-
perature, seat heating and fan. Application view with the car's apps.
the screen. It is also not available when cli-
mate view is shown. Press the symbol in the centre of the Swipe from right to left11 across the screen in
climate row to open the climate view order to access the application view (app view)
Contextual setting and owner's manual and gain access to more climate set- from the home view. Apps that have been down-
Drag the top view down when an app (e.g. navi- tings. loaded (third-party apps) and apps for embedded
gation) is running: functions, such as FM radio, are found here. Cer-
Press the symbol to close the climate tain apps show brief information directly in the
• When contextual setting is available, it is view and return to the previous view.
shown to the right of Settings in the top
11 Applies to left-hand drive cars. For right-hand drive cars - swipe in the opposite direction. }}
43
INTRODUCTION
|| app view, such as the number of unread text Function view Depending on the amount of functions, it is also
messages for Messages. possible here to scroll downward in the view. Do
this by swiping/dragging from the bottom and up.
Tap on an app to open it. It then opens in the
subview to which it belongs, such as Media. Unlike in app view, where an app is opened with
a press, a function is activated/deactivated by
Depending on the amount of apps, it is possible
pressing the relevant function button. Some func-
to scroll downward in the app view. Do this by
tions (trigger functions) open in a new window
swiping/dragging from the bottom and up.
when pressed.
To move an app:
Just as in app view, it is possible to move the
1. Tap on the app and hold depressed. function buttons around and arrange them in the
> The app becomes slightly transparent and desired order.
larger when it is ready to be moved.
Related information
2. Drag the app to the desired location. • Operating the centre display (p. 36)
• Overview of the centre display (p. 33)
NOTE
• Digital owner's manual in the car (p. 15)
Apps and car function buttons cannot be
added to locations that are already occupied.
• Function view with buttons for car functions
(p. 47)
Go back to the home view again by swiping from

• Changing settings for apps (p. 173)
left to right11 across the screen, or by pressing • Symbols in the centre display's status bar
the home button.
The function view with buttons for different car func- (p. 45)
tions.
• Climate controls in the centre display
Swipe from left to right11 across the screen in (p. 181)
order to access the function view from the home
view. From here you can activate/deactivate dif-
ferent car functions, e.g. Lane Departure
Warning, Lane Keeping Aid* and Park Assist*.
11 Applies to left-hand drive cars. For right-hand drive cars - swipe in the opposite direction.
INTRODUCTION
Symbols in the centre display's Symbol Specification • Messages in the driver display and the centre
status bar display (p. 105)
Overview of the symbols that can be shown in Car modem activated.
the centre display's status bar.
USB sharing active.
The status bar shows activities in progress and, in
some cases, their status. Not all symbols are Process in progress.
shown all the time due to the limited space in the
status bar. Timer for preconditioning active.
Symbol Specification Audio source being played back.

Connected to the Internet.
Audio source stopped.
Connection to the Internet failed.
Phone call in progress.
Roaming activated.
Audio source muted.
Signal strength in mobile phone net-
work. News is received from the radio
channel.
Bluetooth device connected.
Traffic information is received.
Bluetooth activated but no device
connected. Clock.
Information sent to and from GPS.

Related information
Connected to Wi-Fi network. • Messages in the driver display and the centre
display (p. 105)
Tethering activated (Wi-Fi hotspot). • Navigating in the centre display's views
The car then shares the available (p. 40)
connection.
45
INTRODUCTION
Change settings for the centre all themes. A light variant can also be selected, in
display which the background is light and the text is dark.
The centre display is started automatically when This alternative can be useful in e.g. strong day-
the driver's door is opened. The settings can be light.
changed for the centre display to personalise This alternative is always available for the user
sound and themes. The screen can be switched and is not affected by the surrounding lighting.
off so as not to be disruptive whilst driving.
Related information
Switching off/changing the system • Settings in the centre display (p. 165)
sounds volume in the centre display.
The system sounds volume in the centre display ment (p. 29)
can be adjusted or switched off:
• Cleaning the centre display (p. 572)
1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre
display. • Operating the centre display (p. 36)
2. Press Sound System Volumes.

3. Under Touch Sounds, drag the control to
change the volume/switch off screen touch
sounds. Drag the control to the desired vol-
ume.
Changing the appearance of the screen

1. Press Settings in the top view.
2. Press My Car Displays Display
Themes.
3. Then select theme, e.g. Minimalistic or
Chrome Rings.
As a supplement to these appearances, it is pos-
sible to choose between Normal and Bright.
With Normal, the screen background is dark and
the text is light. This alternative is the default for
46
INTRODUCTION
Function view with buttons for car basic views. Navigate to the function view from Different types of buttons
functions home view by swiping from left to right across There are three different types of buttons for car
All the buttons for car functions are located in the screen12. functions; see below:
the function view, one of the centre display's
Type of button Property Affects car function

Function buttons Have on/off positions. Most buttons in function view are
function buttons.
When a function is running, an LED indicator illuminates to the left of the icon for the button.
Press the button to activate/deactivate a function.
Trigger buttons Do not have on/off positions. • Camera
When a trigger button is pressed, a window for the function opens. For example, it may be a • Headrest fold
window for changing a seat's position. • Head-up display adjustments
Parking buttons Have on, off and scan modes. • Park In
Similar to the function buttons but with an extra position for parking scanning. • Park Out
12 Applies to left-hand drive cars. For right-hand drive cars - swipe in the opposite direction. }}
47
INTRODUCTION
|| The buttons' different modes
The function is deactivated when the LED indica-

When the LED indicator illuminates in green on a tor is extinguished.
function or parking button, the function is acti-
vated. When a function is activated, extra text
with an explanation for certain functions is
shown. The text is shown for a few seconds and
then the button is shown with the LED indicator
illuminated.
For Lane Keeping Aid, the text Works only at
certain speeds is shown, for example, when the
button is depressed.
Briefly tap on the button once in order to acti- When a warning triangle is shown in the right-
vate/deactivate the function. hand section of the button there is something not
working as intended.
Related information
(p. 40)
• Categories in the settings menu (p. 166)
48
INTRODUCTION
Using the keyboard in the centre

display
The centre display keyboard makes it possible
make entries using keys. It is also possible to
"draw in" letters and characters on the screen
by hand.
Making entries with the keyboard

The keyboard can be used to enter characters,
letters and numbers, e.g. to write text messages
from the car, enter passwords or search for arti-
cles in the digital owner's manual.
The keyboard is only shown when entries can be
made on the screen.
}}
49
INTRODUCTION
||
The image shows an overview of some of the buttons which may be shown in the keyboard. The appearance varies depending on language settings and the context in which the
keyboard is being used.
50
INTRODUCTION
Row of suggested words or characters13. entry, all letters are automatically lower case Changing the keyboard language
The suggested words are adjusted as new unless otherwise set with the button. To make it possible to switch between different
letters are being entered. Browse among the Number entry. The keyboard (2) is then languages for the keyboard, the languages must
suggestions by pressing on the right and left first be added under Settings.
shown with numbers. Press , which in
arrows. Tap on a suggestion to select it. Note
number mode is shown instead of , to Adding/deleting languages in settings
that this function is not supported by all lan-
return to the letter keyboard, or to The keyboard is automatically set to the same
guage selections. If not available, the row will
open the keyboard with special characters. languages as the system language. The keyboard
not be shown on the keyboard.
language can be manually adapted without
The characters available on the keyboard Changes text input language, e.g. EN. The affecting the system language.
depend on which language was selected available characters and word suggestions
(see point 7). Tap on a character to enter it. (1) vary depending on the selected language. 1. Press Settings in the top view.
One long press opens a list of languages 2.
The button works in different ways, depend- Press System System Languages and
and then tap on the language to be used. A
ing on the context in which the keyboard is Units Keyboard Layouts.
short press changes to the next language on
used - either to enter @ (when an email
the list without showing the list. To add addi- 3. Select one or more languages from the list.
address is entered) or to create a new row
tional languages in the keyboard - see the > It is now possible to switch between the
(for normal text input).
heading "Changing keyboard language" selected languages directly from the key-
Hides the keyboard. If this is not possible, the below.
button is not shown. board for text input.
Space.
Used to enter capital letters. Press again to If no languages have been actively selected
enter one capital letter and then continue Undoes entered text. Press briefly to delete under Settings, the keyboard uses the same lan-
with lower-case letters. Another press makes one character at a time. Hold the button guage as the car's system language; see the
all letters capital letters. The next press depressed to delete characters more quickly. section "Changing system settings in the set-
restores the keyboard to lower-case letters. tings menu".
Changes keyboard mode to write letters and
In this mode, the first letter after a full stop, characters by hand instead. Read more in the
exclamation mark or question mark is a capi- section "Writing characters/letters by hand
tal letter. The first letter in the text field is on the screen".
also a capital letter. In text fields intended for
Press the confirmation button above the key-
names or addresses, each word automatically
board (not visible in the image) to confirm the
starts with a capital letter. In text fields for
entered text. The appearance of the button dif-
password, web address or email address
fers depending on context.
13 Applies to Asiatic languages. }}
51
INTRODUCTION
|| Switching between different languages in Variants of a letter or character

the keyboard
When a number of languages
have been selected in
Settings, the keyboard button
(shown in context as number 7
in the illustration above) is used
to switch between different lan-
guages.
To change keyboard language with list:
1. One long press on the button (see image
above).
> A list opens.
To enter a variant of a letter/character, e.g. é or
2. Select the required language. If more than è:
four languages have been selected under
1. Press and hold the letter/character.
Settings, it is possible to scroll in the list
from the keyboard. > A box with possible variants of the letter/
character opens.
> The keyboard is adapted to the selected
language and other word suggestions are 2. Press the required variant. If none of the vari-
given. ants are selected, the original letter/charac-
ter is entered.
To change the keyboard language without dis-
playing the list:
Related information
– One short press of the button.
• Writing characters/words by hand on the
> The keyboard is adapted to the next lan- screen (p. 53)
guage in the list without displaying the list.
• Operating the centre display (p. 36)
• Managing text messages (p. 481)
• Changing system settings in the settings
menu (p. 168)
52
INTRODUCTION
Writing characters/words by hand Suggestions for characters/letters/word/ Writing characters/letters/words by hand

on the screen part of word. It is possible to scroll through 1. Write a character, a letter, a word or parts of
The centre display keyboard allows you to enter the list. a word in the area for hand-written letters
characters, letters and words on the screen by Space. A space can also be created by (1). Write a word or parts of a word above
"drawing" by hand. entering a dash (-) in the area for hand-writ- each other or on a line.
ten letters (1). See the heading "Entering a > A number of suggested characters, letters
Press the button on the key- space in the free text field with handwriting or words is shown (3). The most likely
board to change from typing recognition" below. choice is found at the top of the list.
with the keys to entering letters
and characters by hand. Undo entered text. Press briefly to delete
one character/one letter at a time. Wait a IMPORTANT
moment before pressing again to delete the Do not use sharp objects on the screen as
next character/letter, etc. they may scratch it.
Return to the keyboard with regular charac-
ter input. 2. Enter the character/letters/word by waiting a
Switch off/on sound when entering. moment.
Hide the keyboard. If this is not possible, the > The character/letter/word at the top of
button is not shown. the list is entered. It is also possible to
select a different character by pressing
Change text input language. the required character, letter or word in
the list.
Area for writing characters/letters/words/

parts of word.
The text field where the characters or word
suggestions appear as they are written on
screen (1).
}}
53
INTRODUCTION
|| Deleting/changing characters/letters written Changing row in the free text field with Related information
by hand handwriting • Using the keyboard in the centre display
(p. 49)
• Changing system settings in the settings
menu (p. 168)
Delete all characters in the text field (2) by swiping Change row by hand by drawing the above character in
across the handwriting field (1). the handwriting field15.
– There are several options for deleting/ Entering a space in the free text field with
changing characters/letters: handwriting recognition
• Press the intended letter or word in the
list (3).
• Press the text undo button (5) to delete
the letter and begin again.
• Swipe horizontally from right to left14 over
the area for handwritten letters (1). Delete
multiple letters by swiping over the area
several times.
• Pressing the X in the text field (2) deletes Enter a space by drawing a dash from left to right16.
all of the entered text.
14 For Arabic keyboard - swipe in the opposite direction. Swiping from right to left creates a space.
15 For Arabic keyboards - draw the same character, but reversed.
16 For Arabic keyboard - draw the dash from right to left.
54
SAFETY
SAFETY
Safety WARNING Safety during pregnancy

The vehicle is equipped with several safety sys- It is important that the seatbelt is used correctly
If the warning symbol remains illuminated or
tems that work together to protect the vehicle's is switched on during driving and the mes- during pregnancy, and that pregnant drivers
driver and passengers in the event of an acci- sage SRS airbag Service urgent Drive to adjust their seating position.
dent. workshop is shown in the driver display, it
means that part of one of the safety systems Seatbelt
The car is equipped with a number of sensors does not have full functionality. Volvo recom-
that react in the event of an accident and activate mends that an authorised Volvo workshop
different safety systems, such as different types should be contacted as soon as possible.
of airbags and seatbelt tensioners. Depending on
the specific accident situation, such as collisions
at different angles, rollover or driving off the road, WARNING
the systems react in different ways to provide the Never modify or repair the car's various safety
best protection. systems yourself. Defective work in one of the
systems can cause malfunction and result in
There are also mechanical safety systems such serious personal injury. Volvo recommends
as Whiplash Protection System. The car is also that an authorised Volvo workshop should be
constructed so that a large part of the force of a contacted.
collision is distributed to beams, pillars, floor, roof
and other parts of the body. If the specific warning symbol is broken The diagonal section should wrap over the shoul-
The car's safety mode may be activated after a then the general warning symbol is illu- der then be routed between the breasts and to
collision if an important function in the car has minated instead and the driver display the side of the abdomen.
been damaged. shows the same message.
The lap section should lay flat over the thighs and
Warning symbol in driver display Related information as low as possible under the abdomen. – It must
The warning symbol is illuminated in • Safety during pregnancy (p. 56) never be allowed to ride upward. Remove the
slack from the seatbelt and ensure that it fits as
the driver display when the car's elec- • Seatbelt (p. 58)
close to the body as possible. In addition, check
trical system is set in ignition position
II. The symbol is extinguished after
• Airbags (p. 63) that there are no twists in the seatbelt.
approx. 6 seconds if the car's safety system is • Whiplash Protection System (p. 57)
Seating position
fault-free. • Safety mode (p. 69) As the pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers
• Child safety (p. 71) must adjust the seat and steering wheel such
that they can easily maintain control of the vehi-
56
SAFETY
cle as they drive (which means that they must be Whiplash Protection System WARNING
able to easily operate the foot pedals and steer- Whiplash Protection System (WHIPS) reduces
ing wheel). The aim should be to position the Never modify or repair the seat or WHIPS
the risk of whiplash injuries. The system consists yourself. Volvo recommends that an author-
seat with as large a distance as possible between of energy-absorbing backrests and seat cush- ised Volvo workshop should be contacted.
abdomen and steering wheel. ions, and specially designed head restraints in
If the front seats have been subjected to a
the front seats.
Related information major load, such as in conjunction with a colli-
• Safety (p. 56) WHIPS is deployed in the event of a rear-end sion, the seats must be replaced. Some of the
seats' protective properties may have been
• Seatbelt (p. 58) collision, where the angle and speed of the colli-
lost even if they do not appear damaged.
sion and the nature of the colliding vehicle all
• Manual front seat (p. 119)
have an influence.
• Power front seat* (p. 120)
When WHIPS is deployed, the front seat back-
rests are lowered backward and the seat cush-
ions move downward to change the seating posi-
tion of the driver and front seat passenger. Its
movement helps to absorb some of the forces
that can arise and cause whiplash.
WARNING
WHIPS is a supplement to the seatbelts.
Always use a seatbelt.
Do not leave any objects on the floor behind or under

the front seats or in the rear seat that may prevent
WHIPS from functioning.
}}
SAFETY
|| WARNING Related information Seatbelt

• Safety (p. 56) Heavy braking can have serious consequences
Do not squeeze rigid objects between the
rear seat cushion and the front seat's back- • Manual front seat (p. 119) if the seatbelts are not used.
rest. • Power front seat* (p. 120) It is important that the seatbelt lies against the
If a backrest in the rear seat is lowered then • Rear Collision Warning (p. 349) body so it can provide maximum protection. Do
any load must be secured to prevent it from not lean the backrest too far back. The seatbelt is
sliding up to the front seat backrest in the • Child seats (p. 71)
designed to protect in a normal seating position.
event of a collision.
WARNING
WARNING Remember not to clip or hook the seatbelt to
If a backrest in the rear seat is lowered or a hooks or other interior fittings, as this pre-
rear-facing child seat is used in the rear seat, vents the belt from tightening properly.
the corresponding front seat must be moved
forward so that it does not make contact with
the lowered backrest or child seat. WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seat-
Seating position belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this may
For optimum protection from WHIPS the driver diminish the protection provided by the airbag
in the event of a collision.
and passenger must have the correct seating
position and make sure that the system's func-
tion is not obstructed.
Set the correct seating position in the front seat
before driving starts.
Driver and front seat passenger should sit in the
centre of the seat with as little space as possible
between the head and the head restraint.
WHIPS and child seats

The protection provided by the car to children
seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion is
not diminished by WHIPS.
SAFETY
WARNING Seatbelt tensioner IMPORTANT

The car is fitted with pyrotechnic and electric
Never modify or repair the seatbelts yourself. If the passenger airbag is deactivated, the
Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo seatbelt tensioners that can tension the seat-
electric seatbelt tensioner on the passenger
workshop should be contacted. belts in critical situations and collisions.
side will also be deactivated.
If the seatbelt has been subjected to a major Seatbelt tensioner during collision
load, such as in conjunction with a collision, All the seatbelts are equipped with a pyrotechnic
the entire seatbelt must be replaced. Some of Resetting the electric seatbelt tensioner
seatbelt tensioner. Once the critical situation has passed, the seat-
the seatbelt's protective properties may have
been lost even if the seatbelt does not appear The pyrotechnic seatbelt tensioner tensions the belt and electric seatbelt tensioner are reset
damaged. The seatbelt must also be replaced seatbelt in the event of a collision with sufficient automatically.
if it shows signs of wear or damage. The new force in order to more effectively restrain the
seatbelt must be type-approved and designed If the belt still remains tensioned:
occupant.
for installation at the same location as the 1. Stop the car at a safe place.
replaced seatbelt.
Seatbelt tensioner during critical 2. Unfasten the seatbelt and then refasten it.
situations* > The seatbelt and electric seatbelt ten-
Related information The driver and front passenger seatbelts are sioner are reset.
• Safety (p. 56) equipped with an electric seatbelt tensioner.
• Seatbelt tensioner (p. 59) The seatbelt tensioners work together and can WARNING
• Fastening/unfastening a seatbelt (p. 60) be activated together with the driver support sys-
Never modify or repair the seatbelts yourself.
• Door and seatbelt reminder (p. 61) tems City Safety and Rear Collision Warning. In
Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo
critical situations, such as panic braking, driving workshop should be contacted.
off the road (e.g. the car rolls into a ditch, lifts off
the ground or hits something in the terrain), skid- If the seatbelt has been subjected to a major
load, such as in conjunction with a collision,
ding, or risk of collision, the seatbelt can be ten-
the entire seatbelt must be replaced. Some of
sioned by the seatbelt tensioner's electric motor. the seatbelt's protective properties may have
The electric seatbelt tensioner adjusts the occu- been lost even if the seatbelt does not appear
pant to a better position, reducing the risk of damaged. The seatbelt must also be replaced
if it shows signs of wear or damage. The new
striking the car's interior and improving the effect
seatbelt must be type-approved and designed
of safety systems, such as the car's airbags. for installation at the same location as the
replaced seatbelt.
}}
SAFETY
|| Related information Fastening/unfastening a seatbelt 3. In the front seats the seatbelt can be
• Seatbelt (p. 58) Make sure that all passengers have fastened adjusted for height.
• Fastening/unfastening a seatbelt (p. 60) their seatbelts before starting to drive.
• Door and seatbelt reminder (p. 61) Fastening a seatbelt
• City Safety (p. 336) 1. Pull out the seatbelt slowly and make sure it
• Rear Collision Warning (p. 349) is not twisted or damaged.
• Activating/deactivating the passenger air-

bag* (p. 65) NOTE
The seatbelt locks and cannot be withdrawn:
• if it is pulled out too quickly
• during braking and acceleration
• if the car leans heavily.
Press together the seat mounting and move

2. Lock the belt by inserting the locking tab in
the seatbelt up or down.
the intended buckle.
> A loud "click" indicates that the belt has Position the belt as high as possible without
locked. it chafing against your throat.
WARNING
Always insert the tongue of the seatbelt into
the buckle on the correct side. The seatbelts
and buckles would otherwise possibly not
function as intended in the event of a colli-
sion. There is a risk of serous injury.
SAFETY
WARNING Door and seatbelt reminder

The system reminds unbelted occupants to wear
Each seatbelt is designed for only one person.
a seatbelt, and also warns about an open door,
bonnet, tailgate or fuel filler flap.
WARNING
Driver display graphics
Remember not to clip or hook the seatbelt to
hooks or other interior fittings, as this pre-
vents the belt from tightening properly.
WARNING
Do not make any damages on seatbelts nor
The seatbelt must pass over the shoulder (not down over insert any foreign objects into a buckle. The
the arm). seatbelts and buckles would then possibly not
4. Tension the hip strap over the lap by pulling function as intended in the event of a colli-
the diagonal shoulder belt up towards the sion. There is a risk of serous injury.
shoulder.
Unfastening a seatbelt
1. Press the red button on the seatbelt buckle Graphics in the driver display with different types of
and then let the belt retract. warnings. The warning colour on the door and tailgate is
dependent on the vehicle's speed.
2. If the seatbelt does not retract fully, feed it in
The driver display's graphics show which seats in
by hand so that it does not hang loose.
the car are occupied by belted and unbelted pas-
Related information sengers.
• Seatbelt (p. 58) The same graphic also shows if the bonnet, tail-
• Seatbelt tensioner (p. 59) gate, fuel filler flap or any door is open.
• Door and seatbelt reminder (p. 61) The graphic can be acknowledged by pressing
the O button on the right-hand steering wheel
keypad.
The hip strap must be positioned low down (not over the
abdomen).
}}
61
SAFETY
|| Seatbelt reminder Rear seat Related information

The seatbelt reminder in the rear seat has two • Seatbelt (p. 58)
subfunctions: • Seatbelt tensioner (p. 59)
• Provides information on which seatbelts are • Fastening/unfastening a seatbelt (p. 60)
being used in the rear seat. The driver dis-
play's graphics are shown when the seatbelts
are in use.
• Reminding that a seatbelt in the rear seat is
unfastened during a journey by means of a
visual and acoustic reminder. The reminder
will cease once the seatbelt has been put on
again.
Visual reminder in the roof console. Reminder for doors, bonnet, tailgate
A visual reminder is given in the roof console and and fuel filler flap
by means of the warning symbol in the driver dis- If the bonnet, tailgate, fuel filler flap or a door is
play. not closed properly, the driver display's graphics
The acoustic reminder is dependent on speed, show what is open. Stop the car in a safe place
driving time and distance. as soon as possible and close the source of the
warning.
The belt status of the driver and passengers is
shown in the driver display graphics when a belt If the car is driven at a speed lower
is buckled or unbuckled. than approx. 10 km/h (6 mph) then the
driver display's information symbol illu-
Child seats are not covered by the seatbelt minates.
reminder system.
If the car is driven at a speed higher
Front seat than approx. 10 km/h (6 mph) then the
A visual and acoustic reminder remind the driver driver display's warning symbol illumi-
and front seat passenger to use a seatbelt if nates.
either of them is not wearing one.
62
SAFETY
Airbags WARNING Driver and passenger airbags

The car is equipped with airbags and inflatable As a supplement to the seatbelts, the vehicle is
Never drive with deployed airbags. They can
curtains for driver and passengers. make steering difficult. Other safety systems equipped with airbags on the driver and passen-
may also be damaged. The smoke and dust ger sides in the front seat.
WARNING created when the airbags are deployed can
The airbag system's control module is located cause skin and eye irritation/injury after inten-
in the centre console. If the centre console is sive exposure. In case of irritation, wash with
drenched with water or other liquid, discon- cold water. The rapid deployment sequence
nect the cables to the starter battery. Do not and airbag fabric may cause friction and skin
attempt to start the car since the airbags may burns.
deploy. Recovering the car. Volvo recom-
mends that it is transported to an authorised Related information
Volvo workshop.
• Safety (p. 56)
• Driver and passenger airbags (p. 63)
Deployed airbags
If any of the airbags have deployed, the following • Side airbag (p. 68)
is recommended: • Inflatable curtain (p. 68)
Driver and passenger airbags1.
• Recovering the car. Volvo recommends that it
is transported to an authorised Volvo work- In the event of a frontal collision, the airbags help
shop. Do not drive with deployed airbags. to protect the head, face and chest of the driver
• Volvo recommends engaging an authorised and passenger as well as the knees and legs1 of
Volvo workshop to handle the replacement of the driver.
components in the car's safety systems. A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors
• Always contact a doctor. and the airbag/airbags is inflated. The airbag
cushions the initial collision impact for the occu-
pant. The airbag deflates when compressed by
the collision. When this occurs, smoke escapes
into the car. This is completely normal. The entire
1 The car is only equipped with knee airbag in certain markets. }}
63
SAFETY
|| process, including inflation and deflation of the WARNING WARNING

airbag, occurs within tenths of a second.
Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo Do not put objects in front of or above the
workshop should be contacted for repair. dashboard where the passenger airbag is
NOTE Defective work in the airbag system could located.
The detectors react differently depending on cause malfunction and result in serious per-
the nature of the collision and whether or not sonal injury.
the seatbelts are fastened. Applies to all belt
positions. Driver airbags
It is therefore possible that only one (or none) Airbag in the steering wheel
of the airbags may inflate in a collision. The This airbag is fitted into the centre of the steering
detectors sense the force of the collision on wheel. The steering wheel is marked AIRBAG.
the vehicle and the action is adapted accord- Knee airbag1
ingly so that none, one or more airbags are The airbag is folded up in the lower part of the
deployed. instrument panel on the driver's side. Its cover
panel is marked AIRBAG.
WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If the belt WARNING
is not used or is used incorrectly, this may Do not place or attach any object on the top
diminish the protection provided by the airbag or front of the panel where the knee airbag is
in the event of a collision. stowed.
To minimise the risk of injury if the airbag
deploys, passengers must sit as upright as Passenger airbag
possible with their feet on the floor and backs The airbag is folded up into a compartment
against the backrest.
above the glovebox. Its cover panel is marked
AIRBAG.
1 The car is only equipped with knee airbag in certain markets.
64
SAFETY
Label for passenger airbag WARNING Activating/deactivating the

passenger airbag*
If the car is not equipped with a switch to acti-
vate/deactivate the passenger airbag, the air- The passenger airbag can be deactivated if the
bag will always be activated. car is equipped with a switch, Passenger Airbag
Cut Off Switch (PACOS).
WARNING Switch
Never allow anybody to stand or sit in front of The switch for the passenger airbag is located on
the front passenger seat. the passenger end of the instrument panel and is
accessible when the passenger door is open.
Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front
passenger seat if the airbag is activated. Check that the switch is in the required position.
Front-facing passengers (children and adults)
must never sit on the front passenger seat if
Label on the passenger side's sun visor.
the passenger airbag is deactivated.
Failure to follow the advice given above can
endanger life or lead to serious personal
injury.
Related information
• Airbags (p. 63)
bag* (p. 65)
ON - the airbag is activated and all front-fac-

ing passengers (children and adults) can sit
Label on the passenger side's door pillar. The label safely on the passenger seat.
becomes visible when the passenger door is opened. OFF - The airbag is deactivated and children
The warning label for the passenger airbag is in rear-facing child seats can sit safely on the
positioned as shown above. passenger seat.
}}
SAFETY
|| WARNING Activating the passenger airbag 2. Confirm the message by pressing the right-
hand steering wheel keypad's O button.
If the car is not equipped with a switch to acti-
vate/deactivate the passenger airbag, the air-
bag will always be activated.
Pull the switch outward and turn from OFF

(B) to ON (A).
> The driver display shows the message
Passenger airbag on Please
acknowledge. > A text message and a warning symbol in
the roof console indicate that the airbag
for the front passenger seat is activated.
NOTE
If the passenger airbag has been activated/ WARNING
deactivated with the car in ignition position I
or lower, a message is shown in the driver passenger seat when the airbag is activated.
display and the following indicator in the roof
console approx. 6 seconds after the car's The passenger airbag must always be acti-
electrical system has been set in ignition vated when front-facing passengers (children
and adults) are sitting in the front passenger
position II. seat.
injury.
66
SAFETY
Deactivating the passenger airbag 2. Confirm the message by pressing the right- Related information
hand steering wheel keypad's O button. • Driver and passenger airbags (p. 63)
• Seatbelt tensioner (p. 59)
• Child seats (p. 71)
Pull the switch outward and turn from ON

(A) to OFF (B).
Passenger airbag off Please
acknowledge. > A text message and a symbol in the roof
console indicate that the airbag for the
front passenger seat is deactivated.
NOTE
If the passenger airbag has been activated/ WARNING
deactivated with the car in ignition position I
Front-facing passengers (children and adults)
or lower, a message is shown in the driver must never sit on the passenger seat when
display and the following indicator in the roof the airbag is deactivated.
console approx. 6 seconds after the car's
electrical system has been set in ignition Failure to follow the advice given above can
position II. injury.
IMPORTANT
If the passenger airbag is deactivated, the
electric seatbelt tensioner on the passenger
side will also be deactivated.
67
SAFETY
Side airbag WARNING Inflatable curtain

The side airbags on the driver and passenger The inflatable curtain, Inflatable Curtain (IC),
seats protect the chest and hip in the event of a workshop should be contacted for repair. helps to prevent the driver and passengers from
collision. Defective work in the side airbag system striking their heads on the inside of the car dur-
could cause malfunction and result in serious ing a collision.
personal injury.
WARNING
Do not put objects in the area between the
outside of the seat and the door panel, since
this area is required by the side airbag.
Volvo recommends the use only of car seat
covers approved by Volvo. Other seat covers
may impede the operation of the side airbags.
WARNING
The side airbags are fitted in the outer backrest
Side airbags are a supplement the seatbelts.
frames of the front seats and help to protect the Always use a seatbelt. The inflatable curtain is mounted along both
driver and passengers in the front seat. sides of the headlining and helps protect the
driver and outer seat passengers of the car. The
A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors Side airbag and child seats panels are labelled with IC AIRBAG.
and the side airbags are inflated. The airbag The protection provided by the car to children
inflates between the occupant and the door seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion is A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors
panel and thereby cushions the initial impact. The not diminished by the side airbag. and the inflatable curtain is inflated.
airbag deflates when compressed by the collision.
The side airbag is normally only deployed on the Related information WARNING
side of the collision. • Airbags (p. 63)
• Child seats (p. 71) workshop should be contacted for repair.
Defective work in the inflatable curtain system
can cause malfunction and result in serious
personal injury.
68
SAFETY
WARNING Safety mode WARNING

Safety mode is a protective state that is trig-
Never hang or attach heavy items onto the Never attempt to repair your car or reset the
handles in the roof. The hooks are only gered when a collision may have damaged any electronics yourself if the car has been in
designed for light coats and jackets (not for of the car's vital functions, such as the fuel lines, safety mode. This could result in personal
solid objects such as umbrellas). sensors for any of the safety systems, or the injury or the car not functioning as normal.
brake system. Volvo recommends that engaging an author-
Do not screw or install anything onto the car's
ised Volvo workshop to check and restore the
headlining, door pillars or side panels. This If the car has been in a collision, the message car to normal status after Safety mode See
could compromise the intended protection.
Volvo recommends only using Volvo genuine Safety mode See Owner's manual may be Owner's manual has been shown.
parts that are approved for fitting within these shown on the driver display with a warning sym-
areas. bol as long as the display is not damaged and the
car's electrical system is still in working order. WARNING
This message means that the car has reduced If the car is in safety mode it must not be
WARNING functionality. towed. It must be transported from its loca-
Leave 10 cm (4 inches) space between the tion. Volvo recommends that it is transported
load and the side windows if the car is loaded to an authorised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
to above the top edge of the door windows.
Otherwise, the intended protection of the Never, under any circumstances, attempt to Related information
inflatable curtain, which is concealed in the restart the car if it smells of fuel when the
headlining, may be compromised. Safety mode See Owner's manual mes- • Safety (p. 56)
sage is shown in the driver display. Leave the • Starting/moving the car after safety mode
car at once. (p. 70)
WARNING
• Recovering the car (p. 454)
The inflatable curtain is a supplement to the If the car is in safety mode, it is possible to
seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt. attempt to reset the system in order to start and
move the car for a short distance, if in a danger-
Related information ous traffic situation for example.
• Airbags (p. 63)
69
SAFETY
Starting/moving the car after safety 3. Then try to start the car. Related information
mode > The car's electronics carry out a systems • Safety mode (p. 69)
If the car is in safety mode, it is possible to check and then try to resume normal sta- • Recovering the car (p. 454)
attempt to reset the system in order to start and tus.
move the car for a short distance, if in a danger-
ous traffic situation for example. IMPORTANT
Starting the car after safety mode If the message Safety mode See Owner's
1. Check the general damage situation of the manual is still shown on the display the car
car and whether any fuel has been leaking. must not be driven or towed but a vehicle
There must be no smell of fuel either. recovery service must then be used instead.
Even if the car appears to be driveable, hid-
If there is only minor damage and a check den damage may make the car impossible to
has revealed no fuel leaks, starting can be control once moving.
attempted.
WARNING Moving the car after safety mode

Never, under any circumstances, attempt to 1. If the driver display shows the message
restart the car if it smells of fuel when the Normal mode The car is now in normal
Safety mode See Owner's manual mes- mode after a start attempt, the car can be
sage is shown in the driver display. Leave the
car at once. carefully moved if standing in a dangerous
position.
2. Turn the start knob clockwise to switch off 2. Do not move the car further than necessary.
the car.
WARNING
If the car is in safety mode it must not be
towed. It must be transported from its loca-
tion. Volvo recommends that it is transported
to an authorised Volvo workshop.
70
SAFETY
Child safety Related information Child seats

Volvo has child safety equipment (child seats, • Safety (p. 56) The position of a child in the car and the choice
booster cushions and attachment devices) • Child seats (p. 71) of equipment are dictated by the child's weight
which is designed for fitting in this particular car. and size.
Using Volvo's child safety equipment, the opti- Children should sit comfortably and safely. Make
mum conditions are obtained for the child to sure that the child seat is being used correctly.
travel safely in the car. In addition, the child safety
Look in the installation instructions for the child
equipment fits well and is simple to use.
seat for the correct fitting.
Children of all ages and sizes must always sit
correctly secured in the car. Never allow a child to NOTE
sit on the knee of a passenger.
When using child safety products it is impor-
Volvo recommends that children travel in rear- tant to read the installation instructions
facing child seats until as late an age as possible, included.
at least up to 3-4 years of age, and then in front-
facing booster cushions/child seats until the
child is 140 cm tall. NOTE
Never leave a child seat unsecured in the car.
NOTE Always secure it according to the instructions
Legal provisions about the type of child seat for the child seat, even when it is not in use.
that must be used for children of different
ages and heights vary from country to coun-
try. Check what does apply.
NOTE
In the event of questions when fitting child
safety products, contact the manufacturer for
clearer instructions.
}}
71
SAFETY
|| Location of child seats WARNING Installation in the front seat

• When fitting rear-facing child seats, check
Never allow anybody to stand or sit in front of that the passenger airbag is deactivated.
the front passenger seat.
• When fitting front-facing child seats, check
passenger seat if the airbag is activated. that the passenger airbag is activated.
Front-facing passengers (children and adults) • Only use child seats that are recommended
must never sit on the front passenger seat if by Volvo, are universally approved or are
the passenger airbag is deactivated. semi-universal, and where the car is included
on the manufacturer's vehicle list.
endanger life or lead to serious personal • ISOFIX child seats can only be fitted when
injury. the car is equipped with the ISOFIX console2
accessory.
Rear-facing child seat and airbag are not compatible. Child seat installation • If the child seat is equipped with lower
Always fit rear-facing child seats in the rear seat The following points are important to consider straps, Volvo recommends that the lower
if the passenger airbag is activated. If a child is when a child seat is being fitted in the car. mounting points are used with these2.
sitting on the front passenger seat then he/she • The ISOFIX guide can be used in order to
could suffer serious injury if the airbag deploys. WARNING facilitate child seat installation.
If the passenger airbag is deactivated then rear- Booster cushions/child seats with steel
facing child seats can be fitted on the front pas- braces or some other design that could rest
senger seat. on the seatbelt buckle's opening button must
not be used, as they could cause the seatbelt
buckle to open accidentally.
NOTE Do not secure the straps for the child seat
Regulations regarding the placement of chil- into the seat's horizontal adjustment bar or in
dren in cars vary from country to country. springs, rails or beams under the seat. Sharp
Check what does apply. edges may damage the straps.
Do not allow the upper section of the child
seat to rest against the windscreen.
2 The accessory range varies depending on market.
72
SAFETY
Installation in the rear seat Label for passenger airbag Related information
• Only use child seats that are recommended • Child safety (p. 71)
by Volvo, are universally approved or are • Upper mounting points for child seats
semi-universal, and where the car is included (p. 74)
on the manufacturer's vehicle list.
• Lower mounting points for child seats
• A child seat with support legs must not be (p. 74)
fitted in the centre seat.
• i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points (p. 78)
• The outer seats are equipped with the
ISOFIX fixture system and are approved for i- • Activating/deactivating the passenger air-
bag* (p. 65)
Size3.
• The outer seats are equipped with upper
mounting points. Volvo recommends that
child seat's upper straps should be pulled Label on the passenger side's sun visor.
through the hole in the head restraint before
being tensioned at the mounting point. If this
is not possible, follow the recommendations
from the child seat manufacturer.
• If the child seat is equipped with lower
straps, never adjust the position of the seat
in front after the straps have been fitted in
the lower mounting points. Always remember
to remove the lower straps when the child
seat is not installed.
Label on the passenger side's door pillar. The label

becomes visible when the passenger door is opened.
The warning label for the passenger airbag is
positioned as shown above.
3 Varies depending on market.
SAFETY
Upper mounting points for child WARNING Lower mounting points for child
seats seats
The child seat's upper straps must be routed
The car is equipped with upper mounting points through the hole in the head restraint leg The car is equipped with lower mounting points
for child seats on the rear seat's outer seats. before they are tensioned at the mounting for child seats in the front seat* and the rear
point. If this is not possible, follow the recom- seat.
The upper mounting points are primarily intended mendations from the child seat manufacturer.
for use with front-facing child seats. The lower mounting points are designed to be
Always follow the manufacturer's installation used in conjunction with certain rear-facing child
NOTE seats.
instructions when connecting a child seat to the
upper mounting points. Fold the head restraints in order to facilitate Always follow the manufacturer's installation
fitting this type of child seat in cars with fold- instructions when connecting a child seat to the
The location of the mounting points ing head restraints on the outer seats. lower mounting points.
The location of the mounting points

NOTE
In cars with a cargo cover over the luggage
compartment, this must be removed before
child seats can be attached to the securing
points.
Related information
• Lower mounting points for child seats
Mounting point locations are indicated by symbols on (p. 74)
the rear of the backrest.
The mounting points are located on the rear of Mounting point locations in the front seat.
• Table for location of child seats using the
the rear seat's outer seats. car's seatbelts (p. 76) The mounting points in the front seat are located
on the sides of the passenger seat's legroom.
SAFETY
The mounting points in the front seat are only

mounted if the vehicle is equipped with a switch
to activate/deactivate the passenger airbag*.
Mounting point locations in the rear seat.

The mounting points in the rear seat are located
on the rear section of the front seat's floor rails.
Related information
• Upper mounting points for child seats (p. 74)
car's seatbelts (p. 76)
bag* (p. 65)
SAFETY
Table for location of child seats NOTE

using the car's seatbelts
Always read the section "Child seats" before
The table gives a recommendation for which
fitting a child seat in the car.
child seats suit which locations, and for what
size of child.
Weight Front seat (with deactivated airbag, only rear-facing Front seat (with activated airbag, only front-facing Outer rear seat Centre rear seat
child seats) child seats)
Group 0
UA, B X UB UB
max 10 kg
Group 0+
UA, B X UB UB
max 13 kg
Group 1
LC UFA, D UD, LC UD
9-18 kg
Group 2
LC UFA, E UE, LC UE
15-25 kg
76
SAFETY
Weight Front seat (with deactivated airbag, only rear-facing Front seat (with activated airbag, only front-facing Outer rear seat Centre rear seat
child seats) child seats)
Group 3
X UFA, E UE UE
22-36 kg
U: Suitable for universal category restraints approved for use in this mass group.
UF: Suitable for front-facing universally approved child seats.
L: Suitable for particular child restraints. These restraints may be of the specific vehicle, restricted or semi-universal categories.
X: The seat is not suitable for children in this mass group.
A Adjust the backrest to a more upright position.
B Volvo recommends: Volvo infant seat (type approval E1 04301146).
C Volvo recommends: Volvo rear-facing seat (type approval E5 04212).
D Volvo recommends rear-facing child seat for children in this mass group.
E Volvo recommends: Booster cushion with and without back (type approval E5 04216); Volvo booster seat (type approval E1 04301312).
WARNING
passenger seat if the passenger airbag is
activated.
Related information
• Upper mounting points for child seats (p. 74)
• Table for location of ISOFIX child seats
(p. 79)
• Table for location of i-Size child seats
(p. 82)
77
SAFETY
i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points Related information

The car is equipped with i-Size/ISOFIX4 mount- • Child seats (p. 71)
ing points for child seats in the rear seat. • Upper mounting points for child seats (p. 74)
i-Size/ISOFIX is a fixture system for car child • Lower mounting points for child seats (p. 74)
seats that is based on an international standard. • Table for location of i-Size child seats
(p. 82)
Always follow the manufacturer's installation
instructions when connecting a child seat to the • Table for location of ISOFIX child seats
i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points. (p. 79)
The location of the mounting points
Mounting point locations are indicated by symbols4 on

the upholstery of the backrest.
The mounting points for i-Size/ISOFIX are
located behind covers in the lower section of the
rear seat's backrest, in the outer seats.
Lift the covers in order to access the mounting
points.
4 Names and symbols change depending on market.
78
SAFETY
Table for location of ISOFIX child The child seat must be approved in accordance NOTE
seats with UN Reg R44 and the car model must be
included in the manufacturer's vehicle list. Always read the section "Child seats" before
The table gives a recommendation for which
ISOFIX child seats suit which locations, and for
what size of child.
Weight Size classA Type of child seat Front seat (with deactivated air- Front seat (with activated air- Outer rear seat Centre rear seat
bag, only rear-facing child bag, only front-facing child
seats)B seats)B
Group 0
E Rear-facing infant seat ILB, C, XD X ILC X
max 10 kg
E Rear-facing infant seat
Group 0+
C Rear-facing child seat ILB, C, E, XD X ILC X
max 13 kg
D Rear-facing child seat
}}
79
SAFETY
|| Weight Size classA Type of child seat Front seat (with deactivated air- Front seat (with activated air- Outer rear seat Centre rear seat
bag, only rear-facing child bag, only front-facing child
seats)B seats)B
A Front-facing child seat
B Front-facing child seat X ILB, E, F, XD ILF, IUFF X
Group 1
B1 Front-facing child seat
9-18 kg
C Rear-facing child seat
ILB, E, XD X IL X
D Rear-facing child seat
IL: Suitable for particular ISOFIX child restraint systems. These child restraint systems are those of the specific vehicle, restricted or semi-universal catego-
ries.
IUF: Suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraint systems of universal category approved for use in the mass group.
X: Not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems.
A For child seats with the ISOFIX fixture system there is a size classification to help users choose the right type of child seat. The size class can be read on the child seat's label.
B Works for the installation of ISOFIX child seats that are semi-universally approved (IL) if the car is equipped with the ISOFIX console accessory (the accessory range varies depending on market).
C Volvo recommends: Volvo infant seat secured using the ISOFIX fixture system (type approval E1 04301146).
D Applicable if the car is not fitted with an ISOFIX bracket.
E Adjust the backrest so that the head restraint does not touch the child seat.
F Volvo recommends rear-facing child seat for children in this mass group.
WARNING NOTE NOTE

Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front If an i-Size/ISOFIX child seat has no size Volvo recommends contacting an authorised
passenger seat if the passenger airbag is classification, the car model must be included Volvo dealer for information about which i-
activated. on the vehicle list for the child seat. Size/ISOFIX child seats Volvo recommends.
Related information
80
SAFETY
• Table for location of i-Size child seats

(p. 82)
81
SAFETY
Table for location of i-Size child The child seat must be approved in accordance NOTE
seats with UN Reg R129.
Always read the section "Child seats" before
The table gives a recommendation for which i-
Size child seats suit which locations, and for
what size of child.
Type of child seat Front seat (with deactivated airbag, only rear- Front seat (with activated airbag, only front-fac- Outer rear seat Centre rear seat
facing child seats) ing child seats)
i-Size child seats X X i-UA, B X
i-U: Suitable for i-Size "universal" child seat, front-facing and rear-facing.
X: Not suitable for universally approved child seats.
A Volvo recommends rear-facing child seats for this group.
B Volvo recommends: BeSafe iZi Kid X2 i-Size (type approval E4-129R-000002).
Related information
• Table for location of ISOFIX child seats
(p. 79)
82
Instruments and controls, left-hand Display/function/control Display/function/control

drive car
The overviews show where the displays and Right-hand steering wheel keypad Front reading lamps and interior lighting
controls near the driver are located.
Steering wheel adjustment Panorama roof*
Horn Display in roof console
Left-hand steering wheel keypad Manual dimming of interior rearview mir-

ror
Bonnet opening
Display lighting, tailgate unlocking, tail-

gate opening/closing*, halogen head-
lamp levelling
Display/function/control
Position lamps, daytime running lights,
dipped beam, main beam, direction indi-
cators, front fog lamps/cornering lights*,
rear fog lamp, resetting the trip meter
Steering wheel paddles for manual gear
changing in an automatic gearbox* Centre display
Head-up display* Hazard warning flashers, max defroster/

heated windscreen*, media, glovebox
Driver display door opening
Wipers and washing, rain sensor* Gear selector
Display/function/control Display/function/control Instruments and controls, right-

hand drive car
Start knob Power windows, door mirrors The overviews show where the displays and
controls near the driver are located.
Drive mode control* Adjusting front seat
Parking brake
Related information
Automatic braking when stationary • Steering wheel (p. 129)
• Adjusting the power front seat* (p. 120)
• Lighting control (p. 131)
• Climate controls (p. 180)
Position lamps, daytime running lights,
dipped beam, main beam, direction indi-
cators, front fog lamps/cornering lights*,
Display/function/control rear fog lamp, resetting the trip meter
Memory for setup of: Steering wheel paddles for manual gear
changing in an automatic gearbox*
• Power front seat*
• Door mirrors Head-up display*
• Head-up display* Driver display

Door opening, locking/unlocking of side Wipers and washing, rain sensor*
doors and tailgate
}}
|| Display/function/control Display/function/control Display/function/control

Right-hand steering wheel keypad Front reading lamps and interior lighting Start knob
Display lighting, unlocking the tailgate, Panorama roof* Drive mode control*
opening/closing the tailgate*
Display in roof console Parking brake
Bonnet opening
Manual dimming of interior rearview mir- Automatic braking when stationary
Horn ror
Steering wheel adjustment
Left-hand steering wheel keypad
Memory for setup of:
Centre display
• Power front seat*
Hazard warning flashers, max defroster/ • Door mirrors
heated windscreen*, media, glovebox
door opening
• Head-up display*
Door opening, locking/unlocking of side
Gear selector
doors and tailgate
Power windows, door mirrors
Adjusting front seat
Related information
• Steering wheel (p. 129)
Driver display WARNING Driver display, 12-inch*

The driver display shows information about the
If the driver display should extinguish, not illu-
car and driving. minate on activation/start or be fully or parti-
ally illegible, the car must not be used. You
The driver display contains gauges, indicators and
should visit a workshop immediately. Volvo
indicator and warning symbols. The content of recommends an authorised Volvo workshop.
the driver display depends on the car's equip-
ment, settings and which functions are active at
that time.
The driver display is available in two versions, 12-
inch* and 8-inch.
WARNING
In the event of a fault in the driver display the
information on e.g. brakes, airbags or other
safety systems may not be shown. In which
case, the driver cannot check the status of
the car's systems or receive current warnings
and information.
Location in the driver display:

On the left In the middle On the right
Speedometer Indicator and warning symbols Tachometer/ECO gaugeA
Trip meter Outside temperature gauge Gear shift indicator
OdometerB Clock Drive mode

(Comfort, Off Road, Eco, Dynamic or Individual)
Cruise control and speed limiter information Messages, in some cases with graphics Fuel gauge
Road Sign Information* Door and seatbelt information Status of the Start/Stop function
– Media player Distance to empty tank
– Navigation map* Instantaneous fuel consumption
– Phone App menu (activated via steering wheel keypad)
– Voice recognition –
– CompassA –
A Depends on drive mode selected.
B Accumulated mileage.
Driver display, 8-inch
}}
|| Location in the driver display:

Fuel gauge Speedometer Media player
Drive mode Road Sign Information* Phone
(Comfort, Off Road, Eco, Dynamic or Individual)
Gear shift indicator Cruise control and speed limiter information Navigation information*
Tachometer/ECO gaugeA Door and seatbelt information Clock
Distance to empty tank Status of the Start/Stop function App menu (activated via steering wheel keypad)
Outside temperature gauge – Instantaneous fuel consumption
Indicator and warning symbols – OdometerB
– – Trip meter
– – Indicator and warning symbols
– – Voice recognition
– – Engine temperature gauge
– – Messages, in some cases with graphics
– – CompassA
A Depends on drive mode selected.
B Accumulated mileage.
Dynamic symbol display extinguishes after a while if it is not used.

The dynamic symbol in its basic To reactivate it, proceed with one of the following:
form.
• Depress the brake pedal.
• Turn the ignition knob to ignition position to I.
• Open one of the doors.
Related information
The centre of the driver display contains a • Driver display settings (p. 92)
dynamic symbol that changes appearance for dif-
• Indicator symbols in the driver display
ferent types of message. It can show an indicator (p. 93)
or warning symbol, or consist of an image
sequence that starts from this position and is • Warning symbols in the driver display
then converted to a larger image to clarify infor- (p. 95)
mation. • Application menu in the driver display
(p. 103)
• Fuel gauge (p. 97)
• License agreement for the driver display
(p. 98)
Example of indicator symbol in the 12-inch driver display.
Activating the driver display

The driver display is activated as soon as a door
is opened, i.e. in ignition position 0. The driver
91
Driver display settings 3. Select what should be shown in the back- 2. Tap on System System Languages and
Settings for the driver display can be made in ground: Units System Language to select lan-
the driver display's application menu and in the • Show no information in background guage.
centre display's Settings menu.
• Show information for current playing > A change will affect the language in all
Settings in the app menu media displays.
In the app menu, you can choose which informa- • Show navigation even if no route is Related information
tion is shown on the driver display from set1. • Driver display (p. 88)
• trip computer The 12-inch driver display* shows the infor- • Application menu in the driver display
• media player mation in the centre, and the 8-inch driver (p. 103)
display shows the information in the top
• phone
right-hand field.
• navigation system*.
Selecting theme
The application menu in the driver display is 1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top
opened and navigated using the steering wheel's view.
right-hand keypad, see the section "Using the
application menu in the driver display". 2. Tap on My Car Displays Display
Themes
Settings in the centre display
3. Select a theme (appearance) for the driver
Selecting information type display:
1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top
view. • Glass
2.
• Minimalistic
Press My Car Displays Driver
Display Information. • Performance
• Chrome Rings.
Selecting language
view.
1 The map is only shown with 12-inch driver display*. In the 8-inch driver display, only guidance is shown. For more information, see the section "Displays and controls for map navigation" and "Map navigation in
the driver display".
Indicator symbols in the driver Symbol Specification Symbol Specification

display
The indicator symbols alert the driver that a func- Automatic brake on Left and right-hand direction
tion is activated, that a system is operating, or indicator
The symbol illuminates when the
that a fault or abnormal condition exists. function is activated and the foot The symbols flash when the direc-
brake or parking brake is acting. tion indicators are used.
Symbol Specification The brake holds the car stationary
when it has stopped.
Information, read display text
When one of the car's systems Tyre pressure system
Position lamps
does not behave as intended, this The symbol illuminates when tyre
information symbol illuminates and pressure is too low. If there is a The symbol lights up when the
a text appears on the driver display. fault in the tyre pressure system, position lamps are switched on.
The information symbol can also the symbol will flash for approx. 1
illuminate in conjunction with other Fault in the headlamp system
minute and then illuminate with a
symbols. constant glow. This may be The symbol illuminates if a fault
because the system cannot detect has occurred in the ABL function
Fault in brake system (Active Bending Lights) or if
or warn of low tyre pressure as
The symbol lights up when there is intended. another fault has occurred in the
a fault in the parking brake. headlamp system.
Emissions system
ABS fault Active main beam on
If the symbol illuminates after the
If this symbol illuminates then the engine has been started then it The symbol lights up blue when the
system is not working. The car's may be due to a fault in the car's automatic main beam is on.
regular brake system continues to emissions system. Drive to a work-
work, but without the ABS function. Active main beam off
shop for checking. Volvo recom-
mends that an authorised Volvo The symbol lights up white when
workshop is contacted. the automatic main beam is off.
}}
93
|| Symbol Specification Symbol Specification Symbol Specification

Main beam On Rain sensor on Lane assistance
The symbol illuminates when main This symbol illuminates when the White symbol: Lane assistance is
beam is on and with main beam rain sensor is on. on and road lines are detected.
flash.
Preconditioning on Grey symbol: Lane assistance is on
Active main beam on but road lines are not detected.
The symbol illuminates when the
The symbol lights up blue when engine block and passenger com- Yellow symbol: Lane assistance
active main beam is on. Position partment heater/air conditioning warns/intervenes.
lamps are switched on. are preconditioning the car.
Lane assistance and rain sensor
Active main beam off Stability system White symbol: Lane assistance is
The symbol lights up white when A flashing symbol indicates that on and road lines are detected.
active main beam is off. Position the stability system is operating. If Rain sensor is on.
lamps are switched on. the symbol illuminates with con- Grey symbol: Lane assistance is on
stant glow then there is a fault in but road lines are not detected.
Main beam On the system. Rain sensor is on.
The symbol lights up when main
Stability system, sport mode
beam and the position lamps are Reminder for doors, bonnet, tailgate
switched on. The symbol illuminates when the and fuel filler flap
sport mode is activated. Sport If the bonnet, tailgate, fuel filler flap or door is not
Front fog lamps on mode allows for a more active driv- closed properly then the information or warning
This symbol illuminates when the ing experience. The system then symbol and graphics illuminate in the driver dis-
front fog lamp is switched on. detects whether the accelerator play.
pedal, steering wheel movements
Rear fog lamp on and cornering are more active than Related information
This symbol illuminates when the in normal driving and then allows • Driver display (p. 88)
rear fog lamp is switched on. controlled skidding of the rear sec-
tion up to a certain level before it
• Warning symbols in the driver display
(p. 95)
intervenes and stabilises the car.
• Door and seatbelt reminder (p. 61)
94
Warning symbols in the driver Symbol Specification Symbol Specification

display
The warning symbols alert the driver that an Warning Fault in brake system
important function is activated or that a serious The red warning symbol illuminates If this symbol illuminates, the brake
fault or condition exists. when a fault has been indicated fluid level may be too low. Visit the
which could affect the safety nearest authorised workshop to
WARNING and/or driveability of the car. An have the brake fluid level checked
If the brake fluid is below the MIN level in the explanatory text is shown on the and rectified.
brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further driver display at the same time. The
warning symbol can also illuminate Parking brake applied
before topping up the brake fluid.
The loss of brake fluid must be investigated in conjunction with other symbols. This symbol illuminates with a con-
by a workshop. Volvo recommends contacting stant glow when the parking brake
Seatbelt reminder
an authorised Volvo workshop. is applied.
This symbol flashes if someone in
A flashing symbol means that a
a front seat has not put on their
WARNING fault has arisen. Read the message
seatbelt or if someone in a rear
in the driver display.
If the BRAKE and ABS symbols are lit at the seat has taken off their seatbelt.
same time, there is a risk that the rear end will Low oil pressure
skid during heavy braking. Airbags
If this symbol illuminates during
If the symbol remains illuminated or
driving then the engine's oil pres-
illuminates while driving, a fault has
sure is too low. Stop the engine
been detected in one of the car's
immediately and check the engine
safety systems. Read the message
oil level, top up if necessary. If the
in the driver display. Volvo recom-
symbol illuminates and the oil level
mends that an authorised Volvo
is normal, contact a workshop.
workshop is contacted.
Volvo recommends that an author-
ised Volvo workshop is contacted.
}}
95
|| Symbol Specification Outside temperature gauge – Select Settings System System

The outside temperature gauge is shown in the Languages and Units Units of
Alternator not charging driver display. Measurement and select the required unit
This symbol illuminates during driv- type, Metric, Imperial or US.
A sensor detects the temperature outside of the
ing if a fault has occurred in the
car. Related information
electrical system. Visit a workshop.
Volvo recommends that an author- • Driver display (p. 88)
ised Volvo workshop is contacted. • Climate control - sensors (p. 177)
Collision risk
City Safety warns of a risk of colli-
sion with other vehicles, pedes-
trians, cyclists or large animals.
Reminder for doors, bonnet, tailgate

and fuel filler flap
If the bonnet, tailgate, fuel filler flap or door is not
closed properly then the information or warning Outside temperature gauge location in the 12-inch and
symbol and graphics illuminate in the driver dis- 8-inch driver display.
play.
If the car has been stationary, the gauge may dis-
Related information play a temperature reading that is too high.
• Driver display (p. 88) When the outside temperature is within the range
• Indicator symbols in the driver display (p. 93) -5 °C to +2 °C (23 till 36 °F) a snowflake symbol
is also shown in the driver display as a warning
• Door and seatbelt reminder (p. 61)
for potentially slippery conditions. The snowflake
• Safety (p. 56) symbol is also illuminated briefly in the head-up
display, if the car is equipped with one.
Outside temperature gauge setting

Change the unit for the temperature gauge via
the centre display's top view.
96
Clock Automatic time for cars with GPS Fuel gauge

The clock is shown in both the driver display and If the car is equipped with a navigation system The fuel gauge in the driver display shows the
the centre display. then Auto Time can be selected. The time zone fuel level in the tank.
is then adjusted automatically based on the loca-
Location tion of the car. For certain types of navigation
systems, the current location (country) must also
be set to obtain the right time zone. If Auto Time
is not selected, time and data are adjusted with
arrow up or arrow down on the touch screen.
Summer time
In certain countries, it is possible to select auto-
matic setting of summer time with Auto. For
other countries, summer time can be set with On
or Off.
Related information
• Driver display (p. 88) Fuel gauge in the 12-inch driver display.
Clock location in the 12-inch and 8-inch driver display. The beige zone in the fuel gauge indicates the
In the centre display, the clock is located at the quantity of fuel in the tank.
top right of the status bar. When the fuel level is low and it is soon time to
In certain situations, messages and information refuel, the fuel pump symbol illuminates and
may cover the clock in the driver display. changes to amber colour. The trip computer also
indicates distance to empty tank, see the section
Settings for time and date "Trip computer".
Select Settings System Date and Time
in the centre display's top view to change set-
tings for time and date format.
Adjust time and date by pressing the up or down
arrow on the touch screen.
}}
97
|| License agreement for the driver 4. Neither the name of the University nor the
display names of its contributors may be used to
A license is an agreement for the right to oper- endorse or promote products derived from
ate a certain activity or the right to use someone this software without specific prior written
else's entitlement according to the terms and permission.
conditions in the agreement. The following text is THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE
Volvo's agreement with the manufacturer/devel- REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS `ÀS IS'' AND
oper. ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
BSD 4-clause "Original" or "Old" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
License AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1990, 1991, 1993 ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
Fuel gauge in the 8-inch driver display. The Regents of the University of California. All REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
The bars in the fuel gauge indicate the quantity rights reserved. FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
of fuel in the tank. Redistribution and use in source and binary SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
forms, with or without modification, are permitted DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
When the fuel level is low and it is soon time to PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
refuel, the fuel pump symbol illuminates and provided that the following conditions are met:
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
changes to amber colour. The trip computer also 1. Redistributions of source code must retain OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
indicates distance to empty tank, see the section the above copyright notice, this list of CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
"Trip computer". When the fuel level is critically conditions and the following disclaimer. WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
low, only one amber-coloured bar remains. Refuel 2. Redistributions in binary form must OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
the car as soon as possible. reproduce the above copyright notice, this list OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF
of conditions and the following disclaimer in THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
Related information
the documentation and/or other materials ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
• Trip computer (p. 161)
provided with the distribution. DAMAGE.
• Opening/closing the fuel filler flap and refu-
3. All advertising materials mentioning features
elling (p. 439) BSD 3-clause "New" or "Revised"
or use of this software must display the
License
following acknowledgement: This product
Copyright (c) 2011-2014, Yann Collet.
includes software developed by the
University of California, Berkeley and its
contributors.
98
Redistribution and use in source and binary WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
forms, with or without modification, are permitted OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
provided that the following conditions are met: OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
1. Redistributions of source code must retain
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
the above copyright notice, this list of
DAMAGE. CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
conditions and the following disclaimer.
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
2. Redistributions in binary form must BSD 2-clause “Simplified” license OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
reproduce the above copyright notice, this list Copyright (c) <YEAR>, <OWNER> All rights OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF
of conditions and the following disclaimer in reserved. THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
the documentation and/or other materials ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
Redistribution and use in source and binary
provided with the distribution. DAMAGE.
forms, with or without modification, are permitted
3. Neither the name of the organisation nor the provided that the following conditions are met: The views and conclusions contained in the
names of its contributors may be used to software and documentation are those of the
endorse or promote products derive from this 1. Redistributions of source code must retain
the above copyright notice, this list of authors and should not be interpreted as
software without specific prior written representing official policies, either expressed or
permission. conditions and the following disclaimer.
implied, of the FreeBSD Project.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE 2. Redistributions in binary form must
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS reproduce the above copyright notice, this list FreeType Project License
"AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED of conditions and the following disclaimer in 1. 1 Copyright 1996-1999 by David Turner,
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED the documentation and/or other materials Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg
TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF provided with the distribution. Introduction The FreeType Project is
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE distributed in several archive packages; some
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS of them may contain, in addition to the
NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED FreeType font engine, various tools and
OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED contributions which rely on, or relate to, the
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF FreeType Project. This license applies to all
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A files found in such packages, and which do
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN not fall under their own explicit license. The
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER license affects thus the FreeType font
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY engine, the test programs, documentation
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, and makefiles, at the very least. This license
}}
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, was inspired by the BSD, Artistic, and IJG
99
|| (Independent JPEG Group) licenses, which license applies to all files distributed in the that you understand and accept all the terms
all encourage inclusion and use of free original FreeType archive, including all source of this license.
software in commercial and freeware code, binaries and documentation, unless 2. Redistribution Redistribution and use in
products alike. As a consequence, its main otherwise stated in the file in its original, source and binary forms, with or without
points are that: o We don't promise that this unmodified form as distributed in the original modification, are permitted provided that the
software works. However, we are be archive. If you are unsure whether or not a following conditions are met: o Redistribution
interested in any kind of bug reports. (às is' particular file is covered by this license, you of source code must retain this license file
distribution) o You can use this software for must contact us to verify this. The FreeType (`licence.txt') unaltered; any additions,
whatever you want, in parts or full form, project is copyright (C) 1996-1999 by David deletions or changes to the original files
without having to pay us. (`royalty-free' Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner must be clearly indicated in accompanying
usage) o You may not pretend that you wrote Lemberg. All rights reserved except as documentation. The copyright notices of the
this software. If you use it, or only parts of it, specified below. 1. No Warranty THE unaltered, original files must be preserved in
in a program, you must acknowledge FREETYPE ARCHIVE IS PROVIDED ÀS IS' all copies of source files. o Redistribution in
somewhere in your documentation that WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, binary form must provide a disclaimer that
you've used the FreeType code. (`credits') EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, states that the software is based in part of
We specifically permit and encourage the INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, the work of the FreeType Team, in the
inclusion of this software, with or without WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND distribution documentation. We also
modifications, in commercial products, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. encourage you to put an URL to the
provided that all warranty or liability claims IN NO EVENT WILL ANY OF THE FreeType web page in your documentation,
are assumed by the product vendor. Legal AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE though this isn't mandatory. These conditions
Terms 0. Definitions Throughout this license, LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES CAUSED BY apply to any software derived from or based
the terms `package', `FreeType Project', and THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO USE, OF on the FreeType code, not just the
`FreeType archive' refer to the set of files THE FREETYPE PROJECT. As you have not unmodified files. If you use our work, you
originally distributed by the authors (David signed this license, you are not required to must acknowledge us. However, no fee need
Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner accept it. However, as the FreeType project be paid to us.
Lemberg) as the `FreeType project', be they is copyrighted material, only this license, or
named as alpha, beta or final release. `You' another one contracted with the authors, 3. Advertising The names of FreeType's authors
refers to the licensee, or person using the grants you the right to use, distribute, and and contributors may not be used to endorse
project, where ùsing' is a generic term modify it. Therefore, by using, distributing, or or promote products derived from this
including compiling the project's source code modifying the FreeType project, you indicate software without specific prior written
as well as linking it to form a `program' or permission. We suggest, but do not require,
èxecutable'. This program is referred to as à that you use one or more of the following
program using the FreeType engine'. This phrases to refer to this software in your
documentation or advertising materials:
100
`FreeType Project', `FreeType Engine', libpng versions 1.0.7, July 1, 2000, through libpng versions 0.89, June 1996, through 0.96,
`FreeType library', or `FreeType Distribution'. 1.0.13, April 15, 2002, are Copyright (c) May 1997, are Copyright (c) 1996, 1997
4. Contacts There are two mailing lists related 2000-2002 Glenn Randers-Pehrson and are Andreas Dilger Distributed according to the same
to FreeType: o [email protected] distributed according to the same disclaimer and disclaimer and license as libpng-0.88, with the
Discusses general use and applications of license as libpng-1.0.6 with the following following individuals added to the list of
FreeType, as well as future and wanted individuals added to the list of Contributing Contributing Authors:
additions to the library and distribution. If you Authors
John Bowler
are looking for support, start in this list if you Simon-Pierre Cadieux
Kevin Bracey
haven't found anything to help you in the
Eric S. Raymond
documentation. o [email protected] Sam Bushell
Discusses bugs, as well as engine internals, Gilles Vollant
Magnus Holmgren
design issues, specific licenses, porting, etc.
and with the following additions to the disclaimer:
o http://www.freetype.org Holds the current Greg Roelofs
FreeType web page, which will allow you to There is no warranty against interference with
Tom Tanner
download our latest development version and your enjoyment of the library or against
read online documentation. You can also infringement. There is no warranty that our efforts libpng versions 0.5, May 1995, through 0.88,
contact us individually at: David Turner or the library will fulfill any of your particular January 1996, are Copyright (c) 1995, 1996 Guy
<[email protected]> Robert Wilhelm purposes or needs. This library is provided with all Eric Schalnat, Group 42, Inc.
<[email protected]> Werner faults, and the entire risk of satisfactory quality, For the purposes of this copyright and license,
Lemberg <[email protected]> performance, accuracy, and effort is with the user. "Contributing Authors" is defined as the following
libpng versions 0.97, January 1998, through set of individuals:
Libpng License
1.0.6, March 20, 2000, are Copyright (c) 1998, Andreas Dilger
This copy of the libpng notices is provided for
1999 Glenn Randers-Pehrson, and are
your convenience. In case of any discrepancy Dave Martindale
distributed according to the same disclaimer and
between this copy and the notices in the file
license as libpng-0.96, with the following Guy Eric Schalnat
png.h that is included in the libpng distribution,
individuals added to the list of Contributing
the latter shall prevail. Paul Schmidt
Authors:
COPYRIGHT NOTICE, DISCLAIMER, and Tim Wegner
Tom Lane
LICENSE:
Glenn Randers-Pehrson The PNG Reference Library is supplied "AS IS".
If you modify libpng you may insert additional
The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc.
notices immediately following this sentence. Willem van Schaik disclaim all warranties, expressed or implied,
}}
including, without limitation, the warranties of
101
|| merchantability and of fitness for any purpose. Also, the PNG logo (in PNG format, of course) is THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc. supplied in the files "pngbar.png" and LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR
assume no liability for direct, indirect, incidental, "pngbar.jpg (88x31) and "pngnow.png" (98x31). OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
special, exemplary, or consequential damages, OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE,
Libpng is OSI Certified Open Source Software.
which may result from the use of the PNG ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
OSI Certified Open Source is a certification mark
Reference Library, even if advised of the WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR
of the Open Source Initiative.
possibility of such damage. OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
Glenn Randers-Pehrson [email protected]
Permission is hereby granted to use, copy, zlib License
April 15, 2002
modify, and distribute this source code, or The zlib/libpng License Copyright (c) <year>
portions hereof, for any purpose, without fee, MIT License <copyright holders>
subject to the following restrictions: Copyright (c) <year> <copyright holders>
This software is provided 'as-is', without any
1. The origin of this source code must not be Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to express or implied warranty. In no event will the
misrepresented. any person obtaining a copy of this software and authors be held liable for any damages arising
2. Altered versions must be plainly marked as associated documentation files (the "Software"), from the use of this software.
such and must not be misrepresented as to deal in the Software without restriction,
Permission is granted to anyone to use this
being the original source. including without limitation the rights to use,
software for any purpose, including commercial
3. This Copyright notice may not be removed or copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute,
applications, and to alter it and redistribute it
altered from any source or altered source sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software,
freely, subject to the following restrictions:
distribution. and to permit persons to whom the Software is
furnished to do so, subject to the following 1. The origin of this software must not be
The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc. conditions: misrepresented; you must not claim that you
specifically permit, without fee, and encourage wrote the original software. If you use this
the use of this source code as a component to The above copyright notice and this permission
software in a product, an acknowledgment in
supporting the PNG file format in commercial notice shall be included in all copies or
the product documentation would be
products. If you use this source code in a product, substantial portions of the Software.
appreciated but is not required.
acknowledgment is not required but would be THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS",
appreciated. 2. Altered source versions must be plainly
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
marked as such, and must not be
A "png_get_copyright" function is available, for EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
misrepresented as being the original
convenient use in "about" boxes and the like: LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
software.
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
printf("%s",png_get_copyright(NULL)); PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND 3. This notice may not be removed or altered
NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL from any source distribution.
102
SGI Free Software B License Version OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE Application menu in the driver
2.0. SOFTWARE. display
SGI FREE SOFTWARE LICENSE B (Version 2.0, Except as contained in this notice, the name of Application menu (app menu) in the driver dis-
Sept. 18, 2008) Silicon Graphics, Inc. shall not be used in play provides quick access to commonly used
Copyright (C) [dates of first publication] Silicon advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use functions for certain apps.
Graphics, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Permission is or other dealings in this Software without prior
hereby granted, free of charge, to any person written authorization from Silicon Graphics, Inc.
obtaining a copy of this software and associated
documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in
Related information
the Software without restriction, including without • Driver display (p. 88)
limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge,
publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies
of the Software, and to permit persons to whom
the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the
following conditions: The above copyright notice
including the dates of first publication and either
this permission notice or a reference to http://
oss.sgi.com/projects/FreeB/ shall be included in
The app menu in the driver display can be used instead
all copies or substantial portions of the Software. of using the centre display.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", The app menu is shown in the driver display and
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, is controlled using the steering wheel's right-
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT hand keypad. The app menu makes it easy to
LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF switch between different apps or functions within
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A the apps without having to let go of the steering
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND wheel and take your eyes off the road.
NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL
SILICON GRAPHICS, INC. BE LIABLE FOR ANY App menu functions
CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, Different apps give access to different types of
WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, functions. The following apps and their associ-
TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT ated functions can be controlled from the app
OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE menu:
}}
103
|| App Functions Using the application menu in the Opening/closing the app menu
driver display – Press on open/close (1).
Trip com- Selection of trip meter, selection The application menu (the app menu) in the (It is not possible to open the app menu
puter of what to show in the driver dis- driver display is operated with the steering while there is an unacknowledged message
play, etc. wheel's right-hand keypad. in the driver display. The message must be
Media Selection of active source for confirmed before the app menu can be
player the media player. opened.)
> The app menu opens/closes.
Phone Calling a contact from the call
list. The app menu closes automatically after a period
of inactivity or after certain options have been
Navigation Pause guide, start guide to selected.
recently used destination, etc.
Navigating and selecting in the app
Related information menu
• Driver display (p. 88) 1. Navigate between the different apps that are
• Overview of the centre display (p. 33) available by tapping on left or right (2).
• Using the application menu in the driver dis- > Functions for previous/next app are
play (p. 104) The app menu and the steering wheel's right-hand key- shown in the app menu.
pad.
2. Browse through the functions for the
Open/close
selected app by tapping on up or down (3).
Left/right 3. Confirm or highlight an option for the func-
tion by pressing on confirm (4).
Up/down
> The function is activated and for some
Confirm options the app menu then closes.
If the app menu is opened again, the functions of
the most recently selected app are shown first.
104
Related information Messages in the driver display and

• Application menu in the driver display the centre display
(p. 103) The driver display and centre display can show
• Managing messages in the driver display and messages to inform or assist the driver in the
the centre display (p. 107) event of different events.
Driver display
Message in the driver display3.

The driver display shows messages that are of
high priority for the driver.
The messages can be shown in different parts of
the driver display depending on what other infor-
mation is currently being displayed. After a while,
Message in the driver display2. or when the message has been acknowledged/
action taken if required, the message disappears
from the driver display. If a message needs to be
saved, it is placed in the Car status app, which is
opened from the app view in the centre display.
Message composition may vary and they can be
shown together with graphics, symbols or buttons
for acknowledging the message or accepting a
request, for example.
2 With 8-inch driver display.

3 With 12-inch driver display. }}
105
|| Service messages Message Specification Most messages are shown above the centre dis-
Shown below is a selection of important service play's status bar. After a while, or when any
messages and their meanings. Regular main- Time for regular service - required action related to the message has been
tenance contact a workshopB. taken, the message disappears from the status
Message Specification Shown when the service bar. If a message needs to be saved, it is posi-
Maintenance
date has passed. tioned in the top view in the centre display.
overdue
Stop safelyA Stop and switch off the
Message composition may vary and they can be
engine. Serious risk of Temporarily A function has been tem- shown together with graphics, symbols or a but-
damage - consult a work- offA porarily switched off and is ton for activating/deactivating a function linked
shopB. reset automatically while to the message.
driving or after starting
Turn off Stop and switch off the Pop-up messages
again.
engineA engine. Serious risk of In some cases, a message is shown in the form
damage - consult a work- A Part of message, shown together with information on where the
of a pop-up window. Pop-up messages have
problem has arisen.
shopB. B An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. higher priority than messages shown in the sta-
Service urgent tus bar and require acknowledgement/action
Contact a workshopB to Centre display before they disappear. Messages that need to be
Drive to work- check the car immediately.
saved are positioned in the top view in the centre
shopA
display.
Service Contact a workshopB to
Related information
requiredA check the car as soon as
possible. • Driver display (p. 88)
Regular main- Time for regular service -
tenance contact a workshopB.
• Managing messages in the driver display and
the centre display (p. 107)
Book time for Shown before the next
service date. • Managing messages saved from the driver
maintenance display and centre display (p. 108)
Regular main- Time for regular service -
tenance contact a workshopB. Message in the centre display.
Time for main- Shown at the next service The centre display shows messages that are of
date. lower priority for the driver.
tenance
106
Managing messages in the driver For messages without buttons:

display and the centre display – Close the message by pressing on confirm
Messages in the driver display and centre dis- (2), or allow the message to close automati-
play are managed with the steering wheel's cally after a while.
right-hand keypad and in the centre display's > The message disappears from the driver
views. display.
Driver display If a message needs to be saved, it is placed in
the Car status app, which is opened from the
app view in the centre display. The message Car
message stored in Car Status application is
shown in the centre display in conjunction with
Message in the driver display5 and the steering wheel's this.
right-hand keypad.
Left/right
Centre display
Confirm
Some messages in the driver display contain one
or more buttons for acknowledging the message
or accepting a request, for example.
Message in the driver display4 and the steering wheel's
right-hand keypad. Managing a new message
For messages with buttons:
1. Navigate between the different buttons that
are available by tapping on left or right (1).
2. Confirm the selection by pressing on confirm
(2). Message in the centre display.
> The message disappears from the driver Some messages in the centre display have a but-
display. ton (or several buttons in pop-up messages) for
4 With 8-inch driver display.

5 With 12-inch driver display. }}
107
|| e.g. activating/deactivating a function linked to Managing messages saved from Reading a saved message
the message. the driver display and centre display To read a saved message immediately:
Managing a new message Whether saved from the driver display or the – Press the button to the right of the Car
For messages with buttons: centre display, messages are managed in the message stored in Car Status
centre display. application message in the centre display.
– Press the button to perform the action or
allow the message to close automatically Messages saved from the driver display > The saved message is shown in the Car
after a while. status app.
> The message disappears from the status To read a saved message later:
bar.
1. Open the Car status app from the app view
For messages without buttons: in the centre display.
– Close the message by tapping on it, or allow > The app is opened in the bottom subview
the message to close automatically after a of the home view.
while. 2. Select the Messages tab in the app.
> The message disappears from the status > A list of saved messages is shown.
bar.
3. Press on the arrow to the right to maximise/
If a message needs to be saved, it is positioned minimise a message.
in the top view in the centre display.
Saved messages can be seen in the Car Status app. > More information on the message is
Related information Messages that are shown in shown in the list and the image to the left
• Messages in the driver display and the centre the driver display and that need in the app shows information about the
display (p. 105) to be saved are added in the message graphically.
• Managing messages saved from the driver Car status app in the centre
display and centre display (p. 108) display. The message Car
message stored in Car
Status application is shown
in the centre display in conjunction with this.
108
Managing a saved message Messages saved from the centre – Press the button to perform the action.
In maximised mode, some messages have two display Saved messages in the top view are deleted
buttons available to book service or read the automatically when the car is switched off.
owner's manual.
To book service for a saved message: Related information
• Messages in the driver display and the centre
– In maximised mode for the message, press display (p. 105)
Request appoint.Call to make
Appointment6 for help in booking service.
> With Request appoint.: The
Appointments tab opens in the app and
creates a request to book service and
repair work.
With Call to make Appointment: The
Saved messages and possible options in the top view.
phone app is initiated and calls a service
centre to book service and repair work. Messages that are shown in the centre display
that need to be saved are added in the top view
To read the owner's manual for a saved mes-
of the centre display.
sage:
Reading a saved message
– In maximised mode for the message, press
1. Open the top view in the centre display.
Owner's manual to read about the mes-
sage in the owner's manual. > A list of saved messages is shown. Mes-
sages with an arrow to the right can be
> The owner's manual opens in the centre
maximised.
display and shows information linked to
the message. 2. Press on the arrow to maximise/minimise
the message.
Saved messages in the app are deleted automat-
ically each time the engine is started. Managing a saved message
Some messages have a button for e.g. activating/
deactivating a function linked to the message.
6 Depending on market.
109
Head-up display* NOTE

The head-up display supplements the car's
The driver's ability to see the information in
driver display and projects information from the
the head-up display is impaired by the follow-
driver display onto the windscreen. The projec-
ing:
ted image can only be seen from the driver posi-
tion. • use of polarising sunglasses
• a driving position which means that the
driver is not sitting centred in the seat
• objects on the display unit's cover glass
• unfavourable light conditions.
Examples of what can be shown in the display.

IMPORTANT
Speed
The display unit from which the information is
projected is located in the instrument panel. Cruise control
To avoid damage to the display unit's cover
glass - do not store any objects on the cover Navigation
glass and make sure that no objects fall down Road signs
Incoming phone calls. onto it.
The head-up display shows warnings and infor- A number of symbols can be shown temporarily
mation relating to speed, cruise control functions, in the head-up display, e.g.:
navigation, etc. in the driver's field of vision. Road If the warning symbol illuminates - read
sign information and incoming phone calls are the warning message in the driver dis-
also shown in the head-up display. play.
If the information symbol illuminates -

read the message in the driver display.
NOTE Activating/deactivating the head-up The setting can be saved as a personal setting in
display the driver profile.
Certain visual defects may cause headaches
Press the Head-up display
and a feeling of stress during the use of the
button in the centre display
head-up display.
function view.
City Safety in the head-up display
NOTE
When City Safety* is activated, the informa- NOTE
tion in the head-up display is replaced by a Activation/deactivation and adjustment of the
graphic for City Safety. This graphic is illumi- head-up-display can only be performed when
nated even if the head-up display is switched it shows a projected image. The car's engine
off. must be running.
Settings for head-up display

Select the option and adjust the settings for the
head-up display's projection onto the windscreen.
Selecting display options
view.
2. Press My Car Displays Head-Up
Display Options.
3. Select which functions should be shown:
• Show Navigation
The graphic for City Safety flashes in order to catch the
driver's attention.
• Show Road Sign Information
• Show Driver Support
• Show Phone.
}}
|| Adjusting brightness and vertical position Raising the position
Lowering the position
Confirm
The brightness of the graphics is automatically
adapted to their background light conditions. The
brightness is also affected by the adjustment of
1. Press the Head-up display adjustments the brightness in the car's other displays.
button in the centre display function view.
The height position can be stored in the memory
2. Adjust the brightness and vertical position of
function of the power* front seat.
the projected image in the driver's field of
vision using the steering wheel's right-hand Calibrate the horizontal position
Rotate anticlockwise
keypad. The head-up display's horizontal position may
need to be calibrated if the windscreen or display Rotate clockwise
unit is replaced. Calibration means that the pro-
jected image is rotated clockwise or anticlock- Confirm
wise.
1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top Cleaning
view. Gently wipe the display's cover glass with a clean
and dry microfibre cloth. If necessary, lightly mois-
2. Select My Car Displays Head-Up ten the microfibre cloth.
Display Options Head-Up Display Never use strong stain removers. A special clean-
Calibration. ing agent available from Volvo dealers can be
3. Calibrate the image's horizontal position with used for more difficult cleaning.
the steering wheel's right keypad.
When replacing the windscreen
Reducing the brightness Cars with head-up display are equipped with a
Increasing the brightness special type of windscreen that meets the
requirements for displaying the projected image.
When replacing the windscreen - contact an Voice recognition8

authorised workshop7. The correct version of the The voice recognition system allows the driver to
windscreen must be fitted in order that the head- use voice recognition to control certain functions
up display's graphics shall be displayed correctly. of the media player, Bluetooth-connected phone,
the climate system and Volvo's navigation sys-
Related information
tem*.
• Function view with buttons for car functions
(p. 47) Voice commands offer convenience and assist
• Settings in the centre display (p. 165) the driver to not be distracted so that he or she
can concentrate on driving, the road and the traf-
fic situation.
• Using the memory function in the power
front seat* (p. 121)
WARNING Voice control system microphone
• Driver display (p. 88)
The driver always holds overall responsibility Voice control is done in dialogue form with the
for driving the vehicle in a safe manner and user saying commands and receiving verbal
complying with all applicable rules of the road. responses from the system. The voice recognition
system uses the same microphone as the
Bluetooth handsfree system and the voice recog-
nition system's replies come via the car's speak-
ers. In some cases, a text message is also shown
in the driver display. Functions are controlled
from the right-hand steering wheel keypad. Set-
tings are made via the centre display.
System updating
The voice recognition system is continuously
improved. Download updates for optimal perform-
ance, see support.volvocars.com.
7 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

8 Applies to certain markets. }}
|| Related information Using voice recognition9 Example of voice recognition control

• Using voice recognition (p. 114) Basic instructions for using voice recognition Press , say “Call [Forename] [Surname]
• Voice recognition control of the phone control. [number category]" - calls the selected contact
(p. 116) from the phone book if the contact has more
Depress the steering wheel than one phone number (e.g. home, mobile,
• Voice recognition control of radio and media button for voice recognition work), e.g.:
(p. 116)
to activate the system and
• Voice recognition control of climate control initiate a dialogue using voice Press , say "Call Robin Smith Mobile".
(p. 117) commands.
Commands/phrases
• Voice recognition and map navigation The following commands are always available for
(p. 118) Remember the following during communication: use:
• Settings for voice recognition (p. 115)
• For a command - speak after the tone in a • "Repeat" - repeats the last voice instruction
normal voice at normal speed. in the ongoing dialogue.
• Do not speak while the system is replying • "Cancel" - discontinue the dialogue.
(the system cannot understand commands
• "Help" - starts a help dialogue. The system
during this time). replies with the commands available in the
• Avoid background noise in the passenger current situation, a prompt or an example.
compartment by having the doors, windows Commands for specific functions are described in
and panoramic roof* closed. the corresponding sections, e.g. Voice recogni-
Voice recognition can be deactivated as follows: tion control of the phone.
• by saying "Cancel".
• with a long press on the voice recognition
button on the steering wheel .
To speed up communication and skip the
prompts from the system, press the steering
wheel button for voice recognition when the
system voice is speaking and say the next com-
mand.
9 Applies to certain markets.
Digits Settings for voice recognition10 Related information

The number commands are stated differently Several settings for the voice recognition system • Voice recognition (p. 113)
depending on the function to be controlled: can be made. • Using voice recognition (p. 114)
• Phone numbers and postcodes must be
1. Press Settings in top view. • Voice recognition control of the phone
spoken individually, number by number, e.g. (p. 116)
zero three one two two four four three 2. Continue to System Voice Control and
(03122443).
• Voice recognition control of radio and media
select settings. (p. 116)
• House numbers can be spoken individually • Repeat Voice Command • Voice recognition control of climate control
or in groups, e.g. two two or twenty-two (22).
For English and Dutch, several groups can • Gender (p. 117)
be said in sequence, e.g. twenty-two twenty- • Speech Rate • Voice recognition and map navigation
two (22 22). For English, double or triple can (p. 118)
Audio settings
be used, e.g. double zero (00). Numbers can
1. Press Settings in top view.
be given within the range 0-2300.
2.
• Frequencies can be spoken as ninety eight Continue to Sound System Volumes
point eight (98.8), a hundred and four point Voice Control and select settings.
two or hundred four point two (104.2). Change language
Voice recognition is not possible for all lan-
Related information
guages. Languages available for voice recogni-
• Voice recognition (p. 113)
tion are marked with an icon in the language list -
• Voice recognition control of the phone .
(p. 116)
Changing the language also affects menu, mes-
sage and help texts.
(p. 116)
• Voice recognition control of climate control
(p. 117) 2. Continue to System System Language
• Voice recognition and map navigation and select language.
(p. 118)
115
Voice recognition control of the this function to work, the car must be con- Voice recognition control of radio
phone11 nected to the Internet. and media13
Call a contact, have messages read aloud or Related information Command for voice recognition control of radio
dictate brief messages with voice control com- and media player.
mands to a Bluetooth connected telephone.
• Using voice recognition (p. 114) Tap on and say one of the following com-
To specify a contact in the phone book, the voice • Settings for voice recognition (p. 115) mands:
recognition command must include contact infor-
mation that is entered in the phone book. If a • Connecting the car (p. 484) • "Media" - starts a dialogue for media and
contact, e.g. Robyn Smith, has several phone radio and shows examples of commands.
numbers then the number category can also be • "Play [artist]" - plays back music by the
stated, e.g. Home or Mobile: "Call Robin selected artist.
Smith Mobile". • "Play [song title]" - plays back the selected
Tap on and say one of the following com- song.
mands: • "Play [song title] from [album]" - plays
back the selected song from the selected
• "Call [contact]" - dials the selected contact
album.
from the phone book.
• "Call [phone number]" - dials the phone
• "Play [TV channel name]" - starts the
selected TV channel.
number.
• "Recent calls" - displays the call list.
• "Play [radio station]" - starts playing back
the selected radio channel.
• "Read message" - message is read out. If
• "Tune to [frequency]" - starts the selected
there are several messages - select which
radio frequency in the current frequency
message should be read out.
band. If no radio source is active, the FM
• "Message to [contact]" users are reques- band is started by default.
ted to say a brief message. The message is
then repeated aloud and the user can
• "Tune to [frequency] [wavelength]" -
starts the selected radio frequency in the
choose to send12 or revise the message. For selected frequency band.

12 Only certain cars can broadcast messages from the car. For compatibility, see support.volvocars.com.
116
• "Radio" - starts FM radio. Voice recognition control of climate • "Air condition on"/"Air condition off" -
• "Radio FM" - starts FM radio. control14 activates/deactivates the air conditioning.
• "Radio AM" - starts AM radio. Voice recognition commands for the climate • "Recirculation on"/"Recirculation off" -
control system to e.g. change temperature, acti- activates/deactivates the air circulation.
• "DAB " - starts DAB radio.
vate a heated seat* or change fan level. • "Turn on defroster "/"Turn off defroster"
• "TV" - starts playback from TV*. - activates/deactivates defrosting of windows
Press and say one of the following com-
• "CD" - starts playback from CD*. and door mirrors.
mands:
• "USB" - starts playback from USB. • "Turn on max defroster"/"Turn max
• "Climate" - starts a dialogue for climate defroster off" - activates/deactivates the
• "iPod" - starts playback from iPod. control and shows examples of commands. max defroster.
• "Bluetooth" - starts playback from a Blue-
• "Set temperature to X degrees" - sets
tooth-connected media source. • "Turn on electric defroster"/"Turn off
the desired temperature. electric defroster" - activates/deactivates
• "Similar music" — plays back music similar
• "Raise temperature"/"Lower the heated windscreen*.
to the music currently playing back from USB
temperature" - raise/lower the temperature • "Turn on rear defroster"/"Turn off rear
devices.
setting one step. defroster" - activates/deactivates the
Related information • "Sync temperature" - synchronises the heated rear window and door mirrors.
• Voice recognition (p. 113) temperature for all climate zones in the car • "Turn steering wheel heat on"/"Turn
• Using voice recognition (p. 114) with the temperature set for the driver's side. steering wheel heat off" - activates/deac-
• Settings for voice recognition (p. 115) • "Air on feet"/"Air on body" - opens the tivates the heated steering wheel*.
desired air flow.
• "Raise steering wheel heat"/"Lower
• "Air on feet off"/"Air on body off" - closes steering wheel heat" - raises/lowers the
the desired air flow. setting for the heated steering wheel* one
• "Set fan to max"/"Turn off fan" - changes step.
the air flow to Max/Off. • "Turn on seat heat"/"Turn off seat heat"
• "Raise fan speed"/"Lower fan speed" - - activates/deactivates the heated seat*.
raises/lowers the fan level one step. • "Raise seat heat"/"Lower seat heat" -
• "Turn on auto" - activates automatic climate raises/lowers the setting for the heated
regulation. seat* one step.
14 Applies to certain markets. }}
|| • "Turn on seat ventilation"/"Turn off seat Voice recognition and map • "Go to [Post code]" - Specifies a post
ventilation" - activates/deactivates the seat navigation15 code as a destination. Example "Drive to 1 2
ventilation*. Several navigation system functions can be acti- 3 4 5".
• "Raise seat ventilation"/"Lower seat vated with voice commands. • "Go to [contact]" - Specifies an address
ventilation" - raises/lowers the setting for from the phone book as a destination. Exam-
the ventilated seat* one step. Tap on and say one of the following comple "Drive to Robyn Smith".
mands:
Related information • "Search [POI category]" - Searches for
• Voice recognition (p. 113) • “Navigation” - Initiates a navigation dialogue adjacent points of interest (POI) within a cer-
and shows examples of commands. tain category (e.g. restaurants)16. To have the
• Using voice recognition (p. 114)
• "Take me home" - Guidance is given to the list sorted along the route - say "Along the
• Settings for voice recognition (p. 115) Home position. route" when the results list is shown.
• Climate control (p. 176) • "Go to [City]" - Specifies a city as a desti- • "Search [POI category] in [City]" -
nation. Example "Drive to London". Searches for points of interest (POI) within a
certain category and city. The results list is
• "Go to [Address]" - Specifies an address sorted according to the city's centre point.
as a destination. An address must contain Example "Search for restaurant in London".
city and street. Example "Drive to 5 King
Street". • "Search [POI name]". Example "Search
Hyde Park".
• "Add intersection" - Starts a dialogue
where two streets must be specified. The • "Change country/Change state17, 18" -
intersection point of the specified streets Changes the search area for navigation.
then becomes the destination. • "Show favourites" - Shows favourited posi-
tions in the driver display.
• "Clear itinerary" - Erases all the stored
intermediate destinations and final destina-
tion in an itinerary.

16 The user has the option of calling the POI or specifying it as a destination.
17 In European countries, “Country” is used instead of “State”.
18 For Brazil and India, the search area is changed via the centre display.
• "Repeat voice guidance" - Repeats the Manual front seat Raise/lower the seat by means of adjusting
last spoken guidance. The car's front seats have different setting the control up/down.
• "Turn off voice guidance" - Switches off options for optimum seating comfort. Change the backrest rake by turning the
voice guidance. control knob.
• "Turn on voice guidance" - Starts the
switched-off voice guidance. WARNING
Adjust the position of the driver's seat before
Related information setting off, never while driving. Make sure that
• Voice recognition (p. 113) the seat is in locked position in order to avoid
• Using voice recognition (p. 114) personal injury in the event of heavy braking
or an accident.
Related information
• Multi-functional front seat* (p. 122)
Raise/lower the front edge of the seat cush- • Activating/deactivating heating of the seats*
ion* by pumping up/down. (p. 197)
Change the length* of the seat cushion by • Seatbelt (p. 58)
pulling the lever up and moving the seat
cushion forward/backward by hand.
Adjust the seat forward/backward by lifting
the handle and adjusting the distance to the
steering wheel and pedals. Check that the
seat is locked after the position has been
adjusted.
Change the lumbar support* by pressing the
button upward/downward/forward/back.
Power front seat* Adjusting the power front seat* Related information
The car's front seats have different setting Set to desired sitting position using the control • Power front seat* (p. 120)
options for optimum seating comfort. The power on the front seat's seating section. • Using the memory function in the power
seat can be moved forward/backward and up/ front seat* (p. 121)
down. The front edge of the seat cushion can be
raised/lowered and the backrest rake can be • Multi-functional front seat* (p. 122)
changed. The lumbar support can be adjusted • Seatbelt (p. 58)
upward/downward/forward/backward.
The power seats have overload protection which

is tripped if a seat is blocked by an object. If this
happens, remove the object and then operate the
seat again.
The seat can be adjusted for a period of time
after unlocking the door without the engine run-
ning. Seat adjustment can always be performed
when the engine is running. Adjustment can also Change the lumbar support by pressing the
be performed for a period of time after the button upward/downward/forward/back.
engine has been switched off. Raise/lower the seat cushion front edge by
Related information adjusting the control up/down.
• Multi-functional front seat* (p. 122) Raise/lower the seat by means of adjusting
the control up/down.
Move the seat forward/backward by adjust-
• Using the memory function in the power
ing the control forward/backward.
Change the backrest rake by adjusting the
control forward/backward.
• Activating/deactivating heating of the seats* Only one movement (forward/back/up/down)
(p. 197) can be made at a time.
The backrests of the front seats cannot be low-
ered fully forward.
Using the memory function in the 3. Within three seconds, depress the 1 or 2 WARNING
power front seat* button.
The memory function stores settings for the seat, > When the position has been stored in the • Because the driver's seat can be adjusted
with the ignition off, children should never
door mirrors, and head-up display*. selected memory button an acoustic sig-
be left unattended in the vehicle.
nal sounds and the light indicator in the M
It is possible to store two different settings with button extinguishes. • Movement of the seat can be STOPPED
the memory function. The memory function key- at any time by pressing any button on the
pad is located either on one front door or both*. If none of the memory buttons is depressed power seat control panel.
within three seconds then the M button extin-
guishes and no storing takes place. • Do not adjust the seat while driving.
The seat must be adjusted again before a new • Make sure there is nothing under the
seats when they are being adjusted.
memory can be set.
Using a stored setting Related information

A stored setting can be used with the front door • Power front seat* (p. 120)
either open or closed:
Open front door
– Depress one of the memory buttons 1 or 2
with a short press. Seat, door mirrors and
head-up display move and then stop at the
positions stored in the selected memory but-
Button M for storing settings.
ton.
Memory button Closed front door
– Hold one of the memory buttons 1 or 2
Memory button depressed until seat, door mirrors and head-
up display stop in the positions that are
Store setting stored in the selected memory button.
1. Adjust seat, door mirrors and head-up display
to the desired position. If the memory button is released, the movement
of the seat, door mirrors and head-up display will
2. Push the M button and release. The light be stopped.
indicator in the button illuminates.
Multi-functional front seat* the screen. When it is possible to show setting Adjusting functions in the multi-
Enhance the seating comfort using the multi- options for both the front seats, the driver's set- functional front seat*
function control. ting options are shown in the upper half and the Both the multi-function control on the seat and
passenger's in the lower half. the centre display can be used in order to
To stop showing the seat settings view in the change the settings. The range of settings is
centre display, press the home button, which is shown in the centre display*.
located under the centre display.
Related information
• Adjusting functions in the multi-functional
• Activating/deactivating heating of the seats*
(p. 197)
Multi-function control, located on the side of the seat's

seating section.
The multi-function control can, in some variants,
be used to adjust the lumbar support*, side sup- Multi-function control, located on the side of the seat's
seating section.
port*, cushion length and massage settings*. Set-
tings made with the multi-function control are To activate the multi-function control, turn the
shown in the centre display*. Certain function control upwards/downward.
selections can also be made directly in the centre
display. Adjusting massage settings* in the
front seat
Centre display The front seat has massage in the backrest. The
The driver and the passenger seat settings that massage is performed by air cushions that can
are made with the multi-function control are massage with different settings.
shown in the centre display. If the settings for
only one of the front seats are shown in the cen-
tre display, the settings are positioned centred in
1. Activate the multi-function control by turning Restarting massage Adjusting the lumbar support* in the
the control upward/downward. The seat set- The massage function is deactivated automati- front seat
tings view will be shown on the centre dis- cally after 20 minutes. The function is reactivated The lumbar support can be adjusted upward/
play. manually. downward/forward/backward.
2. Select Massage in the seat settings view. – Tap on Restart, which is shown in the centre To adjust the lumbar support:
3. To choose between the different massage display, to restart the selected massage pro-
1. Activate the multi-function control by turning
functions, select either directly in the touch gram.
the control upward/downward. The seat set-
screen or by moving the cursor up/down > The massage program restarts. If no tings view will be shown on the centre dis-
using the multi-function control's upper/ action is taken, the message remains play.
lower button. Change the setting in the shown in the top view.
selected function by selecting directly in the 2. Select Lumbar in the seat settings view.
It is not possible to use the massage function
touch screen or by pressing the arrows, or by when the engine is switched off. • Press the seat button up/down to move
using the multi-function control's front/rear the lumbar support up/down.
button. Adjusting side support* in the front seat
• Press the front seat button in order to
Settings for massage
backrests increase the lumbar support.
The sides of the backrest can be adjusted to pro-
The following setting options are available for • Press the rear seat button in order to
vide side support.
massage: decrease the lumbar support.
To adjust the side support:
• On/Off: Select On/Off in order to switch Extending the seat cushion in the front
on/off the massage function. 1. Activate the multi-function control by turning
the control upward/downward. The seat set- seat
• Programs 1-5: There are 5 preset massage Seat cushion length can be adjusted by using the
programs. Select between Swell, Tread, tings view will be shown on the centre dis-
play. multi-function control on the seat.
Advanced, Lumbar and Shoulder.
2. Select Side bolsters in the seat settings 1. Activate the multi-function control by turning
• Intensity: Select between Low, Normal and the control upward/downward. The seat set-
High. view.
tings view will be shown on the centre dis-
• Speed: Select between Slow, Normal and • Press the front seat button in order to play.
Fast. increase the side support.
• Press the rear seat button in order to
reduce the side support.
}}
|| 2. Select Cushion extension in the seat set- Adjusting the passenger seat from
tings view. the driver's seat*
• Press the front seat button in order to The front passenger seat can be adjusted from
extend the seat cushion. the driver's seat.
• Press the rear seat button in order to Activating the function
retract the seat cushion. The function can be activated in two ways via the
centre display:
Related information
• Multi-functional front seat* (p. 122) Via the function view
• Managing messages saved from the driver Press the Adjust passenger
display and centre display (p. 108) seat button to activate.
Move the passenger seat forward/backward

by adjusting the control forward/backward.
Change the passenger seat's backrest rake
Via settings by adjusting the control forward/backward.
1. Press Settings in the top view. Related information
2. Press My Car Seats. • Power front seat* (p. 120)
3. Select Adjust Passenger Seat From • Adjusting the power front seat* (p. 120)
Driver Position to activate. • Seatbelt (p. 58)
Adjust passenger seat

From activation of the function, the driver must
adjust the passenger seat within 10 seconds. If
no adjustment is made within this time the func-
tion is deactivated.
The driver adjusts the passenger seat using the
controls on the driver's seat:
Adjusting the head restraints in the Electrical lowering of the rear seat's
rear seat outer head restraints*
Adjust the centre seat head restraint according
to the height of the passenger. Fold down the
outer seat head restraints to improve rearward
visibility.
Adjusting the head restraint, centre

seat
To lower the head restraint, the button (see illus-

tration) must be depressed while the restraint is
carefully moved down. The outer head restraints can be lowered in two
ways via the centre display:
WARNING
The centre seat head restraint must be in its Via the function view
lowest position when the centre seat is not Press the Headrest fold but-
used. When the centre seat is used, the head ton to activate/deactivate low-
restraint must be correctly adjusted to the ering.
height of the passenger so that it covers the
The centre seat's head restraint must be
whole of the back of the head if possible.
adjusted according to the passenger's height so
that, if possible, the whole of the back of the
head is covered. Slide it up manually as required.
}}
|| Via settings Lowering the backrests in the rear

The car's electrical system must be in the ignition seat
position II. The rear seat's backrest is divided into two
1. Press Settings in the top view. parts. The two parts can be lowered forward
individually.
2. Press My Car Seats.
3. Select Fold Headrest On Second Row WARNING
Seats to lower the rear outer head • Adjust the seat and fix it before driving
restraints. away. Take care when adjusting the seat.
Uncontrolled or careless adjustment can
WARNING lead to trapping injuries.
Do not lower the outer head restraints if there • When loading long objects, they must
are passengers in any of the outer rear seats. always be strapped in securely to avoid
injury and damage during sudden braking.
Move the head restraint back manually until a • Always switch off the engine and apply
click is heard. the parking brake when loading and
unloading the car.
WARNING • Set the gear selector in P to prevent it
The head restraint must be in locked position from being moved by mistake.
after being folded up.
IMPORTANT
Manual lowering of the outer head
There must be no objects on the rear seat
restraints, rear seat when the backrest is to be folded down. The
For cars with electric rear seat folding*, the outer Related information seat belts must not be connected either. Oth-
head restraints are folded manually with the con-
• Lowering the backrests in the rear seat erwise there is a risk of damaging the rear
trol on the upper side of the seat; see figure . (p. 126) seat upholstery.
For cars without electric folding, fold down the
outer head restraints with the inner control on the
upper side of the seat; see figure .
IMPORTANT cargo area. The backrests can also be lowered To lower the backrest manually:
manually.
The armrest* for the centre seat must be
raised before lowering the seat.
WARNING
If the car has private locking, the tailgate must Pay attention that people are not at risk of
be closed before lowering the seat. being trapped during the automatic folding of
the rear seat. Since this takes place automati-
cally on the press of a button, no one must be
NOTE on or too close to the rear seat.
The front seats may need to be pushed for-
wards, and/or the backrests adjusted To facilitate folding of the rear seat, the car must
upwards, in order that the rear backrests can be stationary and the tailgate open.
be fully folded forward.
For electronically controlled folding of backrests:
1. Ensure that there are no occupants or 1. Lower the centre head restraint manually .
Lowering the backrest
objects in the rear seat.
Car with electronic folding 2. Pull the handles located in the car's left and
2. Lower the centre seat's head restraint man- right-hand rear seat backrests forward .
ually.
3. The backrest disengages from the lock and
3. Hold the button for folding depressed. The is automatically lowered to the horizontal
buttons are marked L and R for left and position.
right-hand backrest sections respectively.
4. The backrests are lowered automatically to
horizontal position. The head restraints are
also lowered automatically.
If the car is equipped with electronic folding of

the rear seat* there are buttons located in the
}}
|| Car without electronic folding If the right-hand section is being lowered - WARNING
The rear seat consists of two parts: release and adjust the centre backrest head
restraint. Check that the backrests and head restraints
• The right-hand seat and centre seat are in the rear seat are locked properly after
folded as one unit. Pull up the backrest's locking handle being folded up.
• The left-hand seat is folded separately. while folding the backrest forward at the The head restraints of the outer seats must
same time. The locking handle for the head always be raised when there are passengers
restraints is pulled up automatically when the on any of the rear seats.
backrest is folded. A red indicator on the lock
catch shows that the backrest is no Raising the backrest
longer locked in place. Raising the backrest to upright position is carried
out manually:
NOTE 1. Move the backrest up/down manually.
When the backrests have been lowered, the 2. Press the backrest until the catch engages.
head restraints may need to be moved for-
ward slightly so as not to make contact with 3. The head restraint is raised manually.
the seat cushion. 4. If necessary, raise the centre seat's head
restraint.
Raising takes place in reverse order.
Related information
• Adjusting the head restraints in the rear seat
WARNING (p. 125)
When the backrest has been raised, the red
indicator should no longer be showing. If it is
still showing then the backrest is not locked
in place.
128
Steering wheel Horn • Head-up display* (p. 110)

The steering wheel houses the horn and con- • Using the application menu in the driver dis-
trols for e.g. the driver support systems and play (p. 104)
voice recognition.
• Phone (p. 477)
The horn is located in the centre of the steering

wheel.
Related information
Keypads and paddles* in the steering wheel.
• Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 130)
Controls for driver support systems19.
• Activating/deactivating heating of steering
Paddle shifter* for manual gear changing in wheel* (p. 199)
an automatic gearbox. • Speed limiter* (p. 275)
Controls for voice recognition, head-up dis- • Cruise control (p. 282)
play settings, and menu, message and phone
handling.
• Adaptive cruise control* (p. 290)
• Distance Warning* (p. 287)
• Changing gear with steering wheel paddles*
(p. 413)
19 Speed Limiter*, Cruise Control, Adaptive Cruise Control*, Distance Warning* and Pilot Assist*.
Adjusting the steering wheel regulated according to the car's speed in order to Without knee airbag
The steering wheel can be adjusted in different give the driver enhanced road responsiveness.
positions. With knee airbag
Adjusting the steering wheel.

1. Pull the lever backwards to release the steer-
Adjusting the steering wheel. ing wheel.
The steering wheel can be adjusted for height and for
depth. 1. Push the lever forwards to release the steer- 2. Adjust the steering wheel to the position that
Steering wheel adjustment can be made in differ- ing wheel. suits you.
ent ways depending on whether or not the car is 2. Adjust the steering wheel to the position that 3. Push the lever forwards to secure the steer-
equipped with knee airbag20. suits you. ing wheel. If the lever is stiff, press the steer-
ing wheel lightly at the same time as you
3. Pull the lever back to fix the steering wheel
WARNING move the lever back.
in place. If the lever is stiff, press the steering
Adjust the steering wheel and fix it before wheel lightly at the same time as you move Related information
driving away. The steering wheel must never the lever back.
be adjusted while driving. • Steering wheel (p. 129)
• Speed-dependent steering force (p. 270)
With speed related power steering the level of
steering force can be adjusted. Steering force is
20 The car is only equipped with knee airbag in certain markets.
130
Lighting control Position Specification Position Specification

The different lighting controls are used to control
both exterior and interior lighting. The left-hand Daytime running lights. Daytime running lights and position
stalk switch activates and adjusts the exterior lamps.
Main beam flash can be used.
lighting. Use the thumbwheel in the instrument Dipped beam and position lamps in
panel to adjust headlamp levelling21 and the Daytime running lights and position weak daylight or darkness, or when
lamps.
brightness of the interior lighting. the front fog lamp* and/or rear fog
Position lamps when the car is lamp are activated.
Exterior lighting parkedA. The Active main beam function can
Main beam flash can be used. be activated.
Dipped beam and position lamps. Main beam can be activated when
dipped beam is switched on.
Main beam can be activated.
Active main beam on/off.
A Also at stationary when the car is running, provided that the

rotating ring is moved to this position from another position.
Volvo recommends that mode is used

when the vehicle is driven.
Rotating ring in the left-hand stalk switch.
When the car's electrical system is in ignition WARNING
position II or when the car is running, the follow- The car's audio system is not able to deter-
ing functions are available in the rotating ring's mine when daylight is too weak or sufficiently
different positions. strong, e.g. in fog and rain, in all situations.
The driver is always responsible for ensuring
that the car is driven with a beam pattern suit-
able for the traffic situation and in accordance
with applicable traffic regulations.
21 Applies to vehicles with halogen headlamps. }}
|| Thumbwheel in the instrument panel height of the beam. Lower the beam if the car is Headlamp levelling
heavily laden. Headlamp levelling23 is adjusted using one of
For different load cases and settings, see the the thumbwheels in the instrument panel.
section "Headlamp levelling".
1. Leave the engine running, or have the car's
Related information electrical system in ignition position I.
• Passenger compartment lighting (p. 141) 2. Roll the thumbwheel up/down to raise/lower
• Activating/deactivating main beam (p. 135) beam alignment.
• Ignition positions (p. 403) The position in which the thumbwheel should be
• Position lamps (p. 133) set for a number of load cases is shown below.
• Headlamp levelling (p. 132)
Thumbwheel for adjusting interior brightness
Thumbwheel for headlamp levelling
A car with LED22 headlamps* has automatic

headlamp levelling and therefore does not have
the thumbwheel for headlamp levelling.
Adjusting the interior brightness
The lamps inside the car come on differently
depending on the ignition position used.
Examples of thumbwheel position.
The thumbwheel adjusts the brightness of display
lighting, control lighting, ambient light and ambi- Thumbwheel in position 0
ence light*.
Thumbwheel in position 1
Headlamp levelling
The load in the car changes the vertical align-
ment of the headlamp beam, which could dazzle
oncoming motorists. Avoid this by adjusting the
22 LED (Light Emitting Diode)
Load case Thumb- Position lamps running lights are switched on. The driver should
wheel The position lamps are switched on with the turn to a position other than .
position rotating ring on the stalk switch.
Related information
Only driver. 0 • Lighting control (p. 131)
Driver and passenger in the front 0 • Ignition positions (p. 403)

passenger seat.
Driver and passenger in the front 1
passenger seat.
Three passengers in the rear
seat.
Driver and passenger in the front 1
passenger seat.
Three passengers in the rear Stalk switch rotating ring in position lamps position.
seat.
Turn the rotating ring to the position - the
220 kg load in the cargo area.
position lamps are switched on (number plate
Driver and maximum load in the 2 lighting is switched on at the same time).
cargo area. If the tailgate is opened when it is dark outside,
the rear position lamps come on (if not already
Related information switched on) to warn road users approaching
• Lighting control (p. 131) from behind. This takes place irrespective of the
position of the rotating ring or the ignition posi-
tion of the car's electrical system.
When driving for more than 30 seconds at max.
10 km/h (approx. 6 mph), or if the speed
exceeds 10 km/h (approx. 6 mph), the daytime
23 Applies to vehicles with halogen headlamps.
133
Daytime running lights The car automatically changes lighting from day- Dipped beam
The car has sensors that detect the light condi- time running light to dipped beam in weak day- When driving with the stalk switch's rotating ring
tions in the surroundings. The daytime running light or darkness. Changing to dipped beam also
in the position, dipped beam is activated
lights are switched on when the rotating ring on takes place if the front fog lamp* and/or rear fog
automatically in weak daylight or darkness.
lamp are activated.
the stalk switch is in position , or
as well as when the car's electrical system At stationary when the car is running, the posi-
is in ignition position II or when the car is run- tion lamps are switched on instead of other light-
ning. In position , the headlamps change ing, if the rotating ring is moved to the position
automatically to dipped beam in weak daylight or for position lamps, , from another position.
darkness.
WARNING
Daytime running lights during the day.
DRL This system help to save energy - it cannot
determine in all situations when daylight is too
weak or sufficiently strong, e.g. in mist and
rain.
The driver is always responsible for ensuring
that the car is driven with the correct beam Stalk switch rotating ring in AUTO position.
pattern for the traffic situation and in accord-
ance with applicable traffic regulations. With the stalk switch's rotating ring in the
position, dipped beam is activated automatically
Related information in weak daylight or darkness, when the car's
electrical system is in ignition position II or when
the car is running.
• Dipped beam (p. 134)
With the stalk switch's rotating ring in
• Ignition positions (p. 403)
Stalk switch rotating ring in AUTO position. position, dipped beam is also activated automati-
cally if:
If the stalk switch rotating ring is in the
position, the daytime running lights (DRL24) are
• the front fog lamps* are activated
switched on when the car is driven in daylight. • the rear fog lamp is activated
• the front and rear fog lamps are activated
24 Daytime Running Lights
Dipped beam is always switched on when the Activating/deactivating main beam Main beam
rotating ring on the stalk switch is in position Main beam is activated with the stalk switch. Main beam can be activated when the steering
when the car's electrical system is in igni- wheel stalk switch's rotating ring is in position
Active main beam is activated with the rotating
tion position II or when the car is running. 25 or . Activate main beam by moving
ring on the stalk switch.
Tunnel detection the stalk switch forwards. Deactivate by moving
the stalk switch backwards.
The car detects when it is driven into a tunnel
and switches from daytime running lights to When main beam has been activated the
dipped beam. symbol illuminates in the driver display.
Note that the rotating ring in the left-hand stalk
Active main beam
switch must be in mode for tunnel detec- Active main beam is a function which uses a
tion to work. camera sensor at the top edge of the windscreen
to detect the headlamp beams from oncoming
Related information
traffic or the rear lights of vehicles in front, and
• Daytime running lights (p. 134)
then switches from main beam to dipped beam.
• Lighting control (p. 131) The function can also take streetlights into
• Ignition positions (p. 403) account.
Steering wheel stalk switch with rotating ring.
Main beam is reactivated when the camera sen-
Position for main beam flash sor no longer sees any oncoming vehicles or
Position for main beam vehicles ahead.
Car with halogen headlamps
Main beam flash The lighting returns to main beam about a sec-
Move the stalk switch backwards slightly to main ond after the camera sensor no longer detects
beam flash position. Main beam comes on until the headlamp beams from oncoming traffic or the
the stalk switch is released. rear lights from vehicles in front.
25 When dipped beam is activated. }}
135
|| Car with LED26 headlamps* The lighting returns to full main beam about a When main beam is activated, the symbol shines
If the active main beam has the on/off functional- second after the camera sensor no longer blue. This also applies for LED headlamps if the
ity27 then the lighting returns to main beam about detects the headlamp beams from oncoming main beam is partially dimmed, i.e. if the light
a second after the camera sensor no longer traffic or the rear lights from vehicles in front. beam shines with slightly more than dipped
detects the headlamp beams from oncoming Activate/deactivate beam.
traffic or the rear lights from vehicles in front. The function can start while driving in the dark
If the active main beam has adaptive functional- when the car's speed is approx. 20 km/h (approx.
12 mph) or higher.
ity27 then, unlike what happens during conven-
tional dimming, the light beam continues to illu- Activate/deactivate active main beam by turning
minate with main beam on both sides of oncom- the stalk switch's rotating ring to position
ing traffic or vehicles ahead - only the part of the and release. If active main beam is deactivated
light beam that points directly to the vehicle is while main beam is on, the lighting is immediately
dimmed. reset to dipped beam.
Adaptive functionality: Dipped beam directly towards

oncoming vehicle, but continued main beam on both When active main beam is activated, the symbol
sides of the vehicle. illuminates with a white glow in the driver
display.

27 Depending on the car's equipment level.
Manual operation the message goes out and the symbol illu- IMPORTANT
minates.
Examples of when manual switching between
NOTE main and dipped beam may be required:
Keep the windscreen surface in front of the WARNING
camera sensor free from ice, snow, mist and Active main beam is an aid for using the opti-
• In heavy rain or dense fog
dirt. mum beam pattern when conditions are • In freezing rain
favourable. • In snow flurries or slush
Do not stick or attach anything to the wind-
screen in front of the camera sensor as this The driver always bears responsibility for man- • In moonlight
may reduce effectiveness or cause one or ually switching between main and dipped
beam when traffic situations or weather con- • When driving in poorly lit built-up areas
more of the systems dependent on the cam- ditions so require.
era to stop working. • When the traffic ahead has weak lighting
• If there are pedestrians on or beside the
road
If this symbol is shown in the driver dis-
play, together with the message Active • If there are highly reflective objects such
High Beam Temporarily as signs in the vicinity of the road
unavailable, then switching between • When the lighting from oncoming traffic
main and dipped beam must be performed man- is obscured by e.g. a crash barrier
ually. The rotating ring on the stalk switch can still
• When there is traffic on connecting roads
be in the position. The symbol extin-
guishes when these message are shown. • On the brow of a hill or in a hollow
• In sharp bends.
The same applies if this symbol is
shown together with the message
Windscreen sensor Sensor Read more about the camera sensor's limitations
blocked, see Owner's manual. in the section "Limitations for City Safety".
Active main beam may be temporarily unavailable Related information

e.g. in situations with dense fog or heavy rain. • Lighting control (p. 131)
When active main beam becomes available again, • Limitations of City Safety (p. 346)
or the windscreen sensors are no longer blocked,
137
Active bending lights* The function is only active in weak daylight or Front fog lamps/cornering lights*
Active bending lights are designed to provide darkness and only when the car is moving and The front fog lamps have cornering lights that
maximum illumination in bends and junctions. dipped beam is switched on. shine diagonally to the side.
Cars with LED28 headlamps* can have active Deactivating/activating the function
bending lights, depending on the car's equip- The function is in activated mode when the car is
ment level. delivered from the factory and can be deacti-
vated/activated via the centre display in two
ways:
Via the function view
Press the Active Bending
Lights button.
Button for front fog lamps.

Via settings
1. Press Settings in the top view. The front fog lamps can only be switched on
when ignition position II is active or the car is
Headlamp pattern with function deactivated (left) and 2. Press My Car Lights and Lighting running and the rotating ring on the stalk switch
activated (right) respectively. Exterior Lights. is in position , or .
Active bending lights follow steering wheel move- 3. Deselect/select Active Bending Lights. Press the on/off button. The symbol in the
ments to provide maximum illumination in bends
driver display illuminates when the front fog
and junctions and can thereby increase safety. Related information
lamps are switched on.
The function is activated automatically when the • Settings in the centre display (p. 165)
The front fog lamps switch off automatically when
car is started. In the event of a fault in the func- • Front fog lamps/cornering lights* (p. 138)
the start knob it turned clockwise to switch off
tion, the symbol illuminates in the driver the car or the stalk switch rotating ring is set to
display at the same time as the driver display
the position.
shows an explanatory text.
NOTE Rear fog lamp Press the on/off button. The symbol in the
The rear fog lamp is considerably stronger than driver display illuminates when the rear fog lamp
Regulations on the use of fog lamps vary
the normal rear lights and should only be used in is switched on.
from country to country.
reduced visibility due to fog, snow, smoke or The rear fog lamp is switched off automatically
dust so that other road users have an early warn- when:
Cornering lights ing of a vehicle ahead.
The front fog lamps include the cornering lights • the start knob is turned clockwise to switch
function, which temporarily illuminates the area off the car or the stalk switch rotating ring is
diagonally in front of the car in the direction the set to the position
steering wheel is turned on a sharp bend, or in
the direction shown by the direction indicators.
• the stalk switch's rotating ring is in position
and the front fog lamps are switched
The function is activated in weak daylight or dark- off.
ness when the stalk switch's rotating ring is in
the or position and the speed of the NOTE
car is lower than approx. 30 km/h (approx.
20 mph). Regulations on the use of rear fog lamps vary
from country to country.
In addition, both cornering lights are switched on
as a supplement to the reversing lamp during
reversing. Button for rear fog lamp. Related information
The rear fog lamp consists of a lamp on the left-
The function is activated when the car is supplied
from the factory and can be deactivated/acti- hand side on a left-hand drive car, or on the right- • Front fog lamps/cornering lights* (p. 138)
vated via the centre display. hand side on a right-hand drive car. • Ignition positions (p. 403)
The rear fog lamp can only be switched on when:
Related information
• Lighting control (p. 131) • ignition position II is active or the car is run-
ning and the stalk switch's rotating ring is in
• Rear fog lamp (p. 139)
position or
• Active bending lights* (p. 138)
• the stalk switch's rotating ring is in position
and the front fog lamps are switched
on.
Brake lights Hazard warning flashers NOTE

The brake light automatically comes on during Hazard warning flashers warn other road users
Regulations for the use of hazard warning
braking. by means of all the car's direction indicators
flashers may vary between countries.
being activated simultaneously. The function can
The brake light is switched on when the brake be used to warn in the event of traffic hazards.
pedal is depressed. In addition, it is switched on Related information
when one of driver support systems Adaptive • Using direction indicators (p. 141)
cruise control*, City Safety or Rear Collision
Warning brakes the car. • Emergency brake lights (p. 427)
Related information
• Emergency brake lights (p. 427)
• City Safety (p. 336)
• Rear Collision Warning (p. 349)
Button for hazard warning flashers.

Press the button to activate the hazard warning
flashers.
The hazard warning flashers are automatically
activated when the car brakes so powerfully that
the emergency brake lights are activated and the
speed is low. The hazard warning flashers start to
flash after the emergency brake lights have stop-
ped flashing and are then deactivated automati-
cally when the car drives away again or are deac-
tivated if the button is depressed.
Using direction indicators NOTE Passenger compartment lighting

The car's direction indicators are operated with The passenger compartment lighting is acti-
the left-hand stalk switch. The direction indicator • This automatic flashing sequence can be
vated/deactivated with the buttons in the over-
stopped by moving the stalk switch
lamps flash three times or continuously, depend- head controls above the front seats and the rear
immediately in the opposite direction.
ing on how far up or down the stalk switch is seat/rear seats*.
moved. • If the symbol for direction indicators in
the driver display flashes more quickly All lighting in the passenger compartment can be
than normal - see the message in the switched on and off manually within 7 minutes
driver display. from when:
• the car has been switched off and its electri-
Continuous flash sequence cal system is in ignition position 0
Move the stalk switch up or down to its end • the car has been unlocked but it has not
position. been started.
The stalk switch remains in its position and is
moved back manually, or automatically by the Front lighting
steering wheel movement.
Related information
Direction indicators.
• Hazard warning flashers (p. 140)
Short flash sequence
Move the stalk switch up or down to the first
position and release. The direction indicator
lamps flash three times. The function can be
activated/deactivated via the centre display.
Controls in roof console for the front reading lamps and

passenger compartment lighting.
Reading lamp, left-hand side
Passenger compartment lighting

}}
|| Auto function for passenger compartment • remains on for 2 minutes if one of the side
lighting doors is open.
Reading lamp, right-hand side
Rear lighting
Front reading lamps The rear area of the car has reading lighting,
The reading lamps on the right and left-hand which is also used as passenger compartment
sides can be turned on and off by briefly pressing lighting.
the buttons in the roof console. Brightness is The reading lamps are located in the interior roof.
adjusted by holding the button pressed in.
Passenger compartment lighting
The floor lighting and interior roof lighting are
switched on or off with a short press on the but-
ton in the roof console. Reading lamp above the rear seat in cars with panorama
roof*.
Auto function for passenger compartment
The reading lamps are switched on or off by
lighting
briefly pressing the button on the lamp. Bright-
The automatic function is activated by a short
ness is adjusted by holding the button pressed in.
press on the AUTO button in the roof console.
The light indicator in the button illuminates when Glovebox lighting
the automatic function is activated. Press the Glovebox lighting is switched on and off respec-
AUTO button to switch the passenger compart- tively when the lid is opened or closed.
ment lighting on and off in accordance with the Reading lamps above the rear seat29.
following. Vanity mirror lighting*
The lighting for the vanity mirror in the sun visor
Passenger compartment lighting:
is switched on and off respectively when the
• illuminates when the car is unlocked and cover is opened or closed.
when it is switched off
Ground lighting*
• extinguishes when the car is started and
when it is locked The ground lighting is switched on and off when
the corresponding door is opened or closed.
• comes on and goes off, respectively, when a
side door is opened or closed
29 In cars with panorama roof* there are two lamp units, one on each side of the roof.
Lighting in the cargo area – Turn the thumbwheel to adjust the intensity. 3. Choose between By Temperature and By
The lighting in the cargo area is switched on and Colour in order to change the brightness
off respectively when the tailgate is opened or Ambience lights* and colour of the light.
closed. The car is equipped with a number of LEDs that
make it possible to change the colour of the light. With the By Temperature option, the
Ambient light These lights are switched on when the car is run- brightness of the light changes according to
1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre ning. the set passenger compartment temperature.
display. The ambience lights can be changed via the cen- With the By Colour option, the Theme
2. tre display: Colours subcategory can be used to adjust
Press My Car Lights and Lighting
further.
Interior Lighting. Changing the brightness of the lights
3. Choose between the following settings: 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
• Under Ambient Light Intensity, select
from Off, Low and High. 2. Press My Car Lights and Lighting
• Under Ambient Light Level, select from Interior Lighting Interior Mood Lighting.
Reduced and Full. 3. Under Interior Mood Light Intensity, select
from Off, Low and High.
Changing the colour of the light
display.
2. Press My Car Lights and Lighting
Interior Lighting Interior Mood Lighting. Controls located next to the steering wheel.
The intensity of the ambience light can be
adjusted using the controls in the instrument
panel:
– Turn the thumbwheel to adjust the intensity.
Controls located next to the steering wheel.
The intensity of the ambient light can be adjusted
using the control in the instrument panel:
}}
|| Lighting in storage compartments in Home safe light duration Approach light duration
doors Some of the exterior lighting can be kept Approach lighting is switched on when the car is
The lighting in storage compartments in doors is switched on to work as home safe lighting after unlocked and is used to switch on the car's
switched on when the car is running. The bright- the car has been locked. lighting at a distance.
ness can be finely adjusted using the control in
the instrument panel. To activate the function: When the function is activated with the remote
control key during unlocking, the position lamps,
1. Switch off the car.
Lighting in front cup holders in tunnel lighting in outer handles*, number plate lighting,
console 2. Move the left-hand stalk switch forward interior roof lighting and floor lighting will switch
The lighting in the front cup holders is switched toward the instrument panel and release. on. If a door is opened within the activation time,
on when the car is unlocked and is switched off 3. Get out of the car and lock the door. the time for the lighting in the outside handles*
when the car is locked. The brightness can be and the interior lighting will be extended.
finely adjusted using the control in the instrument When the function is activated, dipped beam,
position lamps, lighting in the outside handles* The function can be deactivated/activated via the
panel. centre display.
and number plate lighting are switched on.
Related information The length of time that home safe lighting Related information
• Lighting control (p. 131) remains on can be set via the centre display. • Home safe light duration (p. 144)
• Remote control key (p. 230)
Related information
• Approach light duration (p. 144) • Settings in the centre display (p. 165)
Using windscreen wipers Intermittent wiping Activating/deactivating the rain

The windscreen wiper cleans the windscreen. Set the number of sweeps per time unit sensor
Different settings for the windscreen wiper are with the thumbwheel when intermittent The rain sensor automatically starts the wind-
made with the right-hand steering wheel stalk wiping is selected. screen wipers based on how much water it
switch. detects on the windscreen. Rain sensor sensitiv-
Continuous wiping ity can be adjusted with the thumbwheel on the
Raise the stalk switch for the wipers to
right-hand stalk switch.
sweep at normal speed.
Raise the stalk switch further for the wip-
ers to sweep at high speed.
IMPORTANT
Before activating the wipers - ensure that the
wiper blades are not frozen in, and that any
snow or ice on the windscreen and rear win-
dow is scraped away.
Right-hand stalk switch.

IMPORTANT
Thumbwheel, used to set rain sensor* sensi-
tivity and wiper swipe frequency. Use plenty of washer fluid when the wipers Right-hand stalk switch.
are cleaning the windscreen. The windscreen Rain sensor button
Single sweep must be wet when the windscreen wipers are
Lower the stalk switch and release to operating. Thumbwheel sensitivity/frequency
make one sweep.
When the rain sensor is activated, the rain sensor
Windscreen wipers off Related information symbol is shown in the driver display.
Move the stalk switch to position 0 to • Activating/deactivating the rain sensor
switch off the windscreen wipers. (p. 145) Activating the rain sensor
• Windscreen and headlamp washers (p. 146) When activating the rain sensor, the car must be
running or the electrical system in ignition posi-
• Rear window wiper and washer (p. 147)
tion I or II while the windscreen wiper stalk
• Wiper blades in service position (p. 547)
}}
|| switch must be in position 0 or in the position for Activating/deactivating the memory Windscreen and headlamp washers
a single sweep. function Windscreen and headlamp washers clean the
Activate the rain sensor by pressing the rain sen- The memory function for the rain sensor can be windscreen and headlamps. Washing/wiping is
activated in such a way that the rain sensor but- started by means of the right-hand stalk switch.
sor button .
ton does not need to be depressed each time the
Press the stalk switch down for the wipers to car is started: Starting windscreen and headlamp
make an extra sweep. washers
Turn the thumbwheel upward for higher sensitiv- display.
ity and downward for lower sensitivity. An extra
2. Press My Car Wipers.
sweep is made when the thumbwheel is turned
upward. 3. Select Rain Sensor Memory to activate/
deactivate the memory function.
Deactivating the rain sensor
Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the rain Related information
sensor button or moving the stalk switch • Using windscreen wipers (p. 145)
up to another wiper program.
• Wiper blades in service position (p. 547)
The rain sensor is deactivated automatically in • Rear window wiper and washer (p. 147)
ignition position 0 or when the engine is
switched off. Washing function, right-hand stalk switch.
The rain sensor is deactivated automatically when – Move the right-hand stalk switch toward the
wiper blades are set in service position. The rain steering wheel to start the windscreen and
sensor is reactivated when service position has headlamp washers.
been deactivated.
> The windscreen wipers will make several
more sweeps once the stalk switch has
IMPORTANT been released.
The windscreen wipers could start and be
damaged in an automatic car wash. Deacti- IMPORTANT
vate the rain sensor while the car is running
Avoid activating the washer system when it is
or when the car's electrical system is in igni-
frozen or the washer reservoir is empty, other-
tion position I or II. The symbol in the driver
wise there is a risk of damaging the pump.
display extinguishes.
146
Heated washer nozzles* Rear window wiper and washer – Move the right-hand steering wheel stalk
The washer nozzles are heated automatically in Rear window wiper and washer clean the rear switch forward to start rear window washing
cold weather to prevent the washer fluid from window. Washing/wiping is started and settings and wiping.
freezing. are changed by means of the right-hand steering
Activating/deactivating wiping when
wheel stalk switch.
Headlamp washing* reversing
To save fluid, the headlamps are washed auto- 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre
NOTE
matically at a defined interval when the head- display.
lamps are switched on. The rear window wiper is equipped with over-
heating protection which means that the 2. Press My Car Wipers.
Reduced washing motor is switched off if it overheats. The rear 3. Select Auto Rear Wiper to activate/deacti-
If only approx. 1 litre of washer fluid remains in window wiper works again after a cooling- vate wiping when reversing.
the reservoir and the message Washer fluid down period.
Engaging reverse gear while the windscreen wip-
Level low, refill, together with the symbol,
ers are on initiates rear window wiping. The func-
is shown in the driver display, then the supply of Using the rear window wiper and tion stops when reverse gear is disengaged.
washer fluid to the headlamps is switched off. washer
This is in order to prioritise cleaning the wind- If the rear window wiper is already on at continu-
screen and the visibility through it. ous speed, no change is made.
Related information Related information

• Using windscreen wipers (p. 145) • Using windscreen wipers (p. 145)
• Rear window wiper and washer (p. 147) • Windscreen and headlamp washers (p. 146)
• Filling washer fluid (p. 549) • Activating/deactivating the rain sensor
(p. 145)
• Filling washer fluid (p. 549)
Select for intermittent wiping with the

rear window wiper.
Select for continuous speed with the
rear window wiper.
Power windows Operating power windows Operating

Using the driver's door control panel, all power Using the driver's door control panel, all power
windows can be operated - using the control windows can be operated - using the control
panels in the other doors operates the power panels in the other doors operates the power
window in the individual door. window in the individual door.
WARNING
Check that no children or other passengers
are trapped when the windows are closed
from the driver's door.
WARNING
Check that no children or other passengers Operating the power windows.
are trapped if/when the windows are closed Operating without auto
using the remote control key.
Operating with auto
Driver's door control panel. WARNING Using the driver's door control panel, all power
If there are children in the car - remember to windows can be operated - using the control
Electric child safety locks* that prevent chil-
always switch off the power supply to the panels in the other doors can only operate the
dren from being able to open the rear doors
power windows by setting the car's electrical power window in the individual door. Only one
from inside and open/close the rear win- system in ignition position 0 and then take control panel can be operated at a time.
dows. the remote control key with you when leaving
Controls for rear windows. the car. In order for the power windows to be used, the
ignition position must be at least I. The power
Controls for front windows. windows can be operated for a few minutes after
WARNING the car has been switched off and after the igni-
Related information Never leave children alone in the car. tion has been switched off - although not after a
• Operating power windows (p. 148) door has been opened.
• Child safety locks (p. 256)
NOTE It is possible to override the pinch protection Adjusting the door mirrors
when closing has been interrupted, e.g. if ice has The door mirror positions are adjusted with the
One way to reduce the pulsating wind noise formed on the window. After two successive clos- joystick in the driver's door control panel.
when the rear windows are open is to also ing interruptions the pinch protection will be over-
open the front windows slightly. ridden and the automatic function deactivated for
a short while, now it is possible to close by hold-
ing the button in its raised position.
NOTE
The windows cannot be opened at speeds Resetting
above approx. 180 km/h (approx. 112 mph), If the starter battery is disconnected then the
but they can be closed. function for automatic opening must be reset so
that it can work correctly.
Operating without auto 1. Gently raise the front section of the button to
Move one of the controls up/down gently. The raise the window to its end position and hold
power windows move up/down as long as the it there for one second.
control is held in position. 2. Release the button briefly.
Controls for door mirrors.
Operating with auto 3. Raise the front section of the button again
Move one of the controls up/down to the end for one second. Adjusting
position and release it. The window runs auto- 1. Press the L button for the left-hand door mir-
matically to its end position. ror or the R button for the right-hand door
WARNING mirror. The light in the button illuminates.
Operating with the remote control key, door
A reset must take place for pinch protection
handle or central locking button to work. 2. Adjust the position with the joystick in the
To operate the power windows with the remote centre.
control key, door handles on the outside, or from
Related information 3. Press the L or R button again. The light
the inside with the central locking button, see the
• Power windows (p. 148) should no longer be illuminated.
section "Remote control key", "Locking/unlock-
ing from the outside" or "Locking/unlocking from • Child safety locks (p. 256)
the inside". WARNING
Both mirrors are bent to provide optimal
Pinch protection • Remote control key (p. 230) vision. Objects may appear further away than
Closing of the windows is stopped and the win- • Locking/unlocking from the outside (p. 235) they actually are.
dow is opened if anything prevents its movement.
• }}
Locking/unlocking from the inside (p. 239)
149
|| Memory function in power front seat* Automatic angling of the door mirror Resetting to neutral
Door mirror positions can be saved in the mem- when parking30 Mirrors that have been moved out of position by
ory function of the power front seat. When reverse gear is engaged the door mirror is an external force must be reset electrically to the
automatically angled down so that the driver can neutral position for electric retracting/extending
Retractable power door mirrors* see the side of the road when parking for exam- to work correctly:
The mirrors can be retracted for parking/driving ple. When reverse gear is disengaged the mirror
in narrow spaces: 1. Retract the mirrors with the L and R buttons.
automatically returns to its original position after
1. Depress the L and R buttons simultaneously a short time. 2. Fold them out again with the L and R but-
(ignition position must be at least I). tons.
Settings for this function are set via the centre
2. Release them after approximately 1 second. display: 3. Repeat the above procedure as necessary.
The mirrors automatically stop in the fully 1. Press Settings in the top view. The mirrors are now reset in neutral position.
retracted position.
2. Press My Car Mirrors and Easy Entry. Automatic dimming*
Fold out the mirrors by pressing down the L and Bright light from behind is automatically dimmed
R buttons simultaneously. The mirrors automati- 3. Under Exterior Mirror Tilt at Reverse, by the interior rearview and door mirrors.
cally stop in the fully extended position. select Off, Driver, Passenger or Both to
activate/deactivate and to select which For the door mirrors to be fitted with this function
Angling the door mirror when parking30 review mirror should be angled. requires that the interior rearview mirror also has
The door mirror can be angled down for the automatic dimming, see the section "Interior rear-
driver to view the side of the road when parking Automatic retraction when locking* view mirror".
for example. When the car is locked/unlocked with the remote
Automatic dimming is always active while driving,
control key the door mirrors are automatically
– Engage reverse gear and press the L or R apart from when gearbox reverse position is
retracted/extended.
button. selected. Dimming sensitivity can be adjusted in
The function can be activated/deactivated via the three levels and will affect the interior rearview
When reverse gear is disengaged the mirror
centre display: and the door mirrors.
automatically returns to its original position after
approx. 10 seconds, or earlier by pressing the 1. Press Settings in the top view.
button labelled L or R respectively.
2. Press My Car Mirrors and Easy Entry.
3. Select Fold Mirror When Locked to acti-
vate/deactivate.
30 Only in combination with power seat with memory.
NOTE Interior rearview mirror Automatic dimming*

The interior rearview mirror can be dimmed with Bright light from behind is automatically dimmed
When sensitivity is changed there is no imme- by the rearview mirror. The control for manual
a control in the mirror's lower edge. Alternatively,
diately noticeable change in dimming, but the dimming is not available on mirrors with auto-
the rearview mirror dims automatically.
change will be complete after a while. matic dimming.
The rearview mirror contains two sensors - one
Settings for this function are set via the centre
forward facing and one rearward facing - that
display:
work together to identify and eliminate dazzling
1. Press Settings in the top view. light. The forward facing sensor detects ambient
light, while the rearward facing sensor detects
2. Press My Car Mirrors and Easy Entry. the light from vehicle headlights behind.
3. Under Rearview Mirror Auto Dimming,
select Normal, Dark or Light. NOTE
Related information If the sensors are obscured by e.g. parking
• Interior rearview mirror (p. 151) permits, transponders, sun visors or objects in
the seats or in the cargo area in such a way
that light is prevented from reaching the sen-
Control for dimming
• Using the memory function in the power sors, then the dimming function of the interior
front seat* (p. 121) rearview and door mirrors is reduced.
Manual dimming
Bright light from behind could be reflected in the
rearview mirror and dazzle the driver. Use dim- Automatic dimming is always active while driving,
ming with the dimming control when lights from apart from when gearbox reverse position is
behind are distracting: selected. Dimming sensitivity can be adjusted in
three levels and will affect the interior rearview
1. Use dimming by moving the control in
and the door mirrors.
towards the passenger compartment.
2. Return to normal mode by moving the control NOTE
towards the windscreen.
When sensitivity is changed there is no imme-
diately noticeable change in dimming, but the
change will be complete after a while.
}}
|| Settings for this function are set via the centre Compass* Related information
display: The upper right-hand corner of the rearview mir- • Calibrating the compass* (p. 153)
1. Press Settings in the top view. ror has an integrated display that shows the • Ignition positions (p. 403)
compass direction in which the front of the car is
2. Press My Car Mirrors and Easy Entry. pointing.
3. Under Rearview Mirror Auto Dimming,
select Normal, Dark or Light.
Related information
Rearview mirror with compass.

Eight different compass directions are shown by
their English abbreviations: N (north), NE (north
east), E (east), SE (south east), S (south), SW
(south west), W (west) and NW (north west).
Activating/deactivating the compass

The compass is activated automatically when the
car is started.
To deactivate/activate the compass:
– Depress the button on the underside of the
rearview mirror using e.g. a paper clip.
Calibrating the compass* 7. Cars with heated windscreen*: If the char-

The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones. The acter C is shown in the display when the
compass should be calibrated if the car is heated windscreen is activated, perform the
moved between several magnetic zones. calibration in accordance with point 6 above
with the heated windscreen activated.
Proceed as follows to perform calibration:
8. Repeat the above procedure as necessary.
1. Stop the car in a large open area free from
steel structures and high-voltage power lines. Related information
2. Start the car and switch off all electrical • Compass* (p. 152)
equipment (air conditioning, wipers, etc.) and
ensure that all doors are closed.
Magnetic zones.
NOTE 4. Press the button repeatedly until the
Calibration may fail or not start at all if electri- required magnetic zone (1–15) is shown.
cal equipment is not switched off. See the map of magnetic zones for the com-
pass.
3. Hold the button on the underside of the rear- 5. Wait until the display returns to showing the
view mirror depressed (use a paper clip or character C, or hold the button on the under-
similar) for approx. 3 seconds. The number of side of the rearview mirror depressed for
the current magnetic zone is shown. approx. 6 seconds until the character C is
shown.
6. Drive slowly in a circle at a speed of no more
than 10 km/h (6 mph) until a compass direc-
tion is shown in the display, indicating that
calibration is complete. Then drive a further 2
circles to fine-tune calibration.
Panorama roof* WARNING IMPORTANT

The panorama roof is divided into two glass sec-
tions. The front section can be opened vertically
Children, other passengers or objects may be • Remove ice and snow before opening the
trapped by the panoramic roof's moving parts. panoramic roof.
at the rear edge (ventilation position) or horizon-
tally (open position). The rear section is fixed • Always operate the panoramic roof with • Do not operate the panoramic roof if it
roof glass. caution. has frozen closed.
The panoramic roof has a wind deflector. • Do not allow children to play with the
controls. Wind deflector
The panorama roof has a sun blind made of per- • Never leave children alone in the car.
forated fabric and located under the glass roof to
provide extra protection from factors such as • Remember to always switch off the power
supply to the panoramic roof by setting
strong sunlight.
the car's electrical system in ignition posi-
tion 0, and then take the remote control
key with you when leaving the car.
• Never put an object or part of the body
through the panoramic roof, even if the
car's electrical system is fully discon-
nected.
IMPORTANT The panorama roof has a wind deflector that is

• Do not open the panoramic roof when raised when the panorama roof is in the open
load carriers are fitted. position.
• Do not place any heavy objects on the Related information
The panoramic roof and sun blind are operated panoramic roof.
with a control located in the roof.
• Operating the panorama roof* (p. 155)
The control is activated when the car's electrical
system is in ignition position I or II.
Operating the panorama roof* IMPORTANT Ventilation position

When operating with the control in the roof, the
panoramic roof is first opened horizontally to a
• Do not open the panoramic roof when
load carriers are fitted.
comfort position.
• Do not place any heavy objects on the
In ventilation position, the front glass cover in the panoramic roof.
roof is raised at the rear.
WARNING IMPORTANT
Children, other passengers or objects may be • Remove ice and snow before opening the
trapped by the panoramic roof's moving parts. panoramic roof.
• Always operate the panoramic roof with • Do not operate the panoramic roof if it
caution. has frozen closed.
Ventilation position, vertically at the rear edge.
• Do not allow children to play with the
controls. In order that the panoramic roof and sun blind Open by pressing the control upward.
• Never leave children alone in the car. can be operated, the car's electrical system must Close by pressing the control forward/down-
be in at least ignition position I. Turn the start
• Remember to always switch off the power
knob clockwise and then release it. The panor-
ward.
supply to the panoramic roof by setting When the ventilation position is selected the front
amic roof and sun blind are operated using the
the car's electrical system in ignition posi- glass cover is raised at its rear edge. If the sun
control in the ceiling.
tion 0, and then take the remote control blind is fully closed when ventilation position is
key with you when leaving the car. selected, then it opens automatically approx.
• Never put an object or part of the body 50 mm (approx. 2 inches).
through the panoramic roof, even if the The sun blind follows automatically if the panor-
car's electrical system is fully discon- amic roof is closed from ventilation position.
nected.
}}
|| Operating with the control in the roof 2. Open the panorama roof - press the control 2. To open the panorama roof, press the control
backwards a second time to the position for backwards a second time to the position for
manual opening. The panoramic roof first automatic opening and release. The panor-
reaches comfort position31. In order to open amic roof first reaches comfort position31. To
to maximum opening position - press the open to the maximum opening position -
control backwards a third time. press the control a third time backward to
the position for automatic opening and
Close the roof/blind by repeating the preceding
release.
procedure in reverse order - press the control
forward/downward to the manual closing position Close the roof/blind by repeating the preceding
instead. procedure in reverse order - press the control
forward/downward to the automatic closing posi-
The movement of the roof is stopped if the con-
tion instead.
trol is released or when the glass reaches the
comfort position or the maximum opening or The movement of the roof is stopped when the
Opening, manual closing position. The movement is also stopped if glass reaches the comfort position or the maxi-
Opening, automatic the control is operated again in the opposite mum opening or closing position. The movement
direction to the direction of movement in pro- is also stopped if the control is operated again in
Closing, manual gress. the opposite direction to the direction of move-
ment in progress.
Closing, automatic
NOTE The movement of the roof is not stopped when
Manual operation For manual opening, the sun blind must be the glass reaches the comfort position when
1. To open the sun blind - press the control fully open before the panoramic roof can be closing from maximum opening position.
backwards to the position for manual open- opened. When the procedure is reversed, the
ing. The sun blind moves towards maximum panoramic roof must be fully closed before
opening position for as long as the control is the sun blind can be fully closed.
held depressed rearward.
Automatic operation
1. Open the sun blind to maximum position -
press the control backward to the position
for automatic opening and release.
31 Comfort position is an open position for the glass cover, where wind noise and resonance noise are at a comfortably low level while driving.
156
Automatic operation - rapid opening/closing 2. Press My Car Locking. the driver's door or passenger door* can be used
The panorama roof and sun blind can be to close the panoramic roof.
Select Auto Close Sunroof Curtain to
opened/closed simultaneously:
activate/deactivate. – Give a long press on the central locking but-
– To open - press the control rearward to the ton until the panorama roof and sun blind
automatic operation position twice and Closing using the remote control key, start moving towards the closed position.
release. central locking button or door handles Then release the button.
– To close - press the control forward/down- Remote control key Movement stops if the central locking button is
ward to the automatic operation position – Give a long press on the remote control key's pressed again or when the roof/blind has
twice and release. lock button until the panorama roof and reached the closed position.
The movement of the roof is stopped when the sun blind start moving towards the closed Door handle
glass reaches the comfort position or the closing position. Then release the lock button.
Cars equipped with keyless locking/unlocking*
position. When closing from maximum opening Movement stops if the remote control key's lock have a touch-sensitive recess on the outer part of
position, the movement is not stopped at comfort button is pressed again or when the roof/blind the outside door handle.
position. The movement of the blind is not stop- has reached the closed position.
ped when the roof reaches comfort position. The – Place your finger against the touch-sensitive
Central locking button recess on the outside of one of the door
movement is also stopped if the control is oper-
handles until the panorama roof and sun
ated again in the opposite direction to the direc-
blind start moving towards the closed posi-
tion of movement in progress.
tion. Then remove your finger from door han-
Automatic closing of the sun blind dle's recess.
When the car is parked in hot weather, the sun Movement stops if you place your finger against
blind closes automatically 15 minutes after the the door handle recess again or once the roof/
car has been locked. This is in order to lower the blind has reached the closed position.
passenger compartment temperature and protect
the car upholstery from being bleached by the
WARNING
sun.
If the panorama roof is closed with the remote
The function is deactivated when the car is sup- control key, the central locking button or door
plied from the factory and can be activated/deac- handle, check that no one risks being trapped.
Central locking button.
tivated:
When the car's electrical system is set in at least
ignition position I, the central locking button in
display.
}}
|| IMPORTANT • Locking/unlocking from the outside (p. 235) HomeLink®*32

Check that the panoramic roof is properly HomeLink® is a programmable remote control
closed when closing. that is integrated into the car's electrical system.
General
Pinch protection
The panorama roof has pinch protection that is
triggered if the glass cover or the sun blind is
blocked by an object during closing. In the event
of blocking, the glass cover or sun blind stops
and is then opened automatically to approx.
50 mm (approx. 2 inches) from the blocked posi-
tion (or to full ventilation position). The pinch pro-
tection is also active when the glass cover or sun
blind is opened.
If the pinch protection has deployed then it is still
possible to operate the glass cover and/or sun
blind once more in the same direction without Button 1
pinch protection, if this is done within 10 seconds
after pinch protection deployment. It is therefore Button 2
possible to override the pinch protection when
Button 3
closing has been interrupted e.g. if ice has
formed around the glass cover, by continually Indicator lamp
pressing the control forward/downward until the
glass cover and/or sun blind is closed. HomeLink®33 is a programmable remote control
that can remotely control up to three different
Related information devices (e.g., garage door openers, alarm sys-
• Panorama roof* (p. 154) tems, outdoor and indoor lighting, etc.) and thus
• Ignition positions (p. 403) replace their remote controls. HomeLink® is sup-
plied built into the interior rearview mirror. The
HomeLink® panel consists of three programma-
• Locking/unlocking from the inside (p. 239)
ble buttons and one indicator lamp in the mirror deleted when the car is sold; see the section Programming HomeLink®*34
glass. "Programming HomeLink®". Instructions for programming HomeLink®.
For more information about HomeLink®, visit Related information
www.HomeLink.com, www.youtube.com/ Programming HomeLink®
• Programming HomeLink®* (p. 159)
HomeLinkGentex or call the toll-free number
00 8000 466 354 65 (or the toll number NOTE
+49 6838 907 277).
In certain vehicles the ignition must be
switched on or in "accessory position" before
WARNING HomeLink® can be programmed or used.
• If HomeLink® is used to control a garage Preferably fit new batteries in the remote con-
door or gate, ensure that nobody is near trol that will be replaced by HomeLink® for
the door or gate while it is in motion. faster programming and improved transmis-
• While programming HomeLink, the sion of the radio signal. The HomeLink® but-
garage door or gate being programmed tons should be reset before programming,
may activate. For this reason, make sure see the heading "Resetting the HomeLink®
that nobody is in the vicinity of the door or buttons". When the reset is complete,
gate while programming is in progress. HomeLink® is set in "learn mode" and ready
for programming.
• The car should be outside the garage
while a garage door opener is being pro-
grammed. 1. Press the button35 on HomeLink® you want
• Do not use HomeLink® for any garage to program. The indicator lamp35 on
door that does not have safety stop and HomeLink® should flash yellow once per
safety reverse. second. It is not necessary to hold the button
depressed.
Save the original remote controls for future pro-
gramming (e.g. when changing to another car or
for use in another vehicle). It is also recom-
mended that the programming for the buttons is

33 HomeLink and the HomeLink house symbol are registered trademarks of Gentex Corporation. }}
|| 2. Aim the remote control towards the 4. Press and release the button on the original
HomeLink® button to be programmed and remote control every other second until the
hold it approx. 2-8 cm (approx. 1-3 inches) indicator lamp has changed from flashing
from the button. Do not obstruct the indicator yellow once per second to either flashing
lamp on HomeLink®. green 10 times per second or illuminating in
a constant green glow.
Note: The ability of some remote controls to
program HomeLink® is improved at a dis- 5. Depress the programmed HomeLink® button
tance of approx. 15-20 cm (approx. 6-12 and check the indicator lamp.
inches). Bear this in mind if you encounter > Constant green glow: If the indicator
problems during programming. lamp illuminates in a constant green glow, 6. Locate programming button36 on the
programming is complete. The garage receiver for the garage door or similar. It is
3. Press and hold the button on the original
door, gate or similar should now be acti- normally located near the antenna bracket on
remote control to be programmed on
vated when the programmed button is the receiver.
HomeLink® and keep an eye on the indicator
depressed.
lamp. Do not release the button until the 7. Depress and release the receiver's program-
indicator lamp has switched from flashing Flashes green 10 times per second: ming button. Step 8 must be completed
yellow once per second to either flashing Depress the button being programmed, within 30 seconds of the button being
green 10 times per second or illuminating in hold it depressed for 2 seconds and depressed.
a constant green glow. The button on the then release it. Repeat the sequence of
8. Depress the button being programmed, hold
remote control can be released once the pressing/holding/releasing a second time
it depressed for 2 seconds and then
indicator lamp flashes or illuminates in green. and, depending on the receiver model,
release it. Repeat the sequence of press-
even a third time. Programming should
Note: For some receivers, programming step ing/holding/releasing a second time and,
now be complete and the garage door,
3 may need to be replaced with the instruc- depending on the receiver model, even a
gate or similar should now be activated
tions in step 4. third time. Programming is now be com-
when the programmed button is
plete and the garage door, gate or similar
depressed.
should now be activated when the pro-
If the receiver is still not activated: grammed button is depressed.
Continue with programming steps 6-8 to
complete programming.

35 See section "HomeLink®*" for the location of buttons and indicator lamp.
36 Button designation and colour vary depending on manufacturer.
160
Operation 1. Depress buttons 1 and 3 on HomeLink® and Trip computer

When HomeLink® is fully programmed it can be hold them depressed until the indicator lamp The car's trip computer records and calculates
used in place of the separate original remote begins flashing green (about 10 seconds). vales such as e.g. distance, fuel consumption
controls. 2. Release the buttons. and average speed whilst driving.
Depress the programmed button. The garage > HomeLink® is now set to "learn mode" In order to facilitate fuel-efficient driving, informa-
door, gate, alarm system or similar is activated and is ready to be reprogrammed; see the tion is recorded about both instantaneous and
(may take a few seconds). If the button is section "Programming HomeLink®" average fuel consumption. The information from
depressed for more than 20 seconds then the above. the trip computer can be shown in the driver dis-
programming is deleted. The indicator lamp illu- play.
minates or flashes when the button has been Programming individual buttons
depressed. Naturally the original remote controls To reprogram an individual HomeLink® button,
can still be used in parallel with HomeLink® if proceed as follows:
required.
1. Depress the required button and do not
release.
NOTE
2. After approx. 20 seconds when the indicator
If the ignition is switched off, HomeLink® will lamp on HomeLink® starts to flash yellow,
work for 30 minutes after the driver's door start with step 1 from the section "Program-
has been opened.
ming HomeLink®" above.
Note: If the button to be reprogrammed is
In the event of programming problems, contact
not programmed with a new unit, it will
HomeLink® at www.HomeLink.com,
resume the previously saved programming.
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or call the
toll-free number 00 8000 466 354 65 (or the For more information or to provide feedback
toll number +49 6838 907 277). about HomeLink®, visit www.HomeLink.com,
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or call the
Resetting the HomeLink® buttons toll-free number 00 8000 466 354 65 (or the
It is only possible to reset all of the HomeLink® toll number +49 6838 907 277).
buttons at the same time, not each button indi-
vidually. However, individual buttons can be Related information
reprogrammed; see the section "Programming • HomeLink®* (p. 158)
individual buttons" below.
}}
|| • Distance to empty tank The calculation is based on the average fuel con-
• Tourist - alternative speedometer sumption over the last 30 km (20 miles) and the
remaining driveable fuel quantity.
Trip meter When the gauge shows "----", there is not
There are two trip meters, TM and TA. enough fuel left to be able to calculate the
TM can be reset manually and TA is reset auto- remaining mileage. Refuel as soon as possible.
matically if the car is not used for at least four
hours. NOTE
The following information is registered while driv- There may be a slight deviation if the driving
ing: style has been changed.
• Mileage
12-inch driver display*. An economic driving style generally results in a
• Driving time
longer driving distance.
• Average speed
• Average fuel consumption. Tourist - alternative speedometer
The alternative digital speedometer makes it eas-
The values apply from the trip meter's latest
ier to drive in countries where speed limit signs
reset.
are in a different unit than that shown in the car's
Odometer instruments.
The odometer records the car's total mileage. The digital speed is then shown in the opposite
This value cannot be reset to zero. unit to that shown in the analogue speedometer.
If the analogue speedometer is graduated in
Instantaneous fuel consumption
mph, the digital speedometer shows the corres-
This gauge shows the fuel consumption that the
ponding speed in km/h and vice versa.
car has at the moment. The value is updated
approximately every second. Related information
The following meters are included in the trip
computer: Distance to empty tank • Show trip data in the driver display (p. 163)
The trip computer calculates the remaining mile- • Show trip statistics in the centre display
• Trip meter
age with the fuel available in the tank. (p. 164)
• Odometer
• Instantaneous fuel consumption
Show trip data in the driver display 1. Open the app menu in the driver display by Resetting the trip meter
The trip computer's recorded and calculated val- pressing (1).
ues can be shown in the driver display. (It is not possible to open the app menu
while there is an unacknowledged message
The values are saved in a trip computer app. Via
in the driver display. The message must be
the app menu, you can choose which information
confirmed before the app menu can be
is shown on the driver display.
opened.)
2. Navigate to the trip computer app to left or
right with (2).
> The top four menu rows show measured
values for trip meter TM. The next four
menu rows show measured values for trip
meter TA. Scroll up or down in the list with
(3). – Reset all information in trip meter TM (i.e.
mileage, average consumption, average
3. Scroll down to the option buttons to select speed and driving time) with a long press on
which information to show in the driver dis- the RESET button on the left-hand stalk
play: switch.
• Distance to empty tank A short press on the RESET button resets
Open and navigate in the app menu37 using the right-
hand steering wheel keypad. • Odometer only the mileage.
App menu • Mileage for trip meter TM, TA, or no dis- Trip meter TA only has automatic resetting. The
play of mileage meter is reset if the car is not used for four hours
Left/right or more.
• Instantaneous fuel consumption, average
Up/down consumption for TM or TA, alternatively,
no display of fuel consumption
Change unit
Confirm Change the units for mileage, speed, etc. via the
• Tourist (alternative speedometer). centre display as follows:
Select or deselect an option with the O but- 1. Press Settings in the top view.
ton (4). The change is made immediately.
37 The appearance of the display may vary depending on instrument variant. }}
163
|| 2. Press System System Languages and Show trip statistics in the centre
Units Units of Measurement. display
Trip statistics from the trip computer are dis-
3. Select the required unit standard: Metric,
played graphically in the centre display and pro-
Imperial or US. vide an overview that facilitates more fuel-effi-
cient driving.
NOTE
Open the Driver performance
In addition to in the trip computer, these units
app in app view in order to
are also changed in Volvo's navigation sys-
show the trip statistics.
tem*.
Each bar in the diagram sym-
bolises a distance of 1, 10 or
Related information 100 km, alternatively miles. The Trip statistics from the trip computer38.
• Trip computer (p. 161) bars are filled in from the right as driving pro-
Settings for trip statistics
• Show trip statistics in the centre display gresses. The bar on the far right shows the value
(p. 164) for the current distance. Press Preferences to
• Using the application menu in the driver dis- The average fuel consumption and total driving • change graph scale. Select resolution 1, 10
play (p. 104) time are calculated since the last time the trip or 100 km/miles for the bar.
statistics were reset. • reset data after every trip. Performed when
the car has been stationary for more than
4 hours.
• reset data for the current trip.
Trip statistics, calculated average consumption
and total driving time are always reset simultane-
ously.
Change unit
Change the unit for mileage, fuel consumption,
etc. via the centre display as follows:
38 The figure is schematic, the layout may vary depending on selected unit standard or updated software.
1. Press Settings in the top view. Settings in the centre display Changing a setting
2. Press System System Languages and Settings and information for many of the car's
functions can be managed in the centre display
Units Units of Measurement. settings menu.
3. Select the required unit standard: Metric,
Imperial or US. Opening/closing and navigating in the
settings
Related information
• Trip computer (p. 161)
• Show trip data in the driver display (p. 163)
A subcategory in the settings menu with different types

of settings (here, a multi-selector button and radio but-
tons).
1. Press on categories and subcategories to
navigate to the required setting.
2. Change one or more settings. Different types
Top view with button for Settings.
of settings are changed in different ways
1. Open the top view by pressing the tab or by (see the table below for a description of each
dragging/swiping across the screen from the type).
top down. > The changes are saved immediately.
2. Press Settings to open the settings menu.
3. Press one of the categories shown and navi-
gate to subcategories and respective set-
tings by pressing again.
4. Press Back to go back in the settings menu.
Press Close to close the settings menu.
}}
165
|| Types of settings Related information Categories in the settings menu

There are several different types of settings: • Overview of the centre display (p. 33) The settings menu in the centre display has a
• Navigating in the centre display's views number of main categories and subcategories
Setting Description (p. 40) where settings and information for many of the
type car's functions are collected.
• Categories in the settings menu (p. 166)
Trigger Starts an app or separate view • Changing system settings in the settings There are 7 main categories under settings: My
function for more advanced settings menu (p. 168) Car, Sound, Navigation, Media,
through a press on the text, e.g. Communication, Climate and System.
to connect a device with
In turn, each category contains a number of sub-
Bluetooth®. categories and setting options. The tables below
Radio but- Select a setting from several show the first level of subcategories. The setting
ton options by pressing the required options for a function or area are described in
radio button, e.g. to select a sys- more detail in the corresponding section of the
tem language. owner's manual. For system settings not descri-
bed in the corresponding section, see the section
Multi- Select a level for something by "Changing system settings in the settings menu".
selector pressing the required part of the
Some settings are personal, which means that
button button, e.g. to select a sensitivity
they can be saved to Driver Profiles. Other set-
level for City Safety.
tings are global, which means they are not linked
Checkbox Activate/deactivate a function by to a driver profile. The tables below provide an
pressing on the box to select/ overview showing whether a category's settings
deselect it, e.g. to select auto- are personal, global or a mixture of both.
matic start of seat heating.
My Car
Slider Select a level for something
Subcategories Settings
within an interval by pressing and
dragging the slider, e.g. to select Displays Personal
volume level.
IntelliSafe Mixed
Display of No actual setting. Shows infor-
informa- mation about something, e.g. the Drive Mode/Individual Drive Mixed
tion car's identification number. Mode*
Subcategories Settings Media Climate

Subcategories Settings The main category Climate has no subcatego-
Lights and Lighting Mixed ries.
AM/FM radio Personal
Mirrors and Easy Entry Mixed System
DAB Personal
Locking Mixed Subcategories Settings
Parking Brake and Suspension Global Driver Profile Personal

Gracenote® Personal
Wipers Personal Date and Time –
TV* Personal
System Languages and Units Personal
Sound Video Personal
Subcategories Settings Keyboard Layouts Global
Communication Voice Control* Personal
Tone Personal
Subcategories Settings
Balance Personal Factory reset –
Phone –
System Volumes Mixed System Information Global
Text Messages –
Navigation Related information
Android Auto* –
Subcategories Settings • Settings in the centre display (p. 165)
Apple CarPlay* – • Changing system settings in the settings
Map Personal menu (p. 168)
Bluetooth Devices –
Route and Guidance Personal
Wi-Fi Global
Traffic Personal
Car Wi-Fi Hotspot Global
Car Modem Internet* Global
Volvo On Call* –
Volvo Service Networks Global
Changing system settings in the 2. Continue to System System Languages 2. Continue to System System
settings menu and Units Units of Measurement. Information Vehicle Identification
The System category in the centre display set- Number.
3. Select from the following unit standards:
tings menu collects general settings and infor- > The car's vehicle identification number
mation for car systems, such as language and • Metric - kilometres, litres and degrees (VIN39) is shown.
units. Celsius.
• Imperial - miles, gallons and degrees Related information
The system settings under Driver Profile, Date
and Time, System Languages and Units, Celsius. • Categories in the settings menu (p. 166)
Keyboard Layouts, Voice Control, Factory • US - miles, gallons and degrees Fahren- • Driver profiles (p. 169)
reset and System Information are described in heit. • Clock (p. 97)
the corresponding section of the owner's manual. > The units in the driver display, centre dis- • Using the keyboard in the centre display
play and head-up display are changed. (p. 49)
Changing system language
1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre See storage information • Settings for voice recognition (p. 115)
display. 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre • System updates (p. 531)
display.
2. Continue to System System Languages • Resetting settings in the settings menu
and Units. 2. Continue to System System (p. 169)
3. Select system language. Languages that Information Storage. • Book service and repair (p. 528)
support voice recognition have a voice recog- > Storage information for the car's hard disk
nition symbol. is shown, including total capacity, available
> The language in the driver display, centre capacity and how much space installed
display and head-up display is changed. applications are using.
Changing system units See the car's vehicle identification

Changing length and volume units number
1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre
display. display.
39 Vehicle Identification Number.
168
Resetting settings in the settings 4. Press OK to confirm the reset. Driver profiles
menu For Reset Personal Settings, the reset Many of the settings made in the car can be
It is possible to reset all modified settings in the must be confirmed by pressing Reset for adapted according to the driver's personal pref-
centre display settings menu to their default val- the active profile or Reset for all profiles. erences and can be saved in one or more driver
ues at once. profiles.
> Selected settings are reset.
Types of resets The personal settings are automatically saved in
Related information the active driver profile. Each key can be linked to
There are two different types of resets for set-
tings in the settings menu:
• Changing system settings in the settings a driver profile. When the linked key is used, the
menu (p. 168) car is adapted to the settings of that specific
• Factory Reset - clears all data and media • Driver profiles (p. 169) driver profile.
and resets all settings to their default values.
• Resetting user data for change of ownership
What settings are saved in the driver
• Reset Personal Settings - clears personal (p. 173)
data and resets personal settings to their profiles?
default values. Many of the settings made in the car will be auto-
matically saved in the active driver profile if the
Resetting settings profile is not locked; see the section "Editing a
driver profile". Settings made in the car are either
NOTE personal or global. Only personal settings are
saved in driver profiles.
Factory reset is only possible when the car
is stationary. Settings that can be saved in a driver profile
include, amongst other things, screens, mirrors,
front seats, navigation, audio and media system,
language and voice control.
display.
Some settings, referred to as global settings, can
2. Continue to System Factory reset. be changed but are not saved to a specific driver
3. Select the required reset type. profile. Changes to global settings affect all pro-
> A pop-up window is shown. files.
}}
169
|| Global settings Selecting driver profile 2. Press Profile.

The global settings and parameters are not The last used driver profile is the one selected > The same list as for Option 1 is shown.
changed when changing between driver profiles. when the car is unlocked. It is possible to
They remain the same regardless of which driver 3. Select the driver profile required.
change to another driver profile after the car has
profile is active. been unlocked. 4. Press Confirm.
Keyboard layout settings are an example of > The driver profile is selected and the sys-
When the centre display has been started, the
global settings. If driver profile X is used to add tem loads the settings for the new driver
selected driver profile is shown at the top of the
additional languages to the keyboard, these profile.
screen. The driver profile last used is the one that
remain available for use even if driver profile Y is will be active next time the car is unlocked. How-
used. The keyboard layout settings are not saved Related information
ever, if the remote control key has been linked to • Driver profiles (p. 169)
to a specific driver profile - the settings are a driver profile then this is what is selected when
global. the car is started. See "Linking remote control • Editing a driver profile (p. 171)
Personal preferences key to driver profile". • Linking remote control key to driver profile
If driver profile X was used to e.g. set centre dis- (p. 172)
There are two options for changing to another
play brightness, driver profile Y is not affected by
driver profile.
this setting. It has been saved to driver profile X -
the brightness setting is a personal setting. Option 1:
Refer to the section "Categories in the settings 1. Tap on the name of the driver profile shown
menu" for more information on which settings in the top of the centre display when the dis-
are personal and which are global. play has been started.
> A list of selectable driver profiles is shown.
Related information
• Editing a driver profile (p. 171) 2. Select the driver profile required.
• Categories in the settings menu (p. 166) 3. Press Confirm.
• Selecting driver profile (p. 170) > The driver profile is selected and the sys-
tem loads the settings for the new driver
profile.
Option 2:
1. Drag down the top view in the centre display.
170
Editing a driver profile 3. Save the name change by tapping on Back/ • Using the keyboard in the centre display
It is possible to change the name of the different Close. (p. 49)
driver profiles used in the car. > The name has now been changed. • Selecting driver profile (p. 170)
NOTE
A profile name cannot start with a space, as
the profile name will not then be saved.
Resetting settings in the driver profiles

Settings that have been saved to one or more
driver profiles can be reset if the car is stationary.
NOTE
Factory reset is only possible when the car
is stationary.
All types of changes to driver profiles are made
from the top view in the centre display - Settings 1. Press Settings in the top view.
System Driver Profiles.
2. Press System Factory Reset Reset
Renaming a driver profile Personal Settings.
Rename a driver profile starting from the Driver 3. Select one of the options Reset for the
Profile window:
active profile, Reset for all profiles or
1. Press Edit Profile. Cancel.
> A menu opens, where the profile can be
Related information
edited.
• Driver profiles (p. 169)
2. Tap in the box Profile Name.
• Resetting settings in the settings menu
> A keyboard appears, and it is possible to (p. 169)
change the name. Tap on to close • Navigating in the centre display's views
the keyboard. (p. 40)
171
Linking remote control key to driver 4. Drag down the top view again and tap on Related information
profile Settings System Driver Profiles • Driver profiles (p. 169)
It is possible to link your key to a driver profile. Edit Profile. • Editing a driver profile (p. 171)
The driver profile along with all of its settings will
then be automatically selected every time the car
5. Select Connect key to link the profile with • Remote control key (p. 230)
the key. It is not possible to link a driver pro-
is used with that specific remote control key. file to a different key than the one currently
The first time the remote control key is used, it is being used in the car. If there are multiple
not linked to any specific driver profile. When the keys in the car, the message More than one
car is started, the Guest profile will automatically key is found, put the key you want to
be activated. connect on backup reader will be dis-
played.
A driver profile can be selected manually without
linking it to the key. When the car is unlocked,
the last active driver profile is activated. Once the
key has been linked to a driver profile, a driver
profile does not need to be selected when that
specific key is used.
Linking a remote control key to a driver

profile
First select the profile to be linked to the key, if
the profile to be linked is not already active. The Backup reader's location in the tunnel console.
active profile can then be linked to the key. > When the message Profile connected
1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre to key is shown, the key and the driver
display. profile are linked.
2. 6. Press OK.
Press System Driver Profiles.
> This key is now linked to the driver profile
3. Select the desired profile. The display returns and will remain linked as long as the
to the home view. The Guest profile cannot Connect key box is not unticked.
be linked to a key.
172
Changing settings for apps are always made inside the app and not from the Resetting user data for change of
All of the car's apps are listed in the app view. top view. ownership
The app settings that relate to the car's embed- In the event of a change of ownership, user data
Related information
ded functions can be changed from the centre and system settings should be restored to fac-
display's top view. • Navigating in the centre display's views
tory settings.
(p. 40)
Apps for embedded functions - basic • Settings in the centre display (p. 165) The settings in the car can be reset at different
apps levels. Restore all user data and system settings
• Downloading, updating and uninstalling apps
to the original factory settings in the event of a
The apps installed in the car from the beginning, (p. 489)
e.g. FM radio and USB, are a part of Sensus and change of ownership. In the event of a change of
are part of the car's embedded functions. Set- • Categories in the settings menu (p. 166) ownership it is also important to change the
tings for these apps can be changed directly in owner of the Volvo On Call* service.
the top view in the centre display.
Related information
Change the settings for a basic app • Resetting settings in the settings menu
1. Tap on the app, e.g. FM radio. (p. 169)
2. Drag down the top view. • Volvo ID (p. 23)
3. Press FM Radio Settings.
4. Change settings as desired and confirm the
selections.
5. Press either the physical home button or the
virtual close button.
Most of the car's basic apps have this contextual
setting option, but not all. Refer to the section
"Categories in the settings menu" for more infor-
mation on how settings are changed.
Third party apps

Third party apps are not included in the car's sys-
tem from the beginning, but are the type that can
be downloaded e.g. Volvo ID. Here the settings
CLIMATE CONTROL
CLIMATE CONTROL
Climate control 4-zone climate* • Parking climate* (p. 200)

The car is equipped with electronic climate con- • Voice recognition control of climate control
trol. The climate control system cools or heats as (p. 117)
well as dehumidifies the air in the passenger
compartment.
2-zone climate
Climate zones with 4-zone climate.

With 4-zone climate the temperature in the pas-
senger compartment can be set separately for
the left and right-hand sides in both the front and
rear seat.
Climate zones with 2-zone climate. All climate control system functions are con-
trolled from the centre display and physical but-
With 2-zone climate, the temperature in the pas-
tons in the centre console. The functions for the
senger compartment can be set separately for
rear seat can also be controlled from the climate
the left and right-hand sides.
panel at the rear of the tunnel console.
All climate control system functions are con-
trolled from the centre display and physical but- Related information
tons in the centre console. • Climate control - sensors (p. 177)
• Perceived temperature (p. 177)
• Air distribution (p. 191)
CLIMATE CONTROL
Climate control - sensors With the Interior Air Quality System* there is also Perceived temperature
The climate control system has a number of sen- an air quality sensor that is fitted into the climate The climate control system regulates the climate
sors to help control the climate in the car. control system air intake. in the passenger compartment based on the
perceived temperature, not on actual tempera-
Sensor location Related information ture.
• Climate control (p. 176)
• Perceived temperature (p. 177) The temperature you select in the passenger
compartment corresponds to the physically per-
• Interior Air Quality System* (p. 179)
ceived temperature as affected by factors such
as the ambient temperature, air speed, humidity,
solar radiation, etc. in and around the car at the
time.
The system includes a sun sensor which detects
on which side the sun is shining into the passen-
ger compartment. This means that the tempera-
ture can differ between the right and left-hand
side's air vents despite the controls being set for
Moisture sensor - in the casing by the inte- the same temperature on both sides.
rior rearview mirror.
Related information
Outside temperature sensor - in the right- • Climate control (p. 176)
hand door mirror.
• Climate control - sensors (p. 177)
Sun sensor - on the upper side of the instru-
ment panel. • Regulating the temperature (p. 185)
Temperature sensor for the passenger com-

partment - by the physical buttons in the
centre console.
NOTE
Do not cover or block the sensors with cloth-
ing or other objects.
CLIMATE CONTROL
Air quality NOTE

The materials selected for the passenger com-
Clean Zone does not indicate that the air
partment and the air cleaning system ensure that
quality is good. It only indicates that the con-
the air quality in the passenger compartment is
ditions for good air quality have been met.
high.
Materials in the passenger Related information

compartment • Climate control (p. 176)
The interior of the passenger compartment is
designed to be pleasant and comfortable, even
• Passenger compartment filter (p. 179)
for people with contact allergies and for asthma • Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 179)
sufferers. • Interior Air Quality System* (p. 179)
Tested materials have been developed in order to The indicator is visible in the climate view in • Cleaning the interior (p. 570)
minimise the quantity of dust in the passenger the centre display.
compartment and to contribute to making the The indicator is visible in the climate row (p. 181)
passenger compartment easier to keep clean. when the climate view is not open.
The carpets in both the passenger compartment If the conditions have not been met then the
and the cargo area are removable and easy to Clean Zone text is white. When all conditions
remove and clean. have been met, this is indicated by the text
Use cleaning agents and car care products rec- changing colour to blue.
ommended by Volvo to clean the interior. Conditions that are checked:
Air cleaning system • That all doors and the tailgate are closed.
In addition to the passenger compartment filter, • That all side windows and the panorama
Clean Zone Interior Package* and the Interior Air roof* are closed.
Quality System* also help to maintain high air • That the air quality system Interior Air Quality
quality in the passenger compartment. System* is activated.
Clean Zone* • That the ventilation fan is activated.
The Clean Zone function checks whether or not • That the air recirculation is deactivated.
all conditions have been met for good air quality
in the passenger compartment.
CLIMATE CONTROL
Passenger compartment filter Clean Zone Interior Package* Interior Air Quality System*
All air entering the car's passenger compartment Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP) comprises Interior Air Quality System (IAQS) is a fully auto-
is cleaned with a filter. a series of modifications that keep the passen- matic air quality system that separates gases
ger compartment even clearer from allergy and and particles to reduce the levels of odours and
Replacing the passenger compartment asthma-inducing substances. contaminants in the passenger compartment.
filter
To maintain high climate system performance, The following is included: IAQS is a part of the Clean Zone Interior
the filter must be changed at regular intervals. Package (CZIP) and cleans the air in the passen-
• An enhanced fan function that means that
ger compartment from contaminants such as par-
Follow the Volvo Service Programme for the rec- the fan starts when the car is unlocked with
ommended replacement intervals. If the car is ticles, hydrocarbons, nitrous oxides and ground-
the remote control key. The fan fills the pas-
used in a severely contaminated environment, it level ozone.
senger compartment with fresh air. The func-
may be necessary to replace the filter more often. tion starts when required and is disengaged If the air quality sensor senses that the outside
automatically after a time or when one of the air is contaminated, the air intake is closed and
NOTE passenger compartment doors is opened. air recirculation is activated.
There are different types of passenger com- The amount of time the fan runs is reduced
partment filter. Make sure that the correct fil- gradually due to reduced need up until the NOTE
ter is fitted. car is 4 years old.
The air quality sensor must always be enabled
• The fully automatic air quality system Interior to ensure the best air in the passenger com-
Air Quality System (IAQS). partment.
Related information
• Air quality (p. 178) Related information In a cold climate recirculation is limited so as
• Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 179) • Air quality (p. 178) to prevent misting.
• Interior Air Quality System* (p. 179) • Passenger compartment filter (p. 179) In the event of misting, the defrost functions
• Volvo service programme (p. 528) • Interior Air Quality System* (p. 179) for windscreen, side windows and rear win-
dow should be used.
Activating/deactivating the air quality

sensor
It is possible to set whether the air quality sensor
should be activated/deactivated.
}}
CLIMATE CONTROL
|| 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre Climate controls • Activating/deactivating defrost of windows
display. The climate control system's functions are con- and door mirrors (p. 188)
2. Press Climate. trolled from the centre display, physical buttons
in the centre console and the climate panel at
3. Select Air Quality Sensor to activate/deac- the rear of the tunnel console*.
tivate the air quality sensor.
Overview of climate controls
Related information
• Passenger compartment filter (p. 179)
• Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 179)
• Activating/deactivating air recirculation
(p. 191)
Climate controls in the centre display.
Defrost buttons in the centre console.
Climate controls at the rear of the tunnel

console*.
Related information
• Climate control (p. 176)
(p. 181)
• Climate controls at the rear of the tunnel
console* (p. 182)
CLIMATE CONTROL
Climate controls in the centre Climate view

display One tap on the centre button in the climate row
All climate functions can be regulated from the gives access to the climate view. The climate view
climate row and the climate view in the centre is divided into the tabs Main climate, Rear
display. climate* and Parking climate*. Change
between the tabs by swiping left/right or by
Climate row pressing the respective heading.
The most common climate functions can be
Main climate
regulated from the climate row.
In addition to the climate row's functions, other
main climate functions can also be controlled in
the Main climate tab.
Max, Electric, Rear - Controls for defrosting

Temperature controls for driver and passen- the windows and door mirrors.
ger side.
AC - Controls for air conditioning.
Controls for heated* and ventilated* driver
and front passenger seat, as well as heated Recirc - Controls for air recirculation.
steering wheel*.
Controls for air distribution.
Button for access to the climate view. The
graphic on the button shows activated cli- Fan control for front seat (with 2-zone cli-
mate settings. mate, the control is shared with the rear
seat).
}}
AUTO - Auto regulating the climate.
CLIMATE CONTROL
|| Rear climate control* Parking climate* Climate controls at the rear of the
All climate functions for the rear seat can be The car's parking climate control can be regula- tunnel console*
regulated in the Rear climate tab. ted in the Parking climate tab. The rear seat's climate functions are controlled
from the climate panel at the rear of the tunnel
Related information console.
• Activating/deactivating air conditioning
(p. 184)
• Activating/deactivating air recirculation
(p. 191)
• Changing the air distribution (p. 192)
• Regulating the fan level (p. 187)
• Auto-regulating the climate (p. 183)
• Regulating the temperature (p. 185)
• Activating/deactivating heating of the seats* Controls for heated rear seat*.
(p. 197)
Fan controls for rear seat.
• Activating/deactivating ventilation of the
seats* (p. 198) Temperature controls for rear seat.
• Activating/deactivating heating of steering
Locking/unlocking button on the climate
wheel* (p. 199)
2nd row climate - Controls for climate func- panel.
tionality in the rear seat. Fan controls for rear
• Parking climate* (p. 200)
If the car is not equipped with a climate panel at
seat. the rear of the tunnel console, but has heated
Temperature controls for rear seat. rear seats*, there are physical buttons at the rear
of the tunnel console for controlling these.
Controls for heated rear seat*. The climate panel has a screen lock to prevent
unintentional change of fan speed and tempera-
CLIMATE CONTROL
ture. When the screen is locked, only the seat Auto-regulating the climate 2. Give a short or long press on AUTO.
controls* and the unlocking button are shown. With auto climate control activated, multiple cli- • Short press - air recirculation, air condi-
After unlocking, the fan speed and temperature mate functions are controlled automatically. tioning and air distribution are controlled
can be changed via the climate panel and all automatically.
selected climate settings are shown. The screen • Long press - air recirculation, air condi-
locks automatically after a period of inactivity. tioning and air distribution are controlled
automatically, temperature and fan level
Related information
are changed to standard settings: 22
°C/72 °F and level 3 (level 2 in the rear
• Activating/deactivating heating of the seats* seat1).
(p. 197)
> Auto-regulation of the climate is activated
• Regulating the fan level (p. 187) and the button illuminates.
NOTE
Auto-regulation button in the climate view. Temperature and fan speed can be changed
without deactivating the automatically-regula-
1. Open the climate view in the centre display. ted climate control system. The automatically-
regulated climate control system is deacti-
vated when the air distribution is changed
manually or when maximum defroster is acti-
vated.
Related information
(p. 181)
• Activating/deactivating air conditioning
(p. 184)
1 For cars with 4-zone climate*. }}
CLIMATE CONTROL
• Activating/deactivating air recirculation Activating/deactivating air NOTE

(p. 191) conditioning
Close all side windows and the panoramic
• Changing the air distribution (p. 192) The air conditioning cools and dehumidifies
roof* for air conditioning to work optimally.
incoming air as required.
• Regulating the fan level (p. 187) Activating/deactivating the main air
NOTE
conditioning
It is not possible to activate the air condition-
ing when the fan control is in Off position.
Related information
(p. 181)
The air conditioning button in the climate view.

1. Open the climate view in the centre display.
2. Press AC.
> The air conditioning is activated/deacti-
vated and the button illuminates/extin-
guishes.
When the air conditioning is activated, the
climate control system automatically con-
trols starting and switching off as
required.
CLIMATE CONTROL
Regulating the temperature Synchronising the temperature

The temperature can be set separately for the
left and right-hand sides. With 4-zone climate*
the temperature can also be set separately for
the front and rear seats.
Regulating temperature for front seat2
Temperature control.
2. Regulate the temperature by either of the Synchronisation button on the driver's side temperature
controls.
following:
1. Press the driver's side temperature button in
• drag the control to the desired tempera-
the centre display's climate row in order to
ture, or
open the controls.
• press +/− to raise/lower the temperature
Temperature buttons in the climate row. gradually. 2. Press Synchronise temperature.
> The temperature changes and the button > The temperature for all zones in the car is
1. Press the left or right-hand side temperature
shows the set temperature. synchronised with the temperature set for
button in the centre display's climate row to
the driver's side and the synchronisation
open the controls.
symbol is shown adjacent to the tempera-
ture button.
Synchronisation is stopped by a further press on
Synchronise temperature or by changing the
passenger side or rear seat* temperature set-
tings.
2 For 2-zone climate, also rear seat. }}
CLIMATE CONTROL
|| Regulating temperature for rear seat*

From the front seat
Temperature control. Temperature control on the climate panel at the rear of

the tunnel console.
3. Regulate the temperature by means of the
Temperature buttons in the Rear climate tab in the cli- following: 2. Press the left or right-hand side </> buttons
mate view. on the tunnel console's climate panel in
• drag the control to the desired tempera- order to lower/raise the temperature gradu-
1. Open the climate view in the centre display ture ally.
and select the tab for Rear climate.
• press +/− to raise/lower the temperature > The temperature changes and the screen
2. Press the left or right-hand side temperature gradually. in the climate panel shows the set tem-
button to open the control. > The temperature changes and the button perature.
shows the set temperature.
From the rear seat NOTE
1. Press the unlocking button on the tunnel Heating or cooling cannot be hastened by
console climate panel to access the controls. selecting a higher or lower temperature than
the actual desired temperature.
Related information
(p. 181)
CLIMATE CONTROL
• Climate controls at the rear of the tunnel Regulating the fan level Regulating fan level for rear seat*
console* (p. 182) The fan can be set to five different automatic fan From the front seat
• Auto-regulating the climate (p. 183) levels as well as Off and Max. With 4-zone cli-
mate* the fan level can be set separately for the
• Perceived temperature (p. 177)
front and rear seats.
Regulating fan level for front seat3
The fan control buttons in the tab Rear climate in the

climate view.
1. Open the climate view in the centre display
and select the tab for Rear climate.
Fan control buttons in the climate view. 2. Tap on the desired fan level, 1-5.
1. Open the climate view in the centre display. The rear seat's fan level can be switched off
2. Tap on the desired fan level, Off, 1-5 or Max. by tapping on 2nd row climate.
> Fan level is changed and the buttons for > Fan level is changed and the buttons for
the selected level illuminate. the selected level illuminate.
IMPORTANT
If the fan is fully switched off then the air con-
ditioning is not engaged, which results in a
risk of misting on the insides of the windows.
3 For 2-zone climate, also rear seat. }}
CLIMATE CONTROL
|| From the rear seat NOTE Activating/deactivating defrost of

1. Press the unlocking button on the tunnel windows and door mirrors
console climate panel to access the controls. The climate control system automatically
The three functions max defroster, heated wind-
adjusts the air flow within the selected fan
screen*, and heated rear window and door mir-
level based on requirements. This means that
rors are used to quickly remove misting and ice
the fan speed may change even though the
from the windows and door mirrors.
fan level is the same.
From physical buttons in the centre
Related information console
• Climate controls in the centre display The centre console contains physical buttons for
(p. 181) quick access to the defrost functions.
• Climate controls at the rear of the tunnel With heated windscreen* the max defroster can
console* (p. 182) only be activated individually from the climate
• Auto-regulating the climate (p. 183) view in the centre display.
Fan controls on the climate panel at the rear of the tun-

nel console.
2. Tap on the desired fan level, 1-5.
> Fan level is changed and the buttons for
the selected level illuminate.
NOTE
The fan level for the rear seat cannot be set if
the fan level for the front seat is in position
Off.
The rear seat fan speed can only be switched Physical buttons in the centre console.
off from the climate view in the centre display. Button for heated windscreen* and max
defroster.
Button for heated rear window and door mir-
rors.
CLIMATE CONTROL
Cars without heated windscreen: From the climate view in the centre NOTE
– Press the button (1). display
Changing the fan level to 5 increases the
> Max defroster is activated/deactivated Activating/deactivating max defroster noise level.
and the button illuminates/extinguishes.
Cars with heated windscreen:
– Press the button (1) repeatedly in order to
switch between the three levels:
• Activated heated windscreen
• Activated heated windscreen and max
defroster
• Deactivated.
> Heated windscreen and max defroster are
activated/deactivated and the button illu-
minates/extinguishes. Max defroster button in the climate view.
NOTE
2. Press Max.
Max defroster starts with a certain delay in > Max defroster is activated/deactivated
order to avoid a short increase in fan level if and the button illuminates/extinguishes.
the heated windscreen is deactivated by two
quick presses of the button. Max defroster deactivates auto-regulation
of the climate and air recirculation, acti-
vates air conditioning and changes the
Rear window and door mirror defrosters:
fan level to 5 and the temperature to HI.
– Press the button (2).
When max defroster is deactivated, the
> Heated rear window and door mirrors are climate control system returns to the pre-
activated/deactivated and the button illu- vious settings.
minates/extinguishes.
}}
189
CLIMATE CONTROL
|| Activating/deactivating heated windscreen* NOTE Activating/deactivating automatic start

of heated windows
If the heated windscreen is activated when It is possible to set whether automatic start of
the Start/Stop function has auto-stopped the
heated windscreen* and heated rear window and
engine then the engine will be restarted.
door mirrors should be activated/deactivated
when the engine is started. With automatic start
Activating/deactivating heated rear window activated, heating will start when there is a risk of
and door mirrors ice or misting on the windscreen/window. The
heating switches off automatically when the
windscreen/window is sufficiently warm and the
ice or misting is gone.
display.
The button for heated windscreen in the climate view.
2. Press Climate.
3. Select Auto Front Defroster to activate/
2. Press Electric.
deactivate automatic start of heated wind-
> Heated windscreen is activated/deacti- screen.
vated and the button illuminates/extin-
guishes. Select Auto Rear Defroster to activate/
deactivate automatic start of heated rear
The button for heated rear window and door mirrors in
the climate view. window and door mirrors.
NOTE
A triangular area at the end of each side of 1. Open the climate view in the centre display. Related information
the windscreen is not electrically heated, 2. Press Rear. • Climate controls (p. 180)
where de-icing may take longer. > Heated rear window and door mirrors are • Climate controls in the centre display
activated/deactivated and the button illu- (p. 181)
NOTE minates/extinguishes.
The heated windscreen may affect the per-

formance of transponders and other commu-
nication equipment.
CLIMATE CONTROL
Activating/deactivating air NOTE Air distribution

recirculation The climate control system distributes the
It is not possible to activate air recirculation
Air recirculation shuts out bad air, exhaust incoming air via a number of different vents in
when max defroster is activated.
gases, etc. from outside the car by the climate the passenger compartment.
control system reusing the air in the passenger
compartment. Activating/deactivating the timer for air Overview of air distribution
recirculation
It is possible set whether the air recirculation
timer should be activated/deactivated. When the
timer is activated, air recirculation is automatically
switched off after 20 minutes.
display.
2. Press Climate.
3. Select Recirculation Timer to activate/
deactivate the air recirculation timer.
Related information Air distribution in the passenger compartment with 4-

The air recirculation button in the climate view. zone climate.
1. Open the climate view in the centre display. (p. 181) Automatic and manual air distribution
2. Press Recirc. • Auto-regulating the climate (p. 183) With auto-regulated climate running the air distri-
bution takes place automatically. If necessary, the
> Air recirculation is activated/deactivated
air distribution can be controlled manually.
and the button illuminates/extinguishes.
Adjustable air vents
IMPORTANT There are 6 or 8* adjustable air vents in the pas-
If the air in the car is recirculated for too long senger compartment depending on the number
then there is a risk of misting on the insides of climate zones.
of the windows.
}}
CLIMATE CONTROL
|| Changing the air distribution Related information

The air distribution can be changed manually if • Air distribution (p. 191)
required. • Opening/closing and aiming the air vents
(p. 193)
• Table of air distribution options (p. 195)
(p. 181)
Location of adjustable air vents in the passenger com-

partment.
With 2-zone climate - four on the instrument
panel and one on each of the door pillars
between the front and rear doors. The air distribution buttons in the climate view.
Addition with 4-zone climate* - two at the Air distribution - windscreen defroster vents
rear of the tunnel console.
Air distribution - air vents in instrument panel
Related information and centre console
• Climate control (p. 176) Air distribution - air vents in the floor
• Opening/closing and aiming the air vents
2. Press one or more of the air distribution but-
(p. 193)
tons in order to open/close the correspond-
• Table of air distribution options (p. 195) ing air flow.
• Auto-regulating the climate (p. 183) > The air distribution is changed and the
buttons illuminate/extinguish.
CLIMATE CONTROL
Opening/closing and aiming the air Opening/closing the air vents Air vents for the rear seat:
vents Air vents for the front seat:
Some air vents in the passenger compartment
can be opened, closed and aimed individually.
If the door pillar vents and instrument panel outer

vents are aimed toward the side windows, then
misting can be removed.
If the door pillar vents are aimed inwards then, in
a hot climate, a comfortable environment is
obtained in the passenger compartment.
The air vent's thumbwheel4.

Air vent knob4. – Roll the thumbwheel in order to open/close
– Turn the knob in order to open/close the air the air flow from the nozzle.
flow from the vent. The longer the white lines on the thumb-
The air flow is at maximum when the marking wheel that are visible, the higher the air flow.
on the knob is in vertical position.
4 The illustration is schematic - nozzle design varies depending on location. }}
193
CLIMATE CONTROL
|| Aiming the air vents
The air vent's lever4.

– Move the lever sideways/vertically in order to
aim the air flow from the nozzle.
Related information
• Air distribution (p. 191)
• Table of air distribution options (p. 195)
4 The illustration is schematic - nozzle design varies depending on location.
194
CLIMATE CONTROL
Table of air distribution options

The air distribution can be changed manually if
required. The following options are available for
setting.
Air distribution Purpose

If all air distribution buttons are deselected in manual mode, the climate control system returns to automatically regulated climate control.
Main air flow from the defroster vents. Some air flows from other air vents. Counteracts misting and icing in a cold and humid climate
(to achieve this, fan level must not be low).
Main air flow from the air vents in the instrument panel. Some air flows from Provides efficient cooling in a hot climate.
other air vents.
Main air flow from the air vents at the floor. Some air flows from other air Provides heat or cooling to the floor.
vents.
}}
195
CLIMATE CONTROL
|| Air distribution Purpose

Main air from the defroster vents and air vents in the instrument panel. Provides good comfort in hot and dry climates.
Some air flows from other air vents.
Main air flow from the defroster vents and air vents at the floor. Some air Provides good comfort and good demisting in a cold or
flows from other air vents. humid climate.
Main air flow from the air vents in the instrument panel and air vents at the Provides good comfort in sunny weather with cool outdoor
floor. Some air flows from other air vents. temperatures.
Main air flow from the defroster vents, from the air vents in the instrument Gives balanced comfort in the passenger compartment.
panel and air vents at the floor.
Related information • Opening/closing and aiming the air vents • Climate controls in the centre display
• Air distribution (p. 191) (p. 193) (p. 181)
196
CLIMATE CONTROL
Activating/deactivating heating of 2. Repeatedly press the button for heated seats From the rear seat
the seats* in order to change between the four levels: With 2-zone climate:
The seats can be heated in order to increase Off, High, Medium and Low.
comfort for driver and passengers when it is > The level changes and the button shows
cold. the set level.
Activating/deactivating heating of the Activating/deactivating heating of the

front seat* rear seat*
From the front seat*
Buttons for heated seats at the rear of the tunnel con-

sole.
– Press repeatedly on the left or right-hand
side's physical buttons for heated seats at
the rear of the tunnel console to switch
between the four levels: Off, High, Medium
Steering wheel and seat buttons in the climate row.
and Low.
1. Press the left or right-hand side's steering Buttons for heated seats in the group Rear climate in
> The level changes and the LEDs in the
wheel and seat button in the climate row in the climate view.
button show the set level.
the centre display in order to open the con- 1. Open the climate view in the centre display
trols for seat and steering wheel. and select the tab for Rear climate. With 4-zone climate*:
If the car is not equipped with ventilated 2. Repeatedly press the button for heated seats
seats or heated steering wheel, the button in order to change between the four levels:
for heated seats is immediately available in Off, High, Medium and Low.
the climate row.
> The level changes and the button shows
the set level.
}}
CLIMATE CONTROL
|| Activating/deactivating automatic start Activating/deactivating ventilation of

of heated seats the seats*
It is possible to set whether automatic start of The seats can be ventilated to provide increased
heated seats should be activated/deactivated comfort in a hot climate, for example.
when the engine is started. With automatic start
activated, heating will start in the event of low The ventilation system consists of fans in the
ambient temperature. seats and backrests that draw air through the
seat upholstery. The cooling effect increases the
1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre cooler the passenger compartment air becomes.
display. The system can be activated when the engine is
2. Press Climate. running.
3. Under Auto Driver Seat Heating Level and
Seat heating indication and controls on the climate
panel at the rear of the tunnel console.
Auto Passenger Seat Heating Level,
select Off, Low, Medium or High in order to
– Press repeatedly on the left or right-hand activate/deactivate the automatic starting of
side's buttons for heated seats on the tunnel the heating for the driver and passenger
console's climate panel to switch between seats and to select the level.
the four levels: Off, High, Medium and Low.
> The level changes and the screen in the Related information
climate panel shows the set level. • Climate controls (p. 180)
WARNING (p. 181)
Heated seats must not be used by people
who find it difficult to perceive an increase in
temperature due to a lack of sensation or who
otherwise have problems operating the con-
trols for the heated seats. Otherwise they may
suffer burn injuries.
CLIMATE CONTROL
Activating/deactivating ventilation of Related information Activating/deactivating heating of

the front seat* • Climate controls (p. 180) steering wheel*
• Climate controls in the centre display The steering wheel can be heated in order to
(p. 181) increase comfort for the driver when it is cold.
Activating/deactivating heating of
steering wheel

1. Press the left or right-hand side's steering
wheel and seat button in the climate row in
the centre display in order to open the con-
trols for seat and steering wheel.
If the car is not equipped with heated seats
1. Press the driver's side steering wheel and
or heated steering wheel, the button for ven-
seat button in the climate row of the centre
tilated seats is immediately available in the
display in order to open the controls for seat
climate row.
and steering wheel.
2. Repeatedly press the button for ventilated
If the car is not equipped with heated seats
seats in order to change between the four
or ventilated seats, the button for heated
levels: Off, High, Medium and Low.
steering wheel is immediately available in the
> The level changes and the button shows climate row.
the set level.
}}
CLIMATE CONTROL
|| 2. Repeatedly press the button for heated Parking climate* Preconditioning can use direct start or be set via
steering wheel in order to change between The climate of the car's passenger compartment the timer.
the four levels: Off, High, Medium and Low. can be preconditioned or maintained while the The function utilises several systems in different
> The level changes and the button shows car is parked. cases:
the set level.
• The parking heater*, in a cold climate, warms
Activating/deactivating automatic start up both the passenger compartment and the
of heated steering wheel engine.
It is possible to set whether automatic start of • When it is warm, the ventilation cools the
heated steering wheel should be activated/deac- passenger compartment by blowing in air
tivated when the engine is started. With auto- from outside the car.
matic start activated, heating will start in the
event of low ambient temperature. NOTE
1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre During preconditioning of the passenger
display. compartment, the car works to reach comfort
2. Press Climate. temperature and not the temperature set in
the climate control system.
3. Under Auto Steering Wheel Heating
Level, select Off,Low,Medium or High in
order to activate/deactivate the automatic Climate comfort retention
starting of steering wheel heating and to The climate in the car's passenger compartment
select the level. can be maintained while the car is parked, e.g. if
the engine needs to be switched off but the
Related information driver or passenger(s) wants to remain in the car
• Climate controls (p. 180) and maintain the level of climate comfort.
• Climate controls in the centre display Preconditioning and climate comfort retention are con- Starting climate comfort retention is only possible
(p. 181) trolled from the Parking climate tab in the centre dis- via direct start.
• Steering wheel (p. 129) play's climate view.
Preconditioning
Preconditioning of the car before driving can
reduce wear and energy needs during a journey.
CLIMATE CONTROL
The function utilises several systems in different Starting/stopping preconditioning* NOTE

cases: Preconditioning warms the passenger compart-
The car's doors and windows should be
• Residual heat from the engine, in a cold cli- ment and engine or airs the passenger compart-
closed during the preconditioning of the pas-
mate, heats the passenger compartment to ment before driving. The function can use direct
senger compartment.
comfort temperature. start from the centre display or a mobile phone.
• When it is warm, the ventilation cools the
passenger compartment by blowing in air Starting/stopping from the centre WARNING
from outside the car. display Do not use preconditioning if the car is equip-
ped with a heater*:
NOTE • In unventilated spaces indoors. Exhaust
Climate comfort retention is switched off gases are emitted if the heater starts.
when the car is locked from the outside to • In locations with combustible or flamma-
avoid using residual heat unnecessarily. Use ble material nearby. Fuel, gas, long grass,
of the function is intended to maintain climate sawdust, etc. may ignite.
comfort when driver or passengers remain
• When there is a risk that the heater’s
inside the car. exhaust line may be blocked. For exam-
ple, deep snow inside the front right-hand
Related information wheel housing can obstruct the heater’s
• Climate control (p. 176) ventilation.
• Starting/stopping preconditioning* (p. 201) Preconditioning button in the Parking climate tab in Remember that the preconditioning can be
the climate view. started by a timer that has been set for a long
• Timer for preconditioning* (p. 202) time in advance.
• Starting/switching off climate comfort reten-
tion* (p. 204) 2. Select the Parking climate tab.
Starting from the app*
• Symbols and messages for parking climate 3. Press Preconditioning. Start of preconditioning and information about
control* (p. 206) > Preconditioning is started/switched off the selected settings can be managed from a
and the button is illuminated/extin- device that has the Volvo On Call* app. Precondi-
• Heater* (p. 207)
guished. tioning heats the passenger compartment to a
• Parking heater* (p. 208) comfortable temperature or ventilates the pas-
}}
CLIMATE CONTROL
|| senger compartment by blowing in air from out- Timer for preconditioning* Setting the timer for
side. The timer can be set so that the preconditioning preconditioning*
The passenger compartment can also be precon- is finished at a predetermined time. The timer for preconditioning can manage up to
ditioned with the car remote start function 8 time settings.
The timer can handle up to 8 different settings
(Engine Remote Start - ERS)5 via the Volvo On
for: Adding a time setting
Call* app.
• A time on a single date
Related information
• A time on one or more days of the week, with
• Parking climate* (p. 200) or without repetition.
• Timer for preconditioning* (p. 202)
Related information
• Starting/switching off climate comfort reten-
tion* (p. 204)
• Setting the timer for preconditioning*
• Symbols and messages for parking climate
(p. 202)
control* (p. 206)
• Activating/deactivating the timer for precon-
• Heater* (p. 207)
ditioning* (p. 204)
• Starting/stopping preconditioning* (p. 201)
The button to add a time setting in the Parking climate
• Symbols and messages for parking climate tab in the climate view.
control* (p. 206)
2. Select the Parking climate tab.
5 Certain markets.
CLIMATE CONTROL
3. Press Add timer. WARNING Deleting a time setting

> A pop-up window is shown.
Do not use preconditioning if the car is equip-
ped with a heater*:
NOTE
• In unventilated spaces indoors. Exhaust
It is not possible to add a time setting if there gases are emitted if the heater starts.
already are 8 settings entered for the timer.
Delete a time setting in order to be able to
• In locations with combustible or flamma-
ble material nearby. Fuel, gas, long grass,
add a new one.
sawdust, etc. may ignite.
4.
Tap on Date to set the time for a single date. exhaust line may be blocked. For exam-
Tap on Days to set the time for one or more ple, deep snow inside the front right-hand
days of the week. wheel housing can obstruct the heater’s
ventilation. The button for editing the list/deleting the time setting
With Days: Activate/deactivate repetition by in the tab Parking climate in the climate view.
ticking/unticking the box for Repeat Remember that the preconditioning can be
started by a timer that has been set for a long 1. Open the climate view in the centre display.
weekly. time in advance. 2. Select the Parking climate tab.
5. With Date: Select the date for precondition-
ing by scrolling the date list with the arrows. 3. Press Edit list.
Editing a time setting
With Days: Select the days of the week for 1. Open the climate view in the centre display. 4. Press the delete icon to the right in the list.
preconditioning by tapping on the buttons for 2. Select the Parking climate tab. > The icon changes to the text Delete.
the days of the week. 5. Press Delete to confirm.
3. Press the time setting that is to be changed.
6. Set the time when the preconditioning > The time setting is removed from the list.
should be finished by scrolling with the
arrows. 4. Edit the time setting in the same way as Related information
7. Tap on Confirm in order to add the time set-
described in "Adding a time setting" above. • Timer for preconditioning* (p. 202)
ting. • Activating/deactivating the timer for precon-
> The time setting is added to the list and is ditioning* (p. 204)
activated. • Heater* (p. 207)
CLIMATE CONTROL
Activating/deactivating the timer for WARNING Starting/switching off climate

preconditioning* comfort retention*
Do not use preconditioning if the car is equip-
A time setting in the timer for preconditioning ped with a heater*: Climate comfort retention maintains the climate
can be activated or deactivated based on need. in the passenger compartment after driving. The
• In unventilated spaces indoors. Exhaust function can use direct start from the centre dis-
gases are emitted if the heater starts. play.
• In locations with combustible or flamma-
ble material nearby. Fuel, gas, long grass,
sawdust, etc. may ignite.
exhaust line may be blocked. For exam-
ple, deep snow inside the front right-hand
wheel housing can obstruct the heater’s
ventilation.
Remember that the preconditioning can be
started by a timer that has been set for a long
time in advance.
The timer buttons in the Parking climate tab in the cli-
mate view.
1. Open the climate view in the centre display. Related information Button for climate comfort retention in the Parking
• Timer for preconditioning* (p. 202) climate tab in the climate view.
• Setting the timer for preconditioning* 1. Open the climate view in the centre display.
3. Activate/deactivate a time setting by tapping (p. 202)
on the timer button to the right of the setting.
• Heater* (p. 207)
3.
> The time setting is activated/deactivated Press Keep climate comfort.
and the button illuminates/extinguishes. > Climate comfort retention is started/
switched off and the button illuminates/
extinguishes.
CLIMATE CONTROL
NOTE
It is not possible to start climate comfort
retention if there is not enough residual heat
in the engine to maintain the passenger com-
partment climate, or if the outside tempera-
ture is above approx. 20 °C.
NOTE
Climate comfort retention is switched off
when the car is locked from the outside to
avoid using residual heat unnecessarily. Use
of the function is intended to maintain climate
comfort when driver or passengers remain
inside the car.
Related information
• Starting/stopping preconditioning* (p. 201)
CLIMATE CONTROL
Symbols and messages for parking This symbol illuminates in the driver
climate control* display when the parking heater is
A number of symbols and messages regarding active.
parking climate control can be shown in the
driver display.
Symbol Message Specification

Parking climate Parking climate control is disengaged. Contact a workshopA to check the function as soon as possible.
Service required
Parking climate Parking climate control is temporarily disengaged. If the problem persists for some time, contact a work-
Temporarily unavailable shopA to check the function.
Parking climate Parking climate control cannot be activated when the fuel level is too low to start the parking heater*. Fill-
ing the vehicle's normal fuel tank.
Unavailable Fuel level too low
Parking climate Parking climate control cannot be activated if the charge level of the starter battery is too low to start the
parking heater*. Charging the battery.
Unavailable Charge level too low
A An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information • Starting/switching off climate comfort reten- • Managing messages in the driver display and
• Parking climate* (p. 200) tion* (p. 204) the centre display (p. 107)
• Starting/stopping preconditioning* (p. 201) • Timer for preconditioning* (p. 202)
• Heater* (p. 207)
CLIMATE CONTROL
Heater* NOTE NOTE

The heater helps the engine and passenger
Make sure that there is enough charge in the Make sure there is enough fuel in the car's
compartment reach the correct temperature
battery if the heater needs to be used. normal fuel tank if the heater needs to be
before and during driving.
used.
The heater has two subfunctions: Fuel and refuelling
• Parking heater - heats the engine and pas- WARNING
senger compartment, if necessary, when the
Fuel which spills out could be ignited. Switch
parking climate control's preconditioning* is off the fuel-driven heater before starting to
activated. refuel.
• Additional heater - heats the passenger Check in the driver display that the
compartment and engine, if necessary, dur- heater is switched off. This symbol
ing driving. is lit when it is working as a parking
heater.
The heater is fuel-driven and is fitted in the front
right-hand wheel housing.
Related information
NOTE • Parking heater* (p. 208)
When the heater is running, smoke may be Warning label on fuel filler flap. • Additional heater* (p. 209)
emitted from the right-hand front wheel hous- The heater uses fuel from the car's normal fuel • Parking climate* (p. 200)
ing and a low hum may be heard. A ticking tank.
sound from the fuel pump may also be heard
If the car is parked on a steep hill, the front of the
from the rear section of the car. This is per-
car should point downhill to ensure that there is a
fectly normal.
supply of fuel to the heater.
If the level in the fuel tank is too low then the
Battery and charging
heater is switched off automatically and the driver
The heater is powered by the car's starter battery.
display shows a message.
If the charge level of the starter battery is too low,
then the heater is switched off automatically and
the driver display shows a message.
CLIMATE CONTROL
Parking heater* NOTE WARNING

The parking heater heats the passenger com-
Make sure there is enough fuel in the car's Do not use preconditioning if the car is equip-
partment as necessary before driving if the car's ped with a heater*:
normal fuel tank if the parking heater needs
preconditioning is activated.
to be used. • In unventilated spaces indoors. Exhaust
The parking heater is one of two subfunctions of Make sure that there is enough charge in the gases are emitted if the heater starts.
the car's heater. The heater is fitted in the front starter battery if the parking heater needs to • In locations with combustible or flamma-
right-hand wheel housing. be used. ble material nearby. Fuel, gas, long grass,
This symbol illuminates in the driver sawdust, etc. may ignite.
display when the parking heater is • When there is a risk that the heater’s
active.
IMPORTANT
exhaust line may be blocked. For exam-
Repeated use of the parking heater combined ple, deep snow inside the front right-hand
with short journeys may discharge the battery wheel housing can obstruct the heater’s
NOTE and impair starting. ventilation.
When the heater is running, smoke may be If the heater is used on a regular basis, then Remember that the preconditioning can be
emitted from the right-hand front wheel hous- the car should be driven for the same amount started by a timer that has been set for a long
ing and a low hum may be heard. A ticking of time that the heater is used in order to time in advance.
sound from the fuel pump may also be heard ensure that the car's battery is recharged with
from the rear section of the car. This is per- the same amount of energy as consumed by
fectly normal. the parking heater. The parking heater is used
WARNING
for a maximum of 40 minutes each time. If there is a smell of fuel, unusual amounts of
smoke, black smoke, or unusual sounds com-
The parking heater starts automatically if the
ing from the parking heater, switch off the
parking climate's preconditioning* is activated heater and, if possible, pull out its fuse. Volvo
and the passenger compartment needs to be recommends that an authorised Volvo work-
heated up. shop should be contacted for repair.
It is switched off automatically when the right
temperature, the time of a set timer or the heat- Related information
er's maximum running time has been reached. • Heater* (p. 207)
The heater's maximum running time is • Additional heater* (p. 209)
40 minutes. • Parking climate* (p. 200)
• Fuses in engine compartment (p. 556)
CLIMATE CONTROL
Additional heater* Activating/deactivating automatic start

The auxiliary heater helps to heat the passenger for the additional heater
compartment and engine while driving. It is possible to set whether automatic start for
the additional heater should be activated/deacti-
The additional heater is one of two subfunctions vated.
of the car's heater. The heater is fitted in the
front right-hand wheel housing. 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
NOTE 2. Press Climate.
When the heater is running, smoke may be 3. Select Additional Heater to activate/deac-
emitted from the right-hand front wheel hous- tivate automatic start of the additional heater.
ing and a low hum may be heard. A ticking
sound from the fuel pump may also be heard NOTE
from the rear section of the car. This is per-
fectly normal. Volvo recommends that the automatic start
for the additional heater should be switched
off for short driving distances.
The additional heater starts and is controlled
automatically when heating is required while the
car is being driven. Related information
• Heater* (p. 207)
It switches off automatically when the car is
switched off. • Parking heater* (p. 208)
NOTE
Make sure there is enough fuel in the car's
normal fuel tank if the auxiliary heater needs
to be used.
LOADING AND STORAGE
LOADING AND STORAGE
Passenger compartment interior Rear seat Tunnel console

Overview of the passenger compartment's inte- The tunnel console is located between the front
rior and storage locations. seats.
Front seat
Storage compartment in the door panel, cup holder* in

the centre seat backrest, storage pocket* on the front
seat backrest and also electrical sockets in the tunnel
console, as well as storage compartment under the seat.
Storage compartment with hatch*. The hatch
Storage compartment in the door panel, glovebox and is opened/closed with a push on the handle.
sun visor. WARNING
Keep loose objects such as mobile phones, Storage compartment with cup holder for
cameras, remote controls for accessories, etc. driver and passenger as well as 12V socket.
in the glove compartment or other compart- Storage compartment and USB port under
ments. Otherwise they may injure people in the armrest.
the car in the event of sudden braking or a
collision. Climate controls for the rear seat climate
functions* or storage compartment.
Related information
• Tunnel console (p. 212) NOTE
• Using the glovebox (p. 218) One of the detectors for the alarm* is located
under the tunnel console's cup holder. Avoid
• Sun visors (p. 219)
leaving coins, keys and other metal objects in
• Electrical sockets (p. 214) the cup holder, since this may trigger the
Storage spaces with cup holder, electrical socket and
USB port in the tunnel console. alarm.
LOADING AND STORAGE
Related information
• Passenger compartment interior (p. 212)
• Electrical sockets (p. 214)
• Connecting a device via USB port (p. 468)
• Climate controls at the rear of the tunnel
console* (p. 182)
LOADING AND STORAGE
Electrical sockets Electrical socket in the tunnel console - 3. Disconnect the accessory by pulling out the
In the tunnel console there are two 12 V electri- rear seat* plug - do not pull on the cable.
cal sockets and one 230 V electrical socket*, in Pull up the cover when the socket is not
the cargo area there is one 12 V electrical being used or the socket is left unattended.
socket*.
For the sockets to supply current, the car's elec- IMPORTANT

trical system must be set in the lowest ignition Maximum socket output is 150 W.
position I. The sockets are then active as long as
the starter battery level does not become too low.
IMPORTANT
If the engine is switched off and the car is locked,
the sockets are deactivated. If the engine is • Do not use accessories with large or
switched off and the car is not locked, or is heavy connectors - they can damage the
locked with blocked lock position temporarily socket or come loose when driving.
deactivated, then the sockets continue to be Electrical socket in the tunnel console, rear seat. • Do not use accessories that can cause
active for a further ten minutes. The socket can be used for various accessories interference to the car's radio receiver or
requiring a 230 V supply, e.g. chargers and lap- electrical system for example.
NOTE top computers. • Position the accessory so that it is not at
Remember that use of the electrical socket risk of injuring the driver or passengers in
Using the socket
with the engine switched off entails a risk of the event of heavy braking or collision.
1. Pull down the socket cover and insert the
discharging the starter battery, which can limit accessory's plug. • Keep an eye on connected accessories
functionality. as they can generate heat that can burn
> The LED1 lamp on the socket indicates
Accessories that are connected to the electri- passengers or the interior.
the status.
cal sockets may be activated even when the
2. Check that the lamp is illuminated with a
car's electrical system is disconnected or if WARNING
steady green light - only then is current avail-
preconditioning is used. For this reason, dis-
able at the socket. • Only use accessories that are undam-
connect the connectors when they are not in
use in order to avoid the starter battery being aged and fault-free. The accessories
discharged. must be rated for 230 V and 50 Hz with
connectors designed for the socket. The
LOADING AND STORAGE
accessories must have a CE marking, UL

marking or an equivalent safety marking. Status indication
• Never allow sockets, connectors or An LED2 lamp on the socket indicates the status
accessories to come into contact with of the socket:
water or other liquids. Do not touch or
use the socket if it appears to be dam-
aged or has come into contact with water
or other liquid.
• Do not connect junction sockets, adapt-
ers or extension cables to the socket as
these can override the socket's safety
features.
• The socket is equipped with a protective
cover, ensure that nothing protrudes in or
damages the socket preventing the cover
from doing its job. Do not leave children
in the car unsupervised when the socket
is active.
lead to severe or fatal electric shocks.
Status indication Reason Action

Steady green light The socket is delivering current to a connected device. None.
2 LED (Light Emitting Diode) }}
215
LOADING AND STORAGE
|| Status indication Reason Action

Blinking orange light The temperature of the socket's voltage converter is too high (because for Remove the plug and let the voltage converter cool
example the accessory draws too high a current or the passenger compart- down before reinserting the plug.
ment is too warm).
The connected accessory draws too much current (intermittently or continu- None. The accessory cannot be connected to the
ously) or is defective. socket.
Extinguished lamp The socket does not sense that a plug has been inserted. Check that the plug is properly inserted into the
socket.
The socket is not active. Switch the car's electrical system to the lowest igni-
tion position I.
The socket has been active but is now deactivated. Start the engine and/or charge the starter battery.
If the problem persists, contact a workshop - an 12 V electrical socket

authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
WARNING
Never modify or repair the 230 V electrical
socket yourself. Volvo recommends that an
authorised Volvo workshop should be contac-
ted.
12 V electrical socket in tunnel console, rear seat.

12 V electrical socket in tunnel console, front seat.
216
LOADING AND STORAGE
Related information
• Passenger compartment interior (p. 212)
12 V electrical socket in cargo area*.

The sockets can be used for various accessories
designed for 12 V, such as music players, cooler
boxes and mobile phones.
IMPORTANT
Maximum socket output is 120 W (10 A) per
socket.
Using the sockets

1. Remove the blanking plug (tunnel console)
or fold down the cover (cargo area) and plug
in the accessory.
2. Unplug the accessory's connector and refit
the blanking plug (tunnel console) or fold up
the cover (cargo area) when the socket is
not being used or if the socket is left unat-
tended.
LOADING AND STORAGE
Using the glovebox Using the glovebox as a cooled area*

The glovebox is located on the passenger side. The glovebox can be used for cooling of e.g.
drinks or food. The cooling works when the cli-
mate control system is active (i.e. when the car is
set in ignition position II or when the engine is
running).
The key's designated storage space
The printed owner's manual and maps can be

kept in the glovebox, for example. There is also a
pen holder on the inside of the lid. There is also a
card holder at the upper edge of the glovebox. Cooling activated
Locking/unlocking the glovebox* Cooling deactivated
The glovebox can be locked, e.g. when the car is
taken in for service, left at a hotel or similar. The – Activate/deactivate the cooling by moving
glovebox can only be locked/unlocked with the the control to the end position toward the
accompanying key. passenger compartment/glovebox.
Locking the glovebox: Related information
Insert the key in the glovebox lock cylinder. • Passenger compartment interior (p. 212)
Turn the key 90 degrees clockwise. • Using private locking (p. 244)
Pull out the key.
– Unlock by carrying this out in reverse order.
LOADING AND STORAGE
Sun visors Cargo area Recommendations for loading

The rear of each sun visor includes a vanity mir- The car has a flexible cargo area that makes it There are a number of things to remember when
ror with card holder. possible to transport and secure large objects. loading the car.
By folding down the backrests in the rear seat, Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. The
the cargo area can become quite spacious. To total of the weight of the passengers and all
facilitate loading and unloading, the rear section accessories reduces the car's payload by a cor-
of the car can be lowered with the level control responding weight.
function*. Use load retaining eyelets or bag hold-
ers to secure the load, and the extendable cargo WARNING
cover* to conceal the load if desired. The car’s driving properties change depend-
ing on the weight and positioning of the load.
The car's towing eye and puncture repair kit or
spare wheel* are stored under the cargo area
floor. Loading in the cargo area
• Position the load firmly against the rear
Related information seat's backrest.
Vanity mirror with lighting plus card holder. • Through-load hatch in the rear seat (p. 222)
• Centre the load.
The vanity mirror lighting* is switched on auto- • Lowering the backrests in the rear seat
• Heavy objects should be placed as low as
matically when the lid is lifted. (p. 126) possible. Avoid placing heavy loads on low-
The vanity mirror frame incorporates a holder for • Level control* and shock absorption (p. 423) ered backrests.
e.g. cards or tickets. • Recommendations for loading (p. 219) • Cover sharp edges with something soft to
• Tool kit (p. 522) avoid damaging the upholstery.
Related information
• Passenger compartment interior (p. 212) • Secure all loads to the load retaining eyelets
with straps or web lashings.
WARNING
A loose object weighing 20 kg (44 pounds)
can, in a frontal collision at a speed of
50 km/h (30 mph) carry the impact of an
item weighing 1000 kg (2200 pounds).
}}
LOADING AND STORAGE
|| WARNING Level control of the car's rear section* During driving, the rear section height will return
The car's rear section can be lowered/raised in to the normal level.
The protection provided by the inflatable cur- order to create a better working height for the
tain in the headlining may be compromised or
eliminated by high loads. car's cargo area or to assist when a trailer shall NOTE
be coupled/uncoupled to/from the towbar*.
• Never load cargo above the backrest. It is not possible to adjust the height of the
Level control is performed via a control at the rear section when one or more of the doors
rear on the right-hand side in the cargo area's or the bonnet is open. This does not apply to
WARNING side panel. the tailgate.
Always secure the load. During heavy braking
the load may otherwise shift, causing injury to
the car's occupants. WARNING
Cover sharp edges and sharp corners with Pay attention to ensure that there is no per-
something soft. son, animal or object under the car when low-
ering. This would involve danger to life and
Switch off the engine and apply the parking damage to the car or object.
brake when loading/unloading long items.
Otherwise you may accidentally knock the
gear lever or gear selector with the load into a Roof load and loading on load carriers
drive position - and the car could then move For loading on the car's roof, the load carriers3
off. that Volvo have developed are recommended.
This is in order to avoid damage to the car and in
Increasing the space in the cargo area Controls for raising/lowering the car's rear section.
order to achieve the maximum possible safety
To expand the cargo area and simplify loading, during a journey.
the rear seat's backrest can be lowered. Note The control consists of two buttons - one button
that lowers and one button that raises the rear Carefully follow the installation instructions sup-
that objects must not prevent the function of the plied with the carriers.
WHIPS system for the front seats if any of the section of the car. For raising or lowering, each
rear seat's backrests is folded down. button must be held depressed until the rear sec- • Check periodically that the load carriers and
tion has reached the desired level. load are properly secured. Lash the load
A through-load hatch in the rear seat can be securely with retaining straps.
folded down for carrying long and narrow loads. It is not possible to raise the car's rear section
higher than its normal level. • Distribute the load evenly over the load carri-
ers. Put the heaviest objects at the bottom.
3 Volvo's load carriers are available for purchase at authorised Volvo dealers.
LOADING AND STORAGE
• The size of the area exposed to the wind, and Load retaining eyelets Bag hooks
therefore fuel consumption, increase with the The folding load retaining eyelets are used to Bag hooks keep carrier bags in place and pre-
size of the load. fasten straps in order to anchor items in the vent them from overturning and spreading their
• Drive gently. Avoid quick acceleration, heavy cargo area. contents across the cargo area.
braking and hard cornering.
Along the sides
WARNING
The car's centre of gravity and driving charac-
teristics are altered by roof loads.
Read about maximum permitted roof load in
the section on Weights.
Related information
• Load retaining eyelets (p. 221)
• Through-load hatch in the rear seat (p. 222)
• Lowering the backrests in the rear seat
(p. 126)
WARNING There is a bag hook in the side panel on each
• Safety grille* (p. 226)
Hard, sharp and/or heavy objects which pro- side of the cargo area.
• Safety net* (p. 224) trude may cause injury under violent braking.
IMPORTANT
• Cargo cover* (p. 222) Always secure large and heavy objects with a
seatbelt or cargo retaining straps. The bag hooks may be loaded with a maxi-
• Weights (p. 581)
mum of 5 kg (11 lbs).
Related information
• Recommendations for loading (p. 219) Related information
• Bag hooks (p. 221) • Recommendations for loading (p. 219)
• Safety grille* (p. 226) • Safety grille* (p. 226)
• Safety net* (p. 224) • Safety net* (p. 224)
• Cargo cover* (p. 222) • Cargo cover* (p. 222)
LOADING AND STORAGE
Through-load hatch in the rear seat Cargo cover* Then insert the other end piece in the recess
The hatch in the rear seat's backrest can be In the extended position, the cargo cover and in the side panel on the opposite side.
opened to transport long narrow items, e.g. skis. the rear panel prevent visual access to the cargo Ensure that the front panel is pointing down
area. behind the backrests before the cassette is
put in place.
Installation
Press down the end pieces on both sides -

1. In the cargo area, grip the hatch's handle and one by one.
fold down the hatch. > When a "click" is heard and the red mark-
2. Fold forward the armrest in the rear seat. Insert one of the cargo cover's end pieces in ing on each end piece has disappeared,
the recess in the side panel in the cargo the cargo cover is attached - check that it
If the private locking* function is used then the area. is affixed securely.
hatch must be closed.
Usage
Related information There are two extended positions for the cargo
• Using private locking (p. 244) cover - a full-cover position and a loading posi-
• Recommendations for loading (p. 219) tion, where it is partially extended to make it eas-
• Load retaining eyelets (p. 221) ier to reach further into the cargo area.
LOADING AND STORAGE
Full-cover position Returning to full-cover position from loading posi-

tion:
1. Grip the handle and pull the cargo cover
down to the end position. To facilitate, angle
up the handle slightly so that the attachment
pins pass the stops.
2. Release the handle so that the attachment
pins engage.
> The cover is locked in the full-cover posi-
tion.
Grip the handle and pull the cargo cover out
to the end position. The rear panel fitted to the inside of the tailgate comple- IMPORTANT
Hook the attachment pins into the recesses ments the cargo cover. The cargo cover may obscure the view to the
at the cargo area's rear pillars. Loading mode rear when in the loading position. Make sure
> The cargo cover is locked in the full-cover From the full-cover position: the cargo cover is fully extended or fully
position. retracted when driving.
–
Press the cargo cover's handle section

upwards slightly.
Cargo cover in full-cover position. > The cover goes up until it stops in the
loading position.
}}
223
LOADING AND STORAGE
|| Retracting Safety net* Installation

1. From the full-cover position: The safety net prevents loads from being thrown
Lift up the handle and pull it backward to dis- forward in the passenger compartment in the WARNING
engage the cargo cover's attachment pins event of sudden braking. It is necessary to ensure that the upper secur-
and then release. ing points of the safety net are fitted correctly
The safety net is fitted into four mounting points.
and that the puller-straps are hooked in prop-
From loading position: erly.
Grip the handle and pull out the cargo cover Damaged safety nets must not be used.
in the grooves - pull to the full-cover position.
Lift up the handle and pull it backward to dis-
engage the attachment pins and then NOTE
release. With forward mounting, the safety net is most
2. Retract the cover with its attachment pins easily mounted via one of the rear doors.
outside of the side panels until it stops in the
retracted position. 1. Unfold the safety net and make sure that the
split upper rod in the net is locked in its
Removal extended position.
In retracted position:
2. Hook one retaining hook of the net into the
1. Depress the button on one of the retracted For reasons of safety, the safety net must always front or rear roof mounting with the anchor-
cargo cover's end pieces and lift out that be fastened and anchored as described below. ing strap locks turned towards you.
end.
The net is made of a strong nylon fabric and can 3. Hook the net's other retaining hook into the
2. Angle the cover up/out carefully. be secured two different locations in the car: roof mounting on the opposite side - the
> The other end piece loosens automatically • Rear fitting - behind the rear seat. telescopic spring-loaded retaining hooks
and the cover can be lifted out of the facilitate alignment.
cargo area. • Front fitting - behind the front seats.
Take care to press forward the net's retain-
Related information WARNING ing hooks for each respective roof moun-
• Recommendations for loading (p. 219)
Loads in the luggage compartment must be
ting's front end position.
• Safety net* (p. 224) anchored well, and also using a correctly fit-
ted safety net.
• Load retaining eyelets (p. 221)
LOADING AND STORAGE
4. Rear fitting: With the net fitted in the rear Removing and storing
roof mountings, hook the safety net's anchor- The safety net can be easily removed and folded
ing straps into the front floor eyes in the up.
cargo area.
1. Reduce safety net tension by pressing the
button in the anchoring strap lock and feed-
ing out a little of the anchoring strap on each
side.
2. Press in the catches and detach both of the
anchoring strap's hooks.
3. Undo the upper attachments and release the
net from the roof mountings.
Front fitting.
4. Press the red button on the rod to enable
Pay attention to make sure that you do not folding and then roll up the net.
press the seat/backrest hard against the net
when the seat/backrest is moved back again Related information
Rear fitting.
- only adjust until the seat/backrest makes • Recommendations for loading (p. 219)
Front fitting: With the net fitted in the front

contact with the net. • Cargo cover* (p. 222)
roof mountings, hook the anchoring straps 5. Tension the safety net with the anchoring • Load retaining eyelets (p. 221)
into the outer eyes on the rear of the seat straps.
slide rails - it is easier if the backrests are
straightened and the seats are moved for- IMPORTANT
ward slightly.
If the seat/backrest is pressed hard back-
wards against the safety net then the net
and/or its roof mountings could be damaged.
LOADING AND STORAGE
Safety grille* Installation

The safety grille prevents loads or pets in the
cargo area from being thrown forward in the IMPORTANT
passenger compartment.
The safety grille must only be used in the rear
The safety grille is crash-tested in accordance position (behind the rear seat) described
with the ECE R17 legal requirement and fulfils here.
Volvo's strength requirements.
Before first installing the safety grille, the existing
plastic roof mountings must be replaced with
steel roof mountings. Volvo recommends that 4. Insert the supplied screw and tighten using
replacing roof mountings is performed at an the supplied 6 mm Allen key. Repeat on the
authorised Volvo workshop or dealer. other side. Recommended tightening torque:
20 Nm.
1. Fold the rear seat's backrest forward.
> Check that the safety grille is properly fit-
2. Make sure that the safety grille is turned in ted.
the right direction. Lift in the safety grille
5. Restore the backrest to the upright position.
through one of the rear side doors.
For more information about the tools required
and methods for fitting/removal, see the installa-
tion instructions that were included with the initial
For safety reasons, the safety grille must always purchase.
be attached and anchored correctly.
IMPORTANT
WARNING The protective grille cannot be folded up or
Under no circumstances may anybody remain down when a cargo cover is fitted.
in the cargo area while the car is moving. This
is to avoid injury in the event of heavy braking
or an accident. 3. Position the safety grille's brackets on the Related information
roof mountings. • Recommendations for loading (p. 219)
The next step is facilitated if two people hold • Load retaining eyelets (p. 221)
the safety grille in the right position.
LOADING AND STORAGE
• Safety net* (p. 224)

• Cargo cover* (p. 222)
LOCKS AND ALARM
LOCKS AND ALARM
Remote control key key then has a range extending in a semicircle can be ordered. A total of twelve keys can be
The remote control key locks/unlocks the doors, with a radius of approx. 1.5 metres (5 feet) out programmed and used for one single car. If addi-
tailgate and fuel filler flap. The remote control from the driver's door and approx. 1 metre tional keys are ordered, additional driver profiles
key needs to be inside the car for it to be (3 feet) out from the tailgate respectively. See are added - one per new remote control key. This
started. the section "Remote control key range". also applies for the key tag.
With keyless starting and keyless locking/unlock- In the event of a lost key, see the heading "Loss
ing, the remote control key can be located any- of a remote control key" below.
where in the passenger compartment or the
cargo area and maintain the functionality to start Remote control key buttons
the car.
Each of the remote control keys that are supplied
with the car can be linked to a driver profile with
unique settings for the car. When a key with a
specific profile is used, the car's settings are
adjusted to match the settings for that profile.
See the section "Driver profiles".
Button-less key (Key Tag)

Remote control key, on left, and button-less key (Key
For cars equipped with keyless locking/unlock-
Tag), on right.
ing*, a slightly smaller, lighter and button-less key
The remote control key is not physically used (Key Tag) is supplied. It works the same way as
when starting since the car is equipped with sup- the normal remote control key when it comes to The remote control key has four buttons - one on the
port for keyless starting (Passive Start) as stand- left-hand side and three on the right-hand side.
keyless starting and locking/unlocking1. It has no
ard. The key needs to be located in the front of detachable key blade and the battery cannot be Locking - Pressing the button locks the
the passenger compartment, e.g. in the driver’s replaced. A new key tag can be ordered from an doors, tailgate and fuel filler flap and also
pocket or in the cup holder in the tunnel console, authorised Volvo workshop. arms the alarm*. Press and hold to close all
to be able to start the car. See the section "Star- of the windows and the panorama roof*
ting the engine". Ordering additional keys simultaneously. See the section "Locking/
As an option, keyless locking/unlocking of doors The car is supplied with two remote control keys
and tailgate (Passive Entry*) is also available. The - one key tag is supplied if the car is equipped
with keyless locking/unlocking*. Additional keys
1 The key is waterproof to a depth of approx. 10 metres (30 feet) for up to 60 minutes, which makes it suitable for use in activities in and around water.
LOCKS AND ALARM
unlocking from the outside" and "Locking/ WARNING If there is still interference - use the remote con-
unlocking from the inside". trol key's key blade and then place the key in the
If anyone is left in the car, make sure the backup reader in the cup holder to disarm the
Unlocking - Pressing the button unlocks power windows and sunroof are de-energised
the doors and tailgate and also disarms the car. See section "Locking/unlocking with the
by always taking the remote control key with
alarm. A longer press opens all the windows you when you leave the car. detachable key blade".
simultaneously, also called Global opening2.
See the section "Locking/unlocking from the NOTE
outside". NOTE
When the remote control key is placed in the
Tailgate - Unlocks the tailgate only and Be aware of the risk of locking the remote cup holder, make sure that no other car keys,
disarms its alarm. On cars with power oper- control key/Key Tag in the car. metal objects or electronic apparatus (e.g.
ated tailgate*, the tailgate is opened auto- A remote control key/Key Tag left in the car mobile phones, tablets, laptops or chargers)
matically when the button is held depressed. will be deactivated when the car is locked and are in the cup holder. Several car keys close
The tailgate is also closed with a long press - the alarm is armed using another valid key. to each other in the cup holder can cause
acoustic warning signals sound. See the sec- The "Deadlock" function is also deactivated. interference with each other.
tion "Power operated tailgate".
The deactivated key is reactivated when the
Panic function – Used to attract attention car is unlocked. Loss of a remote control key
in an emergency. Press and hold the button If you lose a remote control key then a new one
for at least 3 seconds or press it twice within can be ordered at a workshop - an authorised
3 seconds to activate the direction indicators Interference Volvo workshop is recommended. The remaining
and the horn. The function can be turned off Remote control key functions for keyless starting remote control keys must be taken to the work-
with the same button once it has been active and keyless locking/unlocking* can be disrupted shop. The code of the missing key must be
for at least 5 seconds. Otherwise the func- by electromagnetic fields and screening. erased from the system as a theft prevention
tion switches off automatically after measure.
3 minutes. NOTE
The current number of keys registered to the car
Avoid storing the remote control key close to can be checked in the centre display's top view.
metal objects or electronic apparatus, e.g.
mobile phones, tablets, laptops or chargers - Related information
preferably no closer than 10-15 cm • Remote control key range (p. 232)
(4-6 inches). • Detachable key blade (p. 245)
2 Used, for example, to quickly air the car during hot weather. }}
LOCKS AND ALARM
• Replacing the battery in the remote control Remote control key range cular area with a radius of approx. 1.5 metres
key (p. 252) In order for the remote control key to work prop- (5 feet) on both long sides and approx. 1 metre
• Locking/unlocking from the inside (p. 239) erly it needs to be within a certain distance from (3 feet) from the tailgate.
the car.
• Locking/unlocking from the outside (p. 235)
NOTE
• Driver profiles (p. 169) For manual use
The remote control key's functions for e.g. lock- The remote control key functions may be dis-
• Starting the car (p. 404)
rupted by surrounding radio waves, buildings,
ing/unlocking that are activated by pressing on
• Red Key - Restricted remote control key* topographical conditions, etc. The car can
(p. 233) or have a range that extends approx.
always be locked/unlocked with the key
20 metres (65 feet) from the car.
blade.
If the car does not verify a button being pressed -
move closer and try again.
If the remote control key is removed
For keyless use3 from the car
If the remote control key is removed
from the car when the engine is run-
ning, the warning message Car key
not found Removed from car is
shown in the driver display and an acoustic
reminder sounds when the last door is closed.
The message extinguishes when the key is
returned to the car, followed by a press of the
right-hand keypad's O button, or when the last
door is closed.
Related information
The marked area in the illustration shows areas covered • Remote control key (p. 230)
by the system's antennas. • Antenna locations for the start and lock sys-
For keyless use, a remote control key or the but- tem (p. 234)
ton-less key (Key Tag) must be within a semicir-
3 Only applies to cars equipped with the keyless locking/unlocking option (Passive Entry*).
LOCKS AND ALARM
Red Key - Restricted remote control car - at least one must be a normal remote con- Speed reminder4 (On/Off):
key* trol key. • Setting interval: 0-250 km/h (0-160 mph)
A Red Key enables the car owner to set limits for The settings for Red Key are made by the user of • Setting during first use is: 50, 70 and
certain car properties. The restrictions are the normal remote control key from the centre 90 km/h (30, 45 and 55 mph)
intended to promote safe driving of the car, e.g. display's top view; go to: Settings System
when it is loaned out.
• Increments: 1 km/h (1 mph)
Driver Profiles Red Keys • Max. number of simultaneous reminders: 6
Some of the car's driver support functions cannot Muted max. volume4 (On/Off):
be deactivated by the user of a Red Key. • Setting at first use: On
The restrictions are intended to act as measures Adaptive cruise control*:
to reduce the risk of accidents, thereby making it • Setting at first use: Longest intervals
feel safer to hand over the car to e.g. young dri-
vers, valet parking or a workshop. The settings • See the section "Adaptive cruise control" for
more information
cannot be changed by the person using a Red
Key. Driver support functions
Possible settings The following driver support functions will always
be active for the user of a Red Key:
The following settings can be made to apply for a
Red Key: • Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* - see section
For a Red Key, it is possible to define the car's "Blind Spot Information"
Speed limiter (Speed Limiter)4 (On/Off):
maximum speed, set speed reminders and deter-
• Setting interval: 50-250 km/h (30-160 mph) • Lane assistance (LDW and LKA)* - see sec-
mine the loudspeaker system's maximum volume. tion "Lane assistance"
In addition, some of the car's driver support sys- • Setting during first use is 120 km/h
tems will always be active. Other functions of the (75 mph) • Distance warning* - see section "Distance
warning"
key are the same as those of a normal remote • Increments: 1 km/h (1 mph)
control key. The driver display shows the symbol • City Safety - see section "City Safety"
One or more Red Keys can be ordered from a and message • Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - see section
Volvo dealer. A total of eleven keys with restric- "Driver Alert Control"
Red key Speed limitation cannot
tions can be programmed and used for a single be exceeded. • Road Sign Information* - see section "Road
Sign Information".
4 Option, only available with Red Key. }}
LOCKS AND ALARM
|| Related information Antenna locations for the start and WARNING

• Remote control key (p. 230) lock system
People with pacemaker operations should not
• Adaptive cruise control* (p. 290) The car is equipped with a keyless start and lock come closer than 22 cm (9 inches) to the
system5 and therefore has a number of built-in keyless system's antennas with their pace-
antennas positioned at different locations in the maker. This is to prevent interference
• BLIS* (p. 349) car. between the pacemaker and the keyless sys-
• City Safety (p. 336) tem.
• Lane Keeping Aid (p. 365)

Related information
• Driver Alert Control (p. 363)
• Road Sign Information* (p. 357)
• Driver profiles (p. 169)
Under the cup holder in the front section of

the tunnel console
In the upper front section of the left-hand
rear door6
In the upper front section of the right-hand
rear door6
In the cargo area6
5 The keyless lock system only applies to cars equipped with keyless locking/unlocking (Passive Entry*).
6 Only in cars equipped with keyless locking/unlocking (Passive Entry*).
LOCKS AND ALARM
Locking/unlocking from the outside activated when all the doors and the tailgate are Settings for remote-controlled unlocking
The car is locked/unlocked from the outside closed and locked. It is possible to select different sequences for
using buttons on the remote control key or with unlocking.
NOTE
the door or tailgate handles if the car is equip- 1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top
ped with keyless locking/unlocking (Passive Be aware of the risk of locking the remote
view.
Entry)*. The tailgate can be operated via power control key/Key Tag in the car.
operation* and/or foot movement*. 2. Press My Car Locking Remote and
A remote control key/Key Tag left in the car
will be deactivated when the car is locked and Interior Unlock.
Locking/unlocking with the remote the alarm is armed using another valid key. 3. Select option:
control key The "Deadlock" function is also deactivated.
• All Doors
The deactivated key is reactivated when the
- unlocks all doors simultaneously.
car is unlocked.
• Single Door
- unlocks the driver's door. Unlocking all of
WARNING
the doors requires two presses on the
Do not allow anyone to remain in the car with- remote control key's unlock button.
out first deactivating the deadlocks in order to
avoid the risk of anyone being locked in. The settings made for the Remote and Interior
Unlock function also affect central unlocking via
opening handles from the inside. For more infor-
Unlocking
mation about how unlocking from the inside is
If it is not possible to lock/unlock with the remote
affected, see the section "Locking/unlocking
control key, the battery may be discharged - in
The buttons on the remote control key can be from the inside".
which case, lock or unlock the driver's door with
used to lock/unlock all doors and the tailgate the detachable key blade. See the section
simultaneously.
Keyless* locking/unlocking
"Detachable key blade" for more information. If the car is equipped with keyless locking/
Locking unlocking*, it is sufficient to have the remote con-
The driver's door must be closed in order for the NOTE trol key in the vicinity e.g. in a pocket or a bag,
lock sequence to be activated. If any of the other Always try moving closer to the car and mak- making it more convenient to open the car if your
doors or the tailgate is open, then these are not ing another unlock attempt. hands are full. For information on the system's
locked and their alarms armed* until they are range, see the section "Remote control key
closed. The alarm's movement detectors* are range".
}}
LOCKS AND ALARM
|| Touch-sensitive surfaces NOTE Keyless locking

The outside of the door handles contains a All side doors must be closed to be able to lock
recess for locking, while the inside contains a It is important that only one touch-sensitive the car. The tailgate, on the other hand, can be
touch-sensitive surface for unlocking. The tail- surface is activated at a time. Gripping the open when locking the car with a side door han-
gate handle has a rubberised pressure plate that handle while touching the lock surface risks dle.
is only used for unlocking. giving double commands. This means that the
requested activity (locking/unlocking) will not – Touch the marked surface towards the rear
be executed, or will be executed with a delay. on the outside of a door handle after the
door has been closed, or press the lock7 but-
ton on the bottom edge of the tailgate before
NOTE closing it.
Be aware that the system may be activated in > The lock indicator in the windscreen starts
connection with car washing if the remote to flash to indicate the car is locked.
control key is in range. To close all side windows and the panoramic
roof* simultaneously - place a finger against the
touch-sensitive recess on the outside of the door
handle until all side windows and the panoramic
roof* have been closed.
Keyless entry
Touch-sensitive recess for locking
– Grasp a door handle or press the rubberised
Touch-sensitive surface for unlocking pressure plate beneath the tailgate handle to
unlock the car.
> The lock indicator in the windscreen extin-
guishes to confirm the car is unlocked -
open the doors or tailgate as usual.
Rubberised pressure plate on the tailgate used for

unlocking only.
7 See section "Power operated tailgate".
LOCKS AND ALARM
Settings for Keyless entry • Remote control key range (p. 232) Indication on locking/unlocking the
It is possible to select different sequences for • Detachable key blade (p. 245) car
Keyless entry. When the car is locked or unlocked using the
• Alarm* (p. 257)
1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top remote control key, the direction indicators con-
view. firm that locking/unlocking was correctly per-
formed.
2. Tap on My Car Locking Keyless
Unlock It is possible to separately adapt the indication for
locking/unlocking, see the heading "Select how
3. Select option: the car confirms locking and unlocking" for set-
• All Doors ting options.
- unlocks all doors simultaneously.
• Single Door
- unlocks selected door.
Automatic relocking
If none of the doors or the tailgate is opened
within two minutes of unlocking, they are locked
automatically. This function prevents the car from
being left unlocked unintentionally.
Unlocking with Volvo On Call

It is possible to remotely unlock the car with the
Volvo On Call* app.
See separate supplement for Volvo On Call.
Related information
• Locking/unlocking the tailgate (p. 242)
• Power operated tailgate* (p. 247)
}}
LOCKS AND ALARM
|| Exterior indication Lock and alarm indicator Indication in lock buttons

Locking Front doors
• The car's hazard warning flashers indicate
locking by flashing and retracting the door
mirrors8.
Unlocking
• The car's hazard warning flashers indicate
unlocking by two flashes and extending the
door mirrors8.
All doors, tailgate and bonnet must be closed to
indicate the car is locked. If locking is performed
with only the driver's door closed9, the car will be The lock and alarm indicator on the instrument panel
locked but indication will only occur after all show the status of the alarm system.
doors, tailgate and bonnet have been closed. Lock buttons with indicator lamp in the front door.
Long flash indicates locking of the car. When the
An illuminated indicator lamp in the lock button
car is locked, this will be indicated by short, pul-
of either front door indicates that all doors are
sating flashes.
locked. If any door is opened, the lamp will extin-
guish in both doors.
8 Only for cars with retractable power door mirrors.

9 Does not apply to cars equipped with the keyless locking/unlocking (Passive Entry*).
LOCKS AND ALARM
In all doors* Read more about indication of locking/unlocking Locking/unlocking from the inside
in section "Approach lighting" and "Adjusting the The doors and tailgate can be locked and
door mirrors". unlocked from inside using the central locking
controls in the front doors. The lock controls* on
Related information
the rear doors each lock their own rear door.
• Approach light duration (p. 144) Central locking
Lock button with indicator lamp in the rear door.

An illuminated indicator lamp in the lock button
for one of the doors indicates that the door in
question is locked. If any door is unlocked, its
lamp will extinguish while the others will continue
to illuminate.
Locking/unlocking button with indicator lamp in the
front door.
Select how the car confirms locking
and unlocking – Press the button to lock and the but-
Different options for indicating locking/unlocking ton to unlock.
can be set via the centre display.
Unlocking
– Press the button to unlock all side doors
view.
and the tailgate.
2. Press My Car Locking.
3. Select setting for Audible Locking
Feedback and Visible Locking Feedback
respectively.
}}
LOCKS AND ALARM
|| A long press on the button opens all the side Locking Settings for automatic locking
windows simultaneously - also called global – Press the button - both front doors must The doors and tailgate are locked automatically
opening10. be closed. when the car starts to move. To change this set-
ting:
Alternative unlocking method > All doors and the tailgate are locked.
A long press on the button closes all side view.
windows and the panorama roof* simultaneously.
2. Press My Car Locking.
Lock button* rear doors
3. Select Auto Lock Doors While Driving to
deactivate/activate this function.
Related information
• Indication on locking/unlocking the car
(p. 237)
Opening handle for alternative unlocking in the front
door.
– Pull the opening handle on one of the front
doors and release.
> If the All Doors option is selected for the Locking button with indicator lamp in the rear door.
Remote and Interior Unlock function The rear door lock buttons only lock their respec-
for the remote control key, all doors will be tive rear door.
unlocked. If the Single Door option is
To unlock the rear door:
selected, only this front door will be
unlocked and opened. – Pull the door handle - the rear door unlocks
and opens.
The options are selected in the settings view. For
more information, see the section "Locking/
unlocking from the outside".
10 Used, for example, to quickly air the car during hot weather.
LOCKS AND ALARM
Deadlocks* Temporarily deactivating the deadlock NOTE

Deadlock means that all opening handles are function
disengaged mechanically, which prevents door If someone is going to stay in the car but the • Remember that the alarm is activated
doors must be locked from the outside, then the when the car is locked.
opening from the inside when the car is locked
from the outside. deadlock function can be temporarily deactivated • If any of the doors are opened from the
with the Reduced guard function. The proce- inside then the alarm is triggered.
Deadlocks are activated with the remote control dure is the same as with the temporary disen-
key and in keyless locking (Passive Entry)*. gagement of the alarm's movement and tilt Related information
Deadlocks are activated with a delay of about detectors*.
10 seconds after the doors have locked. • Remote control key (p. 230)
Press the Reduced guard • Locking/unlocking from the outside (p. 235)
button in the centre display's
NOTE function view in order to deacti-
• Locking/unlocking from the inside (p. 239)
If a door is opened within the delay time then vate the deadlock function tem- • Locking/unlocking with the detachable key
the sequence is interrupted and the alarm is porarily. blade (p. 246)
deactivated. • Alarm* (p. 257)
After this, Reduced Guard is shown in the cen-
The car can only be unlocked with the remote tre display and deadlocks are temporarily deacti-
control key, keyless unlocking or the Volvo On vated in the subsequent locking of the car. Note
Call* app when deadlocks are activated. that the alarm's movement and tilt detectors* are
The front left door can also be unlocked with the switched off at the same time.
detachable key blade. If the car is unlocked with In conventional locking, the electrical sockets are
the detachable key blade, the alarm* will be trig- deactivated immediately, but when deadlocks are
gered. See the section "Alarm" for switching off temporarily deactivated, they will be active for a
the alarm. maximum of 10 minutes after locking.
If the car is unlocked and then locked again, the
WARNING
deadlock function must be deactivated again.
Do not allow anyone to remain in the car with-
out first deactivating the deadlocks in order to The system is reset the next time the engine is
avoid the risk of anyone being locked in. started.
LOCKS AND ALARM
Locking/unlocking the tailgate 1. Press the remote control key's button. Keyless unlocking of the tailgate*
The tailgate can be locked/unlocked and > The lock and alarm indicator on the instru-
opened in different ways depending on the ment panel extinguishes in order to show
equipment level of the car. that the alarm is not armed for the whole
of the car.
Unlocking the tailgate with the remote
control key The alarm's level and movement sensors
and the sensors for opening the tailgate
are disconnected.
The tailgate is unlocked, but remains
closed while the doors remain locked and
their alarm functions armed.
To open the tailgate, grip the rubber pres-
Rubber plate with pressure-sensitive surface.
sure plate beneath the tailgate handle
and open the tailgate. The tailgate is held closed by an electrical lock.
You simply need to have the remote control key
If the tailgate is not opened within
in the vicinity e.g. in a pocket or a bag.
2 minutes then it is relocked and the
alarm is re-armed. 1. To open the tailgate - lightly press on the
The alarm for the tailgate can be disarmed and the tail- rubberised pressure plate beneath the tail-
2. With the power operated tailgate option* -
gate unlocked by using the remote control key's gate handle.
button. Long press (approx. 1.5 seconds) on the > The lock is released.
remote control key's button
> The tailgate is unlocked and opened, NOTE
while the doors remain locked and their
If the remote key is not detected sufficiently
alarm functions armed.
close to the tailgate, locking/unlocking will
not work. See the section "Remote key
range" for more information.
LOCKS AND ALARM
2. Lift by the outside handle in order to fully Unlocking the tailgate from the inside Related information
open the tailgate. of the car • Remote control key (p. 230)
1. • Remote control key range (p. 232)
IMPORTANT
• Minimal force is required to release the
• Opening/closing the tailgate with foot move-
rear hatch lock - just gently press the rub-
ment* (p. 250)
berised panel.
• Do not place the lift force on the rubber
panel when opening the rear hatch - lift
the handle. Using too much force may
damage the electrical contacts on the rub-
ber panel.
WARNING
Do not drive with an open tailgate! Toxic Brief press on the button on the instru-
exhaust fumes could be drawn into the car ment panel.
through the cargo area. > The tailgate can be unlocked and opened
from the outside by grasping the rubber-
ised pressure plate.
2. With the power operated tailgate option* -
Long press on the button on the instru-
ment panel.
> The tailgate opens.
Locking with the remote control key

– Press the remote control key's button.
> The lock and alarm indicator on the instru-
ment panel starts to flash - the car is
locked and the alarm* is armed.
LOCKS AND ALARM
Using private locking 2. Enter the desired security code. NOTE

The tailgate can be locked with the private lock- > The security code is saved. The private
If the PIN code has been lost/forgotten, or if
ing function when the car is taken in for service, locking function is now ready to be acti-
the wrong PIN code has been entered more
left at a hotel or similar. vated.
than three times, the security code can be
If the system has been reset then the above pro- used to deactivate the private locking.
NOTE cedure needs to be repeated.
The car needs to be in ignition mode I as a
minimum for the private locking function to be Activate private locking NOTE
activated. 1. Press the button for private locking in the
If private locking is activated and the car is
function view.
unlocked via Volvo On Call* or the Volvo On
Function button for private > A pop-up window is shown. Call* app, private locking will be deactivated
locking. Depending on the cur- 2. Enter the code to be used in order to unlock automatically.
rent status of the lock, Private the tailgate after locking and tap on
locking unlocked or Private Confirm. Related information
locking locked is shown. > The tailgate is locked. Confirmation of • Using the glovebox (p. 218)
locking takes place by means of a green
indicator being shown by the button in the
Enter the security code before using for function view.
the first time
A security code needs to be selected during the Deactivate private locking
first time the function is used. It can then be used 1. Press the button for private locking in the
to deactivate private locking if the selected PIN function view.
code has been lost or forgotten. The security > A pop-up window is shown.
code acts as a PUK code for all subsequent PIN
codes set for the private locking function. 2. Enter the code that was used for locking and
tap on Confirm.
Save the security code in a safe place. > The tailgate is unlocked. Confirmation of
To create a security code: unlocking takes place by means of the
green indicator by the button in the func-
1. Press the button for private locking in the
tion view extinguishing.
function view.
LOCKS AND ALARM
Detachable key blade Detaching the key blade

The remote control key contains a detachable
key blade of metal with which a number of func-
tions can be activated and some operations car-
ried out.
The key blade's unique code is provided by

authorised Volvo workshops, which are recom-
mended when ordering new key blades.
The key blade's application areas Return the key blade to its intended position
Using the remote control key's detachable key Hold the remote control key with the in the remote control key after use.
blade: front visible and the Volvo logo facing the Refit the shell by pressing it downward
• the left-hand11 front door can be opened right way - slide the button at bottom edge until a clicking sound is heard.
manually if central locking cannot be acti- by the key ring to the right. Guide the front
vated with the remote control key. side's shell a few millimetres upwards. Then slide the shell back sedan.
• all doors are emergency locked - see the > A further click will indicate that the shell is
The shell will then come free and can be
section "Locking/unlocking with detachable securely attached.
lifted off the key.
key blade".
Related information
• the rear doors' mechanical child safety locks • Locking/unlocking with the detachable key
can be activated/deactivated - see the sec- blade (p. 246)
tion "Child safety locks".
The button-less key12 (Key Tag) does not have a
detachable key blade. If necessary, use the
detachable key blade from the normal remote
control key.
Detach the key blade by angling it up.
11 This applies whether the car is left-hand drive or right-hand drive.

12 Supplied with cars equipped with the keyless locking/unlocking option (Passive Entry*).
LOCKS AND ALARM
Locking/unlocking with the 5. Pull out the handle. 2. Then turn the start knob clockwise and
detachable key blade > The door opens. release it.
Amongst other things, the detachable key blade > The control automatically returns to its
Locking will be performed in the same way, but
can be used to unlock the car from the outside - starting position - the alarm signal stops
with an anticlockwise turn 45 degrees instead of
e.g. if the remote control key's battery has and the alarm switches off.
clockwise in step (3).
become discharged.
Switching off the alarm* Locking
Unlocking It is also possible to lock the car with the remote
control key's detachable key blade e.g. in the
NOTE
event of a loss of power or if the key's battery
When the door is unlocked using the key has become discharged.
blade and is then opened, the alarm is trig-
The left-hand front door can be locked with its
gered.
lock cylinder and the detachable key blade.
Other doors have no lock cylinders and instead
have a lock switch on the end of each door which
must be depressed using the key blade - they are
then mechanically locked/blocked to prevent
Pull out the front door handle on the left- them being opened from outside.
hand side13 to its end position so that the The doors can still be opened from the inside.
lock cylinder become visible.
Insert the key in the lock cylinder.
Turn clockwise 45 degrees so that the key The backup reader's location in the cup holder.
blade is pointing straight back.
Deactivate the alarm as follows:
Turn the key back 45 degrees to its starting
1. Place the remote control key in the backup
position. Remove the key from the lock cylin-
reader in the bottom of the cup holder in the
der and release the handle so that the rear
tunnel console.
section of the handle is resting against the
car again.
13 This applies whether the car is right-hand drive or left-hand drive.
LOCKS AND ALARM
NOTE Power operated tailgate*

The car's tailgate can be opened/closed electri-
• A door's lock reset only locks that partic-
cally.
ular door - not all doors simultaneously.
• A manually locked rear door with acti- Opening/closing via a foot movement is also
vated manual or electric child safety locks available as an extended option - see the section
cannot be opened from either the outside "Opening/closing the power operated tailgate
or the inside. A rear door that is locked in with foot movement" for more information.
this way can only be unlocked with the
remote control key or central locking but- Opening
ton. The tailgate can be opened with its handle, with
foot movement*, a button on the instrument
panel or the remote control key.
Manual locking of the door. Not to be mixed up with the Related information
child safety locks. Choose one of the following options to open the
• Detachable key blade (p. 245)
– Remove the detachable key blade from the tailgate:
remote control key. Insert the key blade in • Light press on the tailgate handle.
the hole for lock reset and press the key in
until the key bottoms, approx. 12 mm. • Long press on the instrument panel's
button. Keep it depressed until the tailgate
The door can be opened from both the out- starts to open.
side and the inside.
• Long press on the remote control key's
The door is blocked against opening from
button. Keep it depressed until the tailgate
the outside. To return to position A, the inner
starts to open.
door handle must be opened.
The doors can also be unlocked with the unlock • Foot movement* under the rear bumper.
button on the remote control key or with the cen-
tral locking button on the driver's door.
}}
LOCKS AND ALARM
|| – Press the button14 on the underside of Closing and locking

the tailgate to close. – Press the button14 on the underside of
the tailgate to close it and simultaneously
lock the tailgate and doors (all doors must be
closed for locking).
> The tailgate closes automatically - the tail-
gate and doors are locked, and the alarm*
is armed.
NOTE
If the remote key is not detected sufficiently
Opening/closing button on the instrument panel. close to the tailgate, locking/unlocking will
not work. See the section "Remote key
Closing range" for more information.
The tailgate can be closed via the instrument Button for closing and locking on the underside of the
panel's button, with foot movement*, with the tailgate.
> The tailgate closes automatically - the tail- NOTE
remote control key or the buttons14 along the
gate remains unlocked.
bottom edge of the tailgate. When using key-free* blocking/closing, three
Choose one of the following options to close the signals will sound if the key is not detected
NOTE
tailgate: sufficiently close to the tailgate. See the sec-
The button is active 24 hours after the hatch tions "Remote key range" and "Locks and
– Long press on the instrument panel's has been left open. Thereafter, it must be remote keys" for more information.
button or the remote control key's but- closed manually.
ton.
> The tailgate closes automatically and
IMPORTANT
acoustic signals sound - the tailgate
remains unlocked. During manual tailgate operation, open or
close it slowly. Do not use force to open/
close it if there is resistance. It may be dam-
aged and stop working correctly.
14 A car with keyless locking/entry (Passive Entry*) has one button for closing and one button for closing and locking.
LOCKS AND ALARM
Cancel opening/closing 2. Press the button on the underside of and the tailgate returns to the programmed
– Cancel opening/closing in one of the follow- the tailgate for at least 3 seconds. max. position.
ing ways: > Two short acoustic signals sound to indi-
• Press the button on the instrument panel. cate that the set position has been saved. WARNING
• Press the remote control key's button. To reset max. opening: Observe the risk of trapping when opening/
closing. Before starting opening/closing,
• Press the close button14 along the bottom – Manually move the tailgate to its highest check that there is nobody near to the tailgate
edge of the tailgate. possible position - press the button on as trapping may have serious consequences.
• Press the rubberised pressure plate the tailgate for at least 3 seconds. Always operate the tailgate with caution.
beneath the outside handle. > Two acoustic signals sound to indicate
• Using the foot movement* (see section that the set position has been cleared. Pre-tensioned springs
"Opening/closing power operated tailgate The tailgate will then assume its max.
with foot movement" for more informa- position when opened.
tion).
> Tailgate movement will be interrupted and NOTE
the tailgate will stop and can then be • If the system has been operating continu-
manoeuvred manually. ously for a long time, it is switched off to
avoid overload. It can be used again after
Programmable max. opening
about 2 minutes.
The maximum opening position of the tailgate
can be adjusted, e.g. to suit a low ceiling height in
a garage. Pinch protection
If something with sufficient resistance prevents
To adjust max. opening:
the tailgate from opening/closing then the pinch The pre-tensioned springs for the power operated tail-
1. Open the tailgate - stop it in the open posi- protection is activated. gate.
tion.
• During opening - movement is interrupted,
the tailgate stops and a long acoustic signal
sounds.
• During closing - movement is interrupted, the
tailgate stops, a long acoustic signal sounds
14 A car with keyless locking/entry (Passive Entry*) has one button for closing and one button for closing and locking. }}
LOCKS AND ALARM
|| WARNING Opening/closing the tailgate with Operation

foot movement*
Do not open the pre-tensioned springs for the
power operated tailgate. They are pre-ten- To facilitate the operation of the tailgate when
sioned with high pressure and can cause your hands are occupied, it can be opened/
injury if opened. closed by means of a forward kicking motion
under the rear bumper.
Related information
• Opening/closing the tailgate with foot move-
ment* (p. 250)
Kicking motion within the detector's valid activation area.
The sensor is positioned to the left of centre in the

bumper.
One of the car's remote control keys must be
within range15 behind the car in order for open-
ing/closing to be possible. This also applies to an
already unlocked car in order to avoid accidental
opening e.g. in a car wash.
15 See the section "Remote control key range" for more information.
LOCKS AND ALARM
Opening/closing If several kicking motions take place without an • Remote control key range (p. 232)
approved remote control key being located
NOTE behind the car, opening will not be possible until
after a certain delay.
The foot-operated tailgate function is availa-
ble in two versions: Do not leave your foot positioned under the car
during the kicking motion. This could cause acti-
• Opening and closing with foot movement vation to fail.
• Only unlocking with foot movement (lift Cancel opening/closing
up the tailgate manually to open it) – Make one slow forward kicking motion when
Note that the function for opening and clos- opening/closing is in progress in order to
ing with foot movement requires the "Power stop the movement of the tailgate.
operated tailgate"* option.
The remote control key does not have to be in
the vicinity of the car to cancel opening/closing.
– Make one slow, forward kicking motion
under the left part of the rear bumper. Then NOTE
take a step back. The bumper must not be
There is a risk of reduced function, or no
touched.
function, if the rear bumper is loaded with
> A short acoustic signal sounds when large amounts of ice, snow, dirt or similar. For
opening/closing is activated - the tailgate this reason, make sure you keep it clean.
is opened/closed.
If the tailgate is on open position then it is
always closed on activation via foot move- NOTE
ment. Pay attention to the possibility that the sys-
tem may be activated in a car wash or similar
The tailgate can also be closed via the instrument
if the remote key is within range.
panel's button, the remote control key or the but-
ton(s)16 under the tailgate. For more information,
see the section "Power operated tailgate". Related information
16 Only applies to a car equipped with keyless locking/entry (Passive Entry)*.
LOCKS AND ALARM
Replacing the battery in the remote The battery in the button-less key17 (Key Tag) Opening and changing
control key cannot be replaced - a new key can be ordered
The battery in the remote control key needs to from an authorised Volvo workshop.
be replaced when it has become discharged.
IMPORTANT
NOTE A discharged Key Tag must be handed over
All batteries have a limited service life and to an authorised Volvo workshop. The key
must eventually be replaced (does not apply must be deleted from the car since it is still
to Key Tag). The service life of the battery var- possible to use it to start the car via back-up
ies depending on how often the vehicle/key start.
is used. Hold the remote control key with the
front visible and the Volvo logo facing the
The battery for the remote control key should be right way - slide the button at bottom edge
replaced if: by the key ring to the right. Slide the front
side's shell a few millimetres upwards.
the information symbol illuminates and
the message Car key battery low The shell will then come free and can be
See Owner's manual is shown in the lifted off the key.
driver display
and/or
• the locks repeatedly do not react to signals
from the remote control key within 20 metres
(65 feet) of the car.
NOTE
Always try moving closer to the car and mak-
ing another unlock attempt.
17 This key is supplied with a car equipped with the keyless locking/entry option (Passive Entry*).
LOCKS AND ALARM
Turn the key, move the button to the side Use a screwdriver or similar to turn the bat- The battery (+) side is facing upwards. Then
and slide the back shell a few millimetres tery cover anticlockwise until the markings carefully prize loose the battery as illustrated.
upwards. meet at the OPEN text.
Carefully lift away the battery cover by press- IMPORTANT
The shell will then come free and can be
lifted off the key. ing e.g. a fingernail into the recess. Avoid touching new batteries and their con-
Then prize the battery cover upwards. tact surfaces with your fingers as this may
impair their function.
}}
253
LOCKS AND ALARM
|| NOTE
Volvo recommends that the batteries to be
used in the remote control key fulfil UN
Manual of Test and Criteria, Part III, sub-
section 38.3. Batteries fitted in the factory or
replaced by an authorised Volvo workshop
fulfil the above criteria.
Install a new battery with the (+) side up. Reposition the rear side's shell and press
Avoid touching the remote control key's bat- it down until a clicking sound can be heard.
tery contacts with your fingers.
Then slide the shell back sedan.
Place the battery in the holder with the
> A further click will indicate that the shell is
edge down. Then slide the battery forwards
properly positioned and securely attached.
so that it fastens under the two plastic
catches.
Press the battery down so that it fastens
under the upper black plastic catch. Refit the battery cover and turn it clockwise
until the marking aligns with the CLOSE text.
NOTE
Use batteries with the designation CR2032,
3 V.
254
LOCKS AND ALARM
Immobiliser The following error message in the driver display

The electronic immobiliser is a theft protection is related to the remote-controlled immobiliser
system that prevents an unauthorised person with tracking system:
from starting the car.
The car can only be started with the correct
remote control key. Remotely The remote-con-
immobilised trolled immobiliser
The following error message in the driver display
with tracking sys-
is related to the electronic immobiliser: Car not pos-
tem is activated.
sible to start
Turn the remote control key over and refit The car cannot be
the front side's shell by pressing it down until Symbol Message Specification started. Contact
a clicking sound can be heard. Car key not Error reading the Volvo On Call
found remote control key Service Centre.
Then slide the shell back sedan.
during starting -
> A further click will indicate that the shell is See Related information
place the key in the
securely attached. Owner's • Remote control key (p. 230)
cup holder near the
manual
key symbol and try • Remote control key range (p. 232)
IMPORTANT again.
Make sure that exhausted batteries are dis-
posed of in a manner which is kind to the Remote-controlled immobiliser with
environment. tracking system18
The car is fitted with a system which makes it
possible to track and locate the car and to
Related information
remotely activate the immobiliser, which prevents
starting the engine. Contact your nearest Volvo
dealer for more information and assistance with
activating the system.
18 Only certain markets and in combination with Volvo On Call*.
LOCKS AND ALARM
Child safety locks 2. Press the button in the driver's door control Symbol Message Specification
The child safety locks prevent children from panel.
being able to open a rear door from the inside. > The driver display shows the message Rear child Child safety
There is an electric* and a manual lock. Rear child lock Activated and the but- lock Acti- locks are acti-
ton's lamp illuminates - the locks are vated vated.
Electric activation/deactivation* active.
The electric child safety locks can be activated/ Rear child Child safety
deactivated in all ignition positions higher than 0. When the electric child safety lock is active then lock Deacti- locks are deacti-
Activation/deactivation can be performed up to the rear: vated vated.
2 minutes after switching off the engine, provided • windows can only be opened with the driver's
that no door is opened. See the section "Ignition door control panel Manual activation/deactivation
position" for more information.
• doors cannot be opened from inside.
To deactivate the locks:
– Press the button in the driver's door control
panel.
Rear child lock Deactivated and the
button's lamp goes out - the locks are
deactivated.
The current setting is stored when the engine is
switched off - if the child safety locks are acti-
vated at engine shutdown, the function will
remain activated the next time the engine is Manual child safety locks. Not to be mixed up with man-
Button for electric activation/deactivation. started. ual door locks.
1. Start the engine or choose an ignition posi- – Use the remote control key's detachable key
tion higher than 0. blade to turn the knob. For more information,
see the section "Detachable key blade".
LOCKS AND ALARM
The door is blocked against opening from Alarm* NOTE

the inside. The alarm alerts e.g. in the event of a break-in in
The movement sensors trigger an alarm in
The door can be opened from both the out- the car.
the event of movement in the passenger
side and the inside.
When armed, the alarm is triggered if: compartment - air currents are also regis-
tered. For this reason the alarm is triggered if
NOTE • a door, the bonnet or the tailgate is opened19 the car is left with a window or the panoramic
• A door's knob control only blocks that • a movement is detected in the passenger roof* open or if the passenger compartment
particular door - not both rear doors compartment (if fitted with a movement heater is used.
simultaneously. detector*) To avoid this: Close the window/panoramic
• Cars with an electric child safety lock do • the car is raised or towed away (if fitted with roof when leaving the car. If the car's inte-
not have a manual child lock. a tilt detector*) grated parking heater (or a portable electric
• the starter battery's cable is disconnected heater) shall be used - direct the airflow from
the air vents so that they are not pointing
Related information • the siren is disconnected.
upwards into the passenger compartment.
• Detachable key blade (p. 245) If there is a fault in the alarm system, Alternatively, reduced alarm level can be used
• Ignition positions (p. 403) the driver display shows the symbol - see the section further down in this article.
and the message Alarm system
failure Service required. In which Arming the alarm
case, contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo Lock and arm the car alarm as follows:
workshop is recommended.
• press the remote control key's lock button
NOTE • touch in the marked area on the outside of
the door handle20
Do not attempt to repair or alter components
in the alarm system yourself. Any such • push on the tailgate's rubberised pressure
attempts may affect the terms of the insur- plate20.
ance. If the car is equipped with a power-operated tail-
gate, the button on the underside of the tailgate
can also be used to lock the car and arm the car
alarm.

20 Only applies to a car with keyless locking/entry (Passive Entry*) }}
LOCKS AND ALARM
|| Deactivate the alarm Lock and alarm indicator Switch off the movement and tilt detectors in
Unlock and disarm the car alarm as follows: order to avoid accidental triggering of the alarm -
e.g. if a dog is left in a locked car or during trans-
• press the remote control key's unlock button
port on a car train or car ferry. The procedure is
• grip one of the door handles20 the same as with the temporary disengagement
• push on the tailgate's rubberised pressure of the "Deadlock" function.
plate20. Press the Reduced guard
Switching off a triggered alarm function view in order to switch
– Press the remote control key's unlock button off the movement and tilt
or set the car in ignition position I by turning detectors temporarily.
the start knob clockwise and then releasing.
NOTE A red LED on the instrument panel indicates the Related information
• Remember that the alarm is activated alarm system's status: • Automatic arming/rearming of the alarm*
when the car is locked. (p. 259)
• LED not lit – alarm not armed.
• If any of the doors are opened from the • Disarming the alarm* without working remote
inside then the alarm is triggered. • The LED flashes once every other second – control key (p. 259)
alarm is armed.
• Deadlocks* (p. 241)
• After the alarm has been disarmed, the LED
Alarm signals flashes rapidly for a maximum of 30 seconds
When the alarm has been triggered, the following or until ignition position I has been selected
happens: by turning the start knob clockwise and
• A siren sounds for 30 seconds or until the releasing it - the alarm has been triggered.
alarm is switched off.
Reduced alarm level
• The direction indicators flash for 5 minutes Reduced guard means that the movement and tilt
or until the alarm is switched off. detectors can be temporarily deactivated.
If the cause of alarm activation is not rectified,
the alarm cycle is repeated up to 10 times21.
20 Only applies to a car with keyless locking/entry (Passive Entry*)

LOCKS AND ALARM
Automatic arming/rearming of the Disarming the alarm* without Detection of unknown car
alarm* working remote control key component*
Automatic rearming of the alarm prevents the car The car can be unlocked and disarmed even if The "Foreign Component Detection" function
being left with the alarm disarmed unintention- the remote control key does not work, e.g. if the can detect whether an unknown car component
ally. remote control key's battery is dead. has been connected to the car.
If the car is unlocked with the remote control key 1. Open the driver's door with the detachable Each LED headlamp* is designed for the car. If
(which disarms the alarm) but none of the doors key blade. an unknown headlamp is connected, the driver
or the tailgate is opened within two minutes, then > The alarm is triggered. display shows a message Unknown car part.
the alarm is automatically re-armed. The car is Service required, unknown car part found.
relocked at the same time. Volvo recommends contacting an authorised
In certain markets, the alarm is re-armed auto- Volvo workshop.
matically after a certain delay after the driver's Related information
door has been opened and closed without being
locked.
• Book service and repair (p. 528)
Related information
• Alarm* (p. 257)
• Disarming the alarm* without working remote The backup reader's location in the cup holder.
control key (p. 259)
2. Place the remote control key in the backup
reader in the tunnel console's cup holder.
3. Turn the start knob clockwise and release it.
> The alarm is deactivated.
Related information
• Alarm* (p. 257)
• Automatic arming/rearming of the alarm*
(p. 259)
• Detachable key blade (p. 245)
LOCKS AND ALARM
Type approval for the remote Lock system keyless start (Passive
control key system Start) and keyless locking/unlocking
Type approval for the remote control key system (Passive Entry*)
can be read in the table.
CEM marking for the remote control key system. For

supplementary type approval number, see the table
below.
Country/Area Type approval

Jordan TRC/LPD/2014/250
Serbia P1614120100
Argentina CNC ID: C-14771
LOCKS AND ALARM

Brazil MT-3245/2015
Indonesia Nomor: 38301/SDPPI/2015

Malaysia RAAT/37A/0315/S(15-0663)
Mexico IFETEL: RLVDEVO15-0396
Russia
The United Arab Emirates ER37847/15

DA0062437/11
}}
261
LOCKS AND ALARM
|| Country/Area Type approval

Namibia TA-2016-02
South Africa TA-2014-1868
For more information about type approval for the

remote control key system, see
support.volvocars.com.
Remote control key

Morocco AGREE PAR L'ANRT MAROC
Numéro d’agrément: MR 10668 ANRT 2015
Date d’agrément: 24/07/2015
262
LOCKS AND ALARM

Mexico IFETEL
Marca: HUF
Modelo (s): HUF8423
NOM-121-SCT1-2009
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones:
(1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia
perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier
interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operación no deseada.
Oman
Serbia
}}
263
LOCKS AND ALARM

The United Arab Emirates
Namibia TA-2015-102
264
LOCKS AND ALARM
Key Tag
Morocco AGREE PAR L'ANRT MAROC
Numéro d’agrément: MR 10667 ANRT 2015
Date d’agrément: 24/07/2015
Mexico IFETEL
Marca: HUF
Modelo (s): HUF8432
NOM-121-SCT1-2009
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones:
(1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia
perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier
interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operación no deseada.
Oman
}}
265
LOCKS AND ALARM

Serbia
The United Arab Emirates
266
LOCKS AND ALARM

Namibia TA-2015-103
Related information
267
DRIVER SUPPORT
DRIVER SUPPORT
Speed-dependent steering force Settings My Car Drive Modes Stability system RSC1
Speed related power steering causes the steer- Steering force The stability system RSC minimises the risk of
ing wheel force to increase with the speed of the Steering force selection cannot be accessed dur- overturning, for example during a sudden evasive
car in order to give the driver enhanced sensitiv- ing a turn if the speed exceeds 10 km/h (6 mph). manoeuvre or if the car skids.
ity.
Related information The RSC system registers if and how much the
On motorways the steering feels firmer. When car's lateral inclination changes. This information
parking and at low speed steering is light and • Drive modes* (p. 418)
is used to calculate the risk of the car overturn-
requires only a slight effort. ing. If the car is at risk, its electronic stability con-
trol system engages, the engine torque is
NOTE reduced and one or more wheels are braked until
the car has regained its stability.
In certain situations the power steering may
become too hot and then needs to be tempo-
rarily cooled - during this time the power WARNING
steering operates with reduced power and Under normal driving conditions, the RSC sys-
turning the steering wheel may then be per- tem improves the car's road safety, but this
ceived to be slightly heavier. must not be taken as a reason to increase
speed. Always follow the normal precautions
In parallel with the temporarily reduced steer- for safe driving.
ing assistance, the driver display shows a
message.
Related information
• Electronic Stability Control ESC (p. 271)
Change the steering force level* • Safety (p. 56)
To select the steering force level, go to the "Drive
modes" section and see the description at the
alternative INDIVIDUAL under the heading
"Selectable drive modes".
For the car models without a drive mode control
with its INDIVIDUAL option, the selection of
steering force is instead made via the centre dis-
play's top view and the following search path:
DRIVER SUPPORT
Electronic Stability Control ESC2 The ESC system consists of the following func- braking when driving in low gear on slippery road
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) helps the tions: surfaces.
driver to avoid skidding and improves the car's • Active Yaw Control Involuntary wheel locking while driving can,
traction.
• Spin Control amongst other things, impair the driver's ability to
steer the car.
The activation of the ESC sys- • Traction control system
tem during braking may be Trailer stability assist*4
• Engine Drag Control
noticed as a throbbing sound. Trailer Stability Assist (TSA5) stabilises a car with
The car may accelerate slower • Trailer stability assist
attached trailer in situations where snaking
than expected when the accel- Active Yaw Control occurs. Also see section "Trailer Stability Assist"
erator pedal is depressed. The function checks the driving and brake force for more information.
of the wheels individually in order to stabilise the
WARNING car. NOTE
• The stability system ESC is supplemen- Spin Control The TSA function is deactivated if sport mode
tary driver support intended to facilitate The function prevents the driving wheels from is activated.
driving and make it safer – it cannot han- spinning against the road surface during acceler-
dle all situations in all traffic, weather and ation.
road conditions.
Related information
Traction control system • Sport mode for electronic stability control
• ESC is not a substitute for the driver's (p. 272)
attention and judgement. The driver is The function is active at low speed and transfers
always responsible for ensuring the car is power from the driving wheel that is spinning to • Symbols and messages for electronic stabil-
the one that is not. ity control (p. 273)
driven in a safe manner, at the appropri-
ate speed, with an appropriate distance to • Stability system RSC1 (p. 270)
Engine Drag Control
other vehicles, and in accordance with • Trailer Stability Assist* (p. 450)
current traffic rules and regulations. Engine Drag Control (EDC3) prevents involuntary
wheel locking, e.g. after shifting down or engine
1 Roll Stability Control

2 Electronic Stability Control
3 Engine Drag Control
4 Trailer stability assist is included when installing the Volvo genuine towbar.
5 Trailer Stability Assist
DRIVER SUPPORT
Sport mode for electronic stability – Tap on the ESC Sport Mode button in
control function view.
The ESC7 system is always activated — it can- > Sport mode is activated/deactivated, a
not be switched off. However, the driver can green/grey indicator is displayed in the
select Sport mode, which allows for a more button.
active driving experience. The driver display indicates Sport mode
In Sport mode the ESC system detects whether by displaying this symbol with a con-
the accelerator pedal, steering wheel movements stant glow until the function is deacti-
and cornering are more active than in normal vated or the engine is switched off. The
driving and then allows a certain degree of con- next time the engine is started, the ESC system
trolled skidding with the rear section before ESC is back in its normal mode again.
intervenes and stabilises the car. Limitations for Sport mode
For example, if the driver stops a controlled skid The ESC Sport Mode function cannot be
by releasing the accelerator pedal, the ESC sys- selected when one of the functions from speed
tem intervenes and stabilises the car. limiter, cruise control or adaptive cruise control is
activated.
Sport mode also provides maximum traction if the
car has become bogged down or is driving on a Related information
loose surface, such as sand or deep snow. • Electronic Stability Control ESC (p. 271)
Select/deselect Sport mode • Speed limiter* (p. 275)
The Sport mode is activated/ • Cruise control (p. 282)
deactivated in the centre dis-
play's function view. • Adaptive cruise control* (p. 290)
DRIVER SUPPORT
Symbols and messages for Control -ESC) can be shown on the driver dis-
electronic stability control play.
A number of symbols and messages regarding The following table shows some examples.
electronic stability control (Electronic Stability

Constant glow for System check when the engine is started.
approx. 2 seconds.
Flashing light. ESC system is being activated.
Constant glow. Sport mode is selected.

NOTE: The ESC system is not deactivated in this mode — it is partly reduced.
ESC ESC system has been temporarily reduced due to excessive brake temperature - the function is reactiva-
ted automatically when the brakes have cooled.
Temporarily off
See message in the driver display.
ESC ESC system disengaged.
Service required • Stop the car in a safe place, switch off the engine and start it again.
• Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
A text message can be cleared by briefly press- If a message remains: Contact a workshop – an
ing the button, located in the centre of the authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
}}
273
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| Related information
• Sport mode for electronic stability control
(p. 272)
274
DRIVER SUPPORT
Speed limiter* : From active mode - deactivates/ Limitations

A speed limiter (SL8)
can be likened to a reverse changes the speed limiter to standby mode On steep downhill gradients the speed limiter’s
cruise control - the driver regulates the speed braking effect may be inadequate and hence the
: Reduces stored maximum speed stored maximum speed may be exceeded. In this
using the accelerator pedal but is prevented
from accidentally exceeding a pre-selected/set Marker for stored max speed case, the driver is alerted by the message Speed
maximum speed by the speed limiter. limit exceeded in the driver display.
The car's current speed
Overview NOTE
Stored maximum speed
A text message that the maximum speed is
exceeded will be activated if the speed has
WARNING been exceeded by at least 3 km/h
• The Speed Limiter function is supple- (approx. 2 mph).
mentary driver support intended to facili-
tate driving – it cannot handle all situa-
Related information
tions in all traffic, weather and road condi-
tions. • Activating and starting the Speed limiter
(p. 276)
• The driver must always pay attention to
• Deactivating/reactivating the Speed Limiter
traffic conditions and take action if the
(p. 277)
Speed Limiter is not maintaining a suita-
Buttons and symbols for functions9. ble speed. • Managing speed for the Speed limiter
(p. 276)
• The Speed Limiter is not a substitute for
: Activates the speed limiter from the driver's attention and judgement. The • Switching off the speed limiter (p. 278)
standby mode and resumes stored maximum
speed
driver is always responsible for ensuring • Automatic speed limiter* (p. 279)
the car is driven in a safe manner, at the
appropriate speed, with an appropriate
• Activating/deactivating the automatic speed
: Increases the stored maximum speed limiter (p. 280)
distance to other vehicles, and in accord-
: From standby mode - activates the ance with current traffic rules and regula- • Changing the tolerance for the Automatic
speed limiter and stores current speed tions. speed limiter (p. 281)
8 Speed Limiter
9 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Activating and starting the Speed mum speed that can be stored is 30 km/h Managing speed for the Speed
limiter (20 mph). limiter
The speed limiter function (SL10) must first be – When the speed limiter is in standby mode The speed limiter (SL11) can be set to different
selected and activated in order to be able to reg- speeds.
ulate the speed. and the symbol is shown - press the
steering wheel button (2). Setting/changing the stored speed
Set the speed limiter in standby mode > The Speed Limiter starts and the current
speed is stored as the maximum speed.
Related information
• Speed limiter* (p. 275)
• Managing speed for the Speed limiter
(p. 276)
(p. 277)
• Switching off the speed limiter (p. 278)
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary

NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
depending on car model.
– Change the set speed with short or long
– Press ◀ (1) or ▶ (3) to browse to the sym- presses on steering wheel button (1) or
bol/function for speed limiter (4). (3):
> Symbol (4) is shown and the speed limiter • Short press: Each press changes the
is set in standby mode. speed in increments of +/- 5 km/h
(+/- 5 mph).
Start the Speed Limiter
The speed limiter cannot be activated until after • Press and hold: Release the button when
the set speed indicator (4) has moved to
the engine has been started. The lowest maxi-
the desired speed.
10 Speed Limiter
11 Speed Limiter
DRIVER SUPPORT
• The speed set after the last button press is Deactivating/reactivating the Speed Reactivating the Speed Limiter from
stored in the memory. Limiter standby mode
Related information The speed limiter (SL12) can be temporarily
deactivated so that it is set in standby mode and
can be reactivated later.
• Activating and starting the Speed limiter
(p. 276) Deactivate the Speed Limiter and set it
• Deactivating/reactivating the Speed Limiter in standby mode
(p. 277)
• Switching off the speed limiter (p. 278)

To reactivate the Speed Limiter from standby
mode:
– Press the steering wheel button (1).
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary > The driver display's speed limit markings
depending on car model. change colour from GREY to WHITE - the
To deactivate the Speed Limiter and set it in car's speed is then limited again by the
standby mode: last stored maximum speed.
– Press the steering wheel button (2). or

> The speed limit markings and symbols in – Press the steering wheel button (2).
the driver display change colour from > The Speed Limiter indicators and symbols
WHITE to GREY - the speed limiter is now in the driver display change colour from
temporarily deactivated and the driver can GREY to WHITE — the car will now apply
exceed the maximum speed setting. its current speed as the maximum speed.
12 Speed Limiter }}
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| Temporary increase in speed with the Switching off the speed limiter Related information
accelerator pedal The speed limiter (SL13) can be deactivated. • Speed limiter* (p. 275)
The speed limiter can also be temporarily overrid- • Activating and starting the Speed limiter
den with the accelerator pedal without the speed (p. 276)
limiter being set in standby mode - e.g. to be able
to quickly accelerate the car out of a situation. • Managing speed for the Speed limiter
(p. 276)
In which case, proceed as follows:
1. Fully depress the accelerator pedal and (p. 277)
release it so that acceleration is interrupted
when the desired speed has been reached.
> In this case, the speed limiter is still acti-
vated and the driver display's symbol is
therefore WHITE.
2. Fully release the accelerator pedal when the
temporary acceleration is finished. depending on car model.
> The car is then braked automatically
below the last stored maximum speed. 1. Press the steering wheel button (2).
> The speed limiter is set in standby mode.
Related information
2. Press the steering wheel button ◀ (1) or ▶
(3) to change to another function.
• Activating and starting the Speed limiter
> The driver display's symbol and indicator
(p. 276)
for speed limiter (4) are switched off -
• Managing speed for the Speed limiter which deletes the set/stored maximum
(p. 276) speed.
• Switching off the speed limiter (p. 278) 3. Press the steering wheel button (2)
again.
> Another function is activated.
13 Speed Limiter
DRIVER SUPPORT
Automatic speed limiter* WARNING Is SL or ASL active?

The Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL14)
function Symbols in the driver display show which speed
helps the driver to adapt the car's maximum
• The ASL function is supplementary driver limiter function is active:
support intended to facilitate driving and
speed to the speed shown on the road signs. make it safer – it cannot handle all situa- Symbol SL ASL
The Speed Limiter function (SL15)
can be tions in all traffic, weather and road condi-
tions.
changed to Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL). ✓ ✓
The automatic speed limiter uses speed informa- • Even if the driver clearly sees the speed- A
related road sign, the speed information

tion from the Road Sign Information16 function to from the Road Sign Information (RSI) ✓
automatically adapt the car's maximum speed. function to ASL may be incorrect – in
such cases the driver must intervene
him/herself and accelerate or brake to a Sign symbolB after "70" = ASL is acti-
suitable speed. vated.
• ASL is not a substitute for the driver's A WHITE symbol: Function active, GREY symbol: Standby mode.
attention and judgement. The driver is B See the following heading "ASL symbol" regarding the mean-
ing of the symbol's colour.
always responsible for ensuring the car is
ate speed, with an appropriate distance to
other vehicles, and in accordance with
current traffic rules and regulations.
• See also the heading "Limitations for
Road Sign Information".
14 Automatic Speed Limiter

15 Speed Limiter
16 Road Sign Information – RSI }}
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| The ASL symbol The ASL will be reactivated when the RSI16 func- Activating/deactivating the
The sign symbol (displayed alongside tion can once again interpret and provide speed automatic speed limiter
the stored speed, "70", in the centre of information to the ASL. The automatic speed limiter function (ASL17)
the speedometer) can be shown in can be activated and deactivated as a supple-
See also the heading "Limitations for Road Sign
three colours with the following mean- ment to the speed limiter (SL18).
Information".
ings:
Related information Activate ASL
Colour of sign Meaning • Speed limiter* (p. 275) The Speed Sign Assist but-
symbol ton is located in the function
view of the centre display.
Greenish yellow ASL is active limiter (p. 280)
• Changing the tolerance for the Automatic
Grey ASL has been set in speed limiter (p. 281)
standby mode
Amber/Orange ASL is in temporary standby To activate the automatic speed limiter:
mode - e.g. due to a traffic
• Limitations of Road Sign Information*
(p. 362) 1. Press the Speed Sign Assist button.
sign not being read. > ASL is set in standby mode, a green indi-
cator appears on the button, and the
Limitations of ASL driver display shows a sign symbol in the
Automatic speed limitation takes place using centre of the speedometer.
speed information from the RSI16 function - not
from the speed limit road signs that the car 2. Press the steering wheel button .
passes. > ASL is activated with the car’s current
speed.
If RSI16 cannot interpret and provide speed infor-
mation to the ASL, then the ASL is set in standby
mode and changes over to SL. In such cases the
driver must intervene and brake to a suitable
speed.
16 Road Sign Information – RSI

18 Speed Limiter
DRIVER SUPPORT
Deactivate ASL Changing the tolerance for the – Press the steering wheel button (1)
To deactivate the automatic speed limiter: Automatic speed limiter until 70 km/h (43 mph) in the centre of the
– Tap on the Speed Sign Assist button in The Automatic Speed Limiter function (ASL19) speedometer (4) changes to 75 km/h
function view. can be set for different tolerance levels. (47 mph).
> ASL is deactivated and the button's indi- > After which, the car uses the selected tol-
It is possible to increase/decrease the signed erance 5 km/h (4 mph) as long as signs
cation becomes GREY - SL is activated speed limit. If, for example, the car follows a
instead. passed are showing 70 km/h (43 mph).
signed speed limit of 70km/h (43 mph) the
driver can instead choose to allow the car to The tolerance is followed until a road sign
WARNING maintain 75 km/h (47 mph). with a lower or higher speed is passed -
then the car follows the new signed
After switching from ASL to SL the car will no
longer follow the signed speed limit but only speed limit instead and the tolerance is
the maximum speed stored in memory. deleted from the memory.
If the Road Sign Information* function is
activated, the signed speed limit will then
Related information be shown with a RED indicator on the
• Automatic speed limiter* (p. 279) speedometer.
• Changing the tolerance for the Automatic The tolerance is adjusted in the same way as the
speed limiter (p. 281) speed setting is in the speed limiter.
NOTE
Buttons and symbols for functions20. The maximum selectable tolerance is
+/- 10 km/h (5 mph).
Related information
• Automatic speed limiter* (p. 279)
limiter (p. 280)

20 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. }}
DRIVER SUPPORT
• Managing speed for the Speed limiter Cruise control : Reduces stored speed
(p. 276) The cruise control (CC21) helps the driver main- Marker for stored speed
• Road Sign Information* (p. 357) tain an even speed, resulting in more relaxed
• Speed limiter* (p. 275) driving on motorways and long, straight roads in The car's current speed
regular traffic flows.
Stored speed
Overview
NOTE
In cars equipped with Adaptive Cruise Con-
trol*, it is possible to switch between cruise
control and Adaptive Cruise Control – see the
heading "Switch between CC and ACC".
Buttons and symbols for functions22.
: Activates cruise control from standby

mode and resumes stored speed
: Increases the stored speed
: From standby mode - activates cruise

control and stores current speed
: From active mode - deactivates/
changes cruise control to standby mode
21 Cruise Control
DRIVER SUPPORT
WARNING • Adaptive cruise control* (p. 290) Activating and starting the Cruise
control
• The cruise control function is supplemen-
The cruise control function (CC23) must first be
tary driver support intended to facilitate
driving – it cannot handle all situations in selected and activated in order to be able to reg-
all traffic, weather and road conditions. ulate the speed.
• The driver is advised to read all sections

in the Owner's Manual that relate to this
function to learn about factors such as its
limitations and what the driver should be
aware of before using the system (see
the list of links at the end of this article).
• Cruise control is not a substitute for the
driver's attention and judgement. The
driver is always responsible for ensuring
ance with current traffic rules and regula- NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
tions. depending on car model.
Set cruise control in standby mode

Related information To set cruise control in standby mode:
• Activating and starting the Cruise control
– Press ◀ (1) or ▶ (3) to browse to the sym-
(p. 283)
• Managing speed for the Cruise control bol/function (4).
(p. 284) > The symbol is shown and the cruise con-
• Deactivating/reactivating the cruise control trol can then be activated.
(p. 285)
Activating/starting cruise control
• Deactivating Cruise Control (p. 286) In order to start the Cruise control from the
• Change between Cruise control and adaptive standby mode, the car's current speed must be
cruise control* (p. 303)
}}
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| 30 km/h (20 mph) or higher. The lowest speed Managing speed for the Cruise • The speed set after the last button press is
that can be stored is 30 km/h (20 mph). control stored in the memory.
To start the cruise control: Cruise control (CC24) can be set to different If the driver increases the car's speed using the
speeds. accelerator pedal before pressing the steering
–
With the symbol/function displayed, wheel button (1), the speed stored will be
Setting/changing the stored speed the car's speed when the button is depressed,
press the steering wheel button (2).
provided the driver's foot is on the accelerator
> Cruise Control starts and the current
pedal at the moment when the button is
speed becomes the stored speed.
depressed.
NOTE A temporary increase in speed with the accelera-

tor pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect
Cruise Control cannot be enabled at speeds the setting - the car returns to the last stored
below 30 km/h (20 mph). speed when the accelerator pedal is released.
Related information Using engine braking instead of the

• Cruise control (p. 282) foot brake
With Cruise Control, speed is regulated with less
• Managing speed for the Cruise control
frequent application of the foot brake. On a
(p. 284) NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model. downhill gradient it may sometimes be desirable
• Deactivating/reactivating the cruise control to start moving a little faster and limit the acceler-
(p. 285) – Change the set speed with short or long ation by engine braking. In this case the driver
• Deactivating Cruise Control (p. 286) presses on steering wheel button (1) or can temporarily disable foot brake application by
(3): Cruise Control.
• Short press: Each press changes the To do so, proceed as follows:

speed in increments of +/- 5 km/h – Depress the accelerator pedal about halfway
(+/- 5 mph). down and release.
• Press and hold: Release the button when > Cruise Control will disengage its auto-
the speed indicator (4) has moved to the matic foot braking and then uses engine
desired speed braking only.
23 Cruise Control
24 Cruise Control
284
DRIVER SUPPORT
Cruise control dependence on drive Deactivating/reactivating the cruise Standby mode on driver intervention
mode control The cruise control is temporarily deactivated and
The cruise control's way of maintaining a speed Cruise control (CC26) can be temporarily deacti- set in standby mode if:
may vary depending on the selected drive vated so that it is set in the standby mode and • the foot brake is used
mode25. can be reactivated later.
• the gear selector is moved to N position
Cruise control Eco Cruise Deactivate Cruise Control and set in • the clutch pedal is held depressed for longer
In ECO drive mode the cruise control's accelera- standby mode than 1 minute
tions and decelerations become smoother com-
pared to other drive modes to optimise fuel and • the driver maintains a speed higher than the
environmental economy. This can cause the car's stored speed for longer than 1 minute.
speed to be temporarily above or below the set The driver must then control the speed himself/
speed. herself.
See supplementary information in "ECO drive A temporary increase in speed with the accelera-
mode" under "Cruise control Eco Cruise". tor pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect
Cruise control Dynamic Cruise the setting - the car returns to the last stored
speed when the accelerator pedal is released.
In Dynamic drive mode, the cruise control's accel-
erations and decelerations are felt more strongly Automatic standby mode
and seem more direct compared to other modes. Cruise control is temporarily disengaged and set
in standby mode if:
Related information NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
• Cruise control (p. 282) depending on car model. • wheels lose traction
• Activating and starting the Cruise control To set cruise control in standby mode: • engine speed is too low/high
(p. 283)
–
• brake temperature is too high
Press the steering wheel button (2).
• Deactivating/reactivating the cruise control
> The cruise control markings and symbols
• speed falls below 30 km/h (20 mph).
(p. 285) The driver must then control the speed himself/
in the driver display change colour from
• Deactivating Cruise Control (p. 286) WHITE to GREY - cruise control is now herself.
• Drive modes* (p. 418) temporarily deactivated and the driver
must then manually control the speed.
• Drive mode ECO (p. 421)
25 See supplementary information in the section "Drive modes".

26 Cruise Control }}
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| Reactivating cruise control from WARNING Deactivating Cruise Control

standby mode Cruise control Cruise Control — CC can be
A significant increase in speed may follow
deactivated.
when the speed is resumed with the
steering wheel button.
Related information
• Cruise control (p. 282)
(p. 283)
• Managing speed for the Cruise control
(p. 284)
• Deactivating Cruise Control (p. 286)
To start cruise control from standby mode:
GREY to WHITE — the car will now follow
the most recently stored speed again.
or
To start cruise control from standby mode:
GREY to WHITE — the car will now follow
the current speed.
286
DRIVER SUPPORT
NOTE Distance Warning*

In cars equipped with Adaptive Cruise Con- The Distance Warning function28 warns the
driver if the time interval to the vehicle ahead
becomes too short.
heading "Switch between CC and ACC". Distance warning is active at speeds
above 30 km/h (20 mph) and only reacts to the
Related information vehicle ahead travelling in the same direction. No
• Cruise control (p. 282) distance information is provided for oncoming,
slow or stationary vehicles.
(p. 283)
NOTE
Buttons and symbols for functions27. • Managing speed for the Cruise control
(p. 284) Distance warning is deactivated during the
To deactivate cruise control: time the adaptive cruise control is active.
• Deactivating/reactivating the cruise control
1. Press the steering wheel button (2). (p. 285)
> Cruise control is set in standby mode. • Change between Cruise control and adaptive WARNING
cruise control* (p. 303) Distance warning only reacts if the time win-
2. Press the steering wheel button ◀ (1) or ▶
(3) to change to another function. dow to the vehicle ahead is shorter than the
preset value – the speed of the driver's vehi-
> The driver display's symbol for cruise con- cle is not affected.
trol (4) is extinguished - which
deletes the set/stored speed.
3. Press the steering wheel button (2)
again.
> Another function is activated.
28 Distance Alert }}
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| Head-up display* Related information Activating and setting the time

• Activating and setting the time interval for interval for Distance warning*
Distance warning* (p. 288) The Distance Warning30 function can be set
• Limitations of Distance Warning* (p. 289) with different time intervals or switched off.
• Head-up display* (p. 110) On/Off
• Adaptive cruise control* (p. 290) Press the Distance Alert but-
ton in the centre display's func-
tion view.
Symbol for Distance Warning on the windscreen29.

• GREEN button indication - Distance Alert is
activated.
In cars equipped with head-up display, a symbol
is shown on the windscreen for as long as the
• GREY button indication - Distance Alert is
deactivated.
time interval to the vehicle ahead is shorter than
the preset value. However, this presupposes that Distance Alert is activated automatically each
the Show Driver Support function is activated time the engine is started.
via settings in the car's menu system; see the
Setting the time interval for Distance
heading "Head-up display" for how this works.
warning
Different time intervals to the
NOTE vehicle in front can be selected
Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light con- and shown in the driver display
trasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the driver is as 1-5 horizontal lines - the
not looking straight ahead may make the vis- more lines the longer the time
ual warning signal in the windscreen difficult interval. One line represents
to recognise. about 1 second to the vehicle
in front, 5 lines represents about 3 seconds.
30 Distance Alert
DRIVER SUPPORT
The same symbol is also shown when the adap- NOTE Limitations of Distance Warning*
tive cruise control function is activated. The Distance Warning function31 may have limi-
• The higher the speed the longer the cal-
tations in certain situations.
culated distance in metres for a given
time interval.
WARNING
• Only use the time intervals permitted by
local traffic regulations. • The Distance Warning function is supple-
• The set time window is also used by the
tate driving and make it safer – it cannot
adaptive cruise control and Pilot Assist
handle all situations in all traffic, weather
functions.
and road conditions.
• The vehicle's size may affect the ability to
WARNING detect, e.g. motorcycles, which could
mean that the warning lamp illuminates at
• Only use a time window that suits the
a shorter time window than set or that the
Control for time interval. current traffic conditions.
warning is temporarily absent.
Decrease time interval • The driver should be aware that short
time windows limit the amount of time • Extremely high speeds can cause the
Increase time interval available to react and take action if an lamp to illuminate at a shorter time win-
unexpected traffic situation arises. dow than that set due to limitations in
Distance indicator radar unit range.
– Press the steering wheel button (1) or (2) to Related information • Distance Warning is not a substitute for
increase or decrease the time interval. the driver's attention and judgement. The
> The distance indicator (3) shows the cur-
rent time interval.
• Limitations of Distance Warning* (p. 289) the car is driven in a safe manner, at the
• Adaptive cruise control* (p. 290) appropriate speed, with an appropriate
ance with current traffic rules and regula-
tions.
31 Distance Alert }}
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| NOTE Adaptive cruise control* is clear again the car returns to the selected
The adaptive cruise control (ACC32) helps the speed.
The function uses the car's radar unit, which
has some general limitations, see the section driver to maintain an even speed combined with
a pre-selected time interval to the vehicle ahead. WARNING
"Limitations for radar unit".
An adaptive cruise control provides a more relax- • The adaptive cruise control function is
ing driving experience on long journeys on motor- supplementary driver support intended to
Related information facilitate driving and make it safer – it
• Distance Warning* (p. 287) ways and long straight main roads in smooth traf-
fic flows. cannot handle all situations in all traffic,
• Activating and setting the time interval for weather and road conditions.
Distance warning* (p. 288)
• The driver is advised to read all sections
• Limitations of the radar unit (p. 324) in the Owner's Manual that relate to this
function to learn about factors such as its
limitations and what the driver should be
aware of before using the system (see
the list of links at the end of this article).
• The adaptive cruise control is not a sub-
stitute for the driver's attention and
judgement. The driver is always responsi-
ble for ensuring the car is driven in a safe
manner, at the appropriate speed, with an
The camera and radar unit measures the distance to the
appropriate distance to other vehicles,
vehicle ahead33. and in accordance with current traffic
rules and regulations.
The driver selects the desired speed and a time
interval to the vehicle ahead. If the camera and
radar unit detects a slower vehicle in front of the Adaptive cruise control regulates the speed with
car, the speed is adapted automatically via the acceleration and braking. It is normal for the
preset time interval to the vehicle. When the road brakes to emit a low sound when they are being
used to adjust the speed.
32 Adaptive Cruise Control

DRIVER SUPPORT
The adaptive cruise control aims to control the WARNING Overview

speed in a smooth way. In situations that demand
Controls
sudden braking the driver must brake himself/ • Adaptive cruise control is not a collision
herself. This applies in case of large speed differ- avoidance system. The driver is always
ences or if the vehicle in front brakes suddenly. responsible and must intervene if the sys-
Due to the limitations of the radar unit, braking tem does not detect a vehicle ahead.
may come unexpectedly or not at all. • The adaptive cruise control does not
The adaptive cruise control aims to follow the brake for humans or animals, and not for
vehicle ahead in the same lane at a time interval small vehicles such as bicycles and
set by the driver. If the radar unit cannot see any motorcycles. Nor for low trailers, oncom-
vehicle in front then the car will instead maintain ing, slow or stationary vehicles and
the speed set and stored by the driver. This also objects.
takes place if the speed of the vehicle ahead • Do not use the adaptive cruise control in
increases and exceeds the stored speed. demanding situations, such as in city traf-
fic, at junctions, on slippery surfaces, with Buttons and symbols for functions33.
The following applies for cars with automatic
a lot of water or slush on the road, in
gearbox:
heavy rain/snow, in poor visibility, on : Activates the adaptive cruise control
• Adaptive cruise control can follow another winding roads or on slip roads. from standby mode and resumes stored
vehicle at speed from 0 km/h up to speed
200 km/h (125 mph).
IMPORTANT : Increases the stored speed
The following applies for cars with manual gear-
box: Maintenance of adaptive cruise control com- : From standby mode - activates the
ponents must only be performed at a work- adaptive cruise control and stores current
• The Adaptive cruise control can follow shop - an authorised Volvo workshop is rec- speed
another vehicle at speeds from 30 km/h ommended.
(20 mph) up to 200 km/h (125 mph). : From active mode - deactivates/
changes the adaptive cruise control to
standby mode
: Reduces stored speed
Increases the time interval to vehicles ahead
291
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| Reduces the time interval to vehicles ahead Driver display Collision risk warning
Target vehicle indicator: ACC has detected
and is following a target vehicle at the preset
time interval
Symbol for time interval to vehicles ahead
NOTE
In cars equipped with Adaptive Cruise Con-
heading "Switch between CC and ACC".
Indication of speeds33. Audio and symbol for collision warning33
Stored speed Acoustic warning signal in the event of a risk
of collision
Speed of vehicle ahead.
Warning signal in the event of a risk of colli-
Current speed of your car. sion
Distance measurement with the camera and
To see different combinations of symbols
radar unit
depending on traffic situation - see the heading
"Symbols and messages for the adaptive cruise Adaptive Cruise Control uses approx. 40% of the
control". capacity of the foot brake. If the car needs to be
braked more heavily than the adaptive cruise
control is capable of and the driver does not
brake, the warning lamp and acoustic warning are
activated to alert the driver that immediate inter-
vention is required.
DRIVER SUPPORT
WARNING NOTE • Head-up display* (p. 110)
The adaptive cruise control only warns of Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light con-
vehicles which its radar unit has detected - trasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the driver is
hence a warning may not be given, or it may not looking straight ahead may make the vis-
be given with a certain delay. ual warning signal in the windscreen difficult
• Never wait for a warning. Apply the to recognise.
brakes when the situation requires.
Related information
Head-up display* • Activating and starting the Adaptive cruise
control* (p. 294)
• Managing the speed of the Adaptive cruise
control* (p. 295)
• Setting the time interval for the adaptive
• Deactivating/activating the Adaptive cruise
control* (p. 298)
• Overtaking assistance with adaptive cruise
control* or Pilot Assist* (p. 300)
• Change of target and automatic braking with
the Adaptive Cruise Control (p. 301)
Symbol for collision warning on the windscreen33.
In cars equipped with a head-up display, the
• Limitations of the adaptive cruise control*
(p. 302)
warning is shown on the windscreen by a flashing
symbol. • Change between Cruise control and adaptive
• Symbols and messages for the Adaptive
DRIVER SUPPORT
Activating and starting the Adaptive Starting/activating the adaptive cruise – With the symbol/function (4) displayed,
cruise control* control press the steering wheel button (1).
Adaptive cruise control (ACC34) must first be In order to start the ACC the following require-
> Adaptive cruise control starts and the cur-
activated and then started if it is to control the ments apply:
rent speed is stored, which is shown in
speed and distance. • The driver's seatbelt must be buckled and figures in the centre of the speedometer.
the driver's door must be closed.
Setting the adaptive cruise control in The time interval is only
standby mode • There must be a vehicle (the "target vehicle") adjusted to the vehicle ahead
within reasonable distance in front of the car, by the ACC when the distance
or the current speed must be at least symbol shows two vehicles.
15 km/h (9 mph).
• For cars with manual gearbox. Speed must
be at the lowest 30 km/h (20 mph).
At the same time a speed
range is marked.
The higher speed is the
stored/selected speed and the
lower speed is that of the vehi-
cle ahead (target vehicle).
Related information
depending on car model. • Adaptive cruise control* (p. 290)
Immediately after the engine is started the Adap- • Managing the speed of the Adaptive cruise
tive Cruise Control is in the standby mode. To set control* (p. 295)
it in standby mode from active mode, proceed as • Setting the time interval for the adaptive
follows: NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary cruise control* (p. 296)
– Press steering wheel button ◀ (2) or ▶ (3) to • Deactivating/activating the Adaptive cruise
scroll to the symbol/function (4). control* (p. 298)
> The symbol is displayed and Adaptive • Overtaking assistance with adaptive cruise
Cruise Control is set in standby mode. control* or Pilot Assist* (p. 300)
DRIVER SUPPORT
• Change of target and automatic braking with Managing the speed of the Adaptive • The speed set after the last button press is
the Adaptive Cruise Control (p. 301) cruise control* stored in the memory.
• Limitations of the adaptive cruise control* The adaptive cruise control (ACC35) can be set If the driver increases the car’s speed using the
(p. 302) to different speeds. accelerator pedal before pressing the steering
Setting/changing the stored speed
wheel button , the speed stored will be the
cruise control* (p. 305) car’s speed when the button is depressed, provi-
ded the driver’s foot is on the accelerator pedal at
• Change between Cruise control and adaptive
the moment when the button is depressed.
A temporary increase in speed with the accelera-
the setting - the car returns to the last stored
Automatic gearbox
Adaptive cruise control can follow another vehicle
at speeds from 0 km/h up to 200 km/h
(125 mph).
Note that the lowest programmable speed for the
depending on car model. adaptive cruise control is 30 km/h (20 mph) -
even though it is capable of following another
– Change the set speed with short or long vehicle down to 0 km/h, a speed lower than
presses on steering wheel button (1) or 30 km/h (20 mph) cannot be selected/stored.
(3): The maximum speed selectable is 200 km/h
• Short press: Each press changes the (125 mph).
speed in increments of +/- 5 km/h
(+/- 5 mph).
• Press and hold: Release the button when
the set speed indicator (4) has moved to
the desired speed.
35 Adaptive Cruise Control }}
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| Manual gearbox Setting the time interval for the

The Adaptive cruise control can follow another adaptive cruise control*
vehicle at speeds from 30 km/h (20 mph) up to The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC36) can be
200 km/h (125 mph). set to different time intervals.
The lowest programmable speed for the adaptive
Different time intervals to the
cruise control is 30 km/h (20 mph) - the maxi-
vehicle in front can be selected
mum speed is 200 km/h (125 mph).
and shown in the driver display
Related information as 1-5 horizontal lines - the
• Adaptive cruise control* (p. 290) more lines the longer the time
interval. One line represents
• Activating and starting the Adaptive cruise
about 1 second to the vehicle
control* (p. 294) in front, 5 lines represents about 3 seconds. Control for time interval.
The same symbol is also shown when the Dis- Decrease time interval
tance Warning function is activated.
• Deactivating/activating the Adaptive cruise Increase time interval
control* (p. 298)
NOTE Distance indicator
When the symbol in the driver display shows
control* or Pilot Assist* (p. 300) – Press the steering wheel button (1) or (2) to
two cars, ACC is following the vehicle in front increase or decrease the time interval.
• Change of target and automatic braking with at a pre-set time interval.
the Adaptive Cruise Control (p. 301) > The distance indicator (3) shows the cur-
When only one car is shown, there is no vehi- rent time interval.
• Limitations of the adaptive cruise control* cle within a reasonable distance ahead.
(p. 302) The adaptive cruise control allows the time inter-
val to vary significantly in certain situations in
order to allow the car to follow the vehicle in front
smoothly and comfortably. At low speed, when
• Change between Cruise control and adaptive the distances are short, the adaptive cruise con-
cruise control* (p. 303) trol increases the time interval slightly.
DRIVER SUPPORT
NOTE Select one of the following alternatives: • Limitations of the adaptive cruise control*
(p. 302)
• The higher the speed the longer the cal- • Eco - ACC focuses on optimal fuel economy,
culated distance in metres for a given which means longer time interval to the vehi- • Symbols and messages for the Adaptive
time interval. cle ahead. cruise control* (p. 305)
• Only use the time intervals permitted by • Comfort - ACC focuses on following the set • Change between Cruise control and adaptive
local traffic regulations. time interval to the vehicle ahead as cruise control* (p. 303)
smoothly as possible. • Distance Warning* (p. 287)
• If the adaptive cruise control does not
seem to respond with a speed increase • Dynamic - ACC focuses on following the set • Drive modes* (p. 418)
when activated, it may be because the time interval to the vehicle ahead more
closely, which in certain cases may mean • Drive mode ECO (p. 421)
time window to the vehicle ahead is
shorter than the set time window. heavier acceleration and braking.
See further information in the "Drive modes" sec-
tions.
WARNING
More information can also be found under
• Only use a time window that suits the "Cruise control Eco Cruise" in section "Drive
current traffic conditions. mode ECO".
• The driver should be aware that short
time windows limit the amount of time Related information
available to react and take action if an • Adaptive cruise control* (p. 290)
unexpected traffic situation arises. • Activating and starting the Adaptive cruise
control* (p. 294)
Select how ACC shall maintain the • Managing the speed of the Adaptive cruise
distance* to the vehicle ahead control* (p. 295)
The driver can select different driving styles for • Deactivating/activating the Adaptive cruise
how the Adaptive cruise control should maintain control* (p. 298)
the preset time interval to the vehicle ahead.
Selection is made via the drive mode control • Overtaking assistance with adaptive cruise
DRIVE MODE. control* or Pilot Assist* (p. 300)
DRIVER SUPPORT
Deactivating/activating the Adaptive To temporarily switch off Adaptive Cruise Control • the driver maintains a speed higher than the
cruise control* and set it in standby mode: stored speed for longer than 1 minute.
The Adaptive cruise control (ACC37) can be – Press the steering wheel button (2). • the clutch pedal is depressed for approx. 1
temporarily deactivated so that it is set in the minute - applies to cars with manual gearbox.
> The symbol on the driver display
standby mode and can later be reactivated. A temporary increase in speed with the accelera-
changes colour from WHITE to GREY and
Deactivate Adaptive Cruise Control and the stored speed in the centre of the
set it in standby mode speedometer changes from BEIGE to
GREY.
WARNING
• With the adaptive cruise control is in
standby mode, the driver must intervene
and regulate both speed and distance to
the vehicle ahead.
• When the adaptive cruise control is in
standby mode and the car comes too close
to a vehicle ahead, the driver is warned of
the short distance by the Distance Warn-
ing function instead.
Standby mode on driver intervention

The Adaptive cruise control is temporarily deacti-
vated and set in standby mode if:
• the foot brake is used
• the gear selector is moved to N position.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Automatic standby mode • engine speed is too low/high WARNING

The adaptive cruise control is dependent on • one or more wheels lose traction
other systems, e.g. Electronic Stability Control A significant increase in speed may follow
ESC38. If any of the other systems stops working,
• brake temperature is high when the speed is resumed with the
• the parking brake is applied steering wheel button.
the adaptive cruise control is deactivated auto-
matically. • the camera and radar unit is covered by e.g.
snow or heavy rainfall (camera lens/radio Related information
WARNING waves are blocked). • Adaptive cruise control* (p. 290)
With automatic standby mode, the driver is Reactivating adaptive cruise control
warned via an acoustic signal and a message control* (p. 294)
on the driver display.
from standby mode
• The driver must then regulate the car's control* (p. 295)
speed, apply the brakes as needed and • Setting the time interval for the adaptive
maintain a safe distance to other vehicles. cruise control* (p. 296)
Automatic standby mode may occur if: control* or Pilot Assist* (p. 300)
• the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) and ACC • Change of target and automatic braking with
is uncertain whether the vehicle ahead is a the Adaptive Cruise Control (p. 301)
stationary vehicle or an object, such as a
speed bump. (p. 302)
• the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) and the
vehicle ahead turns off so that ACC no NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary cruise control* (p. 305)
longer has a vehicle to follow. depending on car model.
• speed is reduced to below 30 km/h To reactivate ACC from standby mode: cruise control* (p. 303)
(20 mph) - only applies to cars with manual
gearbox. – Press the steering wheel button (1). • Distance Warning* (p. 287)
• the driver opens the door > The speed is then set to the most recently • Electronic Stability Control ESC (p. 271)
stored speed.
• the driver takes off the seatbelt
DRIVER SUPPORT
Overtaking assistance with adaptive Continuation for Overtaking Assistance Limitations for Overtaking Assistance
cruise control* or Pilot Assist* The following conditions must exist for Overtak-
Adaptive cruise control (ACC39) or Pilot Assist ing Assistance to be activated: WARNING
can assist the driver when overtaking other vehi- • there must be a vehicle in front (the “target When using the Overtaking Assistance Sys-
cles. vehicle”) tem, the driver should be aware that there
may be undesired acceleration if the condi-
How overtaking assistance works • your car's current speed is at least 70 km/h
tions suddenly change.
When ACC or Pilot Assist is following another (43 mph)
Some situations should therefore be avoided,
vehicle and the driver indicates the intention to • the stored speed for ACC or Pilot Assist such as if:
overtake by activating the direction indicator40, must be high enough for overtaking to take
adaptive cruise control or Pilot Assist helps by place safely. • the car is approaching an exit for turn-of
accelerating the car towards the vehicle ahead that is in the same direction as overtaking
before the car reaches the overtaking lane. Starting Overtaking Assistance would normally occur.
To start the Overtaking Assistance: • the vehicle ahead slows down before the
The function then delays reducing speed in order
– Activate the direction indicator. driver's car has crossed over into the
to avoid premature braking when the driver’s car
overtaking lane
is approaching a slower vehicle. Use the left direction indicator in a car with
The function remains active until the driver’s vehi- the steering wheel on the left, or the right • the traffic in the overtaking lane slows
direction indicator in a car with the steering down
cle has cleared the overtaken vehicle.
wheel on the right. • a right-hand drive car is driven in a county
> Overtaking Assistance is started. with left-hand traffic (or vice versa).
WARNING
Be aware that this function can be activated
Situations of this kind can be avoided by tempo-
in more situations than during overtaking, e.g.
when a direction indicator is used to indicate rarily setting ACC or Pilot Assist in standby mode.
a change of lane or exit to another road – the
car will then accelerate briefly. Related information

40 On left flash only in left-hand-drive car, or right flash in right-hand-drive car.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Change of target and automatic WARNING front starts moving again then the adaptive cruise
braking with the Adaptive Cruise control is set in standby mode with automatic
When the adaptive cruise control is following
Control another vehicle at speeds in excess of
braking.
In combination with automatic gearbox, the approx. 30 km/h (20 mph) and the target is – The Adaptive Cruise Control is reactivated in
adaptive cruise control (ACC41) has functionality changed from a moving vehicle to a stationary one of the following ways:
for change of target and braking at certain vehicle, the adaptive cruise control will ignore
speeds. the stationary vehicle and instead accelerate • Press the steering wheel button .
to the stored speed.
• Depress the accelerator pedal.
Change of target • The driver must then intervene him/ > The Adaptive Cruise Control resumes fol-
herself and brake. lowing the vehicle ahead if it starts mov-
ing forward within 6 seconds.
Automatic standby mode with change of
target NOTE
The adaptive cruise control is disengaged and set ACC can keep the car stationary for a maxi-
in standby mode: mum of 5 minutes. After this the parking
• when the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) brake is applied and adaptive cruise control is
and the adaptive cruise control is uncertain disengaged.
If the target vehicle in front suddenly turns then there whether the target object is a stationary vehi- The parking brake must be released before
may be stationary traffic in front. cle or some other object, such as a speed the adaptive cruise control can be reactivated.
When adaptive cruise control is following another bump.
vehicle at speeds below 30 km/h (20 mph) and • when the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph)
changes target from a moving to a stationary and the vehicle ahead turns off so the adap-
vehicle, the adaptive cruise control will slow down tive cruise control no longer has a vehicle to
for the stationary vehicle. follow.
Automatic braking
For shorter stops in connection with inching in
slow traffic or at traffic lights driving is automati-
cally resumed if the stops do not exceed about
3 seconds - if it takes longer before the car in
41 Adaptive Cruise Control }}
301
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| Cessation of automatic braking Related information Limitations of the adaptive cruise

In some situations, automatic braking ceases on • Adaptive cruise control* (p. 290) control*
reaching 0 km/h and Adaptive Cruise Control is
• Automatic braking when stationary (p. 432) Adaptive cruise control (ACC42) may have limita-
set in standby mode. This means that the brakes tions in certain situations.
are released and the car may start to roll - the • Parking brake (p. 428)
driver must therefore intervene and brake the car Steep roads and/or heavy load
himself/herself to keep it stationary. Bear in mind that the adaptive cruise control is
This may take place in the following situations: primarily intended for use when driving on level
road surfaces. The function may have difficulty in
• the driver puts his/her foot on the brake keeping the correct distance from the vehicle
pedal ahead when driving on steep downhill slopes - in
• the parking brake is applied which case, be extra attentive and ready to brake.
• the gear selector is moved to P, N, or R posi- • Do not use adaptive cruise control if the car
tion has a heavy load or a trailer is connected to
• the driver sets the adaptive cruise control in the car.
the standby mode.
Miscellaneous
Automatic activation of parking brake • Drive mode Off Road cannot be selected
In certain situations the parking brake is applied when the adaptive cruise control is activated.
to keep the car stationary.
This takes place if the adaptive cruise control is
NOTE
holding the car stationary with the foot brake and: The function uses the car's camera unit,
which has some general limitations, see the
• the driver opens the door or takes off his/her
"Limitations for camera unit" section.
seatbelt
• ACC has kept the car stationary for more
than approx. 5 minutes NOTE
• the brakes have overheated The function uses the car's radar unit, which
• the engine is switched off. has some general limitations, see the section
DRIVER SUPPORT
Related information Change between Cruise control and 3. Press the steering wheel button .
• Limitations of the camera unit (p. 333) adaptive cruise control* > Cruise control starts and stores the cur-
• Limitations of the radar unit (p. 324) In a car with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC43) rent speed.
• Adaptive cruise control* (p. 290) the driver can change between Cruise Control
(CC44) and ACC. WARNING
control* (p. 294) A symbol in the driver display shows which cruise Switching from ACC to CC means that the
control is active: car:
control* (p. 295) CC ACC • no longer maintains a preset time interval
to the vehicle ahead.
cruise control* (p. 296) A A • only follows the stored speed, and the
driver must therefore apply the brakes
• Deactivating/activating the Adaptive cruise
Cruise control Adaptive cruise control when necessary.
control* (p. 298)
• Overtaking assistance with adaptive cruise A WHITE symbol: Function active, GREY symbol: Standby mode
If CC is active when the engine is switched off,
control* or Pilot Assist* (p. 300) Changing from ACC to CC ACC will be activated automatically the next time
• Change of target and automatic braking with Proceed as follows: the engine is started.
1. Set adaptive cruise control to standby mode Changing from CC to ACC
using steering wheel button . Proceed as follows:
2. Press the Cruise control button in the cen- 1. Set cruise control to standby mode using the
tre display's function view - the button's indi-
cruise control* (p. 305) steering wheel button.
cator changes colour from GREY to GREEN.
> The symbol in the driver display changes
from ACC to CC. Adap-
tive Cruise Control is now switched off
and Cruise Control is set to standby
mode.

44 Cruise Control }}
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| 2. Tap on the Cruise control button in the

function view - the button's indicator
changes colour from GREEN to GREY.
> The symbol in the driver display changes
from CC to ACC. Adap-
tive Cruise Control is now activated and
set to standby mode.
3. Press the steering wheel button .
> Adaptive cruise control starts and stores
the current speed, together with the pre-
set time interval to the vehicle ahead.
Related information
• Cruise control (p. 282)
DRIVER SUPPORT
Symbols and messages for the The previous illustration47 shows that the adap- (68 mph) and at the same time is following a
Adaptive cruise control* tive cruise control is set to maintain 110 km/h vehicle ahead which is keeping the same speed.
A number of symbols and messages regarding (68 mph) and that there is no vehicle ahead to
the adaptive cruise control (ACC45) can be follow.
shown via the driver display and/or the head-up
display*.
Here are some examples46.
The previous illustration47 shows that the adap-

tive cruise control is set to maintain 110 km/h

46 In the following illustrative example, the RSI (Road Sign Information) function informs the driver that the maximum permitted speed is 130 km/h (80 mph).
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| Symbol Message Specification

The symbol is WHITE The car is maintaining the stored/selected speed.
Adaptive cruise Adaptive cruise control is set to standby mode.

Unavailable
The symbol is GREY.
Adaptive cruise The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo
Service required
The symbol is GREY.
Windscreen sensor Clean the windscreen in front of the camera and radar unit's detectors.
Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual
A text message can be cleared by briefly press-

ing the button, located in the centre of the
If a message remains: Contact a workshop – an
Related information
DRIVER SUPPORT
Pilot Assist* The driver selects the desired speed and a time The current status of steering
Pilot Assist helps the driver to drive the car interval to the vehicle ahead. Pilot Assist scans assistance is indicated by the
between the lane's side markings using steering the distance to the vehicle ahead and the lane's colour of the steering wheel's
assistance as well as to maintain an even speed, side markings on the road surface using the symbol:
combined with a preselected time interval to the camera and radar unit. The preset time interval is
• GREEN steering wheel indi-
vehicle ahead. maintained with automatic speed adjustment
cates active steering assis-
whilst the steering assistance helps to position
tance
How Pilot Assist works the car in the lane.
The Pilot Assist function gives more comfortable • GREY steering wheel (as in illustration) indi-
Pilot Assist steering assistance takes into
driving and a more relaxed driving experience cates deactivated steering assistance.
account the speed of the preceding car and the
during, for example, long journeys on motorways lane markings. The driver can at any time ignore
in even traffic flows. the Pilot Assist steering recommendation and
steer in another direction, e.g. to change lane or
avoid an obstruction on the road.
If Pilot Assist cannot interpret the lane unambig-
uously, e.g. if the camera and radar unit does not
see the lane's side markings, Pilot Assist tempo-
rarily deactivates steering assistance, but
resumes it if the lane can be interpreted again -
although the speed and distance control func-
tions remain active.
WARNING
The camera and radar unit measures the distance to the Pilot Assist steering assistance is automati-
vehicle ahead and detects side markings48. cally deactivated and is resumed without prior
warning.
Camera and radar unit
Distance readers
Readers, side markings
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| WARNING Pilot Assist attempts to regulate the speed WARNING

smoothly. In situations that demand sudden brak-
• The Pilot Assist function is supplementary ing the driver must brake himself/herself. This • Pilot Assist is not a collision avoidance
driver support intended to facilitate driv- applies in case of large speed differences or if system. The driver must intervene if the
ing and make it safer – it cannot handle the vehicle in front brakes suddenly. Due to the system does not detect a vehicle in front.
all situations in all traffic, weather and limitations of the camera and radar unit, braking • Pilot Assist does not brake for people,
road conditions. may come unexpectedly or not at all. animals, objects, small vehicles (e.g.
• The driver is advised to read all sections Pilot Assist aims to follow the vehicle ahead in cycles and motorcycles), low trailers as
in the Owner's Manual that relate to this the same lane at a time interval set by the driver. well as oncoming, slow or stationary vehi-
function to learn about factors such as its If the radar unit cannot see any vehicle in front cles.
limitations and what the driver should be then the car will instead maintain the speed set • Do not use Pilot Assist in demanding sit-
aware of before using the system (see and stored by the driver. This also takes place if uations, such as in city traffic, at junctions,
the list of links at the end of this article). the speed of the vehicle ahead increases and on slippery surfaces, with a lot of water or
• Pilot Assist must only be used if there are exceeds the stored speed. slush on the road, in heavy rain/snow, in
clear lane lines painted on each side of poor visibility, on winding roads, on slip
The following applies for cars with automatic
the lane. All other use involves increased roads, or with a trailer connected to the
gearbox:
risk of contact with surrounding obstacles car.
that cannot be detected by the function. • Pilot Assist can follow another vehicle at
speeds from 0 km/h up to 200 km/h
• Pilot Assist is not a substitute for the driv- IMPORTANT
er's attention and judgement. The driver (125 mph).
is always responsible for ensuring the car • Pilot Assist can give steering assistance from Maintenance of Pilot Assist internal compo-
is driven in a safe manner, positioned cor- almost stationary up to 140 km/h (87 mph). nents must only be performed at a workshop
rectly in the lane, at the appropriate - an authorised Volvo workshop is recom-
The following applies for cars with manual gear-
speed, with an appropriate distance to mended.
box:
other vehicles, and in accordance with
current traffic rules and regulations. • Pilot Assist can follow another vehicle at
Round bends and when the road splits
speeds from 30 km/h (20 mph) up to
Pilot Assist interacts with the driver, who should
200 km/h (125 mph).
Pilot Assist regulates the speed with acceleration therefore not await the steering assistance from
and braking. It is normal for the brakes to emit a • Pilot Assist can give steering assistance from Pilot Assist but should always be prepared to
low sound when they are being used to adjust 30 km/h (20 mph) up to 140 km/h increase his/her own steering input, especially on
the speed. (87 mph). bends.
308
DRIVER SUPPORT
When the car approaches an exit or if the lane Overview Increases the time interval to vehicles ahead
splits, the driver should steer towards the desired
Controls ▶: Switches from adaptive cruise control to
lane so that Pilot Assist can specify the desired
direction. Pilot Assist
Reduces the time interval to vehicles ahead
Pilot Assist strives to keep the car in
the middle of the lane Function symbol
When Pilot Assist helps to steer, it strives to posi-
tion the car in between the lane markings and Symbols for target vehicle and time interval
therefore it is recommended to let the car find to vehicles ahead
the optimal placement to achieve as smooth a Symbol for activated/deactivated steering
driving experience as possible. The driver checks assistance
that the car is positioned safely in the lane, and
always has the ability to adjust the position by
making his/her own steering corrections.
Buttons and symbols for functions48.
If Pilot Assist does not position the car in an
appropriate way in the lane, it is recommended to : Activates Pilot Assist from standby
turn Pilot Assist off or switch to Adaptive cruise mode and resumes the stored speed and
control. time interval
: Increases the stored speed
: From standby mode - activates Pilot

Assist and stores the current speed
: From active mode - deactivates/
changes Pilot Assist to standby mode
◀: Switches from Pilot Assist to adaptive
cruise control
: Reduces stored speed
309
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| Driver display Collision risk warning WARNING

Pilot Assist only gives warning about vehicles
detected by its camera and radar unit – there-
fore a warning may not occur or be delayed.
• Never wait for a warning. Apply the
brakes when the situation requires!
Indication of speeds48. Audio and symbol for collision warning48

Stored speed Acoustic warning signal in the event of a risk
of collision
Speed of vehicle ahead.
Warning signal in the event of a risk of colli-
Current speed of your car. sion
To see different combinations of symbols
radar unit
depending on traffic situation - see the heading
"Symbols and messages for Pilot Assist". Pilot Assist uses approx. 40% of the foot brake's
capacity. If the car needs to be braked more
heavily than Pilot Assist is capable of and the
driver does not brake, the warning lamp and
acoustic warning are activated to alert the driver
that immediate intervention is required.
310
DRIVER SUPPORT
Head-up display* Related information Activating and starting the

• Activating and starting the Pilot Assist* Pilot Assist*
(p. 311) Pilot Assist must first be activated and then
• Managing the speed for Pilot Assist* started to be able to control speed and distance
(p. 313) and to give steering assistance.
• Setting the time interval for Pilot Assist*
(p. 314)
Pilot Assist* (p. 317)
• Deactivating/activating the Pilot Assist*
(p. 315)
Symbol for collision warning on the windscreen48.

In cars equipped with a head-up display, the
warning is shown on the windscreen by a flashing
• Limitations of Pilot Assist* (p. 319)
symbol. • Symbols and messages for Pilot Assist*
(p. 320)
NOTE • Adaptive cruise control* (p. 290) depending on car model.
Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light con- • Distance Warning* (p. 287) In order to start the Pilot Assist it is required that:
trasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the driver is • Head-up display* (p. 110) • The driver's seatbelt must be buckled and
not looking straight ahead may make the vis-
ual warning signal in the windscreen difficult
• Limitations of the radar unit (p. 324) the driver's door must be closed.
to recognise. • Limitations of the camera unit (p. 333) • There must be a vehicle (the "target vehicle")
within reasonable distance in front of the car,
or the current speed must be at least
15 km/h (9 mph).
• For cars with manual gearbox. Speed must
be at the lowest 30 km/h (20 mph).
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| With the Adaptive cruise control in standby Hands on the steering wheel • Symbols and messages for Pilot Assist*
mode: In order for Pilot Assist to function, the driver’s (p. 320)
Press the steering wheel button ▶ (6). hands must be on the steering wheel. If Pilot
1.
Assist detects that the driver is not holding the
> The symbol changes to Pilot Assist steering wheel, the driver is prompted to actively
in standby mode (8). steer the car via a text message and an acoustic
2. signal.
Press the steering wheel button (2).
> Pilot Assist is started and current speed is If Pilot Assist still cannot detect that the driver is
stored, which is shown with figures in the holding the steering wheel, the function shifts to
centre of the speedometer. standby mode. Pilot Assist must then be restar-
ted with the steering wheel button .
...or...
With the Adaptive cruise control started: NOTE
– Press the steering wheel button ▶ (6). Note that Pilot Assist only works when the
> Pilot Assist is started. driver has hands on the steering wheel.
Pilot Assist steering assistance
is only active when the steering Related information
wheel symbol (2) has changed • Pilot Assist* (p. 307)
from GREY to GREEN.
• Managing the speed for Pilot Assist*
Pilot Assist only regulates the (p. 313)
time interval to the vehicle
ahead when the distance symbol shows a vehicle (p. 314)
(1) above the steering wheel symbol.
At the same time a speed Pilot Assist* (p. 317)
range is marked.
• Deactivating/activating the Pilot Assist*
The higher speed is the (p. 315)
stored/selected speed and the
lower speed is that of the vehi-
cle ahead (target vehicle).
DRIVER SUPPORT
Managing the speed for If the driver increases the car’s speed using the Related information
Pilot Assist* accelerator pedal before pressing the steering • Pilot Assist* (p. 307)
Pilot Assist can be set to different speeds. wheel button , the speed stored will be the • Activating and starting the Pilot Assist*
car’s speed when the button is depressed, provi- (p. 311)
Setting/changing the stored speed ded the driver’s foot is on the accelerator pedal at
the moment when the button is depressed. • Setting the time interval for Pilot Assist*
(p. 314)
A temporary increase in speed with the accelera-
speed when the accelerator pedal is released. • Deactivating/activating the Pilot Assist*
(p. 315)
Automatic gearbox
Pilot Assist can follow another vehicle at speeds • Overtaking assistance with adaptive cruise
from 0 km/h up to 200 km/h (125 mph). control* or Pilot Assist* (p. 300)
Note that the lowest programmable speed for • Limitations of Pilot Assist* (p. 319)
Pilot Assist is 30 km/h (20 mph) - even though it • Symbols and messages for Pilot Assist*
is capable of following another vehicle down to 0 (p. 320)
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary km/h, a speed lower than 30 km/h (20 mph)
cannot be selected/stored.
– Change the set speed with short or long
The maximum speed selectable is 200 km/h
presses on steering wheel button (1) or (125 mph).
(3):
Manual gearbox
• Short press: Each press changes the Pilot Assist can follow another vehicle at speeds
speed in increments of +/- 5 km/h from 30 km/h (20 mph) up to 200 km/h
(+/- 5 mph). (125 mph).
• Press and hold: Release the button when The lowest programmable speed for Pilot Assist
the set speed indicator (4) has moved to is 30 km/h (20 mph) - the maximum speed is
the desired speed. 200 km/h (125 mph).
• The speed set after the last button press is
stored in the memory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Setting the time interval for NOTE

Pilot Assist*
Pilot Assist can be set with different time inter-
• The higher the speed the longer the cal-
culated distance in metres for a given
vals.
time interval.
Different time intervals to the • Only use the time intervals permitted by
vehicle in front can be selected local traffic regulations.
and shown in the driver display
as 1-5 horizontal lines - the
• If Pilot Assist does not seem to respond
with a speed increase when activated, it
more lines the longer the time may be because the time window to the
interval. One line represents vehicle ahead is shorter than the set time
about 1 second to the vehicle window.
in front, 5 lines represents about 3 seconds. Control for time interval.
Decrease time interval
NOTE WARNING
Increase time interval
When the symbol in the driver display shows • Only use a time window that suits the
a car and a steering wheel, Pilot Assist fol- Distance indicator current traffic conditions.
lows a vehicle in front at a preset time gap. • The driver should be aware that short
– Press the steering wheel button (1) or (2) to time windows limit the amount of time
When only one steering wheel is shown, there increase or decrease the time interval.
is no vehicle within a reasonable distance available to react and take action if an
ahead. > The distance indicator (3) shows the cur- unexpected traffic situation arises.
rent time interval.
In order to follow the vehicle ahead in a smooth Select how Pilot Assist shall maintain
and comfortable way, Pilot Assist allows the time the distance* to the vehicle ahead
interval to vary noticeably in certain conditions. The driver can select different driving styles for
For example, at low speed, when the distances how Pilot Assist should maintain the preset time
become short, Pilot Assist increases the time interval to the vehicle ahead. Selection is made
interval slightly. via the drive mode control DRIVE MODE.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Select one of the following alternatives: • Symbols and messages for Pilot Assist* Deactivating/activating the
• Eco - ACC focuses on optimal fuel economy, (p. 320) Pilot Assist*
which means longer time interval to the vehi- • Distance Warning* (p. 287) Pilot Assist can be temporarily deactivated so
cle ahead. that it is set in the standby mode and can be
reactivated later.
• Comfort - Pilot Assist focuses on following • Drive mode ECO (p. 421)
the set time interval to the vehicle ahead as Deactivating and setting Pilot Assist in
smoothly as possible. standby mode
• Dynamic - Pilot Assist focuses on following
the set time interval to the vehicle ahead
more closely, which in certain cases may
mean heavier acceleration and braking.
See further information in the "Drive modes" sec-
tions.
More information can also be found under
"Cruise control Eco Cruise" in section "Drive
mode ECO".
Related information
• Activating and starting the Pilot Assist* depending on car model.
(p. 311)
To temporarily switch off Pilot Assist and set it in
• Managing the speed for Pilot Assist* (p. 313) standby mode:
> Pilot Assist is set in standby mode - the
• Deactivating/activating the Pilot Assist* symbol (8) in the driver display changes
(p. 315) colour from WHITE to GREY and the
• Overtaking assistance with adaptive cruise stored speed in the centre of the speed-
control* or Pilot Assist* (p. 300) ometer changes from BEIGE to GREY.
• Limitations of Pilot Assist* (p. 319) ...or...
}}
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| – Press the steering wheel button ◀ (3). A temporary increase in speed with the accelera- • the driver's hands are not on the steering
> Pilot Assist is switched off and changes tor pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect wheel
to the Adaptive cruise control in active the setting - the car returns to the last stored • the parking brake is applied
mode. speed when the accelerator pedal is released.
• engine speed is too low/high
When the direction indicators are used, Pilot
WARNING Assist steering assistance is temporarily disen-
• the driver takes off the seatbelt
gaged. When this is no longer the case, steering • one or more wheels lose traction
• With Pilot Assist in standby mode, the
driver must intervene and steer, regulat-
assistance is automatically reactivated if the • the camera and radar unit is covered by e.g.
lane's side markings can still be detected. snow or heavy rainfall (camera lens/radio
ing both speed and distance to the vehi-
cle ahead. Automatic standby mode waves are blocked)
• When Pilot Assist is in standby mode and Pilot Assist is dependent on other systems, e.g. • the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) and Pilot
the car comes too close to a vehicle stability control/anti-skid ESC49. If any of these Assist is uncertain whether the vehicle ahead
ahead, the driver is warned of the short other systems stops working, Pilot Assist is is a stationary vehicle or an object, such as a
distance by the Distance Warning func- switched off automatically. speed bump.
tion instead. • the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) and the
WARNING vehicle ahead turns off so that Pilot Assist no
Standby mode on driver intervention With automatic standby mode, the driver is longer has a vehicle to follow.
Pilot Assist is temporarily deactivated and set in warned via an acoustic signal and a message • speed is reduced to below 30 km/h
standby mode if: on the driver display. (20 mph) - only applies to cars with manual
• The driver must then regulate the car's gearbox.
• the foot brake is used
speed, apply the brakes as needed and
• the gear selector is moved to N position maintain a safe distance to other vehicles.
• the direction indicators are used for longer
than 1 minute. Automatic standby mode may occur if, for exam-
• the driver maintains a speed higher than the ple:
stored speed for longer than 1 minute.
• the driver opens the door
• the clutch pedal is depressed for
• brake temperature is high
approx. 1 minute - applies to cars with man-
ual gearbox.
316
DRIVER SUPPORT
Reactivating Pilot Assist from the • Managing the speed for Pilot Assist* (p. 313) Change of target and automatic
standby mode • Setting the time interval for Pilot Assist* braking with Pilot Assist*
(p. 314) In combination with automatic gearbox, Pilot
Assist has functionality for change of target and
Pilot Assist* (p. 317) braking at certain speeds.
• Overtaking assistance with adaptive cruise Change of target

• Symbols and messages for Pilot Assist*
(p. 320)
To reactivate Pilot Assist: If the target vehicle in front suddenly turns then there
may be stationary traffic in front.
– Press the steering wheel button (1). When Pilot Assist is following another vehicle at
> The speed is then set to the most recently speeds below 30 km/h (20 mph) and changes
stored speed. target from a moving to a stationary vehicle, Pilot
Assist will slow down for the stationary vehicle.
WARNING
A significant increase in speed may follow
when the speed is resumed with the
steering wheel button.
Related information
• Activating and starting the Pilot Assist*
(p. 311)
}}
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| WARNING – Pilot Assist is reactivated in the following • the driver sets Pilot Assist in the standby
way: mode.
When Pilot Assist is following another vehicle
at speeds in excess of approx. 30 km/h • Press the steering wheel button . Automatic activation of parking brake
(20 mph) and the target is changed from a In certain situations, the parking brake is applied
moving vehicle to a stationary vehicle, Pilot • Depress the accelerator pedal.
> Pilot Assist resumes following the vehicle in order to keep the car stationary.
Assist will ignore the stationary vehicle and
instead accelerate to the stored speed. ahead if it starts moving forward within This takes place if Pilot Assist is holding the car
6 seconds. stationary with the foot brake and:
• The driver must then intervene him/
herself and brake. • the driver opens the door or takes off his/her
NOTE seatbelt
Automatic standby mode with change of Pilot Assist can hold the car stationary for a • Pilot Assist has kept the car stationary for
target maximum of 5 minutes - then the parking more than approx. 5 minutes
Pilot Assist is disengaged and set in standby brake is applied and the function is disen-
gaged.
• the brakes have overheated
mode:
• the engine is switched off.
• when the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) Before Pilot Assist can be reactivated, the
and Pilot Assist is uncertain whether the tar- parking brake must be released. Related information
get object is a stationary vehicle or some • Pilot Assist* (p. 307)
other object, e.g. a speed bump. Cessation of automatic braking • Activating and starting the Pilot Assist*
• when the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) In some situations, automatic braking ceases on (p. 311)
and the vehicle in front turns off so the Pilot coming to a standstill and Pilot Assist is set in
• Managing the speed for Pilot Assist* (p. 313)
Assist no longer has a vehicle to follow. standby mode. This means that the brakes are
released and the car may start to roll - the driver • Setting the time interval for Pilot Assist*
Automatic braking must therefore intervene and brake the car him- (p. 314)
For shorter stops in connection with inching in self/herself to keep it stationary. • Deactivating/activating the Pilot Assist*
slow traffic or at traffic lights, driving is automati- (p. 315)
cally resumed if the stops do not exceed This may take place in the following situations:
approx. 3 seconds - if it takes longer before the • the driver puts his/her foot on the brake
vehicle in front starts moving again then Pilot pedal
Assist is set in standby mode with automatic
• the parking brake is applied • Limitations of Pilot Assist* (p. 319)
braking. • Symbols and messages for Pilot Assist*
• the gear selector is moved to P, N, or R posi-
(p. 320)
tion
DRIVER SUPPORT
Limitations of Pilot Assist* WARNING between the car and such obstacles. The
The Pilot Assist function may have limitations in driver must ensure him/herself that the
In certain situations, Pilot Assist steering car is at a suitable distance from such
certain situations. assistance may have difficulty helping the obstacles.
driver in the right way or it may be automati-
The Pilot Assist function is an aid which can help cally deactivated - in which case, the use of • The camera and radar sensor does not
the driver in many situations. But the driver is at Pilot Assist is not recommended. Examples of have the capacity to detect all oncoming
all times responsible for maintaining a safe dis- such situations may be that: objects and obstacles in traffic environ-
tance to surrounding objects and a correct posi- ments, e.g. potholes, stationary obstacles
tion in the lane. • the lane markings are worn, missing or
cross each other. or objects which completely or partially
block the route.
• lane division is unclear, for example, when
the lanes divide or merge or at exits or in • Pilot Assist does not "see" pedestrians,
the event of multiple sets of markings. animals, etc.
• edges or other lines than lane markings • The recommended steering input is force
are present on or near the road, e.g. limited, which means that it cannot always
kerbs, joints or repairs to the road sur- help the driver to steer and keep the car
face, edges of barriers, roadside edges or within the lane.
strong shadows.
• the lane is narrow or winding. The driver always has the possibility of correcting
or adjusting a steering intervention imposed by
• the lane contains ridges or holes.
Pilot Assist and can turn the steering wheel to
• weather conditions are poor, e.g. rain, the desired position.
snow or fog or slush or impaired view with
poor light conditions, back-lighting, wet Steep roads and/or heavy load
road surface etc. Bear in mind that Pilot Assist is primarily
The driver should also note that Pilot Assist intended for use when driving on level road surfa-
has the following limitations: ces. The function may have difficulty in keeping
the correct distance from the vehicle ahead when
• High kerbs, roadside barriers, temporary
driving on steep downhill slopes - in which case,
obstacles (traffic cones, safety barriers,
be extra attentive and ready to brake.
etc.) are not detected. Alternatively, they
may be detected incorrectly as lane mark- • Do not use Pilot Assist if the car has a heavy
ings, with a subsequent risk of contact load or a trailer is connected to the car.
}}
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| NOTE • Deactivating/activating the Pilot Assist* Symbols and messages for

(p. 315) Pilot Assist*
Pilot Assist cannot be activated if a trailer,
bicycle rack or similar is connected to the • Overtaking assistance with adaptive cruise A number of symbols and messages regarding
car's electrical system. control* or Pilot Assist* (p. 300) Pilot Assist can be shown via the driver display
and/or the head-up display*.
• Symbols and messages for Pilot Assist*
(p. 320)
Miscellaneous
• Off Road drive mode cannot be selected • Limitations of the camera unit (p. 333)
when Pilot Assist is activated. • Limitations of the radar unit (p. 324)
NOTE
The function uses the car's camera unit,
NOTE
has some general limitations, see the section
Related information
• Activating and starting the Pilot Assist*
(p. 311)
• Managing the speed for Pilot Assist* (p. 313)
(p. 314)
DRIVER SUPPORT
Here are some examples50.
The previous illustration51 shows that Pilot Assist The previous illustration51 shows that Pilot Assist
is set to maintain 110 km/h (68 mph) and at the is set to maintain 110 km/h (68 mph) and at the
The previous illustration51 shows that Pilot Assist
same time is following a vehicle ahead which is same time is following a vehicle ahead which is
is set to maintain 110 km/h (68 mph) and that
keeping the same speed. keeping the same speed.
there is no vehicle ahead to follow.
Pilot Assist provides no steering assistance since Here, Pilot Assist also provides steering assis-
Pilot Assist provides no steering assistance since
the lane's side markings cannot be detected. tance since the lane's side markings can be
the lane's side markings cannot be detected.
detected.
50 In the following illustrative example, the RSI (Road Sign Information) function informs the driver that the maximum permitted speed is 130 km/h (80 mph).
321
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| • Deactivating/activating the Pilot Assist* Radar unit

(p. 315) The radar unit is used by several driver support
• Overtaking assistance with adaptive cruise systems and has the task of sensing other vehi-
control* or Pilot Assist* (p. 300) cles.
The previous illustration51 shows that Pilot Assist

is set to maintain 110 km/h (68 mph) and that
there is no vehicle ahead to follow.
Here too, Pilot Assist provides steering assis-
tance since the lane's side markings can be NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
detected. depending on car model.
The radar unit is used by the following functions:
Related information
• Pilot Assist* (p. 307) • Distance Warning*
• Activating and starting the Pilot Assist* • Adaptive cruise control*

(p. 311) • Lane Keeping Aid
• Managing the speed for Pilot Assist* (p. 313) • Pilot Assist*
• Setting the time interval for Pilot Assist* • City Safety
(p. 314) Modification of the radar unit could result in its
• Change of target and automatic braking with use being illegal.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Related information
• Limitations of the radar unit (p. 324)
• Type approval for radar units (p. 328)
DRIVER SUPPORT
Limitations of the radar unit The radar unit is placed inside the upper section If the driver display shows this symbol
The radar unit has certain limitations - which in of the windscreen together with the car's camera with the message "Windscreen
turn also limits those functions that use the unit. unit. sensor Sensor blocked, see
Owner's manual", it means that the
Blocked unit IMPORTANT camera and radar unit cannot detect other vehi-
cles in front of the car.
Do not place, stick or mount anything on the
outside or inside of the windscreen in front of
or around the camera and radar unit — this
can interfere with camera and radar-depend-
ent functions.
This may mean that functions are reduced,
deactivated completely or give incorrect func-
tion response.
The marked area must be kept free from stickers,

objects, shade film, etc.52.
The following table presents examples of possible causes for a message being shown, along with the appropriate action:
Cause Action
The windscreen surface in front of the camera and radar unit is dirty or cov- Clean dirt, ice and snow from the windscreen surface in front of the camera
ered with ice or snow. and radar unit.
Thick fog and heavy rain or snow block the radar signals or the camera No action. Sometimes the unit does not work during heavy rain or snowfall.
view.
324
DRIVER SUPPORT
Cause Action
Water or snow from the road surface swirls up and blocks the radar signals No action. Sometimes the unit does not work on a very wet or snow-covered
or camera view. road surface.
Dirt has appeared between the inside of the windscreen and the camera Visit a workshop to have the windscreen inside the unit's cover cleaned - an
and radar unit. authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
NOTE that drives in between your car and the vehi-

cle ahead.
Keep the windscreen clean in front of the
Small vehicles, such as motorcycles, or vehi-
camera and radar unit.
cles not driving in the centre of the lane can
remain undetected.
Vehicle speed In bends, the radar unit may detect the
The capacity of the radar unit to detect vehicles wrong vehicle or lose a detected vehicle from
ahead is reduced significantly if: view.
• the speed of the vehicle ahead is signifi- Low trailers
cantly different from that of your own car
Limited field of vision

The radar unit has a limited field of vision. In
some situations another vehicle is not detected,
or the detection is made later than expected.
Low trailer in radar shadow.

Low trailers can also be difficult for the radar unit
The radar unit's field of vision.
to detect, or are not detected at all - the driver
Sometimes the radar unit is late at detecting should therefore be particularly careful when driv-
vehicles at close distances - e.g. a vehicle ing behind low trailers when the adaptive cruise
}}
control or Pilot Assist is activated.
325
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| High temperature Damaged windscreen • The same type or Volvo-approved wind-

At very high temperatures the camera and radar screen wipers must be fitted during
unit can temporarily be switched off for IMPORTANT replacement.
about 15 minutes after the engine is started so
as to protect the unit's electronics. The camera If a crack, scratch or stone chip in the wind-
and radar unit restarts automatically when the screen in front of one of the camera and IMPORTANT
temperature has fallen sufficiently. radar unit “windows” covers an area of When the windscreen is replaced, the camera
approx. 0.5 × 3.0 mm (0.02 × 0.12 in.) or and radar unit must be recalibrated at the
larger, a workshop must be contacted to have workshop to ensure the functionality of all the
the windscreen replaced – an authorised car’s camera and radar-based systems. An
Volvo workshop is recommended. authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
If not rectified it can lead to reduced perform-
ance for the driver support systems that use Maintenance
the camera and radar unit. In order that the camera and radar unit shall
This may mean that functions are reduced, function correctly, the windscreen in front of the
deactivated completely or give incorrect func- unit must be kept clear of dirt, ice and snow, and
tion response. be cleaned regularly with water and car shampoo.
To avoid the risk of failed, deficient or
reduced operation of driver support systems NOTE
that use the radar unit, the following also Dirt, ice and snow covering the camera and
applies: radar unit will reduce its function and may
• Volvo recommends against repairing prevent measurement.
cracks, scratches or stone chips in the This may mean that functions are reduced,
area in front of the camera and radar unit. deactivated completely or give incorrect func-
Instead, the whole windscreen should be tion response.
replaced.
• Before replacing a windscreen, contact Related information
an authorised Volvo workshop to verify • Radar unit (p. 322)
that the correct windscreen is ordered
and fitted. • Limitations of the camera unit (p. 333)
• Limitations of Distance Warning* (p. 289)
DRIVER SUPPORT

(p. 302)
• Limitations of City Safety (p. 346)
DRIVER SUPPORT
Type approval for radar units
Type approval for the car's radar units can be seen in the following table.
Market ACCA BLISB Symbol Type approval
Este equipamento opera em caráter secundário, isto é, não tem direito à proteção contra
interferência prejudicial, mesmo de estações do mesmo tipo, e não pode causar interferência
a sistemas operando em caráter primário.
✓ Modelo: L2C0055TR
1500-15-8065
Brazil
EAN: 07897843840978
Modelo: L2C0054TR
✓ 4122-14-8645
EAN: (01)07897843840855
Hereby, Delphi Electronics & Safety declares that L2C0054TR / L2C0055TR are in
compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive
Europe ✓ ✓
1999/5/EC. The Declaration of Conformity may be consulted at Delphi Electronics & Safety /
2151 E. Lincoln Road / Kokomo, Indiana 46902 USA
TRA
✓ REGISTERED No: ER37536/15
The United Arab Emi- DEALER No: DA37380/15

rates TRA
✓ REGISTERED No: ER37357/15
DEALER No: DA37380/15
328
DRIVER SUPPORT
37295/POSTEL/2014
✓
4927
Indonesia
38806/SDPPI/2015
✓
4927
Type Approval No.: TRC/LPD/2014/255
✓
Equipment Type: Low Power Device (LPD)
Jordan
Type Approval No.: TRC/LPD/2015/3
✓
Equipment Type: Low Power Device (LPD)
Certification No.
✓
MSIP-CMI- DPH-L2C0054TR
Korea
Certification No.
✓
MSIP-CMI-DPH-L2C0055TR
AGREE PAR L’ANRT MAROC
Morocco ✓ ✓ NUMÉRO D’AGRÉMENT: MR 9929 ANRT 2014
DATE D’AGRÉMENT: 26/12/2014
}}
329
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| Market ACCA BLISB Symbol Type approval
This device has been certified under the Communications & Multimedia Act of 1998,
Communications and Multimedia (Technical Standards) Regulations 2000.
To retrieve your device’s serial number, please visit (support.volvocars.com) and search for
✓ “SIRIM Label Verification”.
Malaysia Type Approval No.:
RALM/21A/0315/S(150520)
Type Approval No.:
✓
RALM/21A/0315/S(150618)
Moldavia ✓ ✓ 1024
Singapore ✓ ✓ Complies with IDA Standards DA105753
TA-2014/1824
✓
APPROVED
South Africa
TA-2014/2390
✓
APPROVED
330
DRIVER SUPPORT
✓ CCAB15LP0560T3
Taiwan
✓ CCAB15LP0680T0
A ACC = Adaptive Cruise Control

B BLIS = Blind Spot Information
Related information
• Radar unit (p. 322)
• BLIS* (p. 349)
DRIVER SUPPORT
Camera unit Related information

The camera unit is used by several driver sup- • Limitations of the camera unit (p. 333)
port systems and has the task of for example • Adaptive cruise control* (p. 290)
detecting lane lines or traffic signs.
• Steering assistance upon risk of lane depar-
ture (p. 373)
• Activating/deactivating main beam (p. 135)

The camera unit is used by the following func-
tions:
• Adaptive cruise control*
• Lane assistance*
• Driver Alert Control*
• Pilot Assist*
• City Safety
ture
• Road Sign Information*
• Active main beam*
DRIVER SUPPORT
Limitations of the camera unit Blocked unit

The camera unit has certain limitations - which in If the driver display shows this symbol
turn also limits those functions that use the unit. with the message Windscreen
sensor Sensor blocked, see
Impaired vision Owner's manual, it means that the
The camera has limitations similar to the human camera and radar unit cannot detect other vehi-
eye, i.e. it can "see" worse in for example intense cles in front of the car.
snowfall or rain, dense fog, heavy dust storms The following table presents examples of possi-
and snow flurries. Under such conditions, the ble causes for a message being shown, along
functions of camera-dependent systems could be with the appropriate action:
significantly reduced or temporarily disengaged.
Strong oncoming light, reflections in the carriage-
way, snow or ice on the road surface, dirty road
surfaces or unclear lane markings can also sig- The marked area must be kept free from stickers,
nificantly reduce camera function when it is used objects, shade film, etc.53.
to scan the carriageway to detect pedestrians, The camera unit is placed inside the upper sec-
cyclists, large animals and other vehicles. tion of the windscreen together with the car's
radar unit.
IMPORTANT
Do not place, stick or mount anything on the
outside or inside of the windscreen in front of
or around the camera and radar unit — this
can interfere with camera and radar-depend-
ent functions.
tion response.
333
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| Cause Action
The windscreen surface in front of the camera and radar unit is dirty or Clean dirt, ice and snow from the windscreen surface in front of the camera and
covered with ice or snow. radar unit.
Thick fog and heavy rain or snow block the radar signals or the camera No action. Sometimes the unit does not work during heavy rain or snowfall.
view.
Water or snow from the road surface swirls up and blocks the radar No action. Sometimes the unit does not work on a very wet or snow-covered road
signals or camera view. surface.
Dirt has appeared between the inside of the windscreen and the cam- Visit a workshop to have the windscreen inside the unit's cover cleaned - an
era and radar unit. authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Strong oncoming light No action. The camera unit is reset automatically in more favourable light condi-
tions.
NOTE Damaged windscreen This may mean that functions are reduced,
Keep the windscreen clean in front of the tion response.
camera and radar unit. IMPORTANT
If a crack, scratch or stone chip in the wind- To avoid the risk of failed, deficient or
screen in front of one of the camera and reduced operation of driver support systems
High temperature that use the radar unit, the following also
radar unit “windows” covers an area of
At very high temperatures the camera and radar applies:
approx. 0.5 × 3.0 mm (0.02 × 0.12 in.) or
unit can temporarily be switched off for
about 15 minutes after the engine is started so
larger, a workshop must be contacted to have • Volvo recommends against repairing
the windscreen replaced – an authorised cracks, scratches or stone chips in the
as to protect the unit's electronics. The camera
Volvo workshop is recommended. area in front of the camera and radar unit.
and radar unit restarts automatically when the
temperature has fallen sufficiently. If not rectified it can lead to reduced perform- Instead, the whole windscreen should be
ance for the driver support systems that use replaced.
the camera and radar unit. • Before replacing a windscreen, contact
an authorised Volvo workshop to verify
334
DRIVER SUPPORT
that the correct windscreen is ordered Related information

and fitted. • Camera unit (p. 332)
• The same type or Volvo-approved wind- • Limitations of the radar unit (p. 324)
screen wipers must be fitted during
replacement.
• Limitations of Driver Alert Control (p. 365)
IMPORTANT
When the windscreen is replaced, the camera
and radar unit must be recalibrated at the • Limitations of Road Sign Information*
workshop to ensure the functionality of all the (p. 362)
car’s camera and radar-based systems. An
Maintenance
In order that the camera and radar unit shall
function correctly, the windscreen in front of the
unit must be kept clear of dirt, ice and snow, and
be cleaned regularly with water and car shampoo.
NOTE
Dirt, ice and snow covering the camera and
radar unit will reduce its function and may
prevent measurement.
tion response.
DRIVER SUPPORT
City Safety The function helps the driver by automatically WARNING

City Safety uses visual, haptic and acoustic sig- braking the car in the event of an imminent risk
nals to alert the driver of any pedestrians, of collision if the driver does not react in time by • The City Safety is supplementary driver
braking and/or swerving. support intended to improve driving safety
cyclists, large animals and vehicles that appear.
– it cannot handle all situations in all traf-
The car then brakes automatically unless the City Safety activates a short, sharp braking proce- fic, weather and road conditions.
driver him/herself acts within a reasonable time. dure, normally stopping the car just behind the
vehicle in front. For most drivers this is well out- • The City Safety auto-brake function can
side normal driving style and may be perceived as prevent a collision or reduce collision
uncomfortable. speed, but to ensure full brake perform-
ance the driver should always depress the
City Safety is activated in situations where the brake pedal – even if the car auto-brakes.
driver should have started braking earlier, which
is why it cannot help the driver in every situation. • The warning and steering assistance are
only activated if there is a high risk of col-
City Safety is designed to be activated as late as lision – you must therefore never wait for
possible in order to avoid unnecessary interven- a collision warning or for City Safety to
tion. intervene.
The driver or passengers are not normally aware • The warning and brake intervention for
of City Safety - it only intervenes in a situation pedestrians and cyclists are deactivated
where a collision is immediately imminent. at vehicle speeds exceeding 70 km/h
Location of the radar unit54.
(43 mph).
City Safety can prevent a collision or reduce colli-
sion speed.
• City Safety does not activate any auto-
brake functions in the event of heavy
City Safety is an aid to assist a driver who is at acceleration.
risk of colliding with a pedestrian, large animal, • City Safety is not a substitute for the driv-
cyclist or a vehicle. er's attention and judgement. The driver
The City Safety function can help the driver to is always responsible for ensuring the car
avoid a collision when driving in queues, e.g. is driven in a safe manner, at the appro-
when changes in the traffic ahead, combined with priate speed, with an appropriate distance
a lapse in attention, could lead to an incident.
336
DRIVER SUPPORT
to other vehicles, and in accordance with Large animals City Safety carries out three steps in the follow-
current traffic rules and regulations. In the event of a risk of a collision with a large ing order:
• The driver is advised to read all sections animal, City Safety can reduce the car's speed by 1. Collision warning
in the Owner's Manual that relate to City up to 15 km/h (9 mph).
2. Brake support
Safety to learn about factors such as its The brake function for large animals is primarily
limitations and what the driver should be 3. Auto Brake
intended to reduce the force of the impact at
aware of before using the system (see higher speeds and is most effective at speeds The following text explains what happens during
the list of links at the end of this article). above 70 km/h (43 mph) but less effective at the three steps:
lower speed. 1 - Collision warning
Parameters for City Safety The driver is first warned of a potentially immi-
City Safety can avoid a collision with a vehicle, a
Overview
nent collision.
cyclist, a pedestrian or a larger animal in front by
reducing the car's speed with the auto-brake City Safety can detect pedestrians, cyclists or
function. vehicles that are stationary or moving in the same
direction as the car and are ahead. City Safety
If the speed difference is greater than the follow- can also detect pedestrians, cyclists or large ani-
ing specified speeds, the City Safety auto-brake mals that are crossing the road in front of the car.
function cannot prevent a collision but mitigates
the consequences of it. In the event of a risk of collision with a pedes-
trian, large animal, cyclist or vehicle (including
Vehicles vehicles described in the "City Safety in cross
For a vehicle in front, City Safety can reduce the traffic" section), the driver's attention is alerted by
speed by up to 60 km/h (37 mph). means of a red flashing warning signal, an acous-
cyclists tic signal and a haptic warning in the form of a
Function overview54. brake pulse. At lower speeds or with hard braking
For a cyclist, City Safety can reduce the speed by
up to 50 km/h (30 mph). Acoustic warning signal in the event of a risk or acceleration there will be no haptic warning.
of collision The brake pulse frequency varies according to
Pedestrians the car's speed.
For a pedestrian, City Safety can reduce speed by Warning signal in the event of a risk of colli-
up to 45 km/h (28 mph). sion
radar unit
337
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| 2 - Brake support NOTE Search path in the top view of the centre display:
If the risk of collision has increased further after
On cars with manual gearbox, the engine • Settings My Car IntelliSafe
the collision warning then the brake support is
activated. stops when the Auto-brake function has stop-
ped the car, unless the driver has managed to Related information
Brake support reinforces the driver’s braking depress the clutch pedal beforehand. • Setting the warning distance for City Safety
action if the system considers that the braking is (p. 339)
not sufficient to avoid a collision. • Detection of obstacles with City Safety
The driver can always interrupt a braking inter-
3 - Auto Brake vention by firmly depressing the accelerator (p. 340)
The automatic brake function is activated last. pedal. • City Safety with evasive manoeuvres (p. 343)
If in this situation the driver has not yet started to • City Safety when evasive manoeuvres are
take evasive action and the risk of collision is NOTE prevented (p. 345)
imminent then the automatic braking function is When City Safety brakes, the brake lights • City Safety in cross traffic (p. 342)
deployed - this takes place irrespective of come on.
whether or not the driver brakes. Braking then • Limitations of City Safety (p. 346)
takes place with full brake force in order to • Messages for City Safety (p. 348)
reduce collision speed, or with limited brake force When City Safety is activated and brakes the
vehicle, the driver display shows a text message
if it is sufficient to avoid a collision.
to the effect that the function is/has been active.
In connection with automatic braking the seatbelt
tensioner may also be activated. For more infor-
mation see the "Seatbelt tensioner" section. WARNING
City Safety must not be used as an excuse for
In some situations, the action of Auto-brake may the driver to change his/her driving style. If
begin with light braking and then progress to full the driver relies solely on City Safety to do the
brake action. braking, there might be a risk of a collision
sooner or later.
When City Safety has prevented a collision with a
stationary object, the car remains stationary in
anticipation of positive action by the driver. If the Market limitation
car has been braked to avoid collision with a City Safety is not available in all countries. If City
slower vehicle in front, its speed is reduced to Safety does not appear in the centre display's
match that of the vehicle in front. Settings menu, the car is not equipped with this
function.
338
DRIVER SUPPORT
Setting the warning distance for City warnings and instead leads to City Safety giving a NOTE
Safety warning at a later stage.
The warning with direction indicators for Rear
City Safety is always activated but the driver can The Late warning distance should therefore only Collision Warning is deactivated if the warn-
select the warning distance for the function. be used in exceptional cases, as in dynamic driving distance for collision warning in the City
ing. Safety function is set at the lowest level
NOTE "Late".
The City Safety function cannot be deacti- WARNING
The seat belt pre-tensioning and braking
vated. It is activated automatically when the
• No automatic system can guarantee functions are, however, still active.
engine/electric operation is started and 100 % correct function in all situations.
remains switched on until the engine/electric Therefore, never test City Safety by driv-
operation is switched off. ing at people, animals or vehicles - this
Related information
may cause severe damage and injury and • City Safety (p. 336)
The warning distance determines the sensitivity risk lives. • Detection of obstacles with City Safety
of the system and regulates the distance at (p. 340)
• City Safety warns the driver when there is
which the visual, acoustic and haptic warnings a risk of a collision, but it cannot shorten • City Safety with evasive manoeuvres (p. 343)
shall be triggered. the driver’s reaction time. • City Safety when evasive manoeuvres are
To select warning distance: • Even if the warning distance has been set prevented (p. 345)
1. to Early warnings could be perceived as • City Safety in cross traffic (p. 342)
Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe in
being late in certain situations, e.g. when
there are large differences in speed or if
2. Under City Safety Warning, select Late, vehicles ahead suddenly brake heavily. • Messages for City Safety (p. 348)
Normal or Early to set the desired warning • Rear Collision Warning (p. 349)
distance.
• With the warning distance set at Early,
the warnings will come more in advance.
If the Early setting produces too many warnings, This may mean that the warnings come
which could be perceived as irritating in certain more frequently than at the warning dis-
situations, the Normal or Late warning distance tance Normal, but it is recommended
can be selected. since it can make City Safety more effec-
tive.
When warnings are perceived as being too fre-
quent or disturbing, the warning distance can be
reduced, which reduces the total number of
339
DRIVER SUPPORT
Detection of obstacles with City bicycle outline, requiring the ability to identify the Pedestrians
Safety bicycle, head, arms, shoulders, legs, upper and
The obstructions that City Safety can detect are lower body plus a normal human pattern of move-
vehicles, cyclists, large animals and pedestrians. ment.
If large parts of the cyclist's body or bicycle are
Vehicles not visible to the function's camera then the sys-
City Safety detects most vehicles that are either tem cannot detect a cyclist.
stationary or moving in the same direction as your
car, as well as vehicles described in the "City For the function to be able to detect a cyclist,
Safety in cross traffic" section. he/she must be an adult and riding a bicycle
designed for adults.
In order that City Safety shall be able to detect a
vehicle in the dark, the vehicle's front and rear
lights must be working and clearly illuminated. WARNING
City Safety is supplementary driver support, Optimal examples of what the system regards as pedes-
Cyclists but it cannot detect all cyclists in all situations trians with clear body outlines.
and, for example, cannot see: For optimal performance, the system function
• partially obscured cyclists. that detects pedestrians must receive the clear-
est possible information about the body outline,
• cyclists if the background contrast of the
requiring the ability to identify the head, arms,
cyclist is poor – warning and brake inter-
shoulders, legs, upper and lower body plus a nor-
ventions may then be late or not occur at
mal human pattern of movement.
all.
• cyclists wearing clothing that obscures In order that it shall be possible to detect a
the body outline. pedestrian there must be a contrast with the
background and this will be affected by such
• bicycles loaded with large objects. things as clothes, the background and the
The driver is always responsible that the vehi- weather. With poor contrast the pedestrian may
cle is driven correctly and with a safety dis- either be detected late or not at all, which may
Optimal examples of what City Safety interprets as a tance adapted to the speed.
cyclist — with clear body outline and bicycle outline. mean that warnings and braking are late or omit-
ted.
Optimal performance requires that the system
function that detects a cyclist must receive the
clearest possible information about the body and
340
DRIVER SUPPORT
City Safety can also detect pedestrians in the Large animals WARNING
dark if they are illuminated by the car's head-
lamps. City Safety is supplementary driver support,
but it cannot detect all large animals in all sit-
uations and, for example, cannot see:
WARNING
• partially obscured large animals.
City Safety is supplementary driver support,
but it cannot detect all pedestrians in all sit- • larger animals seen from the front or from
uations and, for example, cannot see: behind.
• partially obscured pedestrians, people in • large animals that run or move quickly.
clothing that hides their body contour or • large animals if the background contrast
pedestrians shorter than 80 cm (32 in.). of the animals is poor - warning and
• pedestrians if the background contrast of brake interventions may then be late or
the pedestrians is poor - warning and not occur at all.
Optimum examples of what City Safety interprets as
brake interventions may then be late or large animals - standing still or walking slowly and with • small animals such as dogs and cats, for
not occur at all. clear body outline. example.
• pedestrians who are carrying larger Optimal performance requires that the system The driver is always responsible that the vehi-
objects. function that detects a large animal (e.g. elk and cle is driven correctly and with a safety dis-
horse) must receive the clearest possible infor- tance adapted to the speed.
The driver is always responsible that the vehi-
cle is driven correctly and with a safety dis- mation about the body outline, requiring the abil-
tance adapted to the speed. ity to identify the animal directly from the side in Related information
combination with what is a normal pattern of • City Safety (p. 336)
movement for the animal.
• Setting the warning distance for City Safety
If parts of the animal's body are not visible to the (p. 339)
function's camera then the system cannot detect
• Detection of obstacles with City Safety
the animal. (p. 340)
City Safety can also detect large animals in the • City Safety with evasive manoeuvres (p. 343)
dark if they are illuminated by the car's head-
lamps. • City Safety when evasive manoeuvres are
prevented (p. 345)
• City Safety in cross traffic (p. 342)
}}
341
DRIVER SUPPORT
• Limitations of City Safety (p. 346) City Safety in cross traffic • the oncoming vehicle must have its head-
• Messages for City Safety (p. 348) City Safety can help the driver when turning and lamps switched on.
crossing the path of another oncoming vehicle at
an intersection. WARNING
• The "City Safety in crossing traffic" func-
tion is supplementary driver support
intended to improve driving safety – it
cannot handle all situations in all traffic,
weather and road conditions.
• Warnings and brake interventions due to
a collision risk with an oncoming vehicle
often come very late.
• Never wait for a collision warning or for
City Safety to intervene.
• City Safety is not a substitute for the driv-
er's attention and judgement. The driver
Sector in which City Safety can detect oncoming cross-
ing vehicles. is always responsible for ensuring the car
is driven in a safe manner, at the appro-
For City Safety to detect an oncoming vehicle on priate speed, with an appropriate distance
a collision course, the oncoming vehicle must first to other vehicles, and in accordance with
enter the sector (1) in which City Safety can ana- current traffic rules and regulations.
lyse the situation.
The following further criteria must also be fulfil- Limitations in cross traffic
led: In some cases City Safety may have difficulty
• your car must be travelling at no less than helping the driver deal with collision risks due to
4 km/h (3 mph) oncoming cross traffic. Examples are:
• your car must turn to the left in markets with • stability control ESC intervenes in the event
right-hand traffic (or to the right in left-hand of slippery driving conditions
traffic) • if the oncoming vehicle is detected too late
342
DRIVER SUPPORT
• if the oncoming vehicle is obscured by some- • Messages for City Safety (p. 348) City Safety with evasive
thing • Limitations of the camera unit (p. 333) manoeuvres
• if the oncoming vehicle has headlamps • Limitations of the radar unit (p. 324) City Safety steering assistance can assist the
switched off driver to steer away from a vehicle/obstacle
when it is not possible to avoid a collision by
• if the oncoming vehicle drives in an unpre-
dictable manner, for example, abruptly braking alone.
changes lanes at a late stage.
NOTE
NOTE
Your car steers away
Related information Slow moving/stationary vehicles or obstacles.
City Safety engages by amplifying the driver's
(p. 339) steering input, which only occurs after the driver
has begun an evasive manoeuvre - and then only
• Detection of obstacles with City Safety if the driver is not steering enough to avoid a col-
(p. 340) lision.
• City Safety with evasive manoeuvres (p. 343)
In parallel with the amplified steering input, the
• City Safety when evasive manoeuvres are brake system is also used to further amplify the
prevented (p. 345) steering input. The function also helps to
}}
343
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| straighten the car again after passing the obsta- Limitations for City Safety steering • Messages for City Safety (p. 348)
cle. assistance • Limitations of the camera unit (p. 333)
City Safety steering assistance can detect: City Safety may have limited functionality in cer-
tain situations and fail to intervene e.g.:
• Vehicles • Lane Keeping Aid (p. 365)
• outside the speed range 50-100 km/h
• cyclists
(30-62 mph)
• Pedestrians
• if the driver initiates an evasive manoeuvre
• larger animals.
NOTE
WARNING
• The ability of City Safety to be able to which has some general limitations, see the
predict a specific situation is supplemen- "Limitations for camera unit" section.
tary driver support intended to improve
driving safety – it cannot handle all situa-
tions in all traffic, weather and road condi- NOTE
tions. The function uses the car's radar unit, which
• City Safety is not a substitute for the driv- has some general limitations, see the section
er's attention and judgement. The driver "Limitations for radar unit".
is always responsible for ensuring the car
is driven in a safe manner, at the appro- Related information
priate speed, with an appropriate distance
to other vehicles, and in accordance with
current traffic rules and regulations. • Setting the warning distance for City Safety
(p. 339)
Activate/deactivate • Detection of obstacles with City Safety

City Safety steering assistance cannot be deacti- (p. 340)
vated but is always activated. • City Safety when evasive manoeuvres are
prevented (p. 345)
344
DRIVER SUPPORT
City Safety when evasive has the opportunity to avoid a collision via a NOTE
manoeuvres are prevented steering manoeuvre.
City Safety has the facility to assist the driver by However, if City Safety anticipates that an evasive has some general limitations, see the section
automatically braking the car earlier when it is manoeuvre is not possible due to traffic in an "Limitations for radar unit".
not possible to avoid a collision by only steering adjacent lane, the function can assist the driver
away. by automatically starting to brake at an earlier
stage. Related information
City Safety assists the driver by continuously • City Safety (p. 336)
attempting to anticipate whether there are
"escape routes" to the side in case a slow or sta- WARNING • Setting the warning distance for City Safety
(p. 339)
tionary vehicle ahead is discovered at a late • The ability of City Safety to be able to
stage. predict a specific situation is supplemen- • Detection of obstacles with City Safety
tary driver support intended to improve (p. 340)
driving safety – it cannot handle all situa- • City Safety with evasive manoeuvres (p. 343)
tions.
• City Safety is not a substitute for the driv-
er's attention and judgement. The driver • Messages for City Safety (p. 348)
is always responsible for ensuring the car • Limitations of the camera unit (p. 333)
is driven in a safe manner, at the appro- • Limitations of the radar unit (p. 324)
Your car (1) "sees" no options for evading the vehicle

ahead (2) and can therefore auto-brake earlier. NOTE
Your car The function uses the car's camera unit,
Slow/stationary vehicle "Limitations for camera unit" section.
City Safety does not intervene with the auto-

brake function as long as the driver him/herself
345
DRIVER SUPPORT
Limitations of City Safety The camera and radar unit's field of view Driver intervention
The City Safety function may have limitations in The camera's field of vision is limited, which is Reversing
certain situations. why pedestrians, large animals, cyclists and vehi- When your own car is reversing, City Safety is
cles in some situations cannot be detected, or temporarily deactivated.
Surroundings they are detected later than anticipated.
Low speed
Low objects Dirty vehicles may be detected later than others City Safety is not activated at very low speeds -
Low-hanging objects, e.g. a flag/pennant for pro- and if it is dark, motorcycles may be detected late below 4 km/h (3 mph) - and the system there-
jecting load, or accessories such as auxiliary or not at all. fore does not intervene in situations where your
lamps and bull bars that are higher than the bon-
If a text message in the driver display indicates car is approaching a vehicle ahead very slowly,
net limit the function.
that the camera and radar unit is obstructed, City e.g. when parking.
Skidding Safety may be unable to detect pedestrians, large Active driver
On slippery road surfaces the braking distance is animals, cyclists, vehicles or road lines ahead of Driver commands are always prioritised, which is
extended, which may reduce the capacity of City the car. This means that the functionality of City why City Safety does not intervene or postpone
Safety to avoid a collision. In such situations, the Safety may be reduced. warning/intervention in situations where the
anti-lock brakes and the stability control ESC55 driver is steering and accelerating in a decisive
However, an error message is not shown in all
will give the best possible braking force with manner, even if a collision is unavoidable.
situations where the windscreen sensors are
maintained stability.
obstructed. The driver must therefore take care to Active and aware driving behaviour can therefore
Oncoming light keep the area of windscreen in front of the cam- delay a collision warning and intervention in order
The visual warning signal in the windscreen may era and radar unit clear. to minimise unnecessary warnings.
be difficult to notice in the event of strong sun-
light, reflections, when sunglasses are being IMPORTANT
worn or if the driver is not looking straight ahead.
Maintenance and replacement of City Safety
Heat
components must only be performed by a
In the event of high passenger compartment workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is
temperature caused by e.g. strong sunlight, the recommended.
visual warning signal in the windscreen may be
temporarily disengaged.
346
DRIVER SUPPORT
Miscellaneous • Warnings and brake interventions for • Detection of obstacles with City Safety
pedestrians and cyclists are deactivated (p. 340)
WARNING at vehicle speeds exceeding 70 km/h • City Safety with evasive manoeuvres (p. 343)
(43 mph).
• Warnings and brake interventions could • City Safety when evasive manoeuvres are
be implemented late or not at all if a traf- • Do not place, stick or mount anything on prevented (p. 345)
the outside or inside of the windscreen in
fic situation or external influences mean • City Safety in cross traffic (p. 342)
front of or around the camera and radar
that the camera and radar unit cannot
detect pedestrians, cyclists, large animals
unit — this can interfere with camera- • Messages for City Safety (p. 348)
dependent functions. • Limitations of the camera unit (p. 333)
or vehicles correctly.
• For vehicles to be detected at night, their • Objects, snow, ice or dirt in the area of • Limitations of the radar unit (p. 324)
the camera sensor may reduce its func-
headlamps and rear lamp cluster must be
tionality, fully deactivate it or give incor- • Electronic Stability Control ESC (p. 271)
switched on and shining clearly.
rect function response.
• The camera and radar unit has a limited
range for pedestrians and cyclists. The
system can provide effective warnings NOTE
and brake interventions as long as the The function uses the car's camera unit,
relative speed is below 50 km/h which has some general limitations, see the
(30 mph). For stationary or slow-moving "Limitations for camera unit" section.
vehicles, warnings and brake interven-
tions are effective at vehicle speeds up to
70 km/h (43 mph). Speed reduction for NOTE
large animals is less than 15 km/h
(9 mph) and can be achieved at vehicle
speeds above 70 km/h (43 mph). The
warning and brake intervention for large
animals is less effective at lower speeds.
Related information
• Warnings for stationary or slow-moving
vehicles and large animals could be dis- • City Safety (p. 336)
engaged due to darkness or poor visibil- • Setting the warning distance for City Safety
ity. (p. 339)
347
DRIVER SUPPORT
Messages for City Safety

A number of messages regarding City Safety
can be shown in the driver display.
The following table shows some examples.

Message Specification
City Safety When City Safety brakes or has done an automatic braking, several of the driver display symbols may be illuminated
in connection with a text message being shown.
Automatic intervention
City Safety The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo workshop is
recommended.
Reduced functionality Service
required
A text message can be cleared by briefly press- • Limitations of City Safety (p. 346)
Related information
(p. 339)
• Detection of obstacles with City Safety
(p. 340)
• City Safety with evasive manoeuvres (p. 343)
• City Safety when evasive manoeuvres are
prevented (p. 345)
348
DRIVER SUPPORT
Rear Collision Warning • if the vehicle approaching from the rear has a BLIS*
The Rear Collision Warning (RCW) function can speed exceeding 80 km/h (50 mph). The BLIS56 function is designed to give a warn-
help the driver to avoid being hit by a vehicle ing of vehicles diagonally behind and to the side
approaching from behind. NOTE of your car so as to give assistance in heavy traf-
In certain markets, RCW does not give a fic on roads with several lanes in the same direc-
RCW is activated automatically each time the
warning with the direction indicators due to tion.
engine is started.
local traffic regulations - in such cases, this BLIS is a driver aid intended to give a warning of:
The RCW can warn the driver in a vehicle part of the function is deactivated.
approaching from behind that a collision is immi- • vehicles in the car's blind spot
nent by rapidly flashing the direction indicators.
NOTE
• quickly approaching vehicles in the left and
If, at a vehicle speed below 30 km/h (20 mph), right lanes closest to the car.
the RCW function detects that the car is in dan- The warning with direction indicators for Rear
ger of being hit from behind, the seatbelt ten- Collision Warning is deactivated if the warn-
sioners may tension the front seatbelts and the ing distance for collision warning in the City
Whiplash Protection System safety system is Safety function is set at the lowest level
activated. "Late".
The seat belt pre-tensioning and braking
Immediately before the collision, RCW may also
functions are, however, still active.
activate the foot brake in order to reduce the for-
ward acceleration of the car during the collision.
However, the foot brake is only activated if the Related information
car is stationary. The foot brake releases immedi- • City Safety (p. 336)
ately if the accelerator pedal is depressed. • Setting the warning distance for City Safety
(p. 339)
Limitations Location of BLIS lamp57.
In certain cases the RCW may have difficulty • Seatbelt tensioner (p. 59) Indicator lamp
helping the driver in the event of a collision risk. • Whiplash Protection System (p. 57)
This can be for example: The function is activated/deactivated using
the BLIS button in the centre display's func-
• if the vehicle approaching from the rear is
tion view.
detected too late
• if the vehicle approaching from the rear
}}
changes lane at the last moment
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| from a constant glow to flashing with a more Related information

intense light. • Activate/deactivate BLIS* (p. 351)
• Limitations of BLIS* (p. 351)
NOTE
• Messages for BLIS* and Cross Traffic Alert*
The lamp illuminates on the side of the car (p. 356)
where the system has detected the vehicle. If
the car is overtaken on both sides at the
• Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 352)
same time then both lamps illuminate.
WARNING
Principle of BLIS • The BLIS function is supplementary driver
Zone in blind spot make it safer – it cannot handle all situa-
Zone for quickly approaching vehicle. tions in all traffic, weather and road condi-
tions.
The BLIS function is active at speeds • The responsibility for changing lanes
above 10 km/h (6 mph). safely and using good judgement always
The system is designed to react when: rests with the driver.
• your car is overtaken by other vehicles • BLIS is not a substitute for the driver's
attention and judgement. The driver is
• another vehicle is quickly approaching your
always responsible for ensuring the car is
car.
When BLIS detects a vehicle in Zone 1 or a ate speed, with an appropriate distance to
quickly approaching vehicle in Zone 2, the indica- other vehicles, and in accordance with
tor lamp on the door mirror on the affected side current traffic rules and regulations.
illuminates with a constant glow. If the driver acti-
vates the direction indicator on the same side as
the warning, the indicator lamp will change over
56 Blind Spot Information Systems

DRIVER SUPPORT
Activate/deactivate BLIS* If BLIS was deactivated when the engine was Limitations of BLIS*
The BLIS58 function can be activated/deacti- switched off, it will continue to be deactivated The BLIS60 function may have limitations in cer-
vated. when the engine is next started and no indicator tain situations.
lights will then be illuminated.
Examples of limitations:
Related information
• BLIS* (p. 349) • Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors may
reduce the functions and deactivate alerts.
• The BLIS function is automatically deacti-
• Messages for BLIS* and Cross Traffic Alert* vated if a trailer, bicycle rack or similar is con-
(p. 356) nected to the car's electrical system.
• For optimal performance of BLIS, no bicycle
rack, luggage carrier or similar should be
mounted on the car's towbar.
WARNING
Location of BLIS lamp59.
• BLIS does not work on sharp bends.
Indicator lamp
• BLIS does not work when the car is
The function is activated/deactivated using reversing.
the BLIS button in the centre display's func-
tion view. Sensors
– Tap on the BLIS button in function view. The sensors for BLIS are located inside each
> BLIS is activated/deactivated - a green/ corner of the rear wing/bumper. The sensors are
grey indicator is shown in the button. also used by the Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) func-
tion.
If BLIS is activated when starting the engine, the
function is confirmed by the door mirror indicator
lamps blinking once.
58 Blind Spot Information

60 Blind Spot Information }}
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| • Messages for BLIS* and Cross Traffic Alert* Cross Traffic Alert*
(p. 356) CTA62 is a driver support that supplements
• Limitations of Cross Traffic Alert (p. 354) BLIS63 and is designed to warn of traffic cross-
ing behind the car when it is reversing.
Keep the surface clean - on both the left and right-hand

sides of the car61.
• To ensure optimal functionality, the surfaces

in front of the sensors must be kept clean.
• Do not affix any objects, tape or labels in the
Principle of CTA.
area of the sensors.
CTA supplements BLIS by detecting the
IMPORTANT approach of crossing traffic during reversing,
such as when reversing out of a parking space.
Repair of the BLIS and CTA functions' com-
ponents or repainting the bumpers must only CTA is primarily designed to detect vehicles. In
be performed by a workshop - an authorised favourable conditions it may also be able to
Volvo workshop is recommended. detect smaller objects, such as cyclists and
pedestrians.
Related information CTA is only active if the car rolls backwards or if

• BLIS* (p. 349) reverse gear has been selected.
• Activate/deactivate BLIS* (p. 351)

DRIVER SUPPORT
If CTA has sensed that something is approaching WARNING Activate/deactivate Cross Traffic
from the side, this is also indicated with: Alert*
• The Cross Traffic Alert function is supple-
• an acoustic signal - the sound is heard in the mentary driver support intended to facili- The CTA66 function can be deactivated.
left-hand or right-hand speaker according to tate driving and make it safer – it cannot
the direction from which the object On/Off
handle all situations in all traffic, weather
approaches. Press the Cross Traffic Alert
and road conditions.
• an illuminated icon in the PAS64 graphics on • The responsibility for reversing the car function view.
the screen. safely and using good judgement always
• an icon on the Park assist camera top view. rests with the driver.
• Cross Traffic Alert is not a substitute for
the driver's attention and judgement. The
• GREEN button indication - CTA is activated.
the car is driven in a safe manner, at the • GREY button indication - CTA is deactivated.
appropriate speed, with an appropriate CTA is activated automatically each time the
distance to other vehicles, and in accord- engine is started.
tions. Related information
Related information • Limitations of Cross Traffic Alert (p. 354)
• Activate/deactivate Cross Traffic Alert* • Messages for BLIS* and Cross Traffic Alert*
(p. 353) (p. 356)
Illuminated icon for CTA in the PAS graphics on the
screen65. • Messages for BLIS* and Cross Traffic Alert* • BLIS* (p. 349)
(p. 356)
• Limitations of Cross Traffic Alert (p. 354)
• BLIS* (p. 349)
• Park Assist* (p. 378)
62 Cross Traffic Alert

64 Park Assist
DRIVER SUPPORT
Limitations of Cross Traffic Alert • For optimal performance of CTA, no bicycle

The CTA67 function may have limitations in cer- rack, luggage carrier or similar should be
tain situations. mounted on the car's towbar.
CTA does not perform optimally in all situations Sensors

but has some limitations. For example, the CTA The sensors for CTA are located inside each cor-
sensors cannot "see" through other parked vehi- ner of the rear wing/bumper. The sensors are
cles or obstructing obstacles. also used by the BLIS68 function.
Here are some examples of situations where
CTA’s "field of vision" may be already limited and
approaching vehicles cannot therefore be
detected until they are very close:
In an angled parking slot CTA may be completely “blind”
on one side.
Blind CTA sector.
Sector in which CTA can detect/“see”.

However, as your car slowly reverses, the angle it
makes with the obstructing vehicle/object
changes and the blind sector rapidly decreases.
Keep the surface clean - on both the left and right-hand
Examples of further limitations: sides of the car69.
• Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors may • To ensure optimal functionality, the surfaces
reduce the functions and deactivate alerts. in front of the sensors must be kept clean.
The car is parked deep inside a parking slot. • CTA is automatically deactivated if a trailer, • Do not affix any objects, tape or labels in the
bicycle rack or similar is connected to the area of the sensors.
car's electrical system.

354
DRIVER SUPPORT
IMPORTANT
Repair of the BLIS and CTA functions' com-
ponents or repainting the bumpers must only
be performed by a workshop - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
• Activate/deactivate Cross Traffic Alert*
(p. 353)
• Messages for BLIS* and Cross Traffic Alert*
(p. 356)
• BLIS* (p. 349)
DRIVER SUPPORT
Messages for BLIS* and Cross

Traffic Alert*
A number of messages regarding BLIS70 and/or
CTA71 can be shown in the driver display.

Blind spot sensor The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Service required
Blind spot system off BLIS and CTA have been deactivated as a trailer has been connected to the car's electrical system.
Trailer attached
A text message can be cleared by briefly press- • Managing messages in the driver display and
ing the button, located in the centre of the the centre display (p. 107)
Related information
• BLIS* (p. 349)
• Activate/deactivate BLIS* (p. 351)
• Activate/deactivate Cross Traffic Alert*
(p. 353)

DRIVER SUPPORT
Road Sign Information* WARNING Related information

The Road Sign Information function (RSI72) • Sign display with Road Sign Information
helps the driver to observe speed-related road
• The Road Sign Information function is (p. 358)
supplementary driver support intended to
signs and certain prohibition signs as the car facilitate driving and make it safer – it • Road Sign Information with Speed Warning
passes them. cannot handle all situations in all traffic, and Settings (p. 360)
weather and road conditions. • Road Sign Information with Speed Camera
Information* (p. 361)
• Road Sign Information is not a substitute
for the driver's attention and judgement. • Limitations of Road Sign Information*
The driver is always responsible for (p. 362)
ensuring the car is driven in a safe man-
ner, at the appropriate speed, with an
and in accordance with current traffic
Activate/deactivate RSI
The Road Sign Information function is selectable
Examples of readable signs73. - the driver can select On or Off.
RSI provides information about such things as Press the Road Sign
current speed, when a motorway or road is star- Information button in the cen-
ting/ending, when overtaking is prohibited or tre display's function view.
when the direction of travel is one-way.
In the case where both a sign for motorway/dual
carriageway and a sign for the speed limit are
passed, RSI selects to show a sign symbol for
motorway/dual carriageway. The new speed limit • GREEN button indication - RSI is activated.
is shown directly with a line in the driver display's • GREY button indication - RSI is deactivated.
speed scale.
72 Road Sign Information

73 Road signs are market-dependent - illustrations in these instructions only show a few examples.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Sign display with Road Sign If the driver enters a road End of all restrictions.
Information marked with a no-entry sign at
The Road Sign Information function (RSI74) reg- the roadside, the symbol for
isters and shows road signs in different ways this sign75 flashes on and off
depending on the sign and the situation. on the driver display as a warn-
ing.
If the car is equipped with Sensus Navigation* End of motorway.
then information from the map is also used to
determine whether the car is being driven in the
wrong direction.
The driver can also get an acoustic warning when
driving towards a no-entry entrance if the Audio
Warning function is activated - see the heading The driver display symbol extinguishes after
"Activating/deactivating the acoustic warning" in 10-30 seconds and remains so until the next
the section "Activating/deactivating Road Sign speed related sign is passed.
Information".
Changed speed limit
Example75 of detected speed information.
Speed limit or end of motorway When passing a direct speed limit sign when a
When RSI detects an "indirect speed limit sign" speed limit changes, a symbol with the corres-
When RSI detects a road sign with an imposed stating the end of the current speed limit - e.g. at ponding road sign appears in the driver's display.
speed limit, the driver display shows the sign as a the end of a motorway - a symbol appears with
symbol plus an indication in red on the speedom- the corresponding road sign in the driver's dis- Example of direct speed limit
eter. play. sign75.
An additional75 sign, such as Example of indirect speed limit sign75:

"no overtaking", may be shown
together with the speed limit
symbol.

75 Road signs are market-dependent - the illustrations in these instructions only show examples.
DRIVER SUPPORT
The driver display symbol extinguishes after Additional signs Some speed limits only apply
about 5 minutes and remains so until the next after a certain distance or at a
speed related sign is passed. certain time of day. The driver's
attention is drawn to this fact
Sensus Navigation by means of a symbol for an
If the car is equipped with Sensus Navigation, additional sign below the speed
speed information is read from the navigation symbol. The additional symbol
unit in the following cases: in the driver display will show either “DIST” or
• On detection of signs that indirectly indicate “TIME”.
a speed limit, such as motorway, dual car- A symbol for additional sign in
riageway and city limit signs. the form of an empty frame
• If a previously detected speed sign is under the driver display's speed
assumed not to apply any longer, but no new symbol75 means that the RSI
sign has been detected. Examples of additional signs75. has detected an additional sign
Sometimes different speed limits are signed for with supplementary information
NOTE the same road - an additional sign then indicates for the current speed limit.
the circumstances under which the different
If a downloaded third-party app is used for
navigation then there is no support for speed-
speeds apply. The road section may be particu- Sign for "School" and "Children at play"
larly susceptible to accidents in rain and/or fog, If the warning sign75 for
related information.
for example. "School" or "Children at play"
An additional sign relating to rain is displayed is included in the satellite navi-
only if the windscreen wipers are in use. gator's map data76, the driver
display shows a sign of this
If the car has a trailer attached and you pass a type.
speed sign with the additional sign “trailer”, the
indicated speed will appear on the driver display. Related information
• Road Sign Information with Speed Warning
and Settings (p. 360)
75 Road signs are market-dependent - the illustrations in these instructions only show examples.
76 Only in cars with Sensus Navigation*. }}
DRIVER SUPPORT
• Road Sign Information with Speed Camera Road Sign Information with Speed Activating/deactivating speed warnings
Information* (p. 361) Warning and Settings The subfunction Speed Limit Warning is acti-
• Limitations of Road Sign Information* The subfunction Speed Limit Warning for vated as follows:
(p. 362) RSI77 is selectable - the driver can select On or 1. Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe
Off.
Road Sign Information in the centre
Speed Limit Warning alerts the driver when the display's top view.
applicable speed limit or set "speed limit" is 2. Select Speed Limit Warning.
exceeded. The warning is repeated once if the
> The function is activated and a speed limit
driver does not reduce speed.
selector appears.
The speed warning is given by
(see description for "speed limit selector "
the driver display symbol78
under following heading)
showing the applicable maxi-
mum permitted speed tempo-
rarily flashing when this speed
is exceeded.
A speed warning is always
given if the speed limit is
exceeded in connection with
speed camera information.

78 Road signs are market-dependent - the illustration in these instructions only show one example.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Adjust the limit for Speed Warning With the Audio Warning function activated, the Road Sign Information with Speed
The driver can select to receive a warning at a driver is also warned when driving towards one- Camera Information*
lower or higher speed than the signed speed. way traffic/no-entry entrance. A car equipped with RSI79 and Sensus
Select limit for speed warning as follows: Related information Navigation* can provide information on an
upcoming speed camera in the driver display.
1. Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe • Road Sign Information* (p. 357)
Road Sign Information in the centre • Sign display with Road Sign Information
display's top view. (p. 358)
2. Select Speed Limit Warning. • Road Sign Information with Speed Camera
Information* (p. 361)
> The function is activated and a speed limit
selector appears. • Limitations of Road Sign Information*
(p. 362)
3. Adjust the limit for Speed Warning by press-
ing the up/down arrows on the screen.
Note that the function does not
give any consideration to
selected limit adjustment when
the driver display shows the
Speed camera warning in the driver display80.
speed camera symbol.
If the car exceeds a detected
speed limit, the driver can be
Acoustic warning On/Off warned when the car
It is also possible to receive an acoustic warning approaches a speed camera,
in connection with Speed Warning. provided that the navigation
Change setting for acoustic warning as follows: maps for the area in question
contain information on speed
1. Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe cameras.
Road Sign Information in the centre For more information about Speed warnings in
display's top view. connection with speed cameras - see section
2. Select/deselect Audio Warning to activate/ "Road Sign Information with Speed Warning and
switch off the acoustic warning.
}}
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| Settings" and "Road Sign Information limita- Limitations of Road Sign NOTE
tions". Information*
The Road Sign Information (RSI81) function may which has some general limitations, see the
NOTE have limitations in certain situations. "Limitations for camera unit" section.
Information about speed cameras in the navi-
Examples of what can reduce the RSI are as fol-
gation maps is not available for all markets/
lows: Related information
areas.
• Faded signs • Road Sign Information* (p. 357)
Related information • Signs positioned on bends • Road Sign Information with Speed Warning
• Road Sign Information* (p. 357) • Rotated or damaged signs
• Sign display with Road Sign Information
• Sign display with Road Sign Information • Signs positioned high above the roadway (p. 358)
(p. 358)
• Fully/partially obscured or poorly positioned
• Limitations of the camera unit (p. 333)
• Road Sign Information with Speed Warning signs
• signs completely or partly covered with frost,
• Limitations of Road Sign Information* snow and/or dirt
(p. 362) • digital road maps82 are out-of-date, inaccu-
rate or have no speed information83.
NOTE
The RSI function may interpret some types of
bicycle rack, connected to the electrical
socket for trailers, as a connected trailer. In
such cases, the driver display may show incor-
rect speed information.

80 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model and market/area.
82 In cars equipped with Sensus Navigation.
83 Map data with speed information does not exist for all areas.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Driver Alert Control WARNING

The Driver Alert Control (DAC) function is
intended to attract the driver's attention when he • The Driver Alert Control function is sup-
plementary driver support intended to
or she starts to drive less consistently, e.g. if the
facilitate driving and make it safer – it
driver becomes distracted or starts to fall asleep.
The objective for DAC is to detect slowly deterio- weather and road conditions.
rating driving ability and it is primarily intended for • Driver Alert Control should not be used to
major roads. The function is not intended for city extend a period of driving. The driver
traffic. should instead plan for breaks at regular
The function is activated when speed exceeds intervals and make sure they are well
65 km/h (40 mph) and remains active as long as rested.
the speed is over 60 km/h (37 mph). When driving behaviour starts • Driver Alert Control is not a substitute for
to become inconsistent, the the driver's attention and judgement. The
driver is alerted by this symbol driver is always responsible for ensuring
in the driver display, together the car is driven in a safe manner, at the
with the text message Time appropriate speed, with an appropriate
for a break soon?. distance to other vehicles, and in accord-
If driving behaviour does not improve but tions.
becomes noticeably inconsistent, the driver is
alerted by the same symbol in the driver display,
combined with an acoustic signal and the text WARNING
message Time to take a break. An alarm from Driver Alert Control should be
If the Rest Stop Guidance function is activated taken very seriously, as a sleepy driver is often
not aware of his/her own condition.
in Sensus Navigation*, suggestions for a suitable
A camera detects the edge markings painted on location for a break are also shown with the If the alarm sounds or you feel fatigued:
the carriageway and compares the alignment of Time to take a break warning. • Stop the car safely as soon as possible
the road with the driver’s steering wheel move- and rest.
ments. The warnings are repeated after a time if driving
behaviour has not improved. Studies have shown that it is just as danger-
ous to drive while tired as it is to drive under
the influence of alcohol or other stimulants.
}}
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| Related information Activate/deactivate Driver Alert Related information

• Activate/deactivate Driver Alert Control Control • Driver Alert Control (p. 363)
(p. 364) The Driver Alert Control (DAC) function can be • Limitations of Driver Alert Control (p. 365)
• Limitations of Driver Alert Control (p. 365) activated/deactivated.
On/Off
To change settings in DAC:
1. Press Settings in the centre display's top
view.
2. Select My Car IntelliSafe Driver Alert
Control
3. Select/deselect Alertness Warning to acti-
vate/deactivate DAC.
Select rest stop guidance in the event

of a warning
It is possible to select whether rest stop guid-
ance shall be activated or deactivated. With the
guidance activated, a suggestion of a suitable
rest stop is shown automatically at the same time
as DAC gives a warning.
To select Rest Stop Guidance:
1. Press Settings in the centre display's top
view.
2. Select My Car IntelliSafe Driver Alert
Control
3. Select/deselect Rest Stop Guidance to
activate/deactivate the function.
364
DRIVER SUPPORT
Limitations of Driver Alert Control • Pilot Assist* (p. 307) Lane Keeping Aid
The Driver Alert Control (DAC) function may The function of the Lane Keeping Aid (LKA84) is
have limitations in certain situations. to help the driver to reduce the risk of the car
accidentally leaving its own lane on motorways
In some cases the system may issue a warning and similar major routes.
despite driving ability not deteriorating, for exam-
ple: Lane Keeping Aid steers the car back into its
lane and/or alerts the driver with vibrations in the
• in strong side winds
steering wheel.
• on rutted road surfaces.
Lane Keeping Aid is active within the speed
range 65-200 km/h (40-125 mph) on roads with
WARNING
clearly visible side lines.
In some cases, driving behaviour is not affec-
ted despite driver fatigue – e.g. when using On narrow roads the function may be unavailable,
the Pilot Assist function – resulting in the in which case it goes into standby mode. The
driver not getting a warning from DAC. function becomes available again when the road
It is therefore important to always stop and is wide enough.
take a break at the slightest feeling of fatigue,
whether the DAC function ha given a warning
or not.
NOTE
Related information
• Activate/deactivate Driver Alert Control A camera reads the side lines of the road/lane.
(p. 364)
}}
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| Depending on settings, lane assistance acts in WARNING

accordance with the following:
• The Lane Keeping Aid function is supple-
• Assist86 activated: When the car is mentary driver support intended to
approaching a lane line, LKA will actively improve driving safety – it cannot handle
steer the car back into its lane by applying a all situations in all traffic, weather and
slight torque to the steering wheel. road conditions.
• Warning86 activated: If the car is about to • The function is not a substitute for the
cross a lane line, the driver is warned by driver's attention and judgement. The
means of vibrations in the steering wheel. driver is always responsible for ensuring
NOTE appropriate speed, with an appropriate
Lane assistance steers the car back into its lane. distance to other vehicles, and in accord-
When a direction indicator is switched on,
there are no steering corrections or alerts
tions.
from Lane assistance.
Steering assistance
In order for LKA to function, the driver’s hands
must be on the steering wheel. The system moni-
tors this continuously.
If the driver does not keep
his/her hands on the steering
wheel, the driver display shows
this symbol and the following
message, to prompt the driver
Lane assistance warns with steering wheel vibrations85. to actively steer the car:
• Lane Keeping Aid Apply steering
84 Lane Keeping Aid

85 The steering wheel vibration varies - the longer the car remains outside the lane lines, the longer the vibration.
86 See the heading "Assistance alternatives for LKA" in the section "Activating/Deactivating Lane Keeping Aid".
366
DRIVER SUPPORT
If the driver does not then start to steer, the sym- Limitations • Steering assistance upon risk of head-on
bol is shown again, combined with a warning In certain demanding conditions Lane assistance collision (p. 375)
sound and this message: may have difficulty helping the driver correctly. In • Symbols and messages for lane assistance
such cases it is recommended to switch off this
• Lane Keeping Aid Standby until steering (p. 369)
applied function.
If the driver then still does not follow the prompt Examples of such conditions are:
to start steering, LKA is set in standby mode - • road works
the function will then be unavailable until the
driver starts to steer the car again. • winter road conditions
• poor road surface
Lane assistance does not intervene • a very “sporty” driving style
• poor weather with reduced visibility
• sharp edges or lines other than the lane lines
• roads with unclear or non-existent line mark-
ings.
NOTE
Lane assistance does not engage on sharp inside Related information

curves.
• Activate/deactivate Lane Keeping Aid
In some situations, lane assistance allows lane (p. 368)
lines to be crossed without intervening with either • Steering assistance upon risk of lane depar-
steering assistance or a warning - e.g. when ture (p. 373)
using the direction indicators or cutting bends.
• Steering assistance upon risk of rear-end
collision* (p. 376)
DRIVER SUPPORT
Activate/deactivate Lane Keeping Related information

Aid • Steering assistance upon risk of lane depar-
The Lane Keeping Aid (LKA87) function is ture (p. 373)
selectable - the driver can select On or Off - and • Lane Keeping Aid (p. 365)
certain subfunctions can be selected.
• Steering assistance upon risk of rear-end
On/Off collision* (p. 376)
Press the Lane Keeping Aid • Steering assistance upon risk of head-on
button in the centre display's collision (p. 375)
function view. • Symbols and messages for lane assistance
(p. 369)
• GREEN button indication - LKA is activated.

• GREY button indication - LKA is deactivated.
Select assistance option for LKA

The driver can select how LKA should react if the
car leaves its lane.
1. Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe in
2. In the event of Lane Keeping Aid Mode,
select how LKA should react:
• Assist - the driver is given steering assis-
tance without a warning.
• Both - the driver is given both a warning
and steering assistance.
• Warning — warning to driver only.
87 Lane Keeping Aid
DRIVER SUPPORT
Symbols and messages for lane Lane assistance is scanning one or both lane Indication of steering assistance/warning
assistance lines.
A number of symbols and messages regarding Unavailable
Lane assistance (LKA88) can be shown on the
driver display.
Symbol in the driver display

Lane assistance is visualised by
symbols in the driver display
depending on the situation.
Here are some examples of Steering assistance/warning - the lane lines in the sym-
bol are in colour.
symbols and the situations in
which they are shown: Unavailable — the lane lines in the symbol are grey. Lane assistance indicates that the system is giv-
ing a warning and/or attempting to steer the car
Available The Lane assistance cannot detect the lane lines,
back into the lane.
the speed is too low or the road is too narrow.
Available — the lane lines in the symbol are white.
88 Lane Keeping Aid }}
369
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| Symbols and messages

Driver support system The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
Reduced functionality Service required
Windscreen sensor The ability of the camera to scan the roadway in front of the car is reduced.
Lane Keeping Aid The LKA steering assistance does not function if the driver does not have his/her hands on
the steering wheel. Follow the instruction and steer the car.
Apply steering
Lane Keeping Aid LKA is set in standby mode until the driver starts to steer the car again.
Standby until steering applied
A text message can be cleared by briefly press- Related information • Steering assistance upon risk of head-on
ing the button, located in the centre of the • Lane Keeping Aid (p. 365) collision (p. 375)
steering wheel's right-hand keypad. • Activate/deactivate Lane Keeping Aid • Steering assistance upon risk of lane depar-
If a message remains: Contact a workshop – an (p. 368) ture (p. 373)
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. • Steering assistance upon risk of rear-end
collision* (p. 376)
DRIVER SUPPORT
Assistance upon risk of collision Activating/deactivating Assistance in Related information

The Collision Avoid. Assistance function is the event of a collision risk • Steering assistance upon risk of lane depar-
designed to help the driver reduce the risk of the The function can be selected - the driver can ture (p. 373)
car leaving its lane unintentionally and/or collid- choose to have it On or Off. • Symbols and messages for assistance upon
ing with another vehicle or obstacle by actively Proceed as follows to switch it off: risk of collision (p. 372)
steering the car back into its lane and/or swerv-
ing. 1. Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe in
• Steering assistance upon risk of head-on
collision (p. 375)
The Collision Avoid. Assistance function con- • Steering assistance upon risk of rear-end
sists of three subfunctions: 2. Deselect Collision Avoidance Assistance. collision* (p. 376)
> The function is then disengaged.
• Steering assistance upon risk of lane depar- • Lane Keeping Aid (p. 365)
ture
• Steering assistance upon risk of head-on NOTE
collision When the Collision Avoid. Assistance
• Steering assistance upon risk of rear-end function is deactivated, all subfunctions are
collision* switched off:
After automatic engagement, the driver display • Steering assistance at risk of lane depar-
indicates that this has occurred via a text mes- ture
sage:
• Steering assistance at risk of oncoming
• Collision avoidance collision
assistance: Automatic intervention • Steering assistance at risk of rear-end
collision
NOTE Even though it is possible to deactivate the
It is always the driver who decides how much function, it is advisable for the driver to always
the car should steer – the car can never take have it activated since it improves driving
command. safety in most cases.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Symbols and messages for

assistance upon risk of collision
A number of symbols and messages regarding
the function can be shown on the driver display.

Collision Avoid. Assistance When the function is activated, a message is shown to the driver indicating that the system
has been activated.
Automatic intervention
Windscreen sensor The ability of the camera to scan the roadway in front of the car is reduced.

Related information
ture (p. 373)
372
DRIVER SUPPORT
Steering assistance upon risk of Steering assistance only Activating/deactivating Steering

lane departure assistance in the event of run-off risk
The subfunction's task is to help the driver The function can be selected - the driver can
reduce the risk of the car accidentally leaving the choose to have it On or Off.
road by actively steering the car back onto the Proceed as follows to switch it off:
road.
1. Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe in
The function is active within the speed range the centre display's top view.
65-140 km/h (40-87 mph) on roads with clearly
visible lane markings/lines. 2. Deselect Collision Avoidance Assistance.
A camera scans the edges of the road and the
painted side markings. If the car is about to leave
the side of the road, the car is steered back onto NOTE
the road and if the steering intervention is not Intervention with steering assistance.
enough to avoid run-off, the brakes are also acti- When the Collision Avoid. Assistance
Steering assistance with brake intervention
vated. function is deactivated, all subfunctions are
switched off:
The function does not intervene however with
steering assistance or braking if the direction • Steering assistance at risk of lane depar-
indicators are used and if the function detects ture
that the driver is actively driving the car, activation • Steering assistance at risk of oncoming
of the function will be delayed. collision
After automatic engagement, the driver indicates • Steering assistance at risk of rear-end
that this has occurred via a text message: collision
• Collision avoidance Even though it is possible to deactivate the

assistance: Automatic intervention function, it is advisable for the driver to always
have it activated since it improves driving
Level of steering assistance Intervention with steering assistance and braking. safety in most cases.
The function has two activation levels:
Brake intervention helps in situations where
• Steering assistance only steering assistance alone is not sufficient. The
• Steering assistance with brake intervention brake force is adapted automatically depending
}}
on the situation at the time of road run-off.
373
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| Limitations for steering assistance WARNING Related information

upon risk of running off the road • Lane Keeping Aid (p. 365)
In certain demanding conditions the function may • The "Steering assistance at risk of lane
departure" subfunction is supplementary • Steering assistance upon risk of rear-end
have difficulty helping the driver correctly. In such collision* (p. 376)
cases it is recommended to switch off this func- driver support intended to improve driving
tion. safety – it cannot handle all situations in • Steering assistance upon risk of head-on
all traffic, weather and road conditions. collision (p. 375)
Examples of such conditions are:
• The function cannot detect barriers, rails • Symbols and messages for lane assistance
• road works or similar obstacles at the side of the (p. 369)
• winter road conditions road. • Symbols and messages for assistance upon
• narrow roads • "Steering assistance at risk of lane risk of collision (p. 372)
departure" is not a substitute for the driv- • Limitations of the camera unit (p. 333)
• poor road surface er's attention and judgement. The driver
• a very “sporty” driving style is always responsible for ensuring the car • Limitations of the radar unit (p. 324)
• poor weather with reduced visibility is driven in a safe manner, at the appro-
• roads with unclear or non-existent side mark-
ings
• sharp edges or lines other than the lane's
side markings.
NOTE
NOTE
DRIVER SUPPORT
Steering assistance upon risk of The function does not intervene with steering Activating/deactivating Steering
head-on collision assistance if the direction indicator is used. And if assistance in the event of a collision
The subfunction can help a distracted driver who the function detects that the driver is actively risk with oncoming
does not notice that the car is drifting into the driving the car, activation of the function will be The function can be selected - the driver can
oncoming lane. delayed. choose to have it On or Off.
After automatic engagement, the driver indicates Proceed as follows to switch it off:
that this has occurred via a text message: 1. Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe in
• Collision avoidance the centre display's top view.
assistance: Automatic intervention
2. Deselect Collision Avoidance Assistance.
WARNING
• The "Steering assistance at risk of
oncoming collision" subfunction is sup- NOTE
plementary driver support intended to When the Collision Avoid. Assistance
improve driving safety – it cannot handle function is deactivated, all subfunctions are
all situations in all traffic, weather and switched off:
The function can assist by guiding the car back to its road conditions.
own lane. • Steering assistance at risk of lane depar-
• Steering assistance is only activated if ture
Oncoming vehicles there is a high risk of collision – you must
therefore never wait for the function to • Steering assistance at risk of oncoming
Your car intervene. collision
The function is active within the speed range • The function is not a substitute for the • Steering assistance at risk of rear-end
60-140 km/h (37-87 mph) on roads with clearly driver's attention and judgement. The collision
visible lane markings/lines. driver is always responsible for ensuring Even though it is possible to deactivate the
the car is driven in a safe manner, at the function, it is advisable for the driver to always
If the car is about to leave its own lane while an
appropriate speed, with an appropriate have it activated since it improves driving
oncoming vehicle is approaching at the same
distance to other vehicles, and in accord- safety in most cases.
time, the function can help the driver to steer the
car back into its own lane. ance with current traffic rules and regula-
tions.
}}
375
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| Limitations for steering assistance NOTE Steering assistance upon risk of

upon risk of head-on collision rear-end collision*
The function may have limited functionality in cer- The function uses the car's radar unit, which
The subfunction can help a distracted driver who
tain situations and fail to intervene: has some general limitations, see the section
does not notice that the car is about to leave its
• for small vehicles, such as motorcycles own lane while an oncoming vehicle is
approaching at the same time, either from
• on roads where the lane does not have clear Related information behind or in the blind spot.
lane markings • Lane Keeping Aid (p. 365)
• if the majority of the car has steered into the • Activate/deactivate Lane Keeping Aid
adjacent lane (p. 368)
• outside the speed range 60-140 km/h • Steering assistance upon risk of lane depar-
(37-87 mph). ture (p. 373)
Other demanding situations can include: • Steering assistance upon risk of rear-end
• road works collision* (p. 376)
• winter road conditions • Limitations of the camera unit (p. 333)
• narrow roads • Limitations of the radar unit (p. 324)
• poor road surface
• a very “sporty” driving style
The function can assist by steering the car back to its
• poor weather with reduced visibility. own lane.
Other vehicle in the blind spot
NOTE
Your car
which has some general limitations, see the If the car is about to leave its own lane while
"Limitations for camera unit" section. another vehicle is in the blind spot, or another
vehicle is approaching rapidly in an adjacent lane
at the same time, the function can help the driver
to steer the car back into its own lane.
The function can even assist if the driver inten-
tionally changes lanes using direction indicators
DRIVER SUPPORT
without noticing that another vehicle is approach- NOTE Other demanding situations can include:
ing.
When the Collision Avoid. Assistance • road works
The function is active within the speed range function is deactivated, all subfunctions are • winter road conditions
60-140 km/h (37-87 mph) on roads with clearly switched off:
visible lane markings/lines. • narrow roads
• Steering assistance at risk of lane depar- • poor road surface
After automatic engagement, the driver indicates ture
• a very “sporty” driving style
that this has occurred via a text message: • Steering assistance at risk of oncoming
collision
• poor weather with reduced visibility.
• Collision avoidance
assistance: Automatic intervention • Steering assistance at risk of rear-end WARNING
collision
Activating/deactivating Steering • The "Steering assistance at risk of rear-
Even though it is possible to deactivate the
assistance upon risk of rear-end end collision" subfunction is supplemen-
function, it is advisable for the driver to always
collision tary driver support intended to improve
have it activated since it improves driving
The function can be selected - the driver can driving safety – it cannot handle all situa-
safety in most cases.
choose to have it On or Off. tions in all traffic, weather and road condi-
tions.
Proceed as follows to switch it off: Limitations for steering assistance • Steering assistance is only activated if
1. Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe in upon risk of rear-end collision there is a high risk of collision – you must
the centre display's top view. In certain situations the function may have limited therefore never wait for the function to
functionality and fail to intervene e.g.: intervene.
2. Deselect Collision Avoidance Assistance.
> The function is then disengaged. • for small vehicles, such as motorcycles • The function is not a substitute for the
• if the majority of the car has steered into the driver's attention and judgement. The
adjacent lane driver is always responsible for ensuring
• on roads/in lanes with unclear or non-exis-
tent lane markings
• outside the speed range 60-140 km/h ance with current traffic rules and regula-
(37-87 mph). tions.
}}
377
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| NOTE Park Assist* approx. 2 seconds. The acoustic signal for obsta-
Park Assist Pilot assists the driver when cles behind is also active when the car is station-
The function uses the car's camera unit, ary.
manoeuvring in tight spaces by indicating the
distance to obstacles through acoustic signals At a distance within 30 cm from an obstacle
combined with graphics on the centre display. behind or in front of the car, the tone is constant
and the active sensor's field closest to the car
NOTE symbol is filled.
The function uses the car's radar unit, which The volume of the parking assistance signal can
has some general limitations, see the section be adjusted while the signal is sounding by
"Limitations for radar unit". means of the [>II] knob on the centre console.
Adjustment can also be performed in the top
In addition to the camera and radar unit, the func- view's Settings menu option.
tion uses the car's rear-facing radar, which has
certain general imitations that a driver should be NOTE
aware of - see section "Limitations for BLIS" for • Acoustic warnings are only given for
more information. objects directly on the vehicle's route.
Related information Screen view showing obstacle zones and sensor sectors.
The centre display shows an overview of the rela-
• Activate/deactivate Lane Keeping Aid tionship between the car and detected obstacles.
(p. 368)
The highlighted sector indicates the location of
• Steering assistance upon risk of lane depar- the obstacle. The closer the car symbol is to a
ture (p. 373) highlighted sector box, the shorter the distance
• Steering assistance upon risk of head-on between the car and detected obstacle.
collision (p. 375)
The shorter the distance to the obstacle, the
• Limitations of the camera unit (p. 333) faster the signal sounds. Other sound from the
• Limitations of the radar unit (p. 324) audio system is muted automatically.
• Limitations of BLIS* (p. 351) The acoustic signal for obstacles ahead and to
the sides is active when the car is moving but
stops after the car has been stationary for
DRIVER SUPPORT
WARNING Backwards Along the sides

• The Park Assist function is supplemen-
tary driver support intended to facilitate
driving and make it safer – it cannot han-
dle all situations in all traffic, weather and
road conditions.
• The parking sensors have blind spots
where obstacles cannot be detected.
• Be particularly aware of people and ani-
mals near the car.
• The Park Assist system is not a substitute
for the driver's attention and judgement.
The driver is always responsible for depending on car model. Parking assistance side sensors are activated
ensuring the car is driven in a safe man- automatically when the engine is started. They
ner, at the appropriate speed, with an The sensors for reverse are activated if the car are active at speeds below 10 km/h (6 mph).
appropriate distance to other vehicles, rolls backward without a gear engaged or when
the gear lever is moved to reverse position. The measuring range starts approx. 30 cm (1 ft)
from the sides. The acoustic signal for obstacles
rules and regulations. The measuring range starts approx. 1.5 metres on the sides comes from the side loudspeakers.
( 5 ft) behind the car.
When reversing with a hitched trailer, parking
assistance backward is deactivated automatically.
NOTE
When reversing with e.g. a trailer or bike car-
rier on the towbar - without Volvo genuine
trailer wiring - parking assistance may need to
be switched off manually in order that the
sensors do not react to them.
}}
379
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| Forwards IMPORTANT Activating/deactivating Park Assist

Pilot*
When auxiliary lamps are fitted: Remember
The Park Assist Pilot function can be activated/
that these must not obscure the sensors - the
deactivated.
auxiliary lamps may then be perceived as an
obstacle. On/Off
The front and side parking assistance sensors
Related information are activated automatically when the engine is
• Activating/deactivating Park Assist Pilot* started. The rear sensors activate if the car rolls
(p. 380) backwards or if reverse gear in engaged.
• Limitations of Park Assist Pilot* (p. 381) The function is activated/deac-
tivated in function view in the
• Symbols and messages for Park Assist Pilot*
(p. 383) centre display.
depending on car model. • Park assist camera* (p. 384) Park Assist Pilot can also be
activated/deactivated from the
The front parking assistance sensors are acti- • Park Assist Pilot* (p. 393) camera views.
vated automatically when the engine is started.
The front sensors are active at speeds – Tap on the Park Assist button in function
below 10 km/h (6 mph). view.
The measuring range starts approx. 80 cm > Park Assist Pilot is activated/deactivated,
(2.5 ft) in front of the car. a GREEN/GREY indicator is displayed in
the button.
NOTE Related information
Parking assistance is deactivated when the • Park Assist* (p. 378)
parking brake is applied or P mode is • Limitations of Park Assist Pilot* (p. 381)
selected in a car with an automatic gearbox.
(p. 383)
DRIVER SUPPORT
Limitations of Park Assist Pilot* IMPORTANT NOTE

The Park Assist Pilot function cannot detect
Objects e.g. chains, thin glossy poles or low Since a towbar is configured with the car's
everything in all situations and may therefore
barriers may be in the "signal shadow" and electrical system, towbar protrusion is
have limited functionality.
are then temporarily not detected by the sen- included when the function measures the dis-
A driver should be aware about the following sors - the pulsating tone may then unexpect- tance to an object behind the car.
examples of Park Assist Pilot's limitations: edly stop instead of changing over to the
expected constant tone.
Maintenance
WARNING The sensors cannot detect high objects, such
Pay additional attention as projecting loading docks.
while reversing when this • In such situations, pay extra attention and
symbol is shown if a trailer, manoeuvre/reposition the car particularly
bicycle rack or similar is
slowly or stop the current parking
mounted and electrically
connected to the car. manoeuvre - there may be a high risk of
damage to vehicles or other objects since
The symbol indicates that information from the sensors is not
the parking assistance sensors rearward are
always reliable in such situations.
switched off and will not warn of any obsta-
cles.
IMPORTANT
In certain conditions the parking assistance Location of the parking sensors89.
system may produce incorrect warning sig- For Park Assist Pilot to work optimally, its sen-
nals that are caused by external sound sors must be cleaned regularly with water and car
sources with the same ultrasonic frequencies shampoo.
that the system works with.
Examples of such sources include horns, wet NOTE
tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes, exhaust Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors may
noises from motorcycles, etc. cause incorrect warning signals, reduced or
no function.
DRIVER SUPPORT
• Activating/deactivating Park Assist Pilot*
(p. 380)
(p. 383)
DRIVER SUPPORT
Symbols and messages for Park

Assist Pilot*
Symbols and messages for Park Assist Pilot can
be shown in the driver display and/or the centre
display.

The rearward parking assistance sensors are deactivated, so there are no acoustic warnings for
obstacles/objects.
Park Assist System One or more of the function's sensors are blocked - check and correct as soon as possible.
Sensors blocked, cleaning nee-
ded
Park Assist System The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo
Unavailable Service required
A text message can be cleared by briefly press- Related information

ing the button, located in the centre of the • Park Assist* (p. 378)
steering wheel's right-hand keypad. • Activating/deactivating Park Assist Pilot*
If a message remains: Contact a workshop – an (p. 380)
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. • Limitations of Park Assist Pilot* (p. 381)
DRIVER SUPPORT
Park assist camera* PAS* - activates/deactivates Park Assist WARNING

The park assist camera helps the driver when Pilot
manoeuvring in tight spaces by indicating obsta- Lines - activates/deactivates park assist
• The parking camera function is supple-
cles with a camera image and graphics in the lines
tate driving and make it safer – it cannot
centre display. Towbar* - activates/deactivates the towbar handle all situations in all traffic, weather
Overview assist line*92 and road conditions.
The parking assistance camera is a support func- CTA* - activate/deactivate Cross Traffic Alert • The parking cameras have blind spots
tion which is activated automatically when reverse where obstacles cannot be detected.
gear is selected or manually via the centre dis-
• Be particularly aware of people and ani-
play. mals near the car.
• Objects/obstacles on the display screen
may be closer to the car than they appear
to be on the screen.
• The parking cameras are not a substitute
for the driver's attention and judgement.
The driver is always responsible for
ensuring the car is driven in a safe man-
ner, at the appropriate speed, with an
Example of camera view90.

Camera views
Zoom91 - zoom in/out The function can display a composite 360° view
360° view* - activate/deactivate all cameras and separate views for each of the four cameras:
rear, front, left or right camera view.
90 The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

91 The park assist lines are switched off when zooming in.
92 Not available in all markets.
DRIVER SUPPORT
360° view* If the car is also equipped with Park Assist Forwards
System* then distance to detected obstacles is
illustrated with fields in different colours.
The cameras can be activated automatically or
manually, see article "Starting the Park assist
camera".
Backwards
The "field of vision" of the parking cameras with approxi- The forwards parking camera90 is located in the grille.
mate coverage area.
The front camera can be helpful on an exit road
The function activates all parking cameras, with limited visibility to the sides, e.g. when there
whereupon the four sides of the car are shown are high hedges. It is active at speeds up to
simultaneously in the centre display, which helps 25 km/h (16 mph) - following which, the front
the driver to observe what is around the car when camera is switched off.
manoeuvring at slow speeds.
The backwards-facing camera90 is fitted above the reg- If the car does not reach 50 km/h (30 mph) and
From the 360° view, each camera view can be istration plate. the speed falls below 22 km/h (14 mph) within
activated separately: The backward-facing camera shows a wide area 1 minute after the forward-facing camera has
• Press the screen for the desired “field of behind the car. For certain models, part of the been extinguished, the camera is reactivated.
vision” of the camera, e.g. in front of/above bumper can be seen as well as the towbar in
the front camera. some cases.
The cameras that are active are indicated at the Objects shown in the centre display may appear
top of the screen in the selected view. slightly tilted — this is normal.
90 The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. }}
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| The sides Park assist lines and fields for the the driver the path the car will take - also when
park assist camera* the car is turning.
The Park assist cameras indicate the position of These park assist lines include the car's most
the car in relation to its surroundings by display- protruding parts, e.g. towbar, door mirrors and
ing lines on the screen. corners.
Park assist lines
NOTE
• When reversing with a trailer which is not
connected electrically to the car, the park
assist lines on the display show the route
the car will take – not the trailer.
The side cameras90 are positioned in each door mirror.

• The screen shows no park assist lines
when a trailer is connected electrically to
The side cameras show what is along each side the car's electrical system.
of the car.
• Park assist lines are not shown when
Related information zooming in.
• Park assist lines and fields for the park assist
camera* (p. 386) Example93 of park assist lines.
• Starting the Park assist camera* (p. 388) Park assist lines show the intended route for the
car's external dimensions with the current steer-
• Limitations for park assist camera* (p. 389)
ing wheel angle - this facilitates parallel parking,
• Park Assist* (p. 378) reversing into tight spaces and when connecting
• Park Assist Pilot* (p. 393) a trailer.
• Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 352) The lines on the screen are projected as if they
were at ground level behind the car and respond
directly to steering wheel movements, showing

DRIVER SUPPORT
IMPORTANT Park assist lines in 360° view* Towbar assist line*
• Remember, that with the rear camera

view selected, the monitor only displays
the area behind the car. Be aware of the
sides and front of the car when manoeu-
vring in reverse.
• The same applies vice versa - note what
happens to the rear parts of the car when
the front camera view is selected.
• Note that the park assist lines show the
shortest route. Therefore, pay extra
attention to the car's sides so that they
do not go against/over something when 360° view with park assist lines93. Towbar with park assist line93.
the steering wheel is turned when driving With the 360° view, park assist lines are shown Towbar - activates the towbar assist line.
forward or that the front sweeps against/ behind, in front of and at the side of the car
over something when the steering wheel (depending on the direction of travel): Zoom - zoom in/out.
is turned when reversing.
• When driving forwards: Front lines The camera can facilitate connecting up to a
trailer by showing an assist line representing the
• When reversing: Side lines and reversing
towbar's intended "path" to the trailer.
lines.
With front or rear camera selected, the park 1. Press Towbar (1).
assist lines appear regardless of the car's direc- > The park assist lines for the towbar's
tion of travel. intended "path" appear - the car's park
assist lines disappear simultaneously.
With one side camera selected, the park assist
lines only appear when reversing. Park assist lines for both car and towbar
cannot be shown at the same time.
2. Press Zoom (2) when a more precise
manoeuvring is required.
> The camera view zooms in.
93 The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. }}
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| Sensor field from Parking assistance* The fields for the front and reversing sensors Starting the Park assist camera*
If the car is equipped with Parking assistance change colour as the distance to the obstacle The park assist camera starts automatically
then the distance is shown in the 360° view with decreases — from yellow through orange to red. when reverse gear is engaged or manually with
coloured fields for each sensor that registers an Colours of front and Distance (metres) one of the centre display's function buttons.
obstacle.
reversing fields
Camera view when reversing
Sensor fields backwards and forwards
Yellow 0,6–1,5 When reverse gear is engaged, the screen shows
the 360° view if it or any of the side views was
Orange 0,4–0,6 the last used camera view, otherwise the rear
Red 0–0,4 view is shown.
Sensor field to the sides Camera view for manual camera start
The side fields are only shown in orange. Start the parking camera with
this button in the centre dis-
Colour of side fields Distance (metres) play's function view.
Orange 0–0.3
Related information
The screen can show coloured sensor fields on the car • Park assist camera* (p. 384) The screen initially shows the last used camera
symbol93. • Starting the Park assist camera* (p. 388) view. However, after each engine start, the previ-
ously shown side view is replaced by the 360°
• Limitations for park assist camera* (p. 389) view and the previously shown zoomed rear view
is replaced by the rear view.
Automatic deactivation of camera

The front view extinguishes at 25 km/h (16 mph)
to avoid distracting the driver - it reactivates auto-
matically if the speed drops to 22 km/h (14 mph)
within 1 minute, on the condition that the speed
has not exceeded 50 km/h (31 mph).
DRIVER SUPPORT
Other camera views are extinguished at 15 km/h Limitations for park assist camera* undetected until the car is very close to the
(9 mph) and not reactivated. The park assist camera cannot detect everything obstacle.
in all situations and may therefore have limited
Related information
functionality.
• Park assist camera* (p. 384)
• Park assist lines and fields for the park assist A driver should be aware about the following
camera* (p. 386) examples of the park assist camera's limitations:
• Limitations for park assist camera* (p. 389)
WARNING
Pay additional attention
while reversing when this
symbol is shown if a trailer,
bicycle rack or similar is
mounted and electrically
connected to the car.
There are "blind" sectors between the cameras' fields of
The symbol indicates that vision.
the parking assistance sensors rearward are
switched off and will not warn of any obsta- In 360° view obstacles/objects can “vanish” in
cles. the gaps between the individual cameras.
Defective camera
NOTE If a camera sector is black and
A bike carrier or other accessory mounted on contains this symbol then it
the rear of the car could obscure the cam- means that the camera is out
era's view. of order. The following illustra-
tion shows an example.
Blind sectors
Pay attention to the possibility that, even if it only
looks like a relatively small part of the image is
obscured, it could be a relatively large sector that
is hidden from view. Obstacles could thereby go
}}
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| Maintenance
Clean camera lenses regularly with lukewarm
water and car shampoo - be careful not to
scratch the lenses.
NOTE
Keep the camera lens clear of dirt, snow and
ice to ensure optimum function. This is partic-
ularly important in poor light.
Related information
The car's left-hand camera is out of order. • Park assist camera* (p. 384)
Black camera sector • Park assist lines and fields for the park assist
A black camera sector is also shown in the fol- camera* (p. 386)
lowing instances, but then without the symbol for • Starting the Park assist camera* (p. 388)
defective camera:
• Symbols and messages for Park assist cam-
• open door era* (p. 391)
• open tailgate
• folded-in door mirror.
Light conditions
The camera image is adjusted automatically
according to prevailing light conditions. Because
of this, the image may vary slightly in brightness
and quality. Poor light conditions can result in
reduced image quality.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Symbols and messages for Park

assist camera*
Symbols and messages for Park assist camera
can be shown in the driver display and/or the
centre display.
The following table shows examples.

The rearward parking assistance sensors are deactivated, so there are no acoustic warnings and
field marks for obstacles/objects.
The camera is disengaged.
}}
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| Symbol Message Specification

Sensors blocked, cleaning
needed
Park Assist System The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo

Related information
• Activating/deactivating Park Assist Pilot*
(p. 380)
• Limitations of Park Assist Pilot* (p. 381)
DRIVER SUPPORT
Park Assist Pilot* NOTE Parallel parking

Park Assist Pilot (PAP94)
helps the driver to park The PAP function measures the space and
in or leave a parking space. steers the car - the driver's task is to:
PAP checks first if a space is sufficiently big and • keep a close watch around the car
thereafter helps the driver to turn the steering
wheel and manoeuvre the car into the space.
• follow the instructions in the centre dis-
play
The centre display indicates with symbols, graph-
• select gear (reverse/forward) - a "ping"
ics and text the various operations to be carried sound indicates when the driver should
out and when to do so. change gear
• control and maintain a safe speed
WARNING
• brake and stop.
• The PAP function is supplementary driver The principal of parallel parking.
Types of parking situations The PAP function parks the car using the follow-
make it safer – it cannot handle all situa-
PAP can be used for the following different parking steps:
tions. ing situations. 1. A parking space is identified and measured.
• Be particularly aware of people and ani- 2. The car is reversed into the space.
mals near the car. 3. The car is positioned in the space by means
• PAP is not a substitute for the driver's of driving forward/backward.
attention and judgement. The driver is Using the Park Out function, a parallel-parked
always responsible for ensuring the car is car can also be assisted by PAP to leave the
driven in a safe manner, at the appropri- parking space - see the heading "Leaving a park-
ate speed, with an appropriate distance to ing space" in the section "Parking with Park
other vehicles, and in accordance with Assist Pilot".
94 Park Assist Pilot }}
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| Perpendicular parking • Messages for Park Assist Pilot* (p. 400) Parking with Park Assist Pilot*
Park Assist Pilot (PAP95) helps the driver park
via three steps. The function can also help the
driver to leave a parking space.
NOTE
The PAP function measures the space and
steers the car - the driver's task is to:
• keep a close watch around the car
• follow the instructions in the centre dis-
play
Principle for perpendicular parking. • select gear (reverse/forward) - a "ping"

sound indicates when the driver should
The PAP function parks the car using the follow- change gear
ing steps:
• control and maintain a safe speed
1. A parking space is identified and measured.
• brake and stop.
2. The car is reversed into the space and then
positioned in the space by means of driving
Symbols, graphics and/or text appear on the cen-
forward/backward.
tre display's screen when the different steps are
to be performed.
NOTE
PAP can be activated if the following criteria are
A perpendicular-parked car cannot be assis- met once the engine has been started:
ted by the PAP Park Out function to leave a
parking space - the function must only be • No trailer is attached to the car
used for a parallel-parked car. • Speed must be lower than 30 km/h
(20 mph).
Related information
• Parking with Park Assist Pilot* (p. 394)
DRIVER SUPPORT
NOTE Proceed as follows:
The distance between the car and parking 1. Drive no faster than 30 km/h (20 mph) for
spaces should be 0.5-1.5 metres (1.6-5.0 ft) parallel parking or 20 km/h (12 mph) for
while PAP is searching for a parking space. perpendicular parking.
2. Tap on the Park In button in function view.
Parking > PAP searches for a parking space and
PAP parks the car using the following steps: checks whether it is big enough.
1. A parking space is identified and measured. 3. Be prepared to stop the car when the
2. The car is reversed into the space. graphic and message on the centre display
state that a suitable parking space has been
3. The car is positioned into the space - the found.
system may then request that the driver Principle for parallel parking.
changes gear.
Finding and measuring parking spaces 4. Select Parallel parking or Perpendicular
The function can be activated parking and select reverse gear.
in the centre display's function
view. NOTE
It can also be accessed from PAP searches the area for parking, displays
the camera views. instructions and guides the car in on its pas-
senger side. But if required the car can also
be parked on the driver's side of the street:
• Activate the direction indicator to the
driver's side - then the system searches
Principle for perpendicular parking.
for a parking space on that side of the
car instead.
95 Park Assist Pilot }}
395
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| Reversing in to the parking space Perform the following to reverse the car into the Positioning the car in the parking space
parking space:
1. Check that the area behind the car is clear,
then engage reverse gear.
2. Reverse slowly and carefully without touching
the steering wheel - and no faster than
7 km/h (4 mph).
3. Be prepared to stop the car when instructed
by the graphic and message on the centre
display.
NOTE
Parallel. Parallel.
• Keep your hands away from the steering
wheel when the PAP function is acti-
vated.
• Make sure that the steering wheel is not
hindered in any way and can rotate freely.
• To achieve optimum results - wait until
the steering wheel is fully turned before
starting to drive backward/forward.
Perpendicular. Perpendicular.
Proceed as follows:
1. Move the gear selector into the D position,
wait until the steering wheel has been turned
and drive slowly forward
396
DRIVER SUPPORT
2. Be prepared to stop the car when instructed The Park Out function is acti- Limitations of Park Assist Pilot*
by the graphic and message on the centre vated in the centre display's The Park Assist Pilot (PAP96) function cannot
display. function view. detect everything in all situations and may there-
3. Select reverse gear and drive slowly back- fore have limited functionality.
wards.
WARNING
by the graphic and message on the centre Proceed as follows: • The PAP function is supplementary driver
display. 1. Tap on the Park Out button in function view. support intended to facilitate driving – it
The function is deactivated automatically and the 2. Use the direction indicator to select the weather and road conditions.
graphics and message show that parking is com- direction in which the car should leave the
plete. It may be necessary for the driver to correct parking space. • Be particularly aware of people and ani-
the car’s position. Only the driver can determine mals near the car.
whether the car is properly parked.
by the graphic and message on the centre
• Bear in mind that the front of the car may
swing out towards oncoming traffic dur-
display - follow the instructions in the same ing the parking manoeuvre.
IMPORTANT way as for the parking procedure.
The warning distance is shorter when the • Objects situated higher than the sensor
Note the steering wheel can "spring" back when detection area are not included when cal-
sensors are used by PAP compared with
the function is completed - the driver may then culating the parking manoeuvre, which
when Park Assist uses the sensors.
need to turn the steering wheel back to the maxi- could cause PAP to swing into the park-
mum steering angle in order to leave the parking ing space too early – such parking
Leaving a parking space space. spaces should be avoided for this reason.
If PAP considers that the driver can leave the • PAP is not a substitute for the driver's
NOTE parking space without any extra manoeuvring attention and judgement. The driver is
When leaving a parking space, the Park Out then the function will be stopped, even if the always responsible for ensuring the car is
function must only be used for a parallel- driver may consider that the car is still in the driven in a safe manner, at the appropri-
parked car - it does not work for a perpendic- parking space. ate speed, with an appropriate distance to
ular-parked car. other vehicles, and in accordance with
Related information current traffic rules and regulations.
• Park Assist Pilot* (p. 393)
}}
• Messages for Park Assist Pilot* (p. 400)
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| A driver should be aware about the following NOTE • The driver is responsible for determining
examples of Park Assist Pilot limitations: whether the space selected by PAP is suita-
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors will ble for parking.
Parking is discontinued reduce their function and may prevent meas-
A parking sequence will be discontinued: urement. • Use approved tyres97 with the correct tyre
pressure - this affects the ability of PAP to
• if the driver moves the steering wheel park the car.
• if the car is driven too quickly - above 7 km/h Driver responsibility
The driver should bear in mind that the PAP is an • Heavy rain or snow may cause the system to
(4 mph) measure the parking space incorrectly.
aid – not an infallible, fully-automatic function.
• if the driver presses Cancel in the centre The driver must therefore be prepared to inter- • Do not use PAP if snow chains or a spare
display rupt a parking step. wheel are fitted.
• when the anti-lock brakes or the Electronic
There are also a few details to bear in mind while • Do not use PAP if cargo items are protruding
stability control are engaged - e.g. when a from the car.
parking, e.g.:
wheel loses grip on a slippery road.
• PAP bases itself on the locations of vehicles • Perpendicular parking spaces may be missed
Where applicable, a message in the centre dis- or offered unnecessarily if one parked car is
play states the reason for a parking sequence already parked nearby - if they are inap-
protruding more than other parked cars.
being discontinued. propriately parked, your own car's tyres and
wheel rims may be damaged by contact with
the kerb. IMPORTANT
IMPORTANT
• PAP is designed for parking on straight Changing to another approved wheel rim
Under certain circumstances, PAP is unable streets - not sharp curves or bends. For this and/or tyre dimension may involve a changed
to find parking spaces - one reason for this reason, make sure the car is parallel to the tyre circumference, which means that the
may be the fact that there is interference with parking space when PAP measures the PAP system's parameters may then need to
the sensors from external sound sources space. be updated. Consult a workshop - an author-
which emit the same ultrasound frequencies ised Volvo workshop is recommended.
as those with which the system works. • Parking spaces on narrow streets are not
always feasible, since the space required for
Examples of such sources include horns, wet manoeuvring may not be sufficient.
tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes and
exhaust noises from motorcycles etc.
96 Park Assist Pilot

97 "Approved tyres" refers to tyres of the same type and make as those fitted new on delivery from the factory.
398
DRIVER SUPPORT
Maintenance
PAP sensor locations98.

For the PAP function to work correctly, its sen-
sors must be cleaned regularly with water and car
shampoo.
Related information
• Messages for Park Assist Pilot* (p. 400)
DRIVER SUPPORT
Messages for Park Assist Pilot*

Messages for Park Assist Pilot (PAP99) can be
shown in the driver display and/or the centre dis-
play.
The following table shows examples.

Sensors blocked, cleaning needed
Park Assist System The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo workshop is
recommended.

Related information
99 Park Assist Pilot
Alcohol lock* Bypass of the alcohol lock* Before starting the engine with the
The function of the alcohol lock is to prevent the In the event of an emergency situation or the alcohol lock
car from being driven by individuals under the alcohol lock is out of order, it is possible to The alcohol lock is activated automatically and is
influence of alcohol. Before the engine can be bypass the alcohol lock in order to drive the car. then ready for use when the car is opened.
started the driver must take a breath test that
verifies that he/she is not under the influence of For deactivation via the alcohol lock, see the sep- To bear in mind
alcohol. Alcohol lock calibration takes place in arate instructions for that specific lock. In order to obtain correct function and as accu-
accordance with each market's limit value in Activating the bypass function (Bypass) rate a measurement result as possible:
force for driving legally. • Avoid eating or drinking approx. 5 minutes
NOTE before the breath test.
The car has an interface for the electrical con-
nection of the different makes and models of All bypass activation is logged and saved in • Avoid excess windscreen washing - the alco-
alcohol lock recommended by Volvo. The inter- the memory in the alcohol lock's control unit. hol in the washer fluid may result in an incor-
face facilitates alcohol lock connection, and gives It is not possible to undo a bypass. rect measurement result.
the option of an integrated function including
messages related to the alcohol lock in the car's NOTE
The message, Blow into alcolock Bypass
main display. For information about a specific After a completed period of driving, the
instead?, is shown in the screen:
alcohol lock, please refer to its owner's manual. engine can be restarted within 30 minutes
– Select Bypass by pressing once on the O without a new breath test.
WARNING button on the steering wheel's right-hand
keypad.
The alcohol lock is an aid and does not Related information
exempt the driver from responsibility. It is > The alcohol lock is now bypassed and the
car can be started. • Bypass of the alcohol lock* (p. 402)
always the responsibility of the driver to be
sober and to drive the car safely. The number of bypasses possible before service • Starting the car (p. 404)
is required is selected during alcohol lock instal-
lation.
Related information
• Before starting the engine with the alcohol
lock (p. 402)
Ignition positions Level Functions Level Functions

The car's electrical system can be set in different
levels/positions and in this way make the differ- 0 • Odometer, clock and temperature II • The headlamps come on.
ent functions available. gauge are illuminated. • Warning/indicator lamps illuminate
• The power seats* can be adjusted. for 5 seconds.
In order to facilitate the use of a limited number
of functions with the engine switched off, the • The power windows can be used. • Several other systems are acti-
vated. However, heating in seat
car's electrical system can be set in 3 different • The centre display is started and
levels - 0, I and II. These levels are described can be used. cushions and the rear window can
with the denomination "ignition position" only be activated after the car has
• The infotainment system can be been started.
throughout the owner's manual. used.
This ignition position consumes a
The following table shows the functions available The functions are time-controlled in lot of current from the battery and
in each ignition position/level: this ignition position and are switched should therefore be avoided!
off automatically after a period of time.
I Selecting ignition position
• Panorama roof, power windows,
12V socket in the passenger com-
partment, Bluetooth, navigation,
phone, ventilation fan and wind-
screen wipers can be used.
• Power seats can be adjusted.
• 12 V sockets in the cargo area
can be used.
• The infotainment system is started
automatically if it was running
when the car was left.
Power is taken from the battery in
Start knob in the tunnel console.
this ignition position.
• Ignition position 0 - Unlock the car and
store the remote control key inside the car.
}}
|| NOTE Starting the car The remote control key is not physically used
The car is started using the start knob in the tun- when starting the car since it is equipped with
To reach level I or II without starting the support for keyless starting (Passive start).
nel console when the remote control key is in
engine - do not depress the brake pedal, or
the passenger compartment. To start the car:
the clutch pedal for cars with manual gear
changing, when these ignition positions are to 1. The remote control key must be inside the
be selected. car. For cars with Passive Start, the key
needs to be located in the front part of the
• Ignition position I - Turn the start knob passenger compartment. With keyless lock-
clockwise and release it. The control auto- ing/unlocking of the car*, the key can be
matically returns to its starting position. anywhere in the car.
• Ignition position II - Turn the start knob 2. Hold the brake pedal depressed1 fully. For
clockwise and hold it in position for cars with automatic gear changing, make
approx. 4 seconds. Then release the knob, sure that gear position P or N is selected.
which automatically returns to its starting For cars with a manual gearbox, make sure
position. that the gear lever is in neutral position or
• Back to ignition position 0 - To return to that the clutch pedal is depressed.
Start knob in the tunnel console.
ignition position 0 from position I and II - 3. Turn the start knob clockwise and release it.
Turn the start knob clockwise and release. The control automatically returns to its star-
The control automatically returns to its star-
WARNING
ting position.
ting position. Before starting:
Related information • Fasten the seatbelt. NOTE

• Starting the car (p. 404) • Adjust the seat, steering wheel and mir- For diesel-engined cars, there may be a slight
rors. delay before starting is initiated.
• Switching off the car (p. 405)
• Driver display (p. 88) • Make sure that the brake pedal can be
fully depressed. When the engine is started the starter motor
works until the engine is started or until its over-
heating protection triggers.
1 If the car is moving, the engine can be started by turning the start knob clockwise.
WARNING Switching off the car

The car is switched off using the start knob in
Never remove the remote control key from
the car while driving or during towing. the tunnel console.
WARNING
Always take the remote control key out from
the car when leaving the car and make sure
the car's electrical system is in ignition posi-
Backup reader's location in the tunnel console. tion 0 - especially if there are children in the
car.
If the message Car key not found is shown in
the driver display when starting, place the remote
control key on the backup reader in the cup NOTE
holder. Then try to start again.
The idling speed can be noticeably higher
NOTE than normal for certain engine types during
cold starting. This is done in order that the Start knob in the tunnel console.
When the remote control key is placed in the emissions system can reach normal operating
cup holder, make sure that no other car keys, To switch off the car:
temperature as quickly as possible, which
metal objects or electronic apparatus (e.g. minimises exhaust emissions and protects the – Turn the start knob clockwise and release it -
mobile phones, tablets, laptops or chargers) environment. the car is switched off. The control automati-
are in the cup holder. Several car keys close cally returns to its starting position.
to each other in the cup holder can cause
Related information If the gear selector for cars with an automatic
interference with each other.
• Ignition positions (p. 403) gearbox is not in position P or if the car rolls:
• Switching off the car (p. 405) – Turn the knob clockwise and hold it until the
IMPORTANT car is switched off.
If the engine fails to start after 3 attempts -
wait for 3 minutes before making a further • Replacing the battery in the remote control Related information
attempt. Starting capacity increases if the bat-
key (p. 252) • Starting the car (p. 404)
tery is allowed to recover. • Ignition positions (p. 403)
405
Steering lock Using jump starting with another 4. Connect one of the red jump lead's clamps
The steering lock makes steering difficult if the battery to the donor battery's positive terminal (1).
car is e.g. taken unlawfully. A mechanical noise If the starter battery is discharged then the car
can be perceived when the steering lock locks can be started with current from another battery. IMPORTANT
or unlocks. Connect the start cable carefully to avoid
Activating the steering lock short circuits with other components in the
The steering lock is activated when the car is engine compartment.
locked from the outside and the engine is
switched off. If the car is left unlocked then the 5. Open the positive jump-starting point's cover
steering lock will lock automatically after a while. (2).
Deactivating the steering lock 6. Connect the red jump lead's other clamp
The steering lock is deactivated when the car is onto the car's positive jump-starting point
unlocked from outside. If the car is not locked, (2).
the steering lock will deactivate if the remote 7. Connect one of the black jump lead's clamps
control key is inside the passenger compartment to the donor battery's negative terminal (3).
and the car is started by turning the start knob Attachment points for the jump leads. 8. Connect the black jump lead's other clamp
clockwise to unlock the steering lock.
When jump starting the car, the following steps onto the car's negative jump-starting point
Related information are recommended to avoid short circuits or other (4).
• Starting the car (p. 404) damage: 9. Check that the jump lead clamps are affixed
• Switching off the car (p. 405) 1. Set the car's electrical system in ignition securely so that there are no sparks during
position 0. the starting attempt.
2. Check that the donor battery has a voltage of 10. Start the engine of the "donor car" and allow
12 V. it to run a few minutes at a speed slightly
higher than idle approx. 1500 rpm.
3. If the donor battery is installed in another car
- switch off the donor car's engine and make
sure that the two cars do not touch each
other.
406
11. Start the engine in the car with the dis- WARNING Gearbox
charged battery. The gearbox is part of the car's powertrain
• The battery can generate oxyhydrogen
(power transmission) between engine and drive
gas, which is highly explosive. A spark can
IMPORTANT wheels. The function of the gearbox is to change
be formed if a jump lead is connected
Do not touch the connections between cable the gear ratio depending on speed and power
incorrectly, and this can be enough for
and car during the starting attempt. There is a requirements.
the battery to explode.
risk of sparks forming.
• Do not connect the jump leads to any There are two main types of gearbox, manual and
fuel system component or any moving automatic.
12. Remove the jump leads in reverse order - part. Be careful of hot engine parts. The manual gearbox has six gears and the auto-
first the black and then the red.
• The battery contains sulphuric acid, which matic gearbox has eight. The number of gear
Make sure that none of the black jump lead's can cause serious burns. changes means that the engine's torque and
clamps comes into contact with the car's power range can be used effectively. In the auto-
• If sulphuric acid comes into contact with
positive jump-starting point/donor battery's eyes, skin or clothing, flush with large matic gearbox, two of the gears are overdrive
positive terminal or the clamp connected to quantities of water. If acid splashes into gears that save fuel when driving at constant
the red jump lead. the eyes - seek medical attention imme- engine speed.
diately. It is also possible to select gears manually with
• Never smoke near the battery. the automatic gearbox. The driver display respec-
tively shows which gear or gear position is cur-
rently in use.
Related information
• Starter battery (p. 550)
IMPORTANT
To prevent damage to any drive system com-
• Starting the car (p. 404) ponents, the working temperature of the
• Opening and closing the bonnet (p. 535) gearbox is checked. If there is a risk of over-
heating, a warning symbol illuminates in the
driver display and a text message is shown -
follow the recommendation given.
}}
407
|| Symbols in the driver display Gear positions for automatic To be able to move the gear selector from the
If a fault should occur in the gearbox, the driver gearbox park position, the brake pedal must be depressed
display shows a symbol and a message. With an automatic gearbox, the system chooses and the ignition position must be II.
the gear so that driving is optimal. The gearbox The gearbox is mechanically blocked when the P
Symbol Specification also has a manual gearshift mode. position is engaged. Apply the parking brake first
when the car is parked.
Information or error message for Gear positions in the driver display
gearbox. Follow the recommenda- WARNING
tion given.
Always use the parking brake when parking
on an inclined surface. Engaging a gear or the
Hot or overheated gearbox. Follow automatic transmission's P position is not suf-
the recommendation given. ficient to hold the car stationary in all situa-
tions.
Reduced performance/Acceler-
ation performance reduced. NOTE
In the event of a temporary power- The gear selector must be in P position to
train fault, the car can go into a allow the car to be locked and alarmed.
Limp home mode with reduced
engine power to prevent damage The driver display shows the gear selector's posi- Reverse position - R
to the powertrain. tion: Select position R to reverse. The car must be sta-
tionary when reverse position is selected.
Related information P, R, N, D or M.
Neutral position - N
• Gear positions for automatic gearbox In manual gearshift mode, the gear being used is No gear is engaged and the engine can be
(p. 408) also shown. started. Apply the parking brake if the car is sta-
• Manual gearbox (p. 410)
Gear positions tionary with the gear selector in N position.
• Gear shift indicator* (p. 410)
Park position - P To be able to change from the neutral position to
Select the P position when the car is parked or another gear position, the brake pedal must be
when starting the engine. The car must be sta- depressed and the ignition position must be II.
tionary when the park position is selected.
Drive position - D Kick-down is used when maximum acceleration

D is the normal driving position. Shifting up and is needed, such as for overtaking.
down takes place automatically based on the Safety function
level of acceleration and speed. The car must be
To prevent over-revving of the engine, the gear-
stationary when changing gear from R position to
box control program has a protective downshift
D position.
inhibitor.
Manual gearshift mode - M
The gearbox does not permit downshifting/kick-
The manual gearshift mode can be selected at
down which would result in an engine speed high
any time while driving. The car engine-brakes
enough to damage the engine. Nothing happens
when the accelerator pedal is released.
if the driver still tries to shift down in this way at
Select manual gearshift mode by moving the high engine speed – the original gear remains
gear selector sideways from position D to the manual gearshift mode in the driver display2. engaged.
end position at "±". The driver display shows
The gearbox automatically shifts down if the When kick-down is activated the car can change
which gear is engaged at the time.
speed decreases to a level lower than appropri- one or more gears at a time depending on
• Press the gear selector forwards to "+" ate for the selected gear, in order to avoid jerking engine speed. The car changes up when the
(plus) to change up one step and release it. and stalling. engine reaches its maximum speed in order to
• Press the gear selector backwards to "–" prevent damage to the engine.
To return to automatic gear changing, press the
(minus) to change down one step and gear selector sideways to the end position at D. Related information
release it.
• Gearbox (p. 407)
Kick-down
When the accelerator pedal is pressed all the • Changing gear with steering wheel paddles*
way to the floor (beyond the position normally (p. 413)
regarded as full acceleration) a lower gear is • Gear shift indicator* (p. 410)
immediately engaged. This is known as kick-
• Gear selector inhibitor (p. 412)
down.
If the accelerator is released from the kick-down
position, the gearbox automatically changes up.
2 The figure is schematic, the layout may vary depending on the car's equipment.
Manual gearbox • Follow the gearing pattern on the gear lever Gear shift indicator*
With a manual gearbox, the driver selects a suit- and start from neutral position, N, before The gear shift indicator in the driver display
able gear manually, according to speed and moving it to the R position. shows the current gear during manual gearshift-
power requirements at the time. • Engage reverse gear only when the car is ing and when it is appropriate to engage the
stationary. next gear for optimum fuel economy.
Changing gear
During parking For eco-driving during manual gear changing, it is
important to drive in the right gear and to change
WARNING gear in good time.
Always apply the parking brake when parking

on a slope - leaving the car in gear is not suf-
ficient to hold the car in all situations.
Related information
• Gearbox (p. 407)
• Gear shift indicator* (p. 410)
Neutral position (N)

The manual gearbox has six gears; the shifting
pattern is shown on the gear lever.
• Depress the clutch pedal fully during each
gear change.
• Take your foot off the clutch pedal between
gear changes.
Reverse gear inhibitor

The reverse gear inhibitor hinders the possibility
of mistakenly attempting to engage reverse gear
during normal forward travel.
With automatic gearbox With manual gearbox Related information

The gear shift indicator shows the current gear in An up-arrow indicates a recommended change to • Gearbox (p. 407)
the driver display and uses an up arrow to indi- a higher gear, and a down-arrow a recommended • Gear positions for automatic gearbox
cate when shifting to a higher gear is recom- change to a lower gear. (p. 408)
mended.
• Manual gearbox (p. 410)
Gear shift indicator in the 12-inch driver display*.

Gear shift indicator in the 12-inch driver display*.
Gear shift indicator in the 8-inch driver display.

Gear shift indicator in the 8-inch driver display.
Gear selector inhibitor From park position - P moved to the N position so that the car can be
The gear selector inhibitor prevents accidental To be able to move the gear selector from the P moved.
changing between different gear positions in an position, the brake pedal must be depressed and Lift the rubber mat in the compartment in
automatic gearbox. the ignition position must be II. front of the gear selector. Locate the hole
From neutral position - N with a spring-loaded button in the bottom of
There are two different types of gear selector
If the gear selector is in the N position and the the compartment.
inhibitor - mechanical and automatic.
car has been stationary for at least 3 seconds Press a small screwdriver into the hole and
Mechanical gear selector inhibitor (irrespective of whether the engine is running) hold.
then the gear selector is locked.
Move the gear selector to position N and
To be able to move the gear selector from the N release the button.
position to another gear position, the brake pedal
must be depressed and the ignition position must 4. Put the rubber mat back in place.
be II.
Related information
Deactivate automatic gear selector • Gear positions for automatic gearbox
inhibitor (p. 408)
The gear selector can be moved forward and

back freely between N and D. Other positions are
locked with a latch that is released with the inhib-
itor button on the gear selector.
With the inhibitor button depressed the lever can
be moved forwards or backwards between P, R,
N and D.
Automatic gear selector inhibitor If the car cannot be driven, e.g. due to a dis-
The automatic gear selector inhibitor has special charged battery, the gear selector must be
safety systems.
412
Changing gear with steering wheel

paddles*
The steering wheel paddles are a complement
to the gear selector and make it possible to
change gear manually without releasing hands
from the steering wheel.
Activating the steering wheel paddles

To be able to change gear with the steering
wheel paddles they must first be activated:
– Pull one of the paddles toward the steering
wheel.
Driver display when changing gear with steering wheel "-": Selects the next lower gear.
> A figure in the driver display indicates cur- paddles in manual gearshift mode.
rent gear.
"+": Selects the next higher gear.
Changing gear
To change gear one step: A gear change occurs at each pull of the paddle
– Pull one of the paddles backwards - towards provided that the engine speed does not leave
the steering wheel - and release. the permitted range.
After each gear change the figure in the driver
display changes to show the current gear.
Deactivating the function

Manual deactivation in gear position D.
– Deactivate the steering wheel paddles by
pulling the right-hand paddle (+) toward the
steering wheel and holding in place until the
Driver display when changing gear with steering wheel figure in the driver display for the current
paddles. gear extinguishes.
Manual gearshift mode
In gear position M the steering wheel paddles are
automatically activated.
}}
|| Automatic deactivation Start/Stop Using the Start/Stop function

In gear position D the steering wheel paddles are With the Start/Stop function, the engine The Start/Stop function temporarily switches off
deactivated after a short time if they are not used. switches off temporarily when the car has stop- the engine when stationary and then restarts it
This is indicated by means of the figure for the ped e.g. at traffic lights or in a traffic queue, and automatically when the journey is resumed.
current gear extinguishing. then starts again automatically when the journey
is resumed. The Start/Stop function is available when the
The exception is during engine braking - then the engine is started and can be activated if certain
paddles are activated for as long as engine brak- Start/Stop is one of several energy-saving func- conditions have been met. The driver display indi-
ing is in progress. tions intended to reduce fuel consumption, which cates whether the function is available, active or
In gear position M there is no automatic deactiva- in turn helps to reduce exhaust emissions. unavailable, see heading "Symbols in driver dis-
tion. play" below.
The system makes it possible to adopt an envi-
Related information ronmentally-conscious driving style by allowing All of the car's normal systems such as lighting,
the car to engine auto-stop when possible. radio, etc. work normally, even when the engine is
• Gear positions for automatic gearbox
auto-stopped. However, some equipment may
(p. 408) Related information have its output temporarily reduced, e.g. the cli-
• Gear shift indicator* (p. 410) • Using the Start/Stop function (p. 414) mate control system's fan speed or extremely
• Conditions for the Start/Stop function high volume on the audio system.
(p. 416)
Auto-stop
The following is required for the engine to auto-
stop:
With automatic gearbox engages, which prevents the car from rolling Symbols in the driver display
backwards.
• Stop the car with the foot brake and then With 12-inch driver display*
keep your foot on the brake pedal - the • When the Auto hold function is activated, • The text READY is shown in the tachometer
engine stops automatically. auto-start is delayed until the accelerator when the function is available.
pedal is depressed.
With manual gearbox • A pointer in the tachometer points to
• When the Adaptive cruise or Pilot Assist READY when the function is active and the
• Declutch, set the gear lever in neutral posi-
function are activated, the engine will autos-
tion and release the clutch pedal - the engine is auto-stopped.
tart when the accelerator pedal is depressed,
engine stops automatically. • The text READY is greyed out when the
or by pressing the button on the left function is not available.
In drive mode Eco or Comfort3, the engine may keypad of the steering wheel.
auto-stop before the car is completely stationary. • No text is shown when the function is deacti-
• Maintain foot pressure on the brake pedal vated.
With the Adaptive cruise or Pilot Assist func- and depress the accelerator pedal - the
tion activated, the engine will autostop after engine auto-starts.
approximately three seconds.
• On a downhill gradient: Release pressure on
See the section "Conditions for Start/Stop func- the brake pedal slightly so that the car
tion". begins to roll - the engine will auto-start after
a slight speed increase.
Autostart
With manual gearbox
The following is required for the engine to auto-
start: • With the gear lever in neutral position:
Depress the clutch pedal or depress the
With automatic gearbox accelerator pedal - the engine starts.
• Release the brake pedal - the engine will • On a downhill gradient: Release pressure on
autostart and you can continue driving. On an the brake pedal slightly so that the car
The function is active and the engine is auto-stopped.
uphill gradient hill start assist (HSA) begins to roll - the engine will auto-start after
a slight speed increase.
3 Normal start mode. }}
|| With 8-inch driver display • it is reactivated Conditions for the Start/Stop

The symbol is shown in the lower edge of the • the drive mode is changed to Eco or function
speedometer. Comfort For the Start/Stop function to work requires that
a number of conditions are met.
• the next time the car is started.
Symbol Specification
If any condition is not met, this will be indicated in
Related information
White symbol: The function is avail- the driver display. See the section "Using the
able.
• Start/Stop (p. 414)
Start/Stop function".
• Conditions for the Start/Stop function
(p. 416) The engine does not auto-stop
Beige symbol: The function is • Hill start assist (p. 431) The engine does not auto-stop in the following
active and the engine is auto-stop- cases:
• Automatic braking when stationary (p. 432)
ped. • The car has not reached approx. 10 km/h
(6 mph) after starting.
The function is not available, the • Activating and starting the Pilot Assist*
• After a number of repeated auto stops,
conditions are not fulfilled. (p. 311)
speed must again exceed approx. 10 km/h
(6 mph) before the next auto stop.
No symbol is shown when the • The driver has unfastened the seatbelt.
function is deactivated. • The capacity of the starter battery is below
the minimum permissible level.
Deactivating the function • The engine is not at normal operating tem-
In certain situations it may be desirable to tempo- perature.
rarily deactivate the function.
• The ambient temperature is under -5 °C or
Deactivate using the Start/ above approx. 30 °C.
Stop function button in the
• the windscreen's electric heating is activated.
centre display's function view.
The indication in the button is • The environment in the passenger compart-
switched off when the function ment deviates from the set values.
is deactivated. • the car is reversed.
The function is deactivated until • The starter battery's temperature is below or
above the permitted limit values.
• The driver makes sweeping steering wheel With automatic gearbox: • High humidity in the passenger compartment
movements. forms misting on the windows.
• The driver is unbelted, the gear selector is in
• The road is very steep. P position and the driver's door is open - a • The environment in the passenger compart-
• The bonnet is opened. normal start must take place. ment deviates from the set values.
• When driving at high altitudes when the With manual gearbox: • There is a temporarily high current take-off
engine has not reached operating tempera- or starter battery capacity drops below the
• The driver is unrestrained.
lowest permissible level.
ture.
• A gear is engaged without declutching.
• Repeated pumping of the brake pedal.
• The ABS system has been activated.
• In the event of heavy braking (even without Involuntary stop with manual gearbox • The bonnet is opened.
the ABS system having been activated). If a start-up fails and the engine stops, proceed • The car starts to roll or increase speed
as follows: slightly if the car auto-stopped without being
• Many starts during a short period of time
have activated the starter motor's thermal 1. Check that the driver side's seatbelt is locked completely stationary.
protection. in the seatbelt buckle. The following applies to automatic gearbox:
• The exhaust system's particulate filter is full4. 2. Depress the clutch pedal again - the engine • The driver's seatbelt buckle is opened with
starts automatically. the gear selector in D or N position.
• A trailer is connected electrically to the car’s
electrical system. 3. In certain cases the gear lever must be set in • The gear selector is moved from D to posi-
neutral position. A message is shown in the tion R or ±.
The following applies to automatic gearbox:
driver display - follow the recommendation
• The gearbox is not at normal operating tem- given. • The driver's door is opened with the gear
perature. selector in D position - a "ping" sound and
The engine auto-starts without the text message indicate that the ignition is on.
• The gear selector is in ± position.
brake pedal having been released
The engine does not auto-start In the following cases, the engine auto-starts WARNING
In the following cases the engine does not auto- even if the driver does not take his/her foot off Do not open the bonnet when the engine has
start after having auto-stopped: the brake pedal: auto-stopped. Switch off the engine normally
before lifting up the bonnet.
4 Applies to cars with diesel engines. }}
417
|| Related information Drive modes* Selecting drive mode

• Start/Stop (p. 414) Selection of drive mode affects the car's driving
• Using the Start/Stop function (p. 414) characteristics in order to enhance the driving
experience and facilitate driving in special situa-
• Support battery (p. 553)
tions.
Using the drive modes it is possible to quickly

have access to the car's numerous functions and
settings for different driving needs. The following
systems are adapted to obtain the best possible
driving characteristics in each respective drive
mode:
• Steering
• Engine/gearbox5/all-wheel drive* 1. Press the drive mode control DRIVE MODE.
• Brakes > A pop-up menu is opened in the centre
display.
• Air suspension* and shock absorption
• Driver display 2. Roll the wheel upward or downward until the
desired drive mode is highlighted.
• Start/Stop function
3. Press the drive mode control or tap directly
• Climate settings
on the touch screen to confirm the selection.
Select the drive mode that best suits the current > The selected drive mode is indicated in
driving conditions. Remember that not all drive the driver display.
modes are available in all situations.
A message is shown when a drive mode is unse-
lectable.
5 Applies to automatic gearbox.
For example: The driver display has an ECO gauge that facili- NOTE
tates fuel-efficient driving.
• Cannot be selected because gear is in If the car is switched off in OFF ROAD mode,
manual More information on this drive mode is found in and therefore has high ground clearance, the
the section "Drive mode ECO".
• Cannot be selected due to low battery car is lowered next time it is started.
OFF ROAD
• Cannot be selected due to low
temperature • Maximise the car's traction when driving in
difficult terrain and on poor roads. IMPORTANT
• Cannot be selected due to limitations The OFF ROAD drive mode must not be used
The drive mode provides high ground clearance,
• Cannot be selected because speed is steering is light, all-wheel drive and the function while driving with a trailer without trailer con-
too high. for low speed control with hill descent control nector. Otherwise, there is a risk of damage to
(Hill Descent Control) are activated. Start/Stop the air bellows.
Selectable drive modes
function is deactivated.
COMFORT DYNAMIC
The drive mode can only be activated at low • Dynamic mode means that the car has sport-
• This is the car's normal mode. speeds and the speedometer shows the range ier characteristics and faster response to
When the car starts, it is in Comfort mode and for speed limitation. If this speed is exceeded, Off accelerating.
the Start/Stop function is activated. These set- road mode is suspended and another drive mode
tings mean that the car feels comfortable, the The gear changes become faster and more dis-
is activated.
steering is light, the shock absorption is soft and tinct, and the gearbox prioritises a gear with
body's movement is smooth. In the Off road mode the driver display has a greater traction.
compass between the speedometer and tachom-
This drive mode is the certification mode for car- Steering response is faster, shock absorption is
eter.
bon dioxide emissions. harder and a low ground clearance means that
the body follows the roadway in order to reduce
ECO NOTE roll during cornering.
• Adapt the car for more energy-efficient and The driving mode is not designed to be used
environmentally-conscious driving with the Start/Stop function is deactivated.
on public roads.
Eco mode.
The drive mode means e.g. that the Start/Stop
function is activated, the ground clearance is
lower to reduce wind resistance and the output
of certain climate settings is reduced.
}}
419
|| INDIVIDUAL 3. In Presets, select a drive mode to start from:

• Adapting a drive mode according to individ- Eco, Comfort or Dynamic.
ual preferences. Possible adjustments apply to settings for:
Select a drive mode to start from, and then adjust
the settings according to the desired driving cha- • Driver Display
racteristics. These settings are saved in an indi- • Steering force
vidual driver profile. • Powertrain Characteristics
An individual drive mode is only available if it is • Brake Characteristics
first activated in the centre display.
• Suspension Control
• ECO Climate
• Start/Stop.
Related information
• Speed-dependent steering force (p. 270)
• Level control* and shock absorption (p. 423)
• Drive mode ECO (p. 421)
• All-wheel drive* (p. 425)
Settings view6 for individual drive mode. • Hill descent control* (p. 434)
1. Press Settings in the top view. • Setting the time interval for the adaptive
2. cruise control* (p. 296)
Press My Car Individual Drive Mode and
select Individual Drive Mode.
6 The figure is schematic, the layout may vary depending on car model or updated software.
Drive mode ECO Selecting ECO mode In the centre display's function view
Driving mode ECO mode optimises the car's The Eco mode is deactivated when the engine is A car without drive mode con-
driving characteristics for more fuel efficient and switched off, and it must therefore be activated trol has a function button for
environmentally-conscious driving. after each time the engine is started. The driver Driving mode ECO in the
display shows ECO when the function is acti- centre display's function view.
Use this drive mode to save fuel and the environ- vated.
ment.
With drive mode control*
The following properties are adapted for Eco driv-
– Press the button in order to activate the
ing: function.
• Gearbox gearshift points7. > An indicator in the button illuminates
• Engine management and response from the when the function is activated.
accelerator pedal.
Free-wheel function Eco Coast7
• The Eco Coast7 freewheel function is acti- The freewheel function Eco Coast means in prac-
vated and engine braking is deactivated tice that engine braking ceases, meaning in turn
when the accelerator pedal is released at that the car's kinetic energy is used to freewheel
speeds between 65 and 140 km/h for longer distances. When the driver releases
(40 and 87 mph). the accelerator pedal the gearbox is automatically
• Some of the climate control system's set- disengaged from the engine whose speed is
tings work at reduced power or are deacti- reduced to idling speed with reduced consump-
1. Press the drive mode control DRIVE MODE.
vated. tion.
> A pop-up menu is opened in the centre
• The level control function* provides a low display. The function is best used where it is possible to
ground clearance in order to reduce wind freewheel a long way, e.g. roads with a slight
resistance. 2. Roll the wheel upward or downward until the downhill gradient or when there is a predictable
desired drive mode is highlighted. speed reduction to freewheel into a zone with a
• The driver display shows information in an
ECO gauge which facilitates environmentally- 3. Press the drive mode control or tap directly lower speed limit.
conscious and fuel-efficient driving. on the touch screen to confirm the selection.
7 Only cars with automatic gearbox. }}
|| Activating the freewheel function Deactivating and switching off the freewheel car's speed can be slightly above or below the
The function is activated when the accelerator function set speed.
pedal is fully released, in combination with the In certain situations it may be desirable to deacti- • On a smooth road, the car's speed can devi-
following parameters: vate or switch off the function in order to use ate from the set speed when the cruise con-
engine braking. Examples of such situations may
• Drive mode Eco is activated. trol is active and the car free-rolls.
be on steep downhill gradients or before an
• The gear selector is in D position. imminent overtaking manoeuvre - in order to be • On a steep uphill slope, the car's speed
drops until a downshift is made7, then
• Speed within the range of able to do it in the safest way possible.
approx. 65-140 km/h (40-87 mph). reduced acceleration starts in order to
Deactivate the freewheel function as follows: achieve the set speed.
• The road's downhill gradient is not steeper
than approx. 6%. • Actuate the accelerator or brake pedal. • On a downhill slope where the car free-rolls,
• Move the gear selector to manual position. the car's speed can be slightly above or
The driver display shows COASTING when the below the set speed. The function uses nor-
freewheel function is being used. • Changing gear with steering wheel paddles*.
mal engine braking to maintain the set
Limitations Switch off the freewheel function as follows: speed. The foot brake is also used if neces-
The freewheel function is not available if: sary.
• Change drive mode*, or switch off the
• Engine and/or gearbox are not at normal Driving mode ECO in the function view. ECO gauge in the driver display
operating temperature. Even without the freewheel function, it is possible The ECO gauge indicates how fuel-efficient the
• The gear selector is moved from the D posi- to freewheel for short distances. This, in turn, driving is:
tion and the manual position. reduces consumption. However, for the best fuel
economy it is better to have the freewheel func- • With fuel-efficient driving, the gauge shows a
• The speed is outside the range of
tion activated and be able to freewheel for longer
low value with the pointer in the green zone.
approx. 65-140 km/h (40-87 mph).
distances. • With non-fuel-efficient driving, e.g. during
• The road's downhill gradient is steeper than heavy braking or heavy acceleration, the
approx. 6%. Cruise control Eco Cruise gauge shows a high value.
• Manual gear changing is performed with the When using the cruise control in the Eco drive The ECO gauge also has an indicator to show
steering wheel paddles*. mode, the car's acceleration and deceleration will how a reference driver would drive the car under
be lower compared to other drive modes, which the same driving conditions. This is indicated with
enables further fuel savings. This means that the the short pointer on the gauge.
7 Only cars with automatic gearbox.
NOTE Level control* and shock absorption

Level control regulates the car's suspension and
When the ECO function is activated, several
shock absorption characteristics automatically to
parameters in the climate control system's
ensure the best comfort and functionality while
settings are changed, and several electricity
driving. It is also possible to adjust the level
consumer functions are reduced. Certain set-
manually in order to facilitate loading or entry
tings can be reset manually, but full function-
and exit.
ality is only regained by switching off the ECO
function or adapting Individual* drive mode Air suspension and shock absorption
with full climate functionality. The system is adapted according to the selected
drive mode and according to the speed of the
In the event of difficulties due to misting, press car. Using the air suspension, the car's ground
Eco gauge in the 12-inch driver display*. the button for max. defroster which has normal clearance is adjusted to a lower level at higher
functionality. speeds, which reduces wind resistance and
increases stability. Shock absorption is normally
Related information set for the best possible comfort and is regulated
• Economical driving (p. 443) continuously depending on the road surface, the
• Start/Stop (p. 414) car's acceleration, braking and cornering.
• Drive modes* (p. 418) The driver display indicates
when level control is in pro-
gress.
The level cannot be regulated when the bonnet

Eco gauge in the 8-inch driver display.
or any side door is open.
ECO climate control
In the Eco drive mode, ECO climate control is
activated automatically in the passenger com-
partment in order to reduce energy consumption.
}}
|| Settings for level control Loading mode During transport

Entry assistance During transport of the car on a ferry, train or
The car can be lowered to facilitate entry and exit. truck, the car must be lashed around the tyres
and not around other parts of the chassis.
Activating entry assistance via the centre display: Changes in the air suspension may occur during
1. Press Settings in the top view. transport, which could affect the lashing nega-
tively.
2. Press My Car Mirrors and Easy Entry.
Related information
3. Select Easy Entry and Exit Suspension
Control.
> When the car is parked and switched off,
• Recommendations for loading (p. 219)
the car is lowered (level control stops if a
door is opened and there may be a cer-
tain delay before level control resumes Use the buttons in the cargo area to regulate the
after the door has been closed). When the height of the car's rear section and facilitate
car is started and begins to move, the car loading/unloading or when connecting/discon-
will rise to the height setting for the drive necting a trailer. See the section "Loading".
mode selected.
During parking
Deactivation of air suspension and level
During parking, make sure you allow adequate
control
space above and below the car since the car's
In certain cases, the function must be deacti- ground clearance may vary e.g. depending on the
vated, e.g. before the car is raised with a jack*. outside temperature, how the car is loaded, the
The difference in level created by raising the car use of loading mode or the drive mode that is
with a jack can otherwise cause problems for the selected after starting.
air suspension.
The level may also be adjusted a period after the
Deactivating the function via the centre display: car is parked. This is to compensate for any
1. Press Settings in the top view. height changes that may occur due to tempera-
ture changes in the air springs when the car
2. Press My Car Parking Brake and cools down.
Suspension.
3. Select Disable Leveling Control.
All-wheel drive* Brake functions Foot brake

All-wheel drive, AWD (All Wheel Drive), means The car's brakes are used to reduce the speed The foot brake is part of the brake system.
that the car is driving all four wheels at the same or prevent the car from rolling.
time, which improves traction. The car is equipped with two brake circuits. If a
Besides the foot brake and parking brake, the car brake circuit is damaged, the brake pedal will
To achieve the best possible traction and prevent is equipped with several automatic brake assist engage deeper. Higher pressure on the pedal will
wheel spin the motive force is distributed auto- functions. These can assist the driver by not therefore be needed to produce the normal brak-
matically to the wheels with the best grip. The needing to keep his/her foot on the brake pedal ing effect.
system continuously calculates the need for tor- when stationary at a traffic light, when starting on
The driver's brake pedal pressure is assisted by a
que to the rear wheels, and can immediately an uphill gradient or when driving on a downhill
brake servo.
redistribute up to half of the motor's torque to the gradient.
rear wheels. Depending on the car's equipment, the following WARNING
All-wheel drive also has a stabilising effect at auto braking functions are available:
The brake servo only works when the engine
higher speeds. Under normal driving conditions,
the majority of power is transmitted to the front
• Automatic braking when stationary (Auto is running.
Hold)
wheels. When stationary, the all-wheel drive is
always engaged in preparation for maximum trac- • Hill start assist (Hill Start Assist) If the foot brake is used when the engine is
tion during acceleration. • Auto braking after a collision switched off then the pedal will feel stiff and a
higher pedal pressure must be used to brake the
All-wheel drive characteristics vary depending on • City Safety car.
the selected drive mode*. • Hill descent control (Hill Descent Control)*
In very hilly terrain or when driving with a heavy
Related information Related information load the brakes can be relieved by using engine
• Drive modes* (p. 418) • Foot brake (p. 425) braking in manual gearshift mode. Engine braking
is most efficiently used if the same gear is used
• Low speed control* (p. 433) • Parking brake (p. 428)
downhill as up. Use drive mode Off Road* for
• Hill descent control* (p. 434) increased engine braking while driving on steep
• Hill start assist (p. 431) downhill gradients at low speeds.
• Automatic braking when stationary (p. 432) Anti-lock braking system
• Auto braking after a collision (p. 428) The car has anti-lock brakes, Anti-lock Braking
System (ABS), which can prevent the wheels
from locking while braking and allows maintained
}}
|| steering control. Vibration may be felt in the • Brake now and again to remove any layer of Symbols in the driver display
brake pedal when this is engaged and this is nor- salt. Make sure that other road users are not
mal. put at risk by the braking.
A short test of the ABS system is made automat- • Gently depress the brake pedal after finish- Check the brake fluid level. If the
ically after the car has been started when the ing driving and before starting your next trip. level is low, fill with brake fluid and
driver releases the brake pedal. A further auto- check for the cause of the brake
matic test of the system may be made at low Maintenance fluid loss.
speed. The test may be felt as pulses in the To keep the car as safe and reliable as possible,
follow the Volvo service intervals as specified in Constant glow for 2 seconds when
brake pedal. the engine is started: Automatic
the Service and Warranty Booklet.
function check.
Braking on wet roads New and replaced brake linings and brake discs
When driving for a prolonged period of time in do not provide optimal braking effect until they Constant glow for more than 2
heavy rain without braking, the braking effect may have been "worn in" a few hundred kilometres. seconds: Fault in the ABS system.
be delayed slightly when next using the brakes. Compensate for the reduced braking effect by The car's normal brake system is
This may also be the case after a car wash. It is depressing the brake pedal harder. Volvo recom- still working, but without the ABS
then necessary to depress the brake pedal more mends only fitting brake linings that are approved function.
forcefully. You should therefore maintain a for your Volvo.
greater distance to the vehicles in front.
WARNING
Brake the car firmly after driving on wet roads or IMPORTANT If both the warning lamps for brake fault and
using a car wash. This warms up the brake discs, ABS fault illuminate at the same time, a fault
The wear on the brake system's components
enabling them to dry faster and protecting them has occurred in the brake system.
must be checked regularly.
against corrosion. Bear in mind the current traffic
situation when braking. Contact a workshop for information about the • If the level in the brake fluid reservoir is
normal at this stage, drive carefully to the
procedure or engage a workshop to carry out
Braking on salted roads nearest workshop and have the brake
the inspection - an authorised Volvo work-
When driving on salted roads, a layer of salt may system checked - an authorised Volvo
shop is recommended.
form on the brake discs and brake linings. This workshop is recommended.
may extend braking distance. You should there- • If the brake fluid is below the MIN level in
fore maintain a greater safety distance to vehi- the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive fur-
cles in front. In addition, make sure you do the ther before topping up the brake fluid.
following: The reason for the loss of brake fluid
must be investigated.
426
Related information Emergency brake lights Brake assistance

• Brake functions (p. 425) Emergency brake lights are activated to alert The brake assist system, BAS (Brake Assist
• Brake assistance (p. 427) vehicles behind about heavy braking. The func- System), helps to increase brake force during
tion means that the brake light flashes instead of braking, thereby shortening the braking distance.
• Brake lights (p. 140)
- as in normal braking - shining with a constant
• Emergency brake lights (p. 427) glow. The system detects the way in which the driver
brakes and increases brake force where neces-
The emergency brake lights are activated during sary. The brake force can be boosted up to the
heavy braking or if the ABS system is activated at level when the ABS system is engaged. The
high speeds. After emergency braking to a low function is suspended when the pressure on the
speed, the brake lights return from flashing to the brake pedal decreases.
normal constant glow. The car's hazard warning
flashers are activated at the same time. These NOTE
flash until the driver accelerates the car to a
higher speed again or switches off the hazard When BAS is activated the brake pedal low-
warning flashers. ers slightly more than usual, depress (hold)
the brake pedal as long as necessary.
Related information When the brake pedal is released, all braking
• Foot brake (p. 425) ceases.
• Brake lights (p. 140) Related information
• Foot brake (p. 425)
427
Auto braking after a collision • Rear Collision Warning (p. 349) Parking brake
In the event of a collision in which the activation • BLIS* (p. 349) The parking brake prevents the car from rolling
level is reached for the pyrotechnic seatbelt ten- away from stationary by means of mechanically
sioners or airbags, or if a collision with a large locking/blocking two wheels.
animal is detected, the car's brakes are automat-
ically applied. This function is to prevent or
reduce the effects of any subsequent collision.
After a serious collision there is a risk that it is no

longer possible to control and steer the car. In
order to avoid or mitigate a possible further colli-
sion with a vehicle or an object in the vehicle's
path, the auto braking system is activated auto-
matically and brakes the car in a safe manner.
Brake lights and hazard warning lights are acti-
vated during braking. When the car has stopped,
the hazard warning lights continue to flash and
the parking brake is applied. The control for the parking brake is located in the tunnel
console between the seats.
If braking is not appropriate, e.g. if there is a risk
A faint electric motor noise can be heard when
of being hit by following traffic, the system can be
the electrically-operated parking brake is being
overridden by the driver depressing the accelera-
applied. The noise can also be heard during the
tor pedal.
automatic function checking of the parking brake.
The function assumes that the brake system is
If the car is stationary when the parking brake is
intact after the collision.
applied then it only acts on the rear wheels. If it is
See also the sections "Rear Collision Warning" applied when the car is moving then the normal
and "Blind Spot Information". foot brake is used, i.e. the brake acts on all four
wheels. Brake function changes over to the rear
Related information wheels when the car is almost stationary.
• Brake functions (p. 425)
• Airbags (p. 63)
Related information Using the parking brake Symbol in the driver display
• Brake functions (p. 425) Use the parking brake to prevent the car from Symbol Specification
• Using the parking brake (p. 429) rolling from stationary.
The symbol is illuminated when the
• In the event of a fault in the parking brake Applying the parking brake parking brake is applied.
(p. 431)
If the symbol flashes, it indicates a
fault has occurred. Read the mes-
sage on the driver display.
Automatic application
The parking brake is applied automatically:
• if the Auto hold function (automatic braking
when stationary) is activated and the car has
been stationary for approx. 5 minutes.
• when gear position P is selected on a steep
hill8.
1. Pull the control upward. • when the car is switched off and the "Auto-
matic activation of parking brake" is acti-
> The symbol in the driver display illumi-
vated9.
nates when the parking brake is applied.
Emergency brake
2. Check that the car is stationary.
In an emergency, the parking brake can be
applied when the car is in motion by pulling and
holding up the control. Braking stops when the
control is released.
NOTE
An acoustic signal sounds while emergency
braking is active at high speeds.

9 See heading "Settings for parking brake". }}
429
|| Releasing the parking brake 4. With automatic gearbox: Heavy load uphill
Select gear position D or R and depress the A heavy load, such as a trailer, can cause the car
accelerator pedal. to roll backward when the parking brake is
released automatically on a steep incline. Avoid
With manual gearbox: this by pulling the control upwards while driving
Engage a suitable gear, release the clutch the car away. Release the control when the
and depress the accelerator pedal. engine achieves traction.
> The parking brake releases and the sym- Settings for parking brake
bol in the driver display extinguishes.
Automatic activation of the parking brake is
selected via the centre display.
NOTE
Automatic activation when the car is switched off:
When the car is first started, the parking
brake can be released automatically without 1. Press Settings in the top view.
Releasing manually the seatbelt fastened.
1. Depress the brake pedal firmly. 2. Press My Car Parking Brake and
Suspension and deselect/select the func-
2. Press the control down. Parking on a hill tion Auto Activate Parking Brake.
> The parking brake releases and the sym-
bol in the driver display extinguishes. WARNING Related information
Releasing automatically Always use the parking brake when parking
• Parking brake (p. 428)
1. Put the seatbelt on. on an inclined surface. Engaging a gear or the • In the event of a fault in the parking brake
automatic transmission's P position is not suf- (p. 431)
2. Depress the brake pedal firmly. ficient to hold the car stationary in all situa-
tions. • Automatic braking when stationary (p. 432)
3. Start the car.
If the car is parked facing uphill:

• Turn the wheels away from the kerb.
If the car is parked facing downhill:
• Turn the wheels towards the kerb.
430
In the event of a fault in the parking Symbols in the driver display Hill start assist
brake Symbol Specification Hill start assist, Hill Start Assist (HSA), prevents
Contact an authorised Volvo workshop if it is not the car from rolling backwards when starting on
possible to release or apply the parking brake If the symbol flashes, it indicates a an uphill gradient. When reversing uphill, it pre-
after several attempts. fault has occurred. See the mes- vents the car from rolling forwards.
sage in the driver display.
An acoustic warning signal sounds when driving The function means that the pedal pressure in
with the parking brake applied. Fault in brake system. See the the brake system remains for several seconds
message in the driver display. while the driver's foot is moved from brake pedal
If the car has to be parked before a possible fault
to accelerator pedal.
is rectified then the wheels must be turned as if
parking on a hill10 and the gear selector must be The temporary braking effect releases after sev-
in position P, or engage first gear if the car has a Information message in driver dis- eral seconds or when the driver accelerates.
manual gearbox. play.
Hill start assist is available even if the function for
automatic braking when stationary (Auto hold) is
Low battery voltage
deactivated.
If the battery voltage is too low then the parking
Message examples:
brake can neither be released nor applied. Con- Related information
nect a donor battery if the battery voltage is too • Parking brake Service required • Brake functions (p. 425)
low. • Parking brake System overheated • Automatic braking when stationary (p. 432)
Replacing the brake linings • Parking brake Not released
The rear brake linings must be replaced at a • Parking brake Cannot hold car
workshop due to the design of the electrically-
operated parking brake - an authorised Volvo • Parking brake Temporarily unavailable
workshop is recommended. Related information
• Using the parking brake (p. 429)
• Parking brake (p. 428)
• Using jump starting with another battery
(p. 406)
10 See section "Using the parking brake".
431
Automatic braking when stationary Switch for automatic brake Symbols in the driver display
Automatic braking when stationary (Auto hold) Symbol Specification
means that the driver can release the brake
pedal while maintaining braking effect when the The symbol is illuminated when the
car has stopped at traffic lights or a junction. function uses the foot brake to
keep the car stationary.
Function
When the car has stopped, the brakes are acti- The symbol is illuminated when the
vated automatically. The function can use either function uses the parking brake to
foot brake or parking brake to hold the car sta- keep the car stationary.
tionary and it works on all gradients. When the
accelerator pedal is depressed again, the brakes
are released. Related information
When braking to a stop on a downhill or uphill An indicator in the button illuminates when the function
gradient - depress the brake pedal a bit harder is activated. • Hill start assist (p. 431)
before releasing to ensure that the car does not Activate or deactivate Auto hold with the switch
roll at all. in the tunnel console. The function remains deac-
When stationary or when is the car is switched tivated until it is reactivated.
off, the parking brake is applied after approx. 5 If the function is active and holds the
minutes. car with the foot brake (A-symbol illu-
minated) then the brake pedal must be
Automatic deactivation
depressed at the same time as the
The function is deactivated automatically:
button is depressed in order to deactivate.
• when the driver's door is open and the driv-
When the function is deactivated, hill start assist
er's seatbelt is unfastened.
(HSA) remains active to prevent the car from roll-
ing backwards when starting on an uphill gradi-
ent.
432
Low speed control* With drive mode control* NOTE

The low speed control function Low Speed
When LSC with HDC is activated, the feel of
Control (LSC) facilitates and improves traction
the accelerator pedal and engine response
for driving off-road and on slippery surfaces,
are changed.
such as with a caravan on grass or a boat trailer
on a launch ramp.
In a car with drive mode control*, the function is NOTE
included in the Off Road drive mode. The driving mode is not designed to be used
on public roads.
The function is adapted for off-road driving and
driving with a trailer at low speed, up to approx.
40 km/h (25 mph). NOTE
With low-speed control, low gears and all-wheel The function is deactivated when driving at
drive are prioritised, which help to avoid wheel- • Select the Off Road drive mode in order to higher speeds and must be reactivated at a
spin and provides better traction on all wheels. activate the function. lower speed, if required.
The accelerator pedal is less responsive in order • Select a different drive mode in order to
to facilitate traction and speed control at low deactivate.
speed.
Related information
In the centre display's function view • Brake functions (p. 425)
The function is activated together with Hill A car without drive mode con-
Descent Control (HDC) which means that the
• Hill descent control* (p. 434)
trol has a function button for
speed down steep downhill gradients can be low speed control with Hill • Drive modes* (p. 418)
controlled with the accelerator pedal and it Descent Control in the centre
reduces the need to use the brake pedal. The display's function view.
system facilitates a low and even speed while
driving on steep downhill gradients.
– Press the button in order to activate the
Activating low speed control, LSC function.
The function is activated in different ways > An indicator in the button illuminates
depending on the car's equipment. when the function is activated.
Hill descent control* the foot brake to be used. The brake lights are • Select the Off Road drive mode in order to
Hill descent control, Hill Descent Control switched on when the function is operating. activate the function.
(HDC), is a low speed function with enhanced The driver can brake and reduce crawling speed, • Select a different drive mode in order to
engine braking. The function makes it possible or stop the car at any time by using the foot deactivate. If the drive mode is changed while
to increase or reduce vehicle speed on steep brake. driving on a steep downhill gradient, the
downhill gradients using only the accelerator braking effect will gradually decrease.
pedal, without using the foot brake. The function is activated together with Low
Speed Control (LSC) which facilitates driving and In the centre display's function view
In a car with drive mode control*, the function is improves traction for driving off-road and on slip- A car without drive mode con-
included in the Off Road drive mode. pery surfaces. The systems are designed for use trol has a function button for
at low speed, up to approx. 40 km/h (25 mph). low speed control with Hill
Hill descent control is adapted for off-road driv- Descent Control in the centre
ing at low speeds and facilitates driving on steep Activating hill descent control, HDC display's function view.
downhill gradients with difficult surfaces. The Hill descent control only works at low speeds.
driver does not need to use the brake pedal, but
can instead focus on steering. The function is activated in different ways – Press the button in order to activate the
depending on the car's equipment. function.
WARNING With drive mode control* > An indicator in the button illuminates
when the function is activated.
HDC does not work in all situations but is
designed merely as a supplementary aid. Points to remember when driving with HDC
The driver always bears ultimate responsibility With automatic gearbox
for ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely. • HDC can be used in gear position D, R, and
with 1st or 2nd gear with manual gear
Function changing.
Hill descent control allows the car to roll at • It is not possible to change to 3rd gear or
inching speed both forward and backward, assis- higher with manual gear changing.
ted by the brake system. The speed can be
With manual gearbox
increased by using the accelerator pedal. When
the accelerator pedal is then released the car • HDC only brakes in 1st gear or with reverse
slows back down to crawling speed, regardless of gear (R). There is no active braking in higher
the gradient of the hill and without the need for gears despite the function not being deacti-
vated until approx. 40 km/h (25 mph).
NOTE Driving in water IMPORTANT

Driving in water means that the car is driven
When LSC with HDC is activated, the feel of
through deep water on a water-covered road- • Engine damage can occur if water enters
the accelerator pedal and engine response the air filter.
way. Driving in water must be carried out with
are changed. • If water enters the transmission, it
great caution.
reduces the lubricating ability of the oil,
The car can be driven through water to a maxi- which shortens the service life of related
NOTE mum depth of 40 cm (15.7 inches) at no more systems.
The driving mode is not designed to be used than walking speed. Extra caution should be
on public roads. exercised when passing through flowing water.
• Damage to any component, engine,
transmission, turbocharger, differential or
During driving in water, maintain a low speed and its internal components caused by flood-
NOTE do not stop the car. When the water has been ing, hydrostatic locking or oil shortage, is
passed, depress the brake pedal lightly and not covered by the warranty.
The function is deactivated when driving at check that full brake function is achieved. Water
higher speeds and must be reactivated at a • In the event of the engine stalling in
and mud for example can make the brake linings water, do not try restart - tow the car from
lower speed, if required. wet resulting in delayed brake function. the water to a workshop - an authorised
• If necessary, clean the contacts for the elec- Volvo workshop is recommended. Risk of
Related information tric heater and trailer coupling after driving in engine breakdown.
• Brake functions (p. 425) water and mud.
• Low speed control* (p. 433) • Do not let the car stand with water over the Related information
• Drive modes* (p. 418) sills for any long period of time - this could • Towing (p. 453)
cause electrical malfunctions.
Overheating in the engine and drive Transmission warm Reduce speed to Symbols in the driver display
system lower temperature or Transmission hot Symbol Specification
Under special conditions, for example hard driv- Stop safely, wait for cooling. Follow the
ing in hilly terrain and hot climate, there is a risk recommendation given, reduce speed or stop High engine temperature. Follow
that the engine and drive system may overheat - the car in a safe way and allow the engine to the recommendation given.
in particular with a heavy load. run at idling speed for several minutes to
enable the gearbox to cool down.
• In the event of overheating, the engine's
• If the car overheats, the air conditioning may Low level, coolant. Follow the rec-
power may be limited temporarily. be switched off temporarily. ommendation given.
• Remove any auxiliary lamps from in front of
• Do not turn the engine off immediately you
the grille when driving in hot climates. stop after a hard drive.
Gearbox hot/overheated/cooled.
• If the temperature in the engine's cooling
Follow the recommendation given.
system becomes too high then a warning NOTE
symbol is illuminated and the driver display
shows the message Engine temperature It is normal for the engine's cooling fan to
High temperature Stop safely. Stop the operate for a time after the engine has been Related information
switched off.
car in a safe way and allow the engine to run • Topping up coolant (p. 540)
at idling speed for several minutes and cool
• Driving with a trailer (p. 448)
down.
• Preparations for a long trip (p. 437)
• If the message Engine temperature High
temperature Turn off engine or Engine
coolant Level low, turn off engine is
shown, stop the car and switch off the
engine.
• In the event of overheating in the gearbox, an
alternative gear shift program will be
selected11. In addition, a built-in protection
function is activated that, amongst other
things, illuminates a warning symbol and the
driver display shows the message
436
Overloading the starter battery Preparations for a long trip • Settings for car modem* (p. 488)
The electrical functions in the car load the starter Before a driving holiday or some other type of • Recommendations for loading (p. 219)
battery to varying degrees. Avoid using the igni- long journey, it is important to check the car's
tion position II when the car is switched off. functions and equipment particularly carefully.
Instead, use ignition position I - which uses less • Speed limiter* (p. 275)
Check that:
power. • Road Sign Information with Speed Camera
Also, be aware of different accessories that load
• the engine is working normally and that fuel Information* (p. 361)
consumption is normal • Driving with a trailer (p. 448)
the electrical system. Do not use functions which
use a lot of power when the car is switched off. • there are no leaks (fuel, oil or other fluid) • Driving in water (p. 435)
Examples of such functions are: • brake force during braking is optimal • Alarm* (p. 257)
• ventilation fan • all lamps are working - adjust headlamp level
• Level control* and shock absorption (p. 423)
if the car is heavily laden
• headlamps • Warning triangle (p. 523)
• windscreen wiper • the tyres have sufficient tread depth and
pressure. Change to winter tyres when driv- • Emergency puncture repair kit (p. 512)
• audio system (high volume). ing to areas where there is a risk of snowy or • Spare wheel* (p. 520)
If the starter battery voltage is low, the message icy road surfaces.
12 V Battery Low charge, will soon enter • starter battery charging is good
power save mode is shown in the driver display.
The energy-saving function then shuts down cer- • the wiper blades are in good condition
tain functions or reduces certain functions such • a warning triangle and high-visibility vest are
as the ventilation fan and/or audio system. located in the car - legally required in certain
countries.
– In which case, charge the starter battery by
starting the car and then running it for at Related information
least 15 minutes - starter battery charging is • Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions
more effective during driving than running (p. 590)
the engine at idling speed while stationary.
• Checking the tyre pressures (p. 506)
Related information • Filling washer fluid (p. 549)
• Winter driving (p. 438)
• Economical driving (p. 443)
Winter driving battery and its capacity is reduced by the • Drive modes* (p. 418)
cold.
For winter driving it is important to perform cer- • Foot brake (p. 425)
tain checks of the car in order to ensure that it • Use washer fluid with antifreeze to avoid ice
• All-wheel drive* (p. 425)
can be driven safely. forming in the washer fluid reservoir.
Check the following in particular before the cold Slippery driving conditions
season: To achieve optimum roadholding Volvo recom-
• The engine coolant must contain 50% glycol. mends using winter tyres on all wheels if there is
This mixture protects the engine against a risk of snow or ice.
frost down to approx. -35°C (-31°F). To avoid
health risks, different types of glycol must not NOTE
be mixed. The use of winter tyres is a legal requirement
• The fuel tank must be kept filled to prevent in certain countries. Studded tyres are not
condensation. permitted in all countries.
• Engine oil viscosity is important. Oils with
lower viscosity (thinner oils) facilitate starting Practise driving on slippery surfaces under con-
in cold weather and also reduce fuel controlled conditions to learn how the car reacts.
sumption while the engine is cold. Read
more about suitable oils in the section Related information
"Adverse driving conditions for engine oil". • Topping up coolant (p. 540)
• Adverse driving conditions for engine oil
IMPORTANT (p. 586)
Low viscosity oil must not be used for hard • Starter battery (p. 550)
driving or in hot weather. • Winter wheels (p. 521)
• The condition of the starter battery and
• Replacing a wiper blade (p. 548)
charge level must be inspected. Cold
weather places great demands on the starter • Parking climate* (p. 200)
Opening/closing the fuel filler flap Refuelling at a petrol station 4. Do not overfill the tank but fill until the pump
and refuelling nozzle cuts out the first time.
The fuel tank is fitted with a coverless fuel filler > The tank is full.
system.
NOTE
Opening/closing the fuel filler flap
The car must be unlocked for the fuel filler flap to Overfilled fuel in the tank can overflow in hot
be opened. weather.
In the driver display, the arrow
next to the tank symbol indi-
cates which side of the car the Filling with a fuel can12
fuel filler flap is located. When filling with a fuel can, use the funnel
located under the floor hatch in the cargo area.
Refuelling is carried out as follows. 1. Open the fuel filler flap.
1. Open the fuel filler flap with a gentle press 1. Switch off the car and open the fuel filler 2. Insert the funnel in the fuel filler opening.
on the rear of the flap. flap. The filler pipe has two opening caps. The
funnel's pipe must be pushed past both caps
2. After refuelling is finished - close the flap 2. Choose fuel that is approved for use in the
before filling can be started.
with a gentle press. car. See information on approved fuels in the
sections on "Petrol" and "Diesel" respec- Label
tively. Never use the fuel-driven heater when the car is
3. Insert the pump nozzle in the fuel filler open- in a filling station area.
ing. The filler pipe has two opening caps. The
pump nozzle must be pushed past both caps
before refuelling is started.
12 Only applies to a car with diesel engine. }}
439
|| Handling of fuel IMPORTANT

Do not use fuel with a lower quality than that rec-
Mixtures of various fuel types or use of fuels
ommended by Volvo, as this will negatively affect
which are not recommended will invalidate
engine power and fuel consumption.
Volvo's guarantees and any supplementary
service agreements; this is applicable to all
WARNING engines.
Always avoid inhaling fuel vapour and getting
fuel splashes in the eyes.
In the event of fuel in the eyes, remove any NOTE
contact lenses and rinse the eyes in plenty of Extreme weather conditions, driving with a
water for at least 15 minutes and seek medi- trailer or driving at high altitudes in combina-
cal attention. tion with fuel grade are factors that could
Decal on the inside of the fuel filler flap.
Never swallow fuel. Fuels such as petrol, bioe- affect the car's performance.
Related information thanol and mixtures of them and diesel are
• Handling of fuel (p. 440) highly toxic and could cause permanent injury
or be fatal if swallowed. Seek medical atten- Related information
• Petrol (p. 441) tion immediately if fuel has been swallowed. • Petrol (p. 441)
• Diesel (p. 441) • Diesel (p. 441)
• Fuel gauge (p. 97) WARNING • Opening/closing the fuel filler flap and refu-
Fuel which spills onto the ground can be igni- elling (p. 439)
ted. • Economical driving (p. 443)
Switch off the fuel-driven heater before star-
ting to refuel.
Never carry an activated mobile phone when
refuelling. The ring signal could cause spark
build-up and ignite petrol fumes, leading to
fire and injury.
440
Petrol IMPORTANT Diesel

Petrol is a type of engine fuel that is intended for Diesel is a type of engine fuel that is intended for
cars with a petrol engine. • Use only unleaded petrol to avoid damag-
cars with a diesel engine.
ing the catalytic converter.
Only use petrol from well-known producers. • Fuel containing metallic additives must Only use diesel fuel from well-known producers.
Never use fuel of dubious quality. The petrol must not be used. Never use fuel of dubious quality. Diesel fuel
fulfil the EN 228 standard. must fulfil the EN 590 or SS 155435 standard.
• Do not use any additives which have not
Diesel engines are sensitive to contaminants in
been recommended by Volvo.
IMPORTANT the fuel, such as excessively high volumes of sul-
phur and metals.
• Fuel that contains up to 10 percent by Related information
volume ethanol is permitted. • Handling of fuel (p. 440) At low temperatures (lower than 0 °C) a paraffin
• EN 228 E10 petrol (max • Opening/closing the fuel filler flap and refu- precipitate may form in the diesel fuel, which may
10 percent by volume ethanol) is elling (p. 439) lead to ignition problems. The fuel qualities that
approved for use. are sold must be adapted for season and climate
zone, but for extreme weather conditions, old fuel
• Ethanol higher than E10 (max.
or moving between climate zones, paraffin precip-
10 percent by volume ethanol) is not per-
mitted, e.g. E85 is not permitted. itate may occur.
The risk of condensation in the fuel tank is
Octane rating reduced if the tank is kept well filled.
• 95 RON can be used for normal driving. When refuelling, check that the area around the
• 98 RON is recommended for optimum per- fuel filler pipe is clean. Avoid spilling fuel onto the
formance and minimum fuel consumption. paintwork. Wash off any spillage with detergent
and water.
When driving in temperatures above +38 °C, fuel
with the highest octane rating is recommended
for optimum performance and fuel economy.
}}
441
|| IMPORTANT Empty tank and diesel engine Points to remember when filling with a
Once the engine has stopped due to fuel starva- fuel can
Diesel fuel must: When filling diesel with a fuel can, use the funnel
tion, the fuel system needs a few moments to
• fulfil the EN 590 and/or SS 155435 carry out a check. located under the floor hatch in the cargo area.
standards Make sure you insert the funnel's pipe firmly into
Before starting the engine after the fuel tank has the filler pipe. The filler pipe has an openable
• have a sulphur content not exceeding been filled with diesel - proceed as follows:
10 mg/kg cover and the funnel's pipe must be slid past the
1. The remote control key must be inside the cover before filling can begin.
• have a maximum of 7 vol % FAME13
car.
(B7). Related information
2. Put the car in the ignition position II - turn • Diesel (p. 441)
the start knob clockwise without pressing the
IMPORTANT brake pedal or clutch pedal for cars with • Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions
manual gearbox, and hold the start knob for (p. 590)
Diesel type fuels that must not be used:
approx. 4 seconds. Then release the knob,
• Special additives which automatically returns to its starting
• Marine diesel fuel position.
• Heating oil 3. Wait approx. one minute.
• FAME14 and vegetable oil. 4. To start the engine: Depress the brake pedal
and turn the start knob clockwise again.
These fuels do not fulfil the requirements in
accordance with Volvo recommendations and
generate increased wear and engine damage NOTE
that is not covered by the Volvo warranty. Before filling with fuel in the event of fuel
shortage:
Related information • Stop the car on as flat/level ground as
• Empty tank and diesel engine (p. 442) possible - if the car is tilting there is a risk
• Diesel particulate filter (p. 443) of air pockets in the fuel supply.
13 Fatty Acid Methyl Ester

14 Diesel fuel with maximum 7 vol % FAME (B7) is permitted.
442
Diesel particulate filter When driving short distances at low Economical driving
Diesel powered cars have a particle filter for speeds in a diesel car Drive economically and eco-consciously by driv-
effective emission control. The capacity of the diesel emission control sys- ing smoothly, thinking ahead, and adjusting your
tem is affected by how the car is driven. It is driving style and speed to the prevailing condi-
Particles in the exhaust gases are collected in important to drive varying distances at different tions.
the diesel particle filter during normal driving. speeds to achieve optimal performance.
When these conditions have been met, regenera-
tion starts to burn off the particles and empty the Driving short distances at low speeds (or in cold
filter. To start regeneration, the engine must have climates) frequently, where the engine does not
reached normal operating temperature. Regener- reach normal operating temperature, can lead to
ation of the particulate filter is automatic and nor- problems that can eventually cause a malfunction
mally takes 10-20 minutes. and trigger a warning message. If the vehicle is
mostly driven in city traffic, it is important to regu-
larly drive at higher speeds to allow the diesel
NOTE emission control system to regenerate.
The following may arise during regeneration:
• The car should be driven on A-roads at
• a smaller reduction of engine power may speeds in excess of 60 km/h (38 mph) for at
be noticed temporarily least 20 minutes between each refuel.
• fuel consumption may increase temporar-
Related information
ily
• Diesel (p. 441)
• a smell of burning may arise.
Use the parking heater* in cold weather - the

engine then reaches normal operating tempera-
ture more quickly.
IMPORTANT
If the filter is completely filled with particles, it
may be difficult to start the engine and the fil-
ter is non-functional. Then there is a risk that
the filter will need to be replaced.
}}
|| • For lower fuel consumption, activate Eco • A roof load and space box increase wind Towing bracket*
drive mode. resistance, leading to higher consumption - The car can be equipped with a towing bracket
• Use the Eco Coast15 freewheel function - remove the load carriers when not in use. that makes it possible to tow e.g. a trailer after
engine braking will cease and the car's • Avoid driving with open windows. the car.
kinetic energy can be used to freewheel for
There may be different towing bracket variants
longer distances. WARNING available for the car; contact a Volvo dealer for
• Drive in the highest gear16 possible, adapted Never switch off the engine while moving, more information.
to the current traffic situation and road - such as downhill, this deactivates important
lower engine speeds result in lower fuel con- systems such as the power steering and For information on towing capacity and towball
sumption. Use the gear shift indicator. brake servo. load, see the section "Towing capacity and tow-
ball load".
• Drive at a steady speed and keep a good dis-
tance to other vehicles and objects to mini- Related information
mise braking. • Drive mode ECO (p. 421) IMPORTANT
• Approved tyre pressures (p. 591) When the engine is switched off, the constant
• High speed results in increased fuel con-
battery voltage to the trailer connector can be
sumption - the wind resistance increases • Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions
switched off automatically so as not to drain
with speed. (p. 590)
the starter battery.
• Drive with the correct air pressure in the • Drive-E - cleaner driving pleasure (p. 25)
tyres and check this regularly - select ECO
tyre pressure for best results. IMPORTANT
• Choice of tyres can affect fuel consumption - The towball needs regular cleaning and lubri-
seek advice on suitable tyres from a dealer. cation with grease in order to prevent wear.
• Remove unnecessary items from the car -
the greater the load the higher the consump-
tion.
• Use engine braking to slow down, when it
can take place without risk to other road
users.
15 See the section "Drive mode ECO".

16 Applies to driving with manual gear changing.
NOTE Extendable/retractable towing

brackets*
When a hitch with a vibration damper is used,
The extendable/retractable towing hitch is
the towball must not be lubricated.
always easily accessible and simple to extend or
This also applies when fitting a bicycle rack retract as needed. In the retracted position, the
that is clamped in around the towball. towing hitch is completely concealed.
WARNING
NOTE
Follow the instructions for retracting and
If the car is equipped with a towing bracket, extending the towing bracket carefully. 1. Open the tailgate. A button for extending/
there is no rear mounting for a towing eye.
retracting the towbar is located on the right-
Extending the towing hitch hand side at the rear of the cargo area. An
Related information indicator lamp in the button must illuminate
• Driving with a trailer (p. 448) with a constant orange glow for the exten-
WARNING
• Towing capacity and towball load (p. 582) sion function to be active.
Avoid standing close to the bumper in the
• Trailer Stability Assist* (p. 450) centre behind the car when extending the
• Towing bracket specifications* (p. 447) towing hitch.
• Extendable/retractable towing brackets*
(p. 445)
}}
|| Retracting the towing hitch
IMPORTANT
Make sure that there is no plug or adapter in
the electrical socket when retracting the tow-
ing bracket.
1. Open the tailgate. Press and release the but-

ton on the right-hand side at the rear of the
2. Press and release the button - extension 3. Move the towbar to its end position, where it cargo area - retraction might not start if the
might not start if the button is pressed for is secured and locked in place - the indicator button is pressed for too long.
too long. lamp illuminates with a constant orange
> The towing bracket automatically lowers in
> The towbar extends out and down in an glow.
an unlocked position - the indicator lamp
unlocked position - the indicator lamp > The towbar is ready for use. in the button flashes orange.
flashes orange.
WARNING
WARNING Take care to secure the trailer's safety cable
Do not press the extend/retract button if a in the intended bracket.
trailer is attached to the towing bracket.
NOTE
NOTE Power save mode activates after a while and
The towbar must finish the extension proce- the indicator lamp goes out. The system is
dure before it can then be moved to locked reactivated by closing and opening the tail-
position. This procedure may take several gate. This applies when retracting or extend-
seconds. If the towbar is not fixed in locked ing the towing bracket.
position, wait a few seconds and try again.
If the car detects a connected trailer electri-
cally, the indicator lamp stops illuminating
with a constant glow.
446
Towing bracket specifications* Dimensions, mounting points (mm)

Dimensions and mounting points for the towing
bracket. A 1041.3
B 90
C 875
D 437,5
E See the image above
2. Lock the towing bracket by moving it back to F 283.5
its retracted position, where it is locked.
> The indicator lamp will now illuminate with G Ball centre
a constant glow if the towing bracket is
correctly retracted. Related information
• Towing bracket* (p. 444)
Related information
• Towing bracket* (p. 444)
• Towing bracket specifications* (p. 447)
Driving with a trailer to a lower gear when shifting manually and IMPORTANT
When driving with a trailer, there are a number of adjust your speed.
When the engine is switched off, the constant
points that are important to think about regar- • Follow the regulations in force for the permit-
battery voltage to the trailer connector can be
ding the towing bracket, the trailer and how the ted speeds and weights.
switched off automatically so as not to drain
load is positioned in the trailer.
• Maintain a low speed when driving with a the starter battery.
Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. The trailer up long, steep ascents.
total of the weight of the passengers and all • The maximum indicated trailer weight only Trailer weights
accessories, e.g. towbar, reduces the car's pay- applies to heights up to 1000 metres above Information about Volvo's permitted trailer
load by a corresponding weight. sea level (3280 ft). At higher elevations, the weights is available in the article "Towing
engine output and the vehicle's climbing abil- capacity and towball load".
The car is supplied with the necessary equipment
ity are reduced due to the reduced air den-
for towing a trailer.
sity, and the maximum trailer load must
• The car's towing bracket must be of an therefore be reduced. The weight of the car
WARNING
approved type. and trailer must be decreased by 10% for Follow the stated recommendations for trailer
each additional 1000 m (3280 ft) (or part weights. Otherwise, the car and trailer may be
• Distribute the load on the trailer so that the
difficult to control in the event of sudden
weight on the towing bracket complies with thereof).
movement and braking.
the specified maximum towball load. Towball • Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of more
load is calculated as part of the car's payload. than 12%.
• Increase the tyre pressure to the recom- NOTE
NOTE
mended pressure for a full load. For more The stated maximum permitted trailer weights
information on tyre pressure, see the section Extreme weather conditions, driving with a are those permitted by Volvo. National vehicle
"Approved tyre pressures". trailer or driving at high altitudes in combina- regulations can further limit trailer weights
tion with fuel quality are factors that consider- and speeds. Towbars can be certified for
• The engine is loaded more heavily than usual
ably increase the car's fuel consumption.
when driving with a trailer. higher towing weights than the car can
actually tow.
• Do not tow a heavy trailer when the car is
brand new. Wait until it has been driven at Trailer connector
least 1000 km (620 miles). An adapter is required if the car's towing bracket Level control*
has a 13 pin connector and the trailer has a 7 pin The car's system for level control endeavours to
• The brakes are loaded much more than usual connector. Use an adapter approved by Volvo.
on long and steep downhill slopes. Downshift maintain a constant height regardless of load (up
Make sure the cable does not drag on the to the maximum permissible weight). When the
ground.
car is stationary the rear of the car lowers slightly, 2. Select gear position D. Trailer lamps
which is normal. When connecting a trailer - check that all the
3. Releasing the parking brake.
trailer lamps work before departure.
When driving in hilly terrain and hot 4. Release the brake pedal and start driving off.
climates Direction indicators and brake lights on
Under certain circumstances, there may be a risk Related information the trailer
of overheating when towing a trailer. In the event • Towing bracket* (p. 444) If one or more of the trailer's direction indicators
of overheating, a warning symbol illuminates in • Trailer lamps (p. 449) or brake light bulbs is broken, the driver display
the driver display together with a message, see shows a symbol and a message. Other lamps on
section "Overheating in the engine and drive sys-
• Towing capacity and towball load (p. 582)
the trailer must be checked manually by the
tem". • Trailer Stability Assist* (p. 450)
driver before departure, see the heading "Check-
The following only applies to cars with automatic • Approved tyre pressures (p. 591) ing trailer lamps".
gearbox. • Low speed control* (p. 433)
• Overheating in the engine and drive system Symbol Message
The automatic gearbox selects the optimum gear
related to load and engine speed. (p. 436)
• Trailer turn indicator Right
Steep inclines turn indicator malfunction
Do not lock the automatic gearbox in a higher • Trailer turn indicator Left
gear than the engine "can cope with" - it is not turn indicator malfunction
always a good idea to drive at a high gear with
low engine speed. • Trailer brake light Malfunc-
tion
Parking on a hill
1. Depress the brake pedal fully.
2. Activate the parking brake.
If any lamp for the trailer's direction indicators is
3. Select gear position P. broken, the driver display symbol for direction
4. Release the brake pedal. indicators will also flash more quickly than nor-
mal.
Block the wheels with chocks when parking a car
with hitched trailer on a hill. Rear fog lamp on trailer
When connecting the trailer, the rear fog lamp
Starting on a hill
may not light up on the car. In such cases, the
1. Depress the brake pedal fully.
}}
rear fog lamp function switches to the trailer.
|| Upon activation of the rear fog lamp, check Switching off automatic checking Trailer Stability Assist*
therefore that the trailer is equipped with a rear The automatic checking function can be switched The function of the trailer stability assist (TSA17)
fog lamp to travel safely. off in the centre display. is to stabilise cars with attached trailers in situa-
Checking trailer lamps* 1. Press Settings in the top view.
Automatic checking 2. Press My Car Lights and Lighting.
After a trailer is connected electrically, it is possi-
3. Deselect Automatic Trailer Lamp Check.
ble to check that the trailer lamps are working via
an automatic lamp activation. The function helps Manual checking
the driver check that the trailer lamps are working If the automatic checking is switched off then it is
before starting off. possible to start the check manually.
The engine must be switched off to perform the 1. Press Settings in the top view.
check. 2. Press My Car Lights and Lighting.
1. When a trailer is connected to the towing
3. Select Manual Trailer Lamp Check.
bracket, the Automatic Trailer Lamp
Check message is shown in the driver dis- > The lamp check starts. Exit the car to
play. check lamp functionality.
2. Confirm the message by pressing the right- Related information

hand steering wheel keypad's O button. • Driving with a trailer (p. 448)
> The lamp check starts. • Towing bracket* (p. 444)
3. Exit the car to check lamp functionality.
> All trailer lamps start to flash - then the
lamps are switched on one at a time.
4. Visually check that all lamps available on the
trailer are operational.
5. After a moment, all lamps on the trailer flash
again.
> The check is complete.
17 Trailer Stability Assist
tions where they begin snaking. The function is If snaking is not eliminated the first time that Related information
included in the stability system ESC18. trailer stability assist comes into action, the car/ • Driving with a trailer (p. 448)
trailer combination is braked with all wheels and
Reasons for snaking engine power is reduced. Once snaking has been
The snaking phenomenon can occur with any gradually suppressed and the car/trailer combi-
car/trailer combination. Snaking normally occurs nation is stable once again, the system stops
at high speeds. But, there is a risk of it occurring regulating and the driver once again has full con-
at lower speeds if the trailer is overloaded or the trol of the car.
load is improperly distributed, e.g. too far back.
In order for snaking to occur, there must be a NOTE
triggering factor, e.g.: The stability function is deactivated if the
• Car with trailer subjected to a sudden and driver selects Sport mode by deactivating
powerful side wind. ESC via the menu system in the centre dis-
play.
• Car with trailer drives on an uneven road sur-
face or in a pothole.
The trailer stability assist may fail to engage if the
• Sweeping steering wheel movements.
driver uses severe steering wheel movements to
If snaking has started, it could be difficult or even try to rectify the snaking because in such a situa-
impossible to suppress. This makes the car/ tion the system cannot determine whether it is
trailer combination difficult to control and there is the trailer or the driver that is causing the snak-
a risk that you could, for example, end up in the ing.
wrong lane or leave the carriageway.
When trailer stability assist is
Trailer Stability Assist function operating, the ESC symbol
The trailer stability assist function continually flashes in the driver display.
monitors car movements, particularly lateral
movements. If snaking is detected, the front
wheels are individually braked. This serves to sta-
bilise the car/trailer combination. This is often
enough to help the driver regain control of the
car.
18 Electronic Stability Control (Electronic stability control)
451
Towing eye
Use the towing eye for towing. The towing eye is
screwed into a threaded socket behind a cover
on the right-hand side of the bumper, front or
rear.
NOTE
If the car is equipped with a towing bracket,
there is no rear mounting for a towing eye.
Fitting the towing eye

1.
Front: Remove the cover. Rear: Remove the cover - press on the mark-
> The cover pivots around its centre line and ing with a finger and, at the same time, fold
can then be removed. out the opposite side/corner using a coin or
similar.
> The cover pivots around its centre line and
can then be removed.
4. Screw the towing eye right in until it stops.
Tighten the towing eye firmly e.g. using the
wheel wrench*.
Take out the towing eye from the foam block IMPORTANT
under the floor hatch in the cargo area.
It is important that the towing eye is firmly
screwed into place - right in until it stops.
After use, unscrew the towing eye and return it to

its place.
Finish by refitting the cover onto the bumper.
The towing eye may be used to pull the car up Towing 5. Move the gear selector to neutral position N
onto a recovery vehicle with a flatbed platform. During towing, the car is towed by another vehi- and release the parking brake.
The car's position and ground clearance deter- cle by means of a towline. If the battery voltage is too low, the parking
mine whether it is possible.
brake cannot be disengaged. Connect a
Find out the statutory maximum speed limit for
If the slope of the recovery vehicle's ramp is too donor battery if the battery voltage is too low.
towing before the towing begins.
steep, or if the ground clearance under the car is > The towing vehicle can now start towing.
inadequate, then the car may be damaged if you Preparations and towing
try to pull it up using the towing eye. 6. Keep the towline taut when the towing vehi-
1. Activate the car's hazard warning flashers. cle reduces speed by holding your foot gen-
If necessary, raise the car by using the recovery 2. Secure the towline in the towing eye. tly pressed on the brake pedal - thereby
vehicle's lifting device. Do not use the towing eye. avoiding unnecessary jerking.
3. Deactivate the steering lock by unlocking the
car. 7. Be prepared to brake to stop.
WARNING
No one/nothing is allowed to remain behind IMPORTANT
NOTE
the recovery vehicle while the car pulled up Note that the car must always be towed with
onto the flatbed platform. In ignition position II the steering lock is
the wheels rolling forward.
deactivated if the car has been unlocked. See
section “Ignition position” for more informa- • Do not tow cars with automatic transmis-
IMPORTANT tion. sion at speeds higher than 80 km/h
The towing eye is only designed for towing on (50 mph) or for distances in excess of 80
roads - not for pulling the car unstuck or out 4. Set the car in ignition position II by turning km.
of a ditch. Call a recovery service for recovery the start knob clockwise and holding the
assistance. start knob in position for approx. 4 seconds. WARNING
Then release the knob, which automatically
Related information returns to its starting position. • Check that the steering lock is unlocked
before towing.
• Towing (p. 453) To reach level II without starting the engine -
• Recovering the car (p. 454) do not depress the brake pedal, or the clutch • Ignition position II must be active - in
pedal for cars with manual gearbox, when ignition position I all airbags are deacti-
selecting the ignition position. vated.
• Always keep the remote control key in the
car when it is being towed.
}}
453
|| WARNING Recovering the car IMPORTANT

For recovery, the car is taken away with the help
The brake servo and power steering do not The towing eye is only designed for towing on
work when the engine is switched off - the of another vehicle.
roads - not for pulling the car unstuck or out
brake pedal needs to be depressed of a ditch. Call a recovery service for recovery
Call a recovery service for recovery assistance.
about 5 times more heavily and the steering is assistance.
considerably heavier than normal. The towing eye can be used to pull the car up
onto a recovery vehicle with a flatbed platform.
Jump starting Applies to cars with level control*: If the car is IMPORTANT
Do not tow the car to jump start the engine. Use equipped with air suspension, this must be disa- Note that the car must always be transported
a donor battery if the starter battery is discharged bled before the car is raised. Deactivating the with the wheels rolling forward.
so much that the engine cannot be started; see function via the centre display.
section "Jump starting with another battery".
1. Press Settings in the top view. Related information
IMPORTANT 2. Press My Car Parking Brake and
• Towing (p. 453)
Suspension. • Towing eye (p. 452)
The catalytic converter may be damaged dur-
ing attempts to tow-start the engine. 3. Select Disable Leveling Control.
The car's position and ground clearance deter-
Related information mine whether it is possible to pull it up onto a
• Warning triangle (p. 523) flatbed platform. If the slope of the recovery vehi-
• Towing eye (p. 452) cle's ramp is too steep, or if the ground clearance
under the car is inadequate, then the car may be
damaged if you try to pull it up. The car should
• Using jump starting with another battery then be lifted using the recovery vehicle's lifting
(p. 406) device.
WARNING
No one/nothing is allowed to remain behind
the recovery vehicle while the car pulled up
onto the flatbed platform.
AUDIO AND MEDIA
AUDIO AND MEDIA
Audio and media Related information Apps

The audio and media system consists of media • Media player (p. 463) Applications (apps) facilitate access to some of
player and radio. You can also connect a phone • Radio (p. 458) the car's services.
via Bluetooth to use handsfree functions or play
music wirelessly in the car. When the car is con-
• Phone (p. 477)
nected to the Internet you can also use apps for • Online car* (p. 484)
media playback. • Apps (p. 456)
Control the functions with your voice, steering • Ignition positions (p. 403)
wheel keypad or the centre display. The number • Symbols in the centre display's status bar
of speakers and amplifiers depends on which (p. 45)
audio system the car is equipped with.
• System updates (p. 531)
• License agreement for audio and media
(p. 491)
System updating Application view. (Generic image, basic apps vary by

market and model.)
The audio and media system is continuously
improved. When the car is online there is the Some basic apps are always available. When the
option to download updates for optimal function- car is online it is possible to download more. The
ality, see the section "System updates" and apps that are available to download vary, but can
support.volvocars.com. include Internet radio and music services.
AUDIO AND MEDIA
Certain apps are only available for use if the car Audio settings
is connected to the Internet. The audio system is preset for optimal sound
– Tap on an app in the app view to launch it. reproduction, but can be adapted according to
needs.
Related information
• Online car* (p. 484) The volume is normally adjusted with the volume
control below the centre display or with the right-
• Downloading, updating and uninstalling apps hand steering wheel keypad.
(p. 489)
• Changing settings for apps (p. 173) Setting for optimal sound reproduction
The audio system is pre-calibrated for optimum
sound reproduction by means of digital signal
processing. This calibration takes into account
Microphones in the car's roof.
loudspeakers, amplifiers, passenger compartment
acoustics, listener position, etc., for each combi-
nation of car model and audio system. There is NOTE
also a dynamic calibration that takes into account Do not cover the car's microphones.
the setting of the volume control and vehicle
speed.
Related information
Audio settings are described in the correspond- • Audio settings for media (p. 469)
ing section in the owner information. To access
the settings, open the top view and tap on
Settings Sound. • Settings for phone (p. 483)

• Audio and media (p. 456)
Active noise reduction* • Online car* (p. 484)
Certain cars are equipped with an active noise
reduction function that suppresses engine noise
in the passenger compartment via the audio sys-
tem. Microphones in the car's roof detect disrup-
tive noise and the audio system outputs anti-
noise in order to dampen the noise.
AUDIO AND MEDIA
Radio • Voice recognition control of radio and media Changing and searching radio
It is possible to listen to the AM and FM bands (p. 116) stations
and to digital radio (DAB)*. When the car is • Media player (p. 463) The radio automatically compiles a station list of
online it is also possible to listen to Internet the radio stations within the area that are trans-
• Settings for radio (p. 462)
radio. mitting the strongest signals.
Starting the radio

1. Open the required frequency band (e.g. FM)
from the app view.
2. Select station.
Changing lists within the frequency

band
The radio can be operated

using voice recognition, the
steering wheel keypad or the
centre display.
Related information 1. Press Library.

• Changing and searching radio stations
(p. 458)
• Digital radio (p. 461)
• RDS radio (p. 460)
• Online car* (p. 484)
AUDIO AND MEDIA
2. Select playback from Stations, Favourites, To choose among favourites within the frequency Searching for radio stations
Genres or Ensembles1. band, see the heading “Changing lists within the
frequency band” above. To choose from among
3. Tap on the desired station from the list.
all favourites, see the heading “Radio Favourites”
Favourites — only plays back selected favourite below.
channels, see heading “Favourites” below.
Radio Favourites
Genres — only plays back channels broadcast- Radio Favourites shows saved
ing the selected genre/programme type, e.g. pop favourites from all frequency
or classical. bands.
Changing stations within the selected

list
– Press on or under the centre dis-
play or the steering wheel's right-hand key- 1. Open the app Radio favourites from the
app view. The parameters you can search on depend on
pad. the frequency band selected:
> The highlight moves up or down one 2. Tap on the desired station in the list to start
place in the selected playlist. listening. • AM — station and frequency.
When you remove a favourite, it will also be

• FM — station, genre and frequency.
You can also change stations from the centre
display. removed from frequency band favourites. • DAB - ensembles and stations.
1. Press Library.
Favourites Changing radio band
– Tap on to add or remove a channel to or – Return to the app view and press the 2. Press .
from frequency band favourites and Radio required frequency band (e.g. FM) or open > Search view with keyboard is opened.
Favourites. the app view with the right steering wheel
keypad and select from there. 3. Enter the search terms.
When a favourite is saved from a station list, the > Searching takes place with each input of
radio will automatically search for the best fre- a character and the search results are
quency. But if a favourite is saved from a manual shown by category.
station search, the radio does not automatically
change to a stronger frequency.
1 Only applies to digital radio (DAB). }}
459
AUDIO AND MEDIA
|| Manual tuning RDS radio Related information

With RDS (Radio Data System) the radio can • Radio (p. 458)
automatically change to the strongest transmit- • Settings for radio (p. 462)
ter. RDS provides the ability to receive e.g. traffic
information and to search for certain programme
types.
RDS links FM transmitters into a network. An FM

transmitter in such a network sends information
that gives an RDS radio the following functions:
• Switch automatically to a stronger transmitter
if reception in the area is poor.
• Search for programme category, e.g. pro-
On changing over to manual tuning, the radio no gramme types or traffic information.
longer changes frequency automatically when • Receive text information on current radio
reception is poor. programme.
– Press Manual tuning, pull the control or
press or . With a long press, the NOTE
search jumps to the next available station in Some radio stations do not use RDS or only
the frequency band. It is also possible to use selected parts of its functionality.
the right keypad on the steering wheel.
Related information When broadcasting news or traffic messages, the

• Radio (p. 458) radio can switch stations, interrupting the audio
source currently in use. For example, if the CD
player is in use, it is paused. The radio returns to
(p. 116)
the previous audio source and volume when the
• Digital radio (p. 461) set programme type is no longer broadcast. To
go back earlier, press on the right-hand
steering wheel keypad or tap Cancel in the cen-
tre display.
460
AUDIO AND MEDIA
Digital radio DAB subchannel Linking between different radio

Digital radio (Digital Audio Broadcasting, DAB) Secondary components are usually named sub- bands FM and DAB
is a digital broadcasting system for radio. The channels. These are temporary and can contain The function enables the digital radio to switch
radio supports DAB, DAB+ and DMB (Digital e.g. translations of the main programme into from a channel with poor or no reception to the
Multimedia Broadcasting). other languages. Subchannels are indicated with same channel in another channel group (ensem-
an arrow symbol in the channel list. ble) with better reception, within DAB and/or
The radio can be operated between DAB and FM.
using voice recognition, the Related information
steering wheel keypad or the • Changing and searching radio stations DAB to DAB and DAB to FM linking
centre display. (p. 458) 1. Press Settings in top view.
• Linking between different radio bands FM 2. Press Media DAB.
and DAB (p. 461)
• Voice recognition control of radio and media 3. Tick/untick DAB To DAB Handover and/or
The digital radio app is
launched from app view in the (p. 116) DAB To FM Handover in order to activate/
centre display. deactivate the respective functions.
• Radio (p. 458)
• Settings for radio (p. 462) Related information
• Resetting settings in the settings menu • Digital radio (p. 461)
(p. 169) • Radio (p. 458)
Digital radio plays back in the same way as FM • Settings for radio (p. 462)
and AM, see section "Changing and searching
for radio stations". Besides the options to select
playback from Stations, Favourites and
Genres, there is also the option to select play-
back from subchannels and Ensembles. An
ensemble is a set of radio channels (a channel
group) broadcasting on the same frequency.
In the cases where the radio channel transmits
its logotype, it is downloaded and shown beside
the station name (download time varies).
461
AUDIO AND MEDIA
Settings for radio bourhood. Playback of previous media source Alarm - interrupts the current media play-
Settings for the different radio bands. is resumed when the message is finished. back and sends alerts about major accidents
The Local Interruptions function is a geo- and disasters. Playback of previous media
The broadcast of traffic messages etc. can be graphically restricted version of the Traffic source is resumed when the message is fin-
temporarily interrupted by tapping on in the Announcements function. The Traffic ished.
right-hand steering wheel keypad or by tapping Announcements function must be acti- Traffic Flash — receives information about
on Cancel in the centre display. vated at the same time. traffic disruptions.
Drag down the top view and select Settings • Alarm - interrupts the current media play- News Flash — receives news.
Media and the desired radio band. Activating/ back and sends alerts about major accidents
Transport Flash — receives information
deactivating functions. and disasters. Playback of previous media
about public transport, e.g. ferry and train
source is resumed when the message is fin-
timetables.
AM/FM ished.
• Show Broadcast Information — shows Warning/Services — receives information
information on programme content, artists,
DAB about incidents of lower significance than
etc. • Sort Services - selection for how channels the Alarm function, e.g. power failures.
will be sorted. Either alphabetically or by
• Freeze Program Name — select to stop service number.
• Show Broadcast Information — select to
the programme service name from scrolling show radio text or selected types of radio
continuously. Instead it freezes after 20 sec- • DAB To DAB Handover - starts the func- text, e.g. artist.
tion for linking within DAB. If reception of a
onds.
radio channel is lost, another channel is
• Show Program Related Images — select
• News - interrupts the current media play- whether or not to show images for pro-
found automatically in another channel group grammes on the screen.
back and broadcasts news. Playback of pre- (ensemble).
vious media source is resumed when the
• DAB To FM Handover - starts the function Related information
news broadcast is finished.
for linking between DAB and FM. If reception • Radio (p. 458)
• Traffic Announcements - interrupts the of a radio channel is lost, an alternative FM • Symbols in the centre display's status bar
current media playback and broadcasts infor- frequency is searched for automatically. (p. 45)
mation about traffic disruptions. Playback of
previous media source is resumed when the • Select Announcements — select the • Digital radio (p. 461)
message is finished. types of messages to be received while DAB
is playing. Selected messages will interrupt
• Local Interruptions — interrupts the cur- the current media playback to play back the
rent media playback and broadcasts informa- message. Playback of previous media source
tion about traffic disruptions in the neigh- is resumed when the message is finished.
462
AUDIO AND MEDIA
Media player Related information Media playback

The media player can play back audio from the • Media playback (p. 463) The media player is controlled from the centre
CD player*, from external audio sources via the • Voice recognition control of radio and media display. Several functions can also be operated
USB port or via Bluetooth. It can also play video (p. 116) using the steering wheel's right-hand keypad or
via the USB port. voice control.
• Apps (p. 456)
When the car is connected to the internet, it is The media player also operates the radio, which
• Radio (p. 458)
also possible to listen to web radio, audio books is described in a separate section.
and music services via apps. • CD player* (p. 467)
• Media via Bluetooth® (p. 467) Starting the media source
The radio is operated in the media player and is
described in a separate section. • Media via USB port (p. 468)
• video (p. 469)
The media player is operated

from the centre display, but
several functions can be oper-
ated using the steering wheel's
right-hand keypad or voice con-
trol.
Application view. (Generic image, basic apps vary by
market and model.)
}}
AUDIO AND MEDIA
|| CD* Bluetooth connected device

1. Insert a CD. 1. Activate Bluetooth in the media source.
2. Open the app CD from the app view. 2. Connect media source.
3. Select what to play back. 3. Start playback from the connected media
> Playback begins. source.
USB memory 4. Open the app Bluetooth from the app view.
1. Insert the USB memory. > Playback begins.
2. Open the app USB from the app view. Internet media
1. Connecting the car.
3. Select what to play back.
> Playback begins. 2. Open the app from the app view.
> Playback begins. Volume - turn the control knob under the centre
Mp3 player and iPod®
video display or press on the steering wheel's
1. Connect media source. right-hand keypad in order to increase or
NOTE decrease the volume.
To start playback from iPod, use the iPod app 2. Open the app USB from the app view.
Play/pause - tap on the image belonging to the
(not USB). 3. Tap on the title of the desired item to play song being played back, the physical button
When an iPod is used as audio source, the back.
under the centre display or on the steering
car's audio and media system has a menu > Playback begins. wheel's right-hand keypad.
structure that is similar to the iPod player's Apple CarPlay
own menu structure. Change track/song - tap on the desired track in
Apple CarPlay is described in a separate section.
the centre display, press on or under
Controlling and changing media the centre display or on the steering wheel's
1. Connect media source.
The media player can be oper- right-hand keypad.
2. Start playback from the connected media ated by voice recognition, from Fast forward/move in time - tap on the time axis
source. the steering wheel keypad or in the centre display and drag sideways, or press
3. Open the app (iPod, USB) from the app the centre display.
and hold or under the centre display or
view. on the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
> Playback begins.
AUDIO AND MEDIA
Changing media - select from previous sources Settings for video • video (p. 469)
in the app, in the app view, press on the desired With the video player in full screen mode, or by • Audio settings for media (p. 469)
app or select with the steering wheel's right-hand opening the top view and pressing Settings
keypad via the app menu .
• TV* (p. 470)
Video, the following can be adjusted: Audio
Language, Off and Subtitle Language. • Apple CarPlay* (p. 471)
Library - tap on the button to
play back from the library. Playing back DivX® • Android Auto* (p. 473)
This DivX Certified® device must be registered in • Technical specifications for media (p. 475)
order to play back purchased DivX Video-on-
Demand (VOD) films.
Shuffle - tap on the button to
2. Tap Video DivX® VOD and retrieve the
shuffle the playback order.
registration code.
3. Go to vod.divx.com for more information and
to complete the registration.
Related information
Similar - tap on the button in • Using the application menu in the driver dis-
order to use Gracenote to play (p. 104)
search for similar music on the
USB device and to create a • Voice recognition control of radio and media
(p. 116)
playlist from it. The playlist can
contain a maximum of 50 • Connecting the car (p. 484)
songs. • Apps (p. 456)
Change device - tap on the • Searching media (p. 466)
button in order to switch • Connecting a device via Bluetooth® (p. 468)
between USB devices when
several are connected. • Connecting a device via USB port (p. 468)
• CD player* (p. 467)
• Radio (p. 458)
• Gracenote® (p. 466)
AUDIO AND MEDIA
Gracenote® Related information Searching media

Gracenote identifies artist, album, song titles • Media playback (p. 463) It is possible to search by artist, composer, song
and associated images, which are shown during • License agreement for audio and media titles, album, video, audio book, playlist and, with
playback. (p. 491) an online connected car, podcasts (digital media
via Internet).
Gracenote MusicID® is a standard for music rec-
ognition.

2. Press Media Gracenote®.
3. Select settings for Gracenote data:
• Gracenote® Online Search - searches in
Gracenote's online database for playing
media.
• Gracenote® Multiple Results - selects
how to display Gracenote data if there are
more than one search results.
1 - the file's original data are used. 1. Press .
2 - Gracenote data are used. > Search view with keyboard is opened.
3 - Gracenote or original data can be 2. Enter the search terms.
selected. 3. Press Search.
• None - no results are shown. > Connected devices are searched and the
search results are listed by category.
Updating Gracenote
The content of the Gracenote database is upda- Swipe sideways across the screen to show each
ted continuously. Download the latest update for category separately.
optimal functionality. For information and down-
load, see support.volvocars.com. Related information
• Media player (p. 463)
• Media playback (p. 463)
466
AUDIO AND MEDIA
• Using the keyboard in the centre display CD player* Media via Bluetooth®
(p. 49) The media player can play back CD discs with The car's media player is equipped with
• Online car* (p. 484) audio files. See technical specifications for sup- Bluetooth® and can wirelessly play audio files
ported formats. from external devices with Bluetooth®, such as
mobile phones and PDAs.
Related information
• Connecting a device via Bluetooth® (p. 468)
(p. 116)
• Technical specifications for media (p. 475)
Disc insert and eject slot.
Disc eject button.
Related information
(p. 116)
AUDIO AND MEDIA
Connecting a device via Bluetooth® Media via USB port Connecting a device via USB port
Connect a Bluetooth® device with the car in An external audio source, e.g. an iPod® or MP3 An external audio source, e.g. an iPod® or MP3
order to stream media and use as Internet con- player, can be connected to the audio system. player, can be connected to the audio system via
nection if it is available. one of the ports in the tunnel console. Allow the
Devices with rechargeable batteries are cable to lie forwards so that it is not trapped
Many phones on the market now have wireless recharged when connected via USB and the igni- when the lid is closed.
Bluetooth® technology, but not all of them are tion is in position I, II or the engine is running.
fully compatible with the car. For compatibility, The content of the external source can be loaded The phone must be connected to the USB port
see support.volvocars.com. more quickly if it only consists of compatible for- with white frame (when there are two USB ports)
mats. Video files can also be played back via the when using Apple CarPlay* and Android Auto*.
The procedure for connecting a media device is
the same as for connecting a phone. USB port.
Some MP3 players have their own file systems
Related information that are not supported by the audio system.
• Connect phone (p. 478)
• Media via Bluetooth® (p. 467) Related information
(p. 116)
USB ports in the tunnel console.
• video (p. 469)
• Apple CarPlay* (p. 471) Related information
• Technical specifications for media (p. 475) • Media playback (p. 463)
• Media via USB port (p. 468)
AUDIO AND MEDIA
video Audio settings for media With the Sound Experience app, there are
Videos on USB-connected devices can be Changing the audio settings for music and other more audio playback options, e.g. playback with
played back using the media player. playback. concert hall feel. The settings replace any
choices made for audio settings.
No picture is shown when the car starts to move, 1. Press Settings in top view.
but only the audio is played back. The picture is Related information
2. Tap on Sound and select settings:
shown again when the car is stationary. • Audio settings (p. 457)
See section "Technical specifications for media"
• Tone — personal settings for bass, treble, • Media player (p. 463)
equaliser, etc.
for supported video formats.
• Balance - balance between right/left
Related information loudspeakers and balance between front/
• Media playback (p. 463) rear loudspeakers.
• Media player (p. 463) • System Volumes – adjusts volume in
• Technical specifications for media (p. 475) the various systems of the car. For exam-
ple, Voice Control, Park Assist and
Phone Ringtone.
Sound experience*
Recreating the acoustics from Gothenburg Concert Hall.
AUDIO AND MEDIA
TV*2 Using the TV*3 TV guide

No images are shown once the car reaches a A programme guide is available with information
certain speed but the sound will be heard the Start the TV about TV programmes for up to 48 hours.
whole time. The picture returns once more when 1. Open the app TV from the app view.
– Tap on Guide to show information about TV
the car is almost or completely stationary. 2. Select a channel. programmes.
The TV is controlled from the centre display. Sev- Change or search for TV channels
eral functions can also be controlled from the NOTE
The TV automatically searches for the channels
right keypad on the steering wheel or with voice with best reception. If the car is moved within the country, e.g.
recognition. from city to city, it is not certain that
Change the list of visible channels Favourites are available since the frequency
1. Press Library may have changed.
2. Select playback from TV-channels or
Favourites. Change the format of the TV picture
3. Select the desired channel. Tapping on Picture format enables you to
choose which format the TV picture should be
Change channel from selected list
shown in.
– Press on or under the centre dis-
play or on the steering wheel keypad. 1. Auto - The TV picture is shown in the image
format being transmitted.
> The highlight moves up or down one
place in the selected playlist 2. Auto fill - The TV picture is maximised with-
out cropping.
You can also change stations from the centre
display. Settings for TV
Related information
• Using the TV* (p. 470) Favourites The option to make certain settings is available,
A TV channel can be saved as a favourite: both in the top view or when TV-viewing takes
place in full screen mode.
– Tap on in order to add/remove a chan-
nel to/from the favourites list.

AUDIO AND MEDIA
With the video player in full screen mode, or by Apple CarPlay* When using map navigation via Apple CarPlay
opening the top view and pressing Settings Apple CarPlay gives you the option to listen to there is no guidance in the driver display or head-
Media TV, the following can be adjusted: music, make phone calls, get directions, send/ up display, but only in the centre display.
receive messages and use Siri, all while you stay The Apple CarPlay apps can be controlled via the
• Subtitle Language focused on your driving. Apple CarPlay works centre display, mobile phone or with the steering
• Audio Language with selected Apple devices. wheel's right-hand keypad (applies to certain
functions). The apps can also be voice-controlled
Related information
using Siri. A long press on the steering wheel
• TV* (p. 470)
button starts voice control using Siri and a
• Voice recognition control of radio and media short press activates the car's own voice control.
(p. 116) If Siri breaks off too early, hold the steering wheel
• Media playback (p. 463) button depressed.
• Navigating in the centre display's views By using Apple CarPlay you acknowledge
(p. 40) the following: Apple CarPlay is a service
• License agreement for audio and media provided by Apple Inc. under its terms and
(p. 491) conditions. Volvo Cars is thus not
responsible for Apple CarPlay or its
features/applications. When using Apple
If the car is not already equipped with CarPlay, certain information from your car
Apple CarPlay then it is possible to install it after- (including its position) is transferred to your
wards. Contact a Volvo dealer to install iPhone. In relation to Volvo Cars, you are
Apple CarPlay. fully responsible for your and any others
person’s use of Apple CarPlay.
Information about which apps are supported and
which phones are compatible is available on Related information
Apple's website: www.apple.com/ios/carplay/. • Media player (p. 463)
Using apps that are not compatible with
Apple CarPlay may sometimes mean that the
• Connecting the car (p. 484)
connection between an iPhone and the car is • Using Apple CarPlay* (p. 472)
broken. Please note that Volvo is not responsible
for the content in Apple CarPlay.
AUDIO AND MEDIA
Using Apple CarPlay* 5. Tap on the desired app. 2. Continue to Communication Apple
To use Apple CarPlay, Siri voice control must be > The app starts. CarPlay.
activated in your phone. The phone must also 3. Untick the box for the Apple device that shall
Starting Apple CarPlay
have an Internet connection via Wi-Fi or the no longer start Apple CarPlay automatically
Apple CarPlay is started according to the follow-
mobile network. when the USB cable is connected.
ing after an iPhone has been connected.
1. Connect an iPhone to the USB port. In the 4. Disconnect and connect the Apple device to
Connect an iPhone and start the USB port.
cases where there are two USB ports, the
Apple CarPlay one with the white frame around the port 5. Open the app iPod from the app view.
must be used.
NOTE iPod to Apple CarPlay
> If the setting for automatic start is
1. Tap on Apple CarPlay in the app view.
Apple CarPlay can only be used if Bluetooth selected - the subview with
is deactivated. A phone or media player con- Apple CarPlay is opened and compatible 2. Read the information in the pop-up message
nected to the car via Bluetooth will therefore apps are shown. and then tap on OK.
not be available when Apple CarPlay is active. 2. If the subview with Apple CarPlay is not 3. Disconnect and connect the Apple device to
An alternative Internet source must be used opened, tap on Apple CarPlay in the app the USB port.
to connect to the Internet for the car's apps. view. > The subview with Apple CarPlay is opened
Use Wi-Fi or the car's built-in modem*.
> The subview with Apple CarPlay is opened and compatible apps are shown.
and compatible apps are shown.
1. Connect an iPhone to the USB port. In the Related information
cases where there are two USB ports, the 3. Tap on the desired app. • Media player (p. 463)
one with the white frame around the port > The app starts.
must be used. Apple CarPlay runs in the background if another • Connecting a device via USB port (p. 468)
2. Read the information in the pop-up message app is started in the same subview. To show
and then tap on OK. Apple CarPlay in the subview again - tap on the • Settings for Apple CarPlay* (p. 473)
Apple CarPlay icon in the app view. • Connecting the car (p. 484)
3. Tap on Apple CarPlay in the app view.
4. Read the terms and conditions and then tap Switch the connection between
on Accept to connect. Apple CarPlay and iPod
> The subview with Apple CarPlay is opened Apple CarPlay to iPod
and compatible apps are shown. 1. Press Settings in top view.
AUDIO AND MEDIA
Settings for Apple CarPlay* Related information Android Auto*

Settings for Apple device connected with Apple • Apple CarPlay* (p. 471) Android Auto gives you the option to listen to
CarPlay. • Resetting settings in the settings menu music, make phone calls, get directions and use
(p. 169) car-adapted apps from an Android device.
Automatic start Android Auto works with selected Android devi-
1. Press Settings in top view. ces.
2. Continue to Communication Apple
CarPlay and select setting:
• Tick the box - Apple CarPlay starts auto-
matically when the USB cable is con-
nected.
• Untick the box - Apple CarPlay does not
start automatically when the USB cable is
connected.
A maximum of 20 Apple devices can be stored in
the list. When the list is full and a new device is
connected the oldest one is deleted.
A factory reset is required in order to delete the Information about which apps are supported and
list; see the section "Resetting settings in the which phones are compatible is available on the
settings menu". website: www.android.com/auto/. For third-party
apps, see Google Play. Please note that Volvo is
System volumes
not responsible for the content in Android Auto.
Android Auto is started from the app view. After
2. Tap on Sound System Volumes and Android Auto has been started once, the applica-
make the settings for the following: tion will be started automatically the next time the
• Voice Control device is connected. Automatic start can be
deactivated under settings.
• Navi Voice Guidance
• Phone Ringtone
}}
AUDIO AND MEDIA
|| NOTE Starting Android Auto Android Auto runs in the background if another
app is started in the same subview. To show
When a phone is connected to Android Auto The first time an Android is connected
Android Auto in the subview again - tap on the
it is possible to stream via Bluetooth to 1. Connect the Android to the USB port. In the
Android Auto icon in the app view.
another media player. Bluetooth is active cases where there are two USB ports, the
while Android Auto is being used. one with the white frame around the port Related information
must be used. • Media player (p. 463)
When using map navigation via Android Auto 2. Read the information in the pop-up message • Media playback (p. 463)
there is no guidance in the driver display or head- and then tap on OK.
up display, but only in the centre display. 3. Tap on Android Auto in the app view. • Settings for Android Auto* (p. 475)
Android Auto can be controlled via the centre 4. Read the terms and conditions and then tap
display using the steering wheel's right-hand key-
on Accept to connect.
pad or voice control. A long press on the steering • Overview of the centre display (p. 33)
> The subview with Android Auto is opened
wheel button starts voice recognition control and compatible apps are shown.
and a short press deactivates.
5. Tap on the desired app.
By using Android Auto, you acknowledge
> The app starts.
the following: Android Auto is a service
provided by Google Inc. under its terms and Previously connected Android
conditions. Volvo Cars is not responsible for 1. Connect the phone to the USB port.
Android Auto or its features or applications. > If the setting for automatic start is
When you use Android Auto, your car selected - the subview with Android Auto
transfers certain information (including its is opened and compatible apps are
location) to your connected Android phone. shown.
You are fully responsible for your and any 2. If the setting for automatic start is not
other person’s use of Android Auto. selected - open the Android Auto app from
the app view.
> The subview with Android Auto is opened
and compatible apps are shown.
3. Tap on the desired app.
> The app starts.
AUDIO AND MEDIA
Settings for Android Auto* Related information Technical specifications for media
Settings for a phone that has been connected • Android Auto* (p. 473) Compatible file formats, audio specifications
the first time with Android Auto. • Resetting settings in the settings menu and USB.
(p. 169)
Automatic start Audio files
1. Press Settings in top view. • Overview of the centre display (p. 33)
For- File extension Codec
2. Press Communication Android Auto mat
and select setting: MP3 .mp3 MPEG1 Layer III,
• Tick the box - Android Auto starts auto- MPEG2 Layer III,
matically when the USB cable is con- MP3 Pro (mp3
nected. compatible),
MP3 HD (mp3
• Untick the box - Android Auto does not
compatible)
start automatically when the USB cable is
connected. AAC .m4a, .m4b, .aac AAC LC (MPEG-4
A maximum of 20 Android devices can be stored part III Audio),
in the list. When the list is full and a new device is HE-AAC (aacPlus
connected the oldest one is deleted. v1/v2)
A factory reset is required in order to delete the WMA .wma WMA8/9,

list; see the section "Resetting settings in the WMA9/10 Pro
settings menu".
WAV .wav LPCM
System volumes FLAC .flac FLAC
2. Tap on Sound System Volumes and Video files
make the settings for the following: Format File extension
• Voice Control MP4 .mp4, m4v
• Navi Voice Guidance MPEG-PS .mpg, .mp2, .mpeg, .m1v
• Phone Ringtone
}}
AUDIO AND MEDIA
|| Format File extension Max file size 4 GB Technical specification for USB
connector
AVI .avi Audio codec MP3, AC3 • Type A socket
AVI (DivX) .avi, divx Subtitles XSUB • Version 2.0
ASF .asf, .wmv Special func- Multiple subtitles, multiple • Voltage supply 5 V
tions audio, resume play • Current supply max. 2.1 A
MKV .mkv
Reference Meets all requirements of Related information
Subtitles the DivX Home Theater pro- • Media player (p. 463)
file. Visit divx.com for more
Format File extension information and software
SubViewer .sub tools to convert your files

into DivX Home Theater
SubRip .srt video.
SSA .ssa
Storage on USB device
DivX® In order for the system to read the USB device
DivX certified devices have been tested for high- correctly, the following specifications must be fol-
quality DivX (.divx, .avi) video playback. When you lowed. No folder structure will be shown in the
see the DivX logo, you have the freedom to play centre display during playback.
DivX films.
Max number
Profile DivX Home Theater
Files 15000
Video codec DivX, MPEG-4
Folders 1000
Resolution 720x576
Folder levels 8
Bit rate 4.8Mbps
Playlists 100
Frame rate 30 fps
Items in a playlist 1000
File extension .divx, .avi
Subfolders No limit
476
AUDIO AND MEDIA
Phone Overview • Settings for text messages (p. 483)

A mobile phone equipped with Bluetooth can be • Bluetooth® settings (p. 483)
connected wirelessly to the car's built-in hands-
free system.
• Using the application menu in the driver dis-
The audio and media system acts as a handsfree, play (p. 104)
with the facility to remotely control a selection of
the mobile phone's functions. The mobile phone
can still be operated with its own keys if it is con-
nected to the car.
When a mobile phone has been paired with the
car and connected, it can be used make calls,
send/receive messages, stream media and used
as an Internet connection. Microphone.
The phone is operated from the
Mobile phone.
centre display, but some opera-
tions are also available via voice Phone operation from centre display.
recognition and the app menu,
which are accessed from the Keypad for operating phone functions that
right-hand steering wheel key- are shown in the driver display and voice rec-
pad. ognition.
Driver display.
Related information
• Connecting/disconnecting the phone
(p. 479)
• Managing phone calls (p. 480)
• Settings for phone (p. 483)
477
AUDIO AND MEDIA
Connect phone 3. Open the subview for phone. Option 2 - search car from phone
1. Open the subview for phone.
Connect a Bluetooth-activated phone to the car • If there is no phone connected to the car,
to make calls, send/receive messages, stream tap on Add phone. • If there is no phone connected to the car,
media and connect the car to the Internet.
• If there is a phone connected to the car, tap on Add phone Make car
It is possible to have two Bluetooth devices con- tap on Change . In the pop-up win- discoverable.
nected at once, in which case one of them can dow, tap on Add phone. • If there is a phone connected to the car,
only be streaming media. The most recently con- > Available Bluetooth devices are listed. The tap on Change . In the pop-up win-
nected phone will automatically be connected to list is updated as new devices are dow, tap on Add phone Make car
make calls, send/receive messages, stream detected. discoverable.
media and provide an Internet connection. To
change the use of the phone, see section 4. Tap on the name of the phone to be con- 2. Activate Bluetooth on the phone.
"Bluetooth settings". nected.
3. To connect the car to the Internet via the
Connection is performed once per device. After 5. Check that the specified number code in the phone’s Bluetooth, activate tethering (porta-
connection, the Bluetooth device no longer car matches that in the phone. In which case, ble/personal hotspot) via Bluetooth on the
needs to be visible/searchable but only needs to choose to accept in both places. phone.
have Bluetooth activated. To connect the car to 6. On the phone, choose to accept or reject any 4. Search on the phone for Bluetooth devices.
the Internet via a phone, tethering must be acti- options for phone contacts and messages.
vated on the phone. A maximum of 20 connected > Available Bluetooth devices are listed.
Bluetooth devices can be stored in the car. 5. Select the name of the car on the phone.
NOTE
There are two options for connecting. Either 6. Check that the specified number code in the
search the phone from the car or search the car
• The message function must be activated
in certain phones. car matches that in the external device. In
from the phone. which case, choose to accept in both places.
• Not all mobile phones are fully compati-
Option 1 - search phone from car ble and may therefore not show contacts 7. On the phone, choose to accept or reject any
1. Make the phone searchable/visible via and messages in the car. options for phone contacts and messages.
Bluetooth.
2. To connect the car to the Internet via the
phone’s Bluetooth, activate tethering (porta-
ble/personal hotspot) via Bluetooth on the
phone.
478
AUDIO AND MEDIA
NOTE Connecting/disconnecting the When the phone is out of range of the car it is
phone automatically disconnected. If disconnection
• The message function must be activated
Connect, change or disconnect a connected occurs during an active call then the call can be
in certain phones. continued on the phone.
phone.
• Not all mobile phones are fully compati-
ble and may therefore not show contacts Connecting the phone automatically Changing phones
and messages in the car. It is only the two last connected phones that can 1. Open the subview for phone.
be connected automatically. 2. Press Change .
NOTE 1. Activate Bluetooth in the phone before set- > Available Bluetooth devices are listed.
ting the car in ignition position I.
If the phone's operating system is updated 3. Tap on the phone to be connected.
then the connection may be broken. In which To connect the car to the Internet at the
case, delete the phone from the car and then same time, tethering (portable/personal hot- Removing a phone
connect again. spot) in the phone must be activated. 1. Open the subview for phone.
2. Set the car in ignition position I or higher. 2. Press Settings Communication
Compatible phones > The phone will connect. Bluetooth Devices.
Many phones on the market now have wireless > A list of connected Bluetooth devices is
Bluetooth technology, but not all of them are fully Connect the phone manually displayed.
compatible with the car. For compatibility, see 1. Activate Bluetooth on the phone.
3. Tap on the phone to be removed.
support.volvocars.com. To connect the car to the Internet at the
same time, tethering (portable/personal hot- 4. Tap on Remove device and confirm your
Related information spot) in the phone must be activated. selection.
• Phone (p. 477)
> The phone is no longer connected with
• Connecting/disconnecting the phone the car.
(p. 479) > Connected phones are listed.
Related information
• Bluetooth® settings (p. 483) 3. Tap on the name of the phone to be con-
nected. • Phone (p. 477)
• Managing phone calls (p. 480)
> The phone will connect.
• Online car* (p. 484) Disconnecting the phone
– Deactivate Bluetooth on the phone. • Bluetooth® settings (p. 483)
}}
AUDIO AND MEDIA
• Ignition positions (p. 403) Managing phone calls Making multi-party calls
• Online car* (p. 484) Call handling in the car for a Bluetooth-con- During a call:
nected phone. 1. Press Add call.
2. Choose to make a call from the call log,
favourites or the contact list.
3. Tap on an entry/row in the call log, or tap on
alongside the contact in the contact list.
4. Tap on Swap call to switch between the
parties.
5. Tap on End call to end the active call.
Conference calls
During an active multi-party call:
1. Tap on Join calls to merge the active multi-
Generic illustration. party call.
Making phone calls 2. Tap on End call to end the call.
Incoming phone calls
2. Select call from: call history, enter number Incoming phone calls are shown in the driver dis-
using the keypad or via the contact list. It is play and the centre display. Manage the call on
possible to search or browse in the contact the right-hand steering wheel keypad or in the
list. Tap on in the contact list in order to centre display.
add a contact under Favourites.
1. Tap on Answer/Reject.
3. Tap on Call or .
2. Tap on End call to end the call.
Incoming phone call during an active call
You can also make calls from the call log via the 1. Tap on Answer/Reject.
app menu, which is accessed from the right-hand
steering wheel keypad .
AUDIO AND MEDIA
Private call Managing text messages Sending text messages in the centre display
– During the current call, press Privacy and Message handling in the car for a Bluetooth- 1. It is not possible to reply to a message or
select setting: connected phone. create a new message.
• Switch to mobile phone - the hands- In some phones, the message function must be • Reply to message — tap on the contact
free function is disconnected and the call activated. Not all mobile phones are compatible. whose message you wish to reply to, then
continues on your mobile phone. In such cases, they cannot display contacts and tap on Answer.
• Driver focused - the microphone in the messages in the car. For compatibility, see • To create a new message – press Create
roof on the passenger side is switched off support.volvocars.com. new and then +. Select a contact or enter
and the call continues with the car's a number.
handsfree function. Managing text messages in the centre
2. Compose the message.
display
Related information Text messages are only shown in the centre dis- 3. Press Send.
• Phone (p. 477) play if the setting is selected; see the section
"Settings for text messages". Managing text messages in the driver
• Voice recognition control of the phone
(p. 116) display
Press Messages in the app
Text messages are only shown in the driver dis-
• Using the application menu in the driver dis- view to manage text messages
play if the setting is selected; see the section
play (p. 104) in the centre display.
"Settings for text messages".
• Using the keyboard in the centre display
Reading a new text message in the driver
(p. 49)
display
– To have the message read aloud – select
Reading a text message in the centre display Read out with the steering wheel keypad.
– Press Read out to get the message read
aloud. Dictating a reply in the driver display
After the text message is read aloud, a brief reply
can be created through dictation.
– Press Answer with the steering wheel key-
pad. A dictation dialogue starts. For this func-
tion to work, the car must be connected to
the Internet.
}}
481
AUDIO AND MEDIA
|| Message notification Managing the phone book Sorting

For notification settings, see section "Settings for Contact handling in the car for a Bluetooth-con- The contact list is sorted in alphabetical order
text messages". nected phone. where special characters and numbers are sorted
under . The sort order can be made by first or
Related information last name, see the section "Settings for phone"
• Phone (p. 477)
for more information.
• Settings for text messages (p. 483)
Related information
• Phone (p. 477)
• Voice recognition control of the phone
(p. 116) • Voice recognition control of the phone
(p. 116)
(p. 49) • Using the application menu in the driver dis-
play (p. 104)
(p. 49)
Browse between the letters and to find • Settings for phone (p. 483)
a matching contact. Depending on existing
contacts in the phone book, only matching
letters are shown.
Search contacts - tap on to search for
a phone number of name in the contact list.
Favourites - tap on to add/remove a
contact to/from the favourites list.
NOTE
Only contacts from an active Bluetooth-con-
nected phone are shown in the centre display.
Up to 3000 contacts can be shown.
482
AUDIO AND MEDIA
Settings for phone Settings for text messages Bluetooth® settings

Settings for connected phone. Settings for text messages on connected phone. Settings for Bluetooth-connected devices.
Message Bluetooth
Phone 1. Press Settings in top view. 1. Press Settings in top view.
2. Press Communication Text Messages 2. Press Communication Bluetooth
2. Press Communication Phone and and select settings: Devices and select settings:
select settings:
• Notification in centre display - shows • Add device - starts the pairing of a new
• Ringtones - select ringtone. It is possible message notifications in the centre dis- device.
to use a ringtone from the phone or the play's status bar.
car. Some phones are not fully compatible • Previously paired devices - lists con-
and their ringtones may therefore not be • Notification in driver display - shows nected devices.
notifications in the driver display. When
available for use in the car. For compatibil-
notifications in the driver display are
• Remove device - removes the connected
ity, see support.volvocars.com. device.
active, it is possible to manage incoming
• Sort order for contacts - select sort messages with the steering wheel's right- • Allowed services for this device - sets
order of contact list. hand keypad. device usage options: calling, sending/
For call notifications in the head-up display*, receiving messages, streaming media and as
• Text message tone - select tone for Internet connection.
see section "Head-up display". incoming text message.
• Internet connection - connects the car to
Related information Related information the Internet via the device's Bluetooth con-
• Settings for text messages (p. 483) • Phone (p. 477) nection.
• Bluetooth® settings (p. 483) • Connect phone (p. 478)
• Phone (p. 477) Related information
• Connect phone (p. 478) • Settings for phone (p. 483)
• Phone (p. 477)
AUDIO AND MEDIA
Online car* Related information Connecting the car

An online car provides the ability to use e.g. • Connecting the car (p. 484) Connect the car to the phone via Bluetooth,
Internet radio and music services via apps as • Apps (p. 456) Wi-Fi or with the car's built-in modem*.
well as contact dealers in the car and download
software.
• Book service and repair (p. 528) The mobile phone and network operator must
• System updates (p. 531) support tethering (sharing the Internet connec-
The car is connected via Bluetooth, Wi-Fi or with tion) and the plan must include data.
• Volvo ID (p. 23)
the car's built-in modem*.
• Symbols in the centre display's status bar
NOTE
When the car is connected to the Internet, its (p. 45)
Internet connection (Wi-Fi hotspot) can be Data is transferred when using the internet
shared to allow other devices to use the Internet • Sharing Internet via Wi-Fi hotspot (p. 486)
(data traffic), which can have a cost.
connection4.
Activation of data roaming can result in fur-
Connection status is indicated by the symbol in ther charges.
Contact your network operator about the cost
for data traffic.
NOTE
When using Apple CarPlay, it is only possible
to connect the car to the Internet using Wi-Fi
or car modem*.
NOTE
When using Android Auto, it is possible to
connect the car to the Internet using Wi-Fi,
Bluetooth or car modem*.
4 This does not apply in the case of connection with Wi-Fi.
AUDIO AND MEDIA
Read Terms and Conditions for Services and Note that certain phones switch off tethering 1.
Customer Privacy Policy at after the contact with the car has been discon-
support.volvocars.com before connecting. nected, e.g. when leaving the car and until the
next time it is used. The tethering in the phone
Connecting with Bluetooth therefore needs to be reactivated the next time it
See Connecting a phone. is used.
Connecting with Wi-Fi When a phone is connected to the car, it is saved
for future use. When the maximum number of
saved phones (50) is reached, the first con-
nected phones are deleted. To show the list of
saved networks or manually delete saved net-
works, go to Settings Communication
Wi-Fi Saved networks.
1. Activate tethering (portable/personal hot- For network connection requirements, see the Fit a personal SIM card into the holder by the
spot) on the mobile phone. section “Technology and security for Wi-Fi”. floor on the passenger side.
2. Press Settings in top view. 2. Press Settings in top view.
Connecting with car modem*5
3. Continue to Communication Wi-Fi. When the car is connected to the Internet via the 3. Press Communication Car Modem
4. Activate/deactivate by ticking/unticking the car modem, Volvo On Call services will use this Internet.
box for Wi-Fi. connection.
4. Activate/deactivate by ticking/unticking the
5. Tap on the network name of the network to box for Car modem Internet.
be connected. 5. If another connection source has been used
6. Enter the network password. in the past - confirm the option to change
connection.
7. If another connection source has been used
in the past - confirm the option to change 6. Enter the SIM card's PIN code.
connection. > The car connects to the network.
> The car connects to the network.
5 Only cars with Volvo On Call. }}
AUDIO AND MEDIA
|| Related information Sharing Internet via Wi-Fi hotspot 2. Press Communication Car Wi-Fi
• Online car* (p. 484) When the car is connected to the Internet, its Hotspot.
• Connect phone (p. 478) Internet connection can be shared to allow other 3. Tap on Network name and name the
devices to use the Internet connection.6
• Symbols in the centre display's status bar shared connection.
(p. 45) 4. Tap on Password and select a password to
• Remove Wi-Fi network (p. 488) be entered on connecting devices.
• Wi-Fi technologies and security (p. 488) 5. Tap on Frequency band and select the fre-
• No or poor connection (p. 487) quency on which the hotspot is to transmit
data. Note that selection of frequency band
• Settings for car modem* (p. 488)
is not available in all markets.
• Bluetooth® settings (p. 483)
6. Activate/deactivate by ticking/unticking the
• Apple CarPlay* (p. 471) box for Car Wi-Fi Hotspot.
7. If Wi-Fi has previously been used as a con-
nection source, confirm the option to change
connection.
> It is now possible for external devices to
connect to the car's tethering (Wi-Fi hot-
spot).
NOTE
Activation of Wi-Fi-hotspot can result in fur-
ther charges from your network operator.
Contact your network operator about the cost
The network operator (SIM card) must support for data traffic.
tethering (sharing of the Internet connection).
1. Press Settings in top view. Connection status is indicated by the symbol in
6 This does not apply in the case of connection with Wi-Fi.
AUDIO AND MEDIA
Press Connected devices to see a list of the No or poor connection Related information
currently connected devices. Factors affecting the network. • Online car* (p. 484)
Related information The amount of data transferred is dependent on • Connecting the car (p. 484)
• Online car* (p. 484) the services or apps in use in the car. For exam-
• Wi-Fi technologies and security (p. 488) ple, streaming audio can require large amounts of
data which requires a good connection and good
• Symbols in the centre display's status bar
signal strength.
(p. 45)
• No or poor connection (p. 487) Mobile phone to car
The speed of the connection may vary depending
on the location of the mobile phone in the car.
Move the mobile phone handset closer to the
centre display in order to increase the signal
strength. Ensure that there is no source of inter-
ference in between.
Mobile phone to network

The speed of the mobile network varies depend-
ing on the coverage in the present location. Poor
network coverage may occur, for example in tun-
nels, in mountainous country, in deep valleys or
indoors. The speed also depends on the agree-
ment you have with your network.
NOTE
In the event of problems with data traffic, con-
tact your network operator.
Restarting the phone

If there are problems with the connection then it
may help to restart the phone.
AUDIO AND MEDIA
Remove Wi-Fi network Wi-Fi technologies and security Settings for car modem*8
Removing a network that is not to be used. Possible network types to connect to. The car is equipped with a modem that can be
used to connect the car to the Internet. It is also
1. Press Settings in top view. It is only possible to connect to the following
possible to share the Internet connection via
types of network:
2. Continue to Communication Wi-Fi Wi-Fi.
Saved networks. • Frequency — 2.4 or 5 GHz7.
3. Tap on Forget alongside the network to be • Standards — 802.11 a/b/g/n.
2. Press Communication Car Modem
removed. • Security type - WPA2-AES-CCMP.
Internet and select settings:
4. Confirm the selection. The car’s Wi-Fi system is designed to handle
> The car will no longer connect to the net- Wi-Fi devices inside the car. • Car modem Internet - select whether to
use the car modem as Internet connection.
work in future. If several devices operate on the frequency at the
same time then it may result in reduced perform- • Data usage - tap on Reset resets the
Remove all networks ance. counters for received and sent data volume.
All networks can be removed simultaneously by • Network
restoring factory settings. Please note that all Related information
Select network operator - automatic or
user data and system settings are reset to origi- • Online car* (p. 484)
manual selection of network operator.
nal factory settings.
Data roaming - if the box is ticked, the car
Related information • Sharing Internet via Wi-Fi hotspot (p. 486) modem will attempt to connect to the Inter-
• Online car* (p. 484) • No or poor connection (p. 487) net when the car is abroad and outside its
• Connecting the car (p. 484) home network. Note that this may result in
heavy costs. Check your roaming agreement
• Resetting settings in the settings menu
for data traffic abroad with your network pro-
(p. 169)
vider in your home country.
• SIM card PIN
7 Selection of frequency is not available on all markets.

8 Only cars with Volvo On Call.
AUDIO AND MEDIA
Change PIN - a maximum of 4 digits can be Downloading, updating and 2. Select New apps in order to open a list of
entered. uninstalling apps apps that are available but not installed in
Disable PIN - select whether the PIN code Once the car is connected, it is possible to the car.
shall be required for access to the SIM card. download new apps, update existing apps or 3. Tap anywhere on the row for an app in order
uninstall apps. to expand in the list and get more informa-
• Send request code — used e.g. to top up
or check the balance on a prepaid card. tion about the app.
Functionality depends on the provider. NOTE
4. Select Install in order to start the download
Data download may affect other services that and installation of the desired app.
Related information transmit data, e.g. Internet radio. If the effect
• Online car* (p. 484) > The status of the download and installa-
on other services is experienced as disruptive tion is shown while it is in progress.
• Sharing Internet via Wi-Fi hotspot (p. 486) then the download can be interrupted. Alter-
natively, it may be appropriate to switch off or A message is shown if a download cannot
interrupt other services. be started for the moment. The app will
remain in the list and it is possible to try to
start a download again.
NOTE
Cancelling a download
When downloading using a mobile phone, – Tap on Abort to cancel a download in pro-
note the data download costs. gress.
Note that only the download can be cancelled —
The apps are managed via installation cannot be cancelled once it has
Download Centre in applica- begun.
tion view.
To be able to download, update Updating apps
or uninstall apps, the car must If an app is being used during an ongoing update,
be online. it will be restarted in order for the installation to
be completed.
Downloading an app Update all
1. Open the app Download Centre. 1. Open the app Download Centre.
2. Select Install all.
> Updating is started.
}}
AUDIO AND MEDIA
|| Update some
1. Open the app Download Centre.
2. Select Application updates in order to
open a list of all available updates.
3. Locate the desired app and select Install.
> Updating is started.
Uninstalling an app
An app that is being used must be closed in
order for the uninstallation to be completed.
1. Open the app Download Centre.
2. Select Application updates in order to
open a list of all installed apps.
3. Locate the desired app and select Uninstall
in order to start the uninstallation of the app.
> When the app has been uninstalled, it dis-
appears from the list.
Related information
• Radio (p. 458)
• System updates (p. 531)
AUDIO AND MEDIA
License agreement for audio and Dirac Unison® DivX®, DivX Certified® and associated logotypes
media are trademarks belonging to DivX, LLC and are
A license is an agreement granting a right to used under licence.
conduct some activity or to make use of another This DivX Certified® device can play back DivX®
person's right under the terms and conditions of Home Theater video files up to 576p (includ-
the agreement. The following texts are Volvo's ing .avi, .divx). Download free software on
agreements with manufacturers/developers. www.divx.com to create, play back and stream
Bowers & Wilkins digital video.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX
Certified® device must be registered in order to
Dirac Unison co-optimises the loudspeakers in play back purchased DivX Video-on-Demand
frequency, time and space for the best possible (VOD) films. Get the registration code by locating
bass integration and clarity. It enables a faithful the DivX VOD section in the device's settings
reproduction of the acoustic characteristics of menu. Go to vod.divx.com for more information on
specific performance venues. Using advanced how to complete the registration.
algorithms, Dirac Unison controls all loudspeak-
ers digitally based on acoustic high-precision Patent numbers
measurements. Like a conductor of an orchestra, Protected by one or more of the following US
Bowers & Wilkins and B&W are trademarks of it guarantees that the loudspeakers perform in patents. 7,295,673; 7,460,668; 7,515,710;
the B&W Group Ltd. Nautilus is a trademark of perfect unison. 8,656,183; 8,731,369; RE45,052.
B&W Group Ltd. Kevlar is a registered trademark
of DuPont. DivX® Gracenote®
}}
491
AUDIO AND MEDIA
|| Parts of the content are copyright © of note servers will be terminated if you violate note has no obligation to provide you with new,
Gracenote or its suppliers. these restrictions. If your license is terminated improved or additional data types or categories
you agree to cease all use of Gracenote data, that Gracenote may provide in the future, and the
Gracenote,Gracenote logo and logotype,
Gracenote software and Gracenote servers. company reserves the right to discontinue its
"Powered by Gracenote" and Gracenote MusicID
Gracenote holds exclusive rights to all Gracenote services at any time.
are either registered trademarks or trademarks of
data, all Gracenote software and all Gracenote
Gracenote, Inc. in the USA and/or other coun- GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES,
servers, including all ownership rights. Gracenote
tries. EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING,
will under no circumstances have any obligation
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRAN-
Gracenote® End User License Agreement to pay you for any information you provide. You
TIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
This program or device contains software from agree that Gracenote, Inc. may enforce the com-
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE AND NON-
Gracenote, Inc. of Emeryville, California, USA pany's rights under this agreement against you
INFRINGEMENT OF INTELLECTUAL PROP-
("Gracenote"). The software from Gracenote directly in its own name.
ERTY RIGHTS. GRACENOTE DOES NOT GUAR-
("Gracenote software") activates this program to The Gracenote service uses a unique identifier to ANTEE THE RESULTS OBTAINED THROUGH
perform disc and/or file identification and obtain track enquiries for statistical purposes. The pur- YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE
music-related information, including name, artist, pose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is OR A GRACENOTE SERVER. GRACENOTE
track and title ("Gracenote data") from online to enable the Gracenote service to count enqui- WILL IN NO EVENT BE LIABLE FOR ANY CON-
servers or embedded databases (together called ries without knowing anything about who you are. SEQUENTIAL DAMAGE OR FOR ANY LOST
"Gracenote servers") and in order to perform Additional information is available on the web PROFITS OR REVENUES.
other actions. You may only use Gracenote data page for Gracenote's privacy policy for the Grace-
in accordance with the intended end-user func- © Gracenote, Inc. 2009
note service.
tions for this program or this device.
The Gracenote software and everything included Sensus software
You agree to only use Gracenote data, Gracenote in Gracenote data are licensed to you "as is". This software uses parts of sources from clib2
software and Gracenote servers for your own Gracenote provides no undertakings or warran- and Prex Embedded Real-time OS - Source
personal non-commercial use. You agree not to ties, express or implied, as to the accuracy of the (Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1991, 1993, 1994),
assign, copy, transfer or transmit this Gracenote Gracenote data contained in the Gracenote serv- and Quercus Robusta (Copyright (c) 1990,
software or any Gracenote data to any third party. ers. Gracenote reserves the right to delete data 1993), The Regents of the University of
YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT from the Gracenote servers or to change data California. All or some portions are derived from
GRACENOTE DATA, GRACENOTE SOFTWARE categories for any reason that Gracenote deems material licensed to the University of California by
OR GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS sufficient. No warranty is provided that the Grace- American Telephone and Telegraph Co. or Unix
EXPRESSLY PERMITTED IN THIS AGREEMENT. note software or Gracenote servers are fault-free System Laboratories, Inc. and are reproduced
You agree that your non-exclusive right to use or that the Gracenote software or Gracenote herein with the permission of UNIX System
Gracenote data, Gracenote software and Grace- servers will operate without interruption. Grace- Laboratories, Inc. Redistribution and use in
492
AUDIO AND MEDIA
source and binary forms, with or without THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
modification, are permitted provided that the POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL
following conditions are met: Redistributions of SILICON GRAPHICS, INC. BE LIABLE FOR ANY
This software is based in part on the work of the
source code must retain the above copyright CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
Independent JPEG Group.
notice, this list of conditions and the following WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
disclaimer. Redistributions in binary form must This software uses parts of sources from TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT
reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of "libtess". The Original Code is: OpenGL Sample OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE
conditions and the following disclaimer in the Implementation, Version 1.2.1, released January OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE
documentation and/or other materials provided 26, 2000, developed by Silicon Graphics, Inc. The SOFTWARE. Except as contained in this notice,
with the distribution. Neither the name of the Original Code is Copyright (c) 1991-2000 Silicon the name of Silicon Graphics, Inc. shall not be
<ORGANIZATION> nor the names of its Graphics, Inc. Copyright in any portions created used in advertising or otherwise to promote the
contributors may be used to endorse or promote by third parties is as indicated elsewhere herein. sale, use or other dealings in this Software
products derived from this software without All Rights Reserved. Copyright (C) [1991-2000] without prior written authorization from Silicon
specific prior written permission. THIS Silicon Graphics, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Graphics, Inc.
SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to
This software is based in parts on the work of the
HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND any person obtaining a copy of this software and
FreeType Team.
ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, associated documentation files (the "Software"),
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE to deal in the Software without restriction, This software uses parts of SSLeay Library:
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY including without limitation the rights to use, Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, ([email protected]). All rights reserved
ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software,
COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE and to permit persons to whom the Software is Linux software
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, furnished to do so, subject to the following This product contains software licensed under
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR conditions: The above copyright notice including GNU General Public License (GPL) or GNU
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, the dates of first publication and either this Lesser General Public License (LGPL), etc.
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF permission notice or a reference to http://
oss.sgi.com/projects/FreeB/ shall be included in You have the right of acquisition, modification,
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF
all copies or substantial portions of the Software. and distribution of the source code of the GPL/
USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", LGPL software.
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, You may download Source Code from the
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT following website at no charge: http://
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF www.embedded-carmultimedia.jp/linux/oss/
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A download/TVM_8351_013
}}
493
AUDIO AND MEDIA
|| The website provides the Source Code "As Is" PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN the above copyright notice(s) and this permission
and without warranty of any kind. NO EVENT SHALL NTT BE LIABLE FOR ANY notice appear with all copies of the Data Files or
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, Software, (b) both the above copyright notice(s)
By downloading Source Code, you expressly
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES and this permission notice appear in associated
assume all risk and liability associated with
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, documentation, and (c) there is clear notice in
downloading and using the Source Code and
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR each modified Data File or in the Software as
complying with the user agreements that
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; well as in the documentation associated with the
accompany each Source Code.
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER Data File(s) or Software that the data or software
Please note that we cannot respond to any CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, has been modified.
inquiries regarding the source code. WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
THE DATA FILES AND SOFTWARE ARE
OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
camellia:1.2.0 PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF
Copyright (c) 2006, 2007 ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING
THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
NTT (Nippon Telegraph and Telephone ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
Corporation). All rights reserved. DAMAGE.
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
Redistribution and use in source and binary Unicode: 5.1.0 NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY
forms, with or without modification, are permitted COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION NOTICE RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
provided that the following conditions are met: COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR HOLDERS
Copyright c 1991-2013 Unicode, Inc. All rights INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR
1. Redistributions of source code must retain reserved. Distributed under the Terms of Use in ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR
the above copyright notice, this list of http://www.unicode.org/copyright.html. CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY
conditions and the following disclaimer as
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM
the first lines of this file unmodified.
any person obtaining a copy of the Unicode data LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER
2. Redistributions in binary form must files and any associated documentation (the IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE
reproduce the above copyright notice, this list "Data Files") or Unicode software and any OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT
of conditions and the following disclaimer in associated documentation (the "Software") to OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
the documentation and/or other materials deal in the Data Files or Software without PERFORMANCE OF THE DATA FILES OR
provided with the distribution. restriction, including without limitation the rights SOFTWARE.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY NTT `ÀS to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, Except as contained in this notice, the name of a
IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED and/or sell copies of the Data Files or Software, copyright holder shall not be used in advertising
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED and to permit persons to whom the Data Files or or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other
TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF Software are furnished to do so, provided that (a)
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
494
AUDIO AND MEDIA
dealings in these Data Files or Software without Declaration of Conformity for

prior written authorization of the copyright holder. Bluetooth® module
}}
495
AUDIO AND MEDIA
|| Country/
Area
Brazil:
Este equipamento opera em caráter secundário isto e, náo tem direito a protecão contra interferéncia prejudicial, mesmo tipo, e não pode
causar interferéncia a sistemas operando em caráter primário.
Para consultas, visite: www.anatel.gov.br
EU:
Exporting country: Japan

Manufacturer: Mitsubishi Electric Corporation
Type of equipment: Audio Navigation Unit
Hereby, Mitsubishi Electric Corporation declares that this Audio Navigation Unit is in compliance with the essential requirements and other
relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EG.
The Uni-
ted Arab
Emirates:
496
AUDIO AND MEDIA
Country/
Area
Kazakh-
stan:
Model name: NR 0V
Manufacturer: Mitsubishi Electric Corporation
Exporting country: Japan
}}
497
AUDIO AND MEDIA
|| Country/
Area
China: 1.
■ 使用频率 2.4 - 2.4835 GHz
■ 等效全向辐射率(EIRP) 天线增益 10dBi 时 ≤100 mW 或≤20 dBm ①
■ 最大率谱密度天线增益 10dBi 时 ≤20 dBm / MHz(EIRP) ①
■ 载频容限 20 ppm
■ 帯外发射率(在 2.4-2.4835GHz 頻段以外) ≤-80 dBm / Hz (EIRP)
■ 杂散发射(辐射) 率(对应载波±2.5 倍信道带宽以外)
• ≤-36 dBm / 100 kHz (30 - 1000 MHz)
• ≤-33 dBm / 100 kHz (2.4 - 2.4835 GHz)
• ≤-40 dBm / 1 MHz (3.4 - 3.53 GHz)
• ≤-40 dBm / 1 MHz (5.725 - 5.85 GHz)
• ≤-30 dBm / 1 MHz (其它 1 - 12.75 GHz)
2.不得擅自更改发射频率大发射率(包括额外装射频率放大器)，不得擅自外接天线或改用其它发射天线
3.使用时不得对各种合法的无线电通信业产生有害干扰一旦发现有干扰现象时，应立即停止使用，并采措施消除干扰后方可继续
使用
4.使用微率无线电设备，必须忍各种无线电业的干扰或工业科学及医疗应用设备的辐射干扰
5.不得在飞机和机场附近使用
498
AUDIO AND MEDIA
Country/
Area
Korea: B 급 기기 (가정용 방송통신기자재)
이 기기는 가정용(B 급) 전자파적합기기로서 주로
가정에서 사용하는 것을 적으로 하며, 든
지역에서 사용할 수 있습니다.
해당 무선설비는 전파혼신 가능성이 있으므로 인명안전과 관련된 서비스는 할 수 없습니다.
Malaysia
This device has been certified under the Communications & Multimedia Act of 1998, Communications and Multimedia (Technical Standards)
Regulations 2000.To retrieve your device’s serial number, please visit (support.volvocars.com) and search for “SIRIM Label Verification”.
Device category: Navigation equipment for vehicle (Bluetooth)
Model: NR-0V
Type Approval No.:
RBAY/18A/1015S(15-4067)
}}
499
AUDIO AND MEDIA
|| Country/
Area
Mexico:
Taiwan: 低功率電波輻射性電機管理辦法
第十二條
經型式認證合格之低功率射頻電機，非經許可，公司商號或使用者均不得擅自
變更頻率加大功率或變更原設計之特性及功能
第十四條
低功率射頻電機之使用不得影響飛航安全及干擾合法通信；經發現有干擾現象時，應
立停用，改善至無干擾時方得繼續使用前項合法通信，指依電信法規定作業之無線
電通信低功率射頻電機須忍受合法通信或工業科學及醫療用電波輻射性電機設備
之干擾
Related information
• Audio and media (p. 456)
• Gracenote® (p. 466)
ment (p. 29)
AUDIO AND MEDIA
Terms and conditions for services Related information

and Customer Privacy Policy • License agreement for audio and media
Read the terms and conditions for services and (p. 491)
the Customer Privacy Policy at • License agreement for the driver display
support.volvocars.com. (p. 98)
Terms & Conditions for Services • Type approval for radar units (p. 328)
Volvo is committed to offering you the absolute
best services to ensure that it is as safe, comfort-
able and pleasant as possible for you to drive
your Volvo. Volvo offers a wide range of services,
from assistance in emergency situations to navi-
gation in various infotainment services.
Read these terms and conditions ("Service Terms
and Conditions") carefully before using the serv-
ices - support.volvocars.com.
Customer Privacy Policy

This policy applies for the processing of customer
data and personal data. The purpose of the policy
is to provide our existing, previous and prospec-
tive customers with a general understanding of:
• The circumstances in which we gather and
process your personal data.
• The types of personal data we gather.
• The reason we gather your personal data.
• How we handle your personal data.
This policy can be read in its entirety at
501
WHEELS AND TYRES
WHEELS AND TYRES
Tyres New tyres are stored for future use. Examples of external
Amongst other things, the function of the tyres is signs which indicate that the tyre is unsuitable for
to carry load, provide grip on the road surface, use are cracks or discoloration.
dampen vibration and protect the wheel from
Wear and maintenance
wear.
Correct tyre pressure results in more even wear.
The tyres greatly affect the car's driving characte- Driving style, tyre pressure, climate and road con-
ristics. The type of tyre, dimensions, tyre pressure dition affect how quickly the tyres age and wear.
and speed rating are important for how the car To avoid differences in tread depth and to pre-
performs. vent wear patterns forming on the tyres, the front
and rear wheels can be switched with each other.
Recommended tyres
A suitable distance for the first change is approx.
On delivery, the car is equipped with Volvo origi-
5000 km and then at 10000 km intervals.
nal tyres that have the VOL1 marking on the side
of the tyres. These tyres are carefully adapted to Tyres are perishable. After a few years they begin Volvo recommends the an authorised Volvo work-
the car. In the event of changing tyres, it is there- to harden at the same time as the friction shop is contacted for checking if you are uncer-
fore important that the new tyres also have this capacity/characteristics gradually deteriorate. For tain about tread depth. If significant differences in
marking in order for the car's driving characteris- this reason, aim to get as fresh tyres as possible wear (> 1 mm difference in tread depth) between
tics, comfort and fuel consumption to be main- when you replace them. This is especially impor- tyres have already occurred, then the least worn
tained. tant with regard to winter tyres. The last four dig- tyres must always be fitted on the rear. Under-
its in the sequence mean the week and year of steer is normally easier to correct than oversteer,
manufacture. This is the tyre's DOT marking and leads to the car continuing forwards in a
(Department of Transportation), and this is stated straight line rather than having the rear end skid-
with four digits, for example 0717. The tyre in the ding to one side, resulting in possible complete
figure was manufactured in week 07 of 2017. loss of control over the car. This is why it is
important for the rear wheels never to lose grip
Tyre age before the front wheels.
All tyres older than 6 years old should be
checked by an expert even if they seem undam- WARNING
aged. Tyres age and decompose, even if they are
hardly ever or never used. The function can A damaged tyre may lead to loss of control
over the car.
therefore be affected. This applies to all tyres that
1 There may be deviations for certain tyre dimensions.
504
WHEELS AND TYRES
Storage Tyres' rotation direction NOTE

Wheels with tyres fitted must be stored lying Tyres with a tread pattern which are designed to
down or hanging up - never standing up. Make sure that both pairs of wheels have the
only turn in one direction have the direction of
same type and dimension, and also the same
rotation marked with an arrow.
Related information make.
• Tyres' rotation direction (p. 505)
Related information
• Tread wear indicators on the tyres (p. 506) • Tyres (p. 504)
• Tyre monitoring* (p. 507)
• Emergency puncture repair kit (p. 512)
• Dimension designation for tyre (p. 525)
The arrow shows the tyre's direction of rotation.

The tyre must always rotate in the same direction
throughout its lifespan. Tyres should only be
switched between front and rear positions, never
between left and right-hand sides, or vice versa. If
the tyres are fitted incorrectly, the car's braking
characteristics and capacity to force rain and
slush out of the way are adversely affected. Tyres
with the greatest tread depth should always be
fitted to the rear of the car (to decrease the risk
of skidding).
WHEELS AND TYRES
Tread wear indicators on the tyres Checking the tyre pressures pressures the tyres should have at different loads
Tread wear indicators show the status of the Tyres with the correct air pressure increase driv- and speed conditions.
tyre's tread depth. ing safety, save fuel and extend the service life of Improved fuel economy with ECO pressure
the tyres. For a light load (max. 3 people) and a speed of
Tyre pressure decreases over time, this is a natu- up to 160 km/h (100 mph), the ECO pressures
ral phenomenon. Tyre pressure also varies can be chosen for optimum fuel economy. How-
depending on ambient temperature. Inadequate ever, the lower comfort pressures are recom-
tyre pressure increases fuel consumption, short- mended instead if optimum noise and travelling
ens tyre lifespan and impairs the car's driving comfort are desired.
characteristics. Driving on tyres with tyre pressure Checking the air pressure
that is too low could result in the tyres overheat- 1. Check the tyre pressures monthly. Carry out
ing and being damaged. Tyre pressure affects the check on cold tyres, which means that
travelling comfort, road noise and driving charac- the tyres should have the same temperature
teristics. as the outside temperature. After several few
Recommended tyre pressure kilometres of driving, the tyres warm up and
A tread wear indicator is a narrow elevation the pressure increases.
across the longitudinal grooves of the tyre's tread 2. If necessary, inflate so that the air pressure
pattern. On the side of the tyre are the letters corresponds with the approved tyre pressure
TWI (Tread Wear Indicator). When the tyre's tread in accordance with the tyre pressure label.
depth is down to 1.6 mm (1/16"), the tread will
be level in height with the tread wear indicators. NOTE
Change to new tyres as soon as possible.
Remember that tyres with little tread depth pro- • After a tyre has been inflated, always refit
vide very poor grip in rain and snow. the dust cap in order to avoid damage to
the valve from gravel, dirt, etc.
Related information • Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust
• Tyres (p. 504) caps can rust and become difficult to
unscrew.
The tyre pressure label on the driver's side door
pillar (between frame and rear door) shows which
506
WHEELS AND TYRES
Related information Tyre monitoring* When the tyre pressure is too low, the indicator
• Tyres (p. 504) The tyre monitoring system, Indirect Tyre symbol for low tyre pressure is illuminated in the
display and a message is shown, see also the
• Checking tyre pressure with the tyre monitor- Pressure Monitoring System (ITPMS), gives a
heading "Message in the driver display" below.
ing system* (p. 509) warning with an indicator symbol in the driver
display when the pressure in one or more of the
• Inflate tyres with the compressor from the
car's tyres is too low.
emergency puncture repair kit (p. 516)
• Approved tyre pressures (p. 591) If the symbol first flashes for approximately one
minute and then changes to a constant glow, it
may indicate that the system cannot detect or
warn of low tyre pressure as intended.
• The symbol illuminates in the

event of low tyre pressure.
• The symbol flashes for approxi-
mately one minute and then
changes over to illuminating
with a constant glow in the
event of a fault in the ITPMS
system.
System description
ITPMS measures differences in rotation speed
between the different wheels via the ABS system
in order to be able to determine whether they
have the correct tyre pressure. If the tyre pres-
sure is too low, the tyre's diameter is changed
and, as a result, so is its rotation speed. By com-
paring the tyres with each other the system can
determine whether one or more tyres have pres-
}}
sure that is too low.
WHEELS AND TYRES
|| General information on the tyre monitoring is not functioning correctly. The TPMS system To bear in mind
system fault indicator is combined with the indicator sym- • Always calibrate the system after a wheel
In the information below, the tyre monitoring sys- bol for low tyre pressure. When the system change or tyre pressure adjustment. See the
tem is referred to generically as TPMS. detects a fault, the symbol in the driver display tyre pressure label on the driver's side door
will flash for about one minute and then remain pillar for Volvo's recommended tyre pres-
Each tyre, including the spare tyre*, should be illuminated. This procedure will be repeated when sures.
checked once a month. When checking, the tyre the car is started until the fault has been rectified.
should be cold and have the air pressure recom- When the symbol is illuminated, the system's abil-
• The system does not replace normal tyre
mended by the car manufacturer specified on the maintenance.
ity to detect or warn of low tyre pressure may be
tyre pressure label or in the tyre pressure table. If affected. • There is no option to deactivate ITPMS.
the car has tyres of a different size than that rec-
ommended by the manufacturer, find out what A TPMS system fault can occur for several rea- Related information
the correct air pressure level is for these. sons, such as after changing to a spare tyre, or • Tyres (p. 504)
changing tyres or wheels that prevent TPMS from
As an extra safety feature, the car is equipped • Checking tyre pressure with the tyre monitor-
functioning correctly. ing system* (p. 509)
with a tyre pressure monitoring system (TPMS),
which shows when the air pressure in one or Always check the indicator symbol for TPMS • Calibrating tyre monitoring* (p. 511)
more tyres is too low. When the indicator symbol after changing one or more tyres in order to
ensure the new tyre or wheel is working correctly • Rectifying low tyre pressure with tyre moni-
for low air pressure is lit, stop and check the tyres toring* (p. 510)
as soon as possible and inflate to the correct air with TPMS.
pressure.
Messages in the driver display
Driving with tyres that have tyre pressure that is The following messages may be shown when the
too low may cause the tyre to overheat, which indicator symbol is illuminated:
can cause a puncture. Low tyre pressure also
reduces fuel efficiency as well as tyre service life, • Tyre pressure low Check tyres, calibrate
and can affect car handling and stopping ability. after fill
Note that TPMS does not replace regular tyre • Tyre pressure system Temporarily
maintenance. It is the driver's responsibility to unavailable
maintain correct tyre pressure, even if the limit for • Tyre pressure system Service required.
low tyre pressure has not been reached so that
the indicator symbol illuminates. If the system cannot determine which tyre has
low pressure, all four tyres will be indicated in the
The car is also equipped with a TPMS system centre display.
fault indicator, which indicates when the system
WHEELS AND TYRES
Checking tyre pressure with the tyre Several minutes driving above 35 km/h (22 mph)
monitoring system* may be required for the system to become active.
With the system for tyre monitoring, Indirect Tyre All tyres grey and a message:
Pressure Monitoring System (ITPMS), tyre pres-
sure status can be viewed in the centre display. • Tyre pressure system Temporarily
unavailable. The indicator symbol flashes
Checking status and changes to constant glow after approx. 1
1. Open the Car status app in the app view. minute. The system is currently unavailable,
activated shortly.
• Tyre pressure system Service required.
The indicator symbol flashes and changes to
constant glow after approx. 1 minute. The
system is not working correctly, contact an
Green tyre:
authorised Volvo workshop (recommended).
• The tyre pressure is above the limit value for
2. Tap on TPMS to show the status of the a warning. Related information
tyres. Yellow tyre: • Tyre monitoring* (p. 507)
• Calibrating tyre monitoring* (p. 511)
• The tyre's pressure is too low. Stop and
check/rectify the tyre pressure as soon as • Rectifying low tyre pressure with tyre moni-
possible. Calibrate ITPMS after the tyre pres- toring* (p. 510)
sure has been adjusted. • Car status (p. 528)
All tyres yellow:
Status indication • The pressure is too low in two or more tyres.

Stop and check/rectify the tyre pressures as
The graphics show the status for each tyre2. soon as possible. Calibrate ITPMS after the
tyre pressures have been adjusted.
All tyres grey:
• Calibration in progress.
• Unknown status.
2 The figure is schematic. Layout may vary depending on car model or updated software.
WHEELS AND TYRES
Rectifying low tyre pressure with 3. Recalibrate the ITPMS system, see the sec- WARNING
tyre monitoring* tion "Calibrating tyre monitoring".
When the tyre monitoring system, Indirect Tyre
• Incorrect tyre pressure may lead to tyre
4. Drive the car at a speed above 35 km/h failure, which could result in the driver
Pressure Monitoring System (ITPMS), gives a (22 mph). losing control of the car.
warning, the tyre pressure in one or more of the
Note that the ITPMS symbol does not extin- • The system cannot indicate sudden tyre
car's tyres is too low.
guish until the low tyre pressure has been damage in advance.
Check and rectify the tyre pressure rectified and new calibration has been per-
when the indicator symbol for ITPMS is formed.
Related information
illuminated and the message Tyre
pressure low is shown. Calibrate
NOTE
ITPMS after the tyre pressure has been adjusted. • Checking tyre pressure with the tyre monitor-
To avoid incorrect tyre pressure, the pressure ing system* (p. 509)
1. Check the tyre pressure in all four tyres with should be checked on cold tyres. "Cold tyres"
a tyre pressure gauge. means the tyres are the same temperature as • Calibrating tyre monitoring* (p. 511)
2. Inflate the tyres to the correct pressure as the ambient temperature (approx. 3 hours • Approved tyre pressures (p. 591)
indicated on the tyre pressure label on the after the car has been driven). After a few kil- • Inflate tyres with the compressor from the
door pillar on the driver's side. ometres of driving, the tyres warm up and the emergency puncture repair kit (p. 516)
pressure increases.
NOTE
• After a tyre has been inflated, always refit
the dust cap in order to avoid damage to
• Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust
caps can rust and become difficult to
unscrew.
WHEELS AND TYRES
Calibrating tyre monitoring* 4. Open the Car status app in the app view. 8. Drive the car.
In order for the Indirect Tyre Pressure Monitoring Calibration is performed when the car is
System (ITPMS) to work correctly, a reference driven at a speed above 35 km/h (22 mph).
value for the tyre pressure must be determined. Calibration is interrupted temporarily if the
This must be performed each time the tyres are engine is switched off, but is resumed auto-
changed or the tyre pressure is changed. matically in the background when the car is
driven again.
For example, when driving with a heavy load or at
high speed above 160 km/h (100 mph), the tyre 5. Press TPMS. > When sufficient data has been collected
pressure should be adjusted in accordance with to enable the system to detect low tyre
Volvo's recommended tyre pressure values. Fol- pressure, the tyres in the centre display
lowing which, the system must be recalibrated. change colour from grey to green. The
system provides no additional confirma-
1. Switch off the car. tion that the calibration is complete.
2. Inflate the tyres to the desired pressure in If calibration fails, a message is shown:
accordance with the tyre pressure label on Calibration unsuccessful. Please try
the door pillar on the driver's side. again..
NOTE
The car must be stationary when calibration is NOTE
started.
Remember that the TPMS system must be
recalibrated at each tyre change or if the tyre
6. Press Calibrate. pressure is adjusted. New reference values
7. Tap on OK to confirm that the tyre pressure must be stored for the system to work cor-
in all four tyres has been checked and rectly.
adjusted.
Related information
• Checking tyre pressure with the tyre monitor-
3. Start the car. ing system* (p. 509)
• Rectifying low tyre pressure with tyre moni-
toring* (p. 510)
WHEELS AND TYRES
Emergency puncture repair kit WARNING

The emergency puncture repair kit, Temporary
Mobility Kit (TMK), is used to seal a puncture as • In the event of skin contact with the seal-
ing fluid, it must be washed off immedi-
well as to check and adjust the air pressure.
ately with soap and plenty of water.
The puncture repair kit consists of a compressor • Sealing fluid that makes contact with an
and a bottle with sealing fluid. The sealing works eye must be rinsed away immediately with
as a temporary repair. The sealing fluid effectively eye wash fluid or with plenty of water. If
seals tyres punctured in the tread. the discomfort persists then the eye
The puncture repair kit has limited capacity to should be examined by a doctor.
seal tyres which have punctures in the wall. Do
not use the puncture repair kit on tyres that have Related information
larger slits, cracks or similar damage.
Sealing fluid bottle • Using the emergency puncture repair kit
(p. 513)
The bottle of sealing fluid must be replaced if the
NOTE bottle's expiry date has passed (see the decal on • Inflate tyres with the compressor from the
The emergency puncture repair kit is only the bottle). Treat the old bottle as environmentally emergency puncture repair kit (p. 516)
intended for sealing tyres with a puncture in hazardous waste. • Tyres (p. 504)
the tread.
The sealing fluid bottle must be replaced after
use. Volvo recommends that the replacement is
NOTE performed by an authorised Volvo workshop.
The compressor for temporary emergency
puncture repair has been tested and WARNING
approved by Volvo. The bottle with sealing fluid contains 1.2-
Ethanol and natural rubber-latex.
Location • Harmful if ingested.
The puncture repair kit is located in the foam • Could result in allergic reaction in the
block under the floor in the cargo area. event of skin contact.
• Avoid contact with the skin and eyes.
• Store out of the reach of children.
512
WHEELS AND TYRES
Using the emergency puncture Sealing fluid bottle 3. Check that the switch is in position 0 (Off),
repair kit and locate the electrical cable and the air
Switch hose.
Seal a puncture with the emergency puncture
repair kit, Temporary Mobility Kit (TMK). 4. Unscrew the orange-coloured cap from the
Connecting
compressor, and unscrew the cork from the
Overview sealing fluid bottle.
NOTE
Do not break the bottle's seal before use. The
seal is broken automatically when the bottle is
screwed in.
1. Set up the warning triangle and activate the

Electrical cable hazard warning lights if a tyre is being sealed
in a trafficked location.
Air hose
If the puncture was caused by a nail or simi-
Pressure reducing valve lar, allow this to remain in the tyre. It helps to
seal the hole.
Protective cap
2. Detach the decal for maximum permitted
Label, maximum permitted speed speed that is affixed on one side of the com-
pressor. Affix it visibly on the windscreen as a
Bottle holder (orange cap) reminder to observe the speed limit. You
Pressure gauge should not drive faster than 80 km/h
(50 mph) after the emergency tyre repair kit
has been used.
}}
513
WHEELS AND TYRES
|| 5. Screw in the bottle to the bottom of the bot- 6. Unscrew the tyre's dust cap. 8. Start the compressor by flicking the switch to
tle holder. position I (On).
Check that the pressure reducing valve on
> The bottle and the bottle holder are the air hose is fully screwed on, and screw in
equipped with a reverse catch to prevent the air hose's valve connection to the bottom WARNING
sealant leakage. When the bottle is of the tyre valve's thread. Never stand next to the tyre when the com-
screwed in it cannot be unscrewed from pressor is running. If cracks or unevenness
the bottle holder again. Bottle removal 7. Connect the electrical cable to the closest
arise then the compressor must be switched
must be performed at a workshop, Volvo 12 V socket and start the car. off immediately. The journey should not be
recommends an authorised Volvo work- continued. Call roadside assistance for recov-
shop. NOTE ery to a tyre centre. Volvo recommends an
authorised tyre centre.
Make sure that none of the other 12 V sock-
WARNING ets is in use when the compressor is operat-
• In the event of skin contact with the sealing. NOTE
ing fluid, it must be washed off immediately When the compressor starts, the pressure
with soap and plenty of water. WARNING can increase up to 6 bar (88 psi) but the
• Sealing fluid that makes contact with an pressure drops after approximately
Do not leave children in the car without 30 seconds.
eye must be rinsed away immediately with supervision when the engine is running.
eye wash fluid or with plenty of water. If the
discomfort persists then the eye should be 9. Inflate the tyre for 7 minutes.
examined by a doctor.
IMPORTANT
WARNING The compressor must not be operated for
Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped with longer than 10 minutes - risk of overheating.
a reverse catch to prevent leakage.
514
WHEELS AND TYRES
10. Switch off the compressor to check the pres- 14. As soon as possible, drive at least 3 km 16. Read the tyre pressure on the pressure
sure on the pressure gauge. Minimum pres- (2 miles) at a maximum speed of 80 km/h gauge.
sure is 1.8 bar (22 psi) and maximum is (50 mph) so that the sealing fluid can seal
3.5 bar (51 psi). Release air using the pres- the tyre, and then perform a follow-up check.
• If it is below 1.3 bar (19 psi) then the tyre
is insufficiently sealed. The journey should
sure reducing valve if the tyre pressure is too
not be continued. Call roadside assistance
high. NOTE for recovery.
WARNING
Sealant will spurt out of the puncture during • If the tyre pressure is higher than 1.3 bar
the first few rotations of the tyre. (19 psi), the tyre must be inflated to the
If the pressure is below 1.8 bar (22 psi) then pressure specified in accordance with the
the hole in the tyre is too big. The journey tyre pressure label on the driver's side
should not be continued. Call roadside assis- WARNING door pillar (1 bar = 100 kPa). Release air
tance for recovery to a tyre centre. Volvo rec-
ommends an authorised tyre centre. Make sure that nobody is standing near the using the pressure reducing valve if the
car and gets the sealing fluid splashed onto tyre pressure is too high.
them when the car is driven away. The dis-
11. Switch off the compressor and detach the tance should be at least 2 metres (7 feet). 17. If the tyre needs to be inflated:
electrical cable. 1. Connect the electrical cable to the closest
12. Unscrew the air hose from the tyre valve and 15. Follow-up inspection 12 V socket and start the car.
refit the dust cap on the tyre. Connect the air hose on the tyre valve and 2. Start the compressor and inflate the tyre
13. Fit the protective cap on the air hose in order screw in the valve connection to the bottom to the pressure specified in accordance
to avoid leakage of the remaining sealing of the tyre valve's thread. The compressor with the tyre pressure label.
fluid. Place the equipment in the cargo area. must be switched off. 3. Switch off the compressor.
}}
515
WHEELS AND TYRES
|| 18. Remove the tyre sealing equipment. Volvo recommends that the car is driven to the Inflate tyres with the compressor
Fit the protective cap on the air hose in order
nearest authorised Volvo workshop for the from the emergency puncture repair
to avoid leakage of the remaining sealing
replacement/repair of the damaged tyre. Advise kit
the workshop that the tyre contains sealing fluid.
fluid. The car's original tyres can be inflated using the
compressor in the emergency puncture repair
WARNING
WARNING kit.
• You should not drive faster than 80 km/h
Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped with (50 mph) after the emergency tyre repair 1. The compressor must be switched off. Make
a reverse catch to prevent leakage. kit has been used. sure that the switch is in position 0 (Off), and
take out the electrical cable and the air hose.
• Maximum mileage with tyres containing
19. Refit the dust cap on the tyre. sealing fluid is 200 km (120 miles). 2. Unscrew the tyre's dust cap and screw in the
air hose's valve connection to the bottom of
• Volvo recommends visiting an authorised
NOTE Volvo workshop as soon as possible for the thread on the tyre's air valve. Check that
the pressure reducing valve on the air hose
• After a tyre has been inflated, always refit inspection of the sealed tyre. The staff
is fully screwed in.
the dust cap in order to avoid damage to there can determine whether or not the
the valve from gravel, dirt, etc. tyre can be repaired or if it needs to be 3. Connect the electrical cable to the closest
replaced. 12 V socket and start the car.
unscrew. Related information WARNING
• Emergency puncture repair kit (p. 512) Inhaling car exhaust fumes could result in
danger to life. Never leave the engine running
NOTE in sealed areas or areas that lack sufficient
The sealing fluid bottle and the hose must be ventilation.
replaced after use. Volvo recommends that
this replacement is performed by an author-
WARNING
ised Volvo workshop.
Do not leave children in the car without
supervision when the engine is running.
WARNING
Check the tyre pressure regularly. 4. Start the compressor by flicking the switch to
position I (On).
516
WHEELS AND TYRES
IMPORTANT 7. Refit the dust cap on the tyre. When changing wheels
The car's wheels can be changed, e.g. to winter
Risk of overheating. The compressor must not
NOTE wheels or a spare wheel.
run for more than 10 minutes.
• After a tyre has been inflated, always refit Follow the relevant instructions for removing and
the dust cap in order to avoid damage to fitting wheels.
5. Inflate the tyre to the pressure specified on
the tyre pressure label on the driver side door
pillar. Release air using the pressure reduc- • Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust When changing to another tyre
ing valve if the tyre pressure is too high. caps can rust and become difficult to dimension
unscrew. Check that the tyre dimension is approved for
use on the car.
Contact an authorised Volvo workshop for updat-
Related information ing the software at each change of tyre dimen-
• Emergency puncture repair kit (p. 512) sion. A software download may be necessary
both when changing to larger and smaller dimen-
• Approved tyre pressures (p. 591)
sions, and also when switching between summer
and winter wheels.
Related information
• Removing a wheel (p. 518)
• Fitting the wheels (p. 519)
• Tool kit (p. 522)
6. Switch off the compressor. Detach the air
hose and the electrical cable. • Winter wheels (p. 521)
• Spare wheel* (p. 520)
• Wheel bolts (p. 520)
WHEELS AND TYRES
Removing a wheel WARNING 4. Place chocks in front of and behind the

Instructions for removing a wheel when chang- wheels which will remain on the ground to
Check that the jack is not damaged, that the prevent them from rolling. Use heavy wooden
ing wheels. threads are thoroughly lubricated and that it is blocks or large stones for example.
free from dirt.
1. Set up the warning triangle and activate the
5. Screw together the towing eye with the
hazard warning lights if a tyre is being
3. Take out the jack*, wheel wrench* and tools wheel wrench* to the stop position.
changed in a trafficked location.
for the wheel bolts' plastic caps that are fitted
2. Apply the parking brake and engage gear
in the foam block.
position P, or engage first gear if the car has
a manual gearbox.
Applies to cars with Leveling Control*: If
the car is equipped with air suspension, this
must be disabled before the car is raised
with a jack*.
Deactivate the function via the top view of
the centre display by pressing Settings
My Car Parking Brake and Suspension IMPORTANT
and selecting Disable Leveling Control. Tool for removing the plastic caps on the wheel bolts.
The towing eye must be screwed all the way
into the wheel bolt wrench*.
NOTE
The normal car jack is only designed for occa- 6. Remove the plastic caps from the wheel
sional, short-term use, such as when chang- bolts with the intended tool.
ing a wheel after a puncture, changing to win-
ter/summer wheels, etc. Only the jack for the 7. Loosen the wheel bolts ½-1 turn anticlock-
specific car model may be used to raise the wise with the wheel wrench*.
car. If the car is to be jacked up more often, or
for a longer time than is required just to
change a wheel, use of a garage jack is rec-
ommended. In this instance, follow the
instructions for use that come with the equip-
ment.
WHEELS AND TYRES
WARNING Crank up the jack* so that it makes contact Fitting the wheels
with the car's jacking point. Check that the Instructions for fitting a wheel when changing
Never position anything between the ground head of the jack is correctly positioned in the
and the jack, nor between the jack and the wheels.
jacking point so that the bump in the centre
car's jacking point.
of the head fits into the jacking point hole WARNING
and the base is positioned vertically below
the jacking point. Also make sure you turn Never crawl under the car when it is raised on
IMPORTANT the jack.
the jack so that the crank is as far away from
The ground must be firm, smooth and level. Passengers must leave the car when it is
the side of the car as possible, at which point
the jack's arms are perpendicular to the raised on the jack. If a wheel must be
8. When raising the car, it is important that the direction of the car. changed in a trafficked environment, passen-
jack* or lifting arms are fitted in the intended gers must stand in a safe place.
points on the car's underbody. The triangle WARNING
markings in the plastic cover indicate the 1. Clean the contact surfaces between wheel
locations of the jacking/lifting points. There Never crawl under the car when it is raised on and hub.
are two jacking points on each side of the the jack.
2. Put on the wheel. Tighten the wheel bolts
car. There is a recess for the jack at each Passengers must leave the car when it is thoroughly.
point. raised on the jack. If a wheel must be
changed in a trafficked environment, passen- Do not use lubricant on the threads of the
gers must stand in a safe place. wheel bolts.
3. Lower the car so that the wheels cannot
9. Lift the car so that the wheel is free. Remove rotate.
the wheel bolts and lift off the wheel.
Related information
• When changing wheels (p. 517)
• Raise the car (p. 533)
• Tool kit (p. 522)
}}
WHEELS AND TYRES
|| 4. Tighten the wheel bolts crosswise. It is impor- Wheel bolts Spare wheel*
tant that the wheel bolts are tightened prop- Wheel bolts are used to attach the wheels to the The spare wheel, the Temporary spare type, can
erly. Tighten to 140 Nm (103 ft.lbs.). Check hubs. be used to temporarily replace a punctured nor-
the tightening torque with a torque wrench. mal wheel.
IMPORTANT
The wheel bolts must be tightened to
140 Nm (103 ft. lbs.). Overtightening or loose
tightening may damage the nuts and the
bolts.
Only use rims that are tested and approved by

Volvo and which are Volvo genuine accessories.
Check the tightening torque of the wheel bolts
with a torque wrench.
Do not use lubricant on the threads of the wheel
5. Refit the plastic caps on the wheel bolts. bolts.
The spare wheel is located under the cargo area
Locking wheel bolts* floor and is attached by two straps. The foam
NOTE In the foam block under the cargo area floor block contains all tools for changing a wheel, see
• After a tyre has been inflated, always refit there is space for the sleeve for the lockable the section "Tool kit".
the dust cap in order to avoid damage to wheel bolts.
The car's handling may be altered by the use of
Related information the spare wheel. The spare wheel must be
• When changing wheels (p. 517) replaced by a normal wheel as soon as possible.
unscrew. The spare wheel is smaller than the regular
wheel, which will affect the car's ground clear-
ance. Pay attention to high kerbs and do not
Related information machine wash the car.
• Spare wheel* (p. 520)
WHEELS AND TYRES
• Follow the manufacturer's recommended tyre • Tool kit (p. 522) Winter wheels
pressure for the spare wheel. • Jack* (p. 523) Winter wheels are adapted for winter road con-
• On all-wheel drive cars the drive on the rear ditions.
axle can be disconnected.
Volvo recommends winter tyres with particular
• If the spare wheel is fitted on the front axle, it dimensions. Tyre dimensions are dependent on
is not possible to use snow chains at the engine variant. When driving on winter tyres, the
same time. correct type of tyres must be fitted to all four
• The spare wheel must not be repaired. wheels.
IMPORTANT
NOTE
• Never drive faster than 80 km/h
Contact a Volvo dealer for advice about which
(50 mph) with a spare wheel on the car.
wheel rim and type of tyre are most suitable.
• The car must never be driven fitted with
more than one "Temporary Spare" wheel.
Tips for changing to winter tyres
When summer and winter wheels are changed,
Taking out the spare wheel mark which side of the car they were mounted
1. Fold up the cargo area floor, from the rear on, for example L for left and R for right.
and forwards.
2. Undo the straps and lift out the spare wheel.
Studded tyres
Studded winter tyres should be run in gently for
Storing the punctured tyre 500-1000 km so the studs settle properly into
1. Take out the wheel bag enclosed in the foam the tyres. This gives the tyre, and especially the
block and put the wheel in the bag. studs, a longer service life.
2. Put the tools back in their right place in the
foam block and lower the cargo area floor. NOTE
3. Place the punctured tyre in the cargo area. The legal provisions for the use of studded
tyres vary from country to country.
Related information
}}
WHEELS AND TYRES
|| Tread depth Tool kit • Towing eye (p. 452)

Road conditions with ice, slush and low tempera- Tools that can be useful during towing, wheel
tures place considerably higher demands on tyres changes or similar are found in the car's cargo
than summer conditions. Volvo therefore recom- area.
mends not to drive on winter tyres that have a
tread depth of less than 4 mm.
Snow chains
Volvo recommends that snow chains are not
used on wheel dimensions greater than
18 inches.
Mounting instructions are supplied with Volvo
original snow chains.
Snow chains may only be used on the front
wheels (also applies to all-wheel drive cars).
Never drive faster than 50 km/h (30 mph) with
snow chains. Avoid driving on bare ground as this
wears out both the snow chains and tyres. The foam block under the cargo area floor con-
tains the car's towing eye, puncture repair kit, tool
WARNING for removing the plastic caps from the wheel
bolts and a socket for the lockable wheel bolts.
Use Volvo genuine snow chains or equivalent
chains designed for the car model, and tyre If the car is equipped with spare wheel* then a
and rim dimensions. Only single-sided snow jack* and wheel wrench* are included, as well as
chains are permitted. a package* with disposable gloves and a bag for
In the event of uncertainty about the show the damaged wheel.
chain, Volvo recommends that an authorised
Volvo workshop should be contacted. The Related information
wrong snow chains may cause serious dam- • When changing wheels (p. 517)
age to the car and lead to an accident.
• Jack* (p. 523)
Related information
• Warning triangle (p. 523)
• When changing wheels (p. 517) • First aid kit (p. 524)
WHEELS AND TYRES
Warning triangle Jack*

Use the warning triangle to warn other road Use the jack to raise the car when changing a
users if the car is stationary in traffic. wheel.
Also activate the hazard warning flashers. Only use the original jack when fitting a spare
wheel or when changing between summer and
Storage spaces winter wheels. The jack's thread must always be
The warning triangle is located in the compart- well greased.
ment on the inside of the tailgate.
Folding up the warning triangle IMPORTANT

Open the hatch by first turning the knob a
quarter turn and then pulling the hatch from The tools and jack* must be stored in the
its brackets in the top and bottom edges. intended location in the car's cargo area
when not in use.
Press the latch that secures the warning tri-
angle slightly to the right and remove the
case. The jack needs to be cranked together to the
correct position in order to have space.
Remove the warning triangle from the case,
unfold it and put the ends together. NOTE
Fold out the warning triangle's support legs. The normal car jack is only designed for occa-
sional, short-term use, such as when chang-
Follow the regulations for the use of a warning ing a wheel after a puncture, changing to win-
triangle. Position the warning triangle in a suita- ter/summer wheels, etc. Only the jack for the
ble place with regard to traffic. specific car model may be used to raise the
Make sure that the warning triangle and case are car. If the car is to be jacked up more often, or
properly secured in their storage space and that for a longer time than is required just to
the hatch is fully closed after use. change a wheel, use of a garage jack is rec-
ommended. In this instance, follow the
Related information instructions for use that come with the equip-
• Tool kit (p. 522) ment.
}}
WHEELS AND TYRES
|| Applies to cars with level control* First aid kit Dimension designation for wheel
If the car is equipped with air suspension then The first aid kit contains first aid equipment. rim
this must be deactivated before the car is raised Wheel and rim dimensions are designated in
with the jack. Store the first aid kit behind the elastic strap on accordance with the examples in the table
the right-hand side of the cargo area. below.
Switch off the function via the centre display:
1. Press on Settings in the top view. The car has an approval for the complete vehicle
with certain combinations of wheel rims and
2. Press My Car Parking Brake and tyres.
Suspension.
All wheel rims have a dimension designation, for
3. Select Disable Leveling Control. example: 7.5Jx18x50.5.
Related information
• Tool kit (p. 522) 7,5 Rim width in inches
• Raise the car (p. 533) J Rim flange profile

18 Rim diameter in inches
50,5 Off-set in mm (distance from wheel
Related information centre to wheel contact surface against
• Tool kit (p. 522) the hub)
Related information
• Tyres (p. 504)
• Dimension designation for tyre (p. 525)
WHEELS AND TYRES
Dimension designation for tyre Speed rating WARNING

Designations for tyre dimension, load index and Each tyre can withstand a certain maximum
speed. Tyre speed rating, SS (Speed Symbol), The lowest permitted load index (LI) and
speed rating. speed rating (SS) for the tyres for each
must at least correspond with the car's top respective engine variant are shown in the
The car has an approval for the complete vehicle speed. The table below shows the maximum per- car's registration document. If a tyre with too
with certain combinations of wheel rims and mitted speed for each speed rating (SS). The low a load index or speed rating is used, it
tyres. only exception to these regulations is winter may overheat and be damaged.
tyres3, where a lower speed rating may be used.
Designation of dimensions
If such a tyre is chosen, the car must not be Related information
All tyres have a dimension designation, such as:
driven faster than the speed rating of the tyre (for • Tyres (p. 504)
235/60 R18 103 V.
example, class Q can be driven at a maximum of
160 km/h (100 mph).) The top speed at which • Dimension designation for wheel rim (p. 524)
235 Tyre width (mm)
the car can be driven depends on road condi- • Approved tyre pressures (p. 591)
60 Ratio between tyre wall height and tyre tions, not the speed rating of the tyres.
width (%)
R Radial ply NOTE
The maximum permitted speed is specified in
18 Rim diameter in inches
the table.
103 Codes for the maximum permitted tyre
load, tyre load index (LI)
Q 160 km/h (100 mph) (used only on win-
V Speed rating for maximum permitted ter tyres)
speed, speed rating (SS). (In this case
240 km/h (149 mph).) T 190 km/h (118 mph)
H 210 km/h (130 mph)
Load index
Each tyre has a certain capacity to carry a load, a V 240 km/h (149 mph)
load index (LI). The car's weight determines the W 270 km/h (168 mph)
load capacity required of the tyres. The lowest
permitted load index is specified in a load index Y 300 km/h (186 mph)
table.
3 Both those with metal studs and those without.
525
Volvo service programme Car status Book service and repair2

To keep the car as safe and reliable as possible, The car's general status can be shown in the Manage service, repair and booking information
follow the Volvo service programme as specified centre display along with the opportunity to book directly from your online car.
in the Service and Warranty Booklet. service1.
The information is handled in the Car status
Volvo recommends engaging an authorised Volvo The Car status app is started app, which is opened from the app view in the
workshop to perform the service and mainte- from app view in the centre dis- centre display.
nance work. Volvo workshops have the personnel, play and has four tabs:
This service provides, for certain markets, a con-
special tools and service literature to guarantee
venient way to book service and workshop visits
the highest quality of service.
directly from your car. Vehicle data is sent to your
dealer, who can prepare the workshop visit. The
IMPORTANT dealer will get back to you with a booking sug-
• Messages - saved status messages
For the Volvo warranty to apply, check and gestion. For certain markets, the system will
follow the instructions in the Service and
• Status - checking the oil level
remind you of a scheduled appointment time as it
Warranty Booklet. • TPMS - checking the tyre pressure approaches and the navigation system3 can also
• Appointments - booking of service and guide you to the workshop when the time comes.
repair work1. You also have information on your dealer availa-
Related information
ble in the car and can contact your workshop at
• Servicing the climate control system
Related information any time.
(p. 542)
• Managing messages saved from the driver
• Book service and repair (p. 528) display and centre display (p. 108) Before the service can be used
• Checking tyre pressure with the tyre monitor- Volvo ID
ing system* (p. 509) • Create a Volvo ID, see section "Volvo ID".
• Checking and filling with engine oil • Register the Volvo ID for your car, see sec-
(p. 539) tion "Volvo ID". If a Volvo ID already exists,
use the same e-mail address that was used
• Book service and repair (p. 528)
when the Volvo ID was created.

3 Applies to Sensus Navigation*.
Changing contact address Filling in and sending an appointment 7. Press the Send appointment request but-
If you would like to change to another e-mail request. ton.
address, you can contact a Volvo dealer. > You will receive an appointment sugges-
Selecting a Volvo dealer tion to your car within a couple of days.4.
Select the Volvo dealer you would like to contact You will also receive the same communi-
for service and repairs by going to cation via e-mail and when you go to
www.volvocars.com and logging in. www.volvocars.com and log in.
Prerequisite for booking from car In certain markets, once you have sent the
For the car to send and receive booking informa- 1. Open the Car status app from the app view appointment request, the message that
tion, it must be connected to the Internet, see in the centre display. the car needs service is extinguished in
section "Online car". 2. the driver display.
Press the Appointments button.
Using the service 8. Press the Cancel request button to cancel
3. Press the Request appointment button.
When it is time for service, and in some cases your request.
4. Make sure that the correct Volvo ID is filled
when the car is in need of repair, a message will The appointment request contains vehicle data
in.
appear in the driver display and at the top of the when it is sent from your car to the workshop via
centre display. The service date is determined by 5. Make sure that the desired Workshop is your Internet connection. This information facili-
how much time has passed, hours that the filled in. tates planning for the workshop.
engine has been running, or distance driven 6. Fill in information for the workshop in the
since the last service.
field Tap to write information to the
Book service or repair workshop, e.g. if there is anything you would
Fill in the appointment request when desired or like done during the workshop visit or any
when a message stating that service or repairs other important information to your work-
are needed is shown in the driver display and at shop.
the top of the centre display.
4 This time frame may vary depending on market. }}
529
|| Accept the appointment suggestion 3. Press the Workshop information button.

The car will retrieve appointment suggestions via > A pop-up window with information on your
your Internet connection when it is available. dealer will open.
When the car has received an appointment sug-
gestion, a message will be shown at the top of 4. Call your dealer if you like, or tap on the
the centre display. address or GPS coordinates to start naviga-
tion to your workshop3.
1. Tap the message. 1. Open the Car status app from the app view
2. If the suggested booking is acceptable, tap
in the centre display. Booking information and vehicle data
When you decide to book a service or send data
on the Accept button. Otherwise press 2. Press the Appointments button.
from your car, the booking information and vehi-
either of the Send new proposal or
3. Press the Send car data button. cle data will be sent via your Internet connection5.
Decline buttons.
> A message that vehicle data are being The vehicle data make it easier for your workshop
When an appointment suggestion is accepted, sent is shown at the top of the centre dis- to plan your next visit.
the reply will be sent to the workshop via your play. You can cancel data transmission by
Internet connection. The vehicle data consists of information in the
tapping the X in the activity indicator. following areas:
Sending vehicle data The vehicle data are sent via your Internet
You can send vehicle data at any time from your • service requirement
connection.
car, e.g. if you book a workshop visit and want to • time since last service
help your workshop with better basic information. See workshop information
• function status
The vehicle data sent is the last saved (last time • fluid levels
the car was running).
• meter reading
• the car's vehicle identification number (VIN6)
• the car's software version
1. Open the Car status app from the app view • the car's diagnostics data.
in the centre display.
2. Press the Appointments button.
3 Applies to Sensus Navigation*.

5 Data is transferred (data traffic) when using the Internet, and this may involve a cost.
6 Vehicle Identification Number.
Related information Remote updates System updates

• Volvo ID (p. 23) Several of the car's systems can be updated System updates are intended for the Internet-
• Online car* (p. 484) from the centre display with an online car. connected and infotainment components of the
car. If system software updates are available, the
• Car status (p. 528) The Download Centre app is updates can be made all at once or one at a
started from app view in the time.
centre display and enables:
System updates are handled
via the Download Centre app
in the centre display's applica-
tion view. A tap on the button
• searching for and updating system software starts a download application in
• updating map data for Sensus Navigation* the home view's bottom sub-
• downloading, updating and uninstalling apps. view. If no search for available
updates has been performed since the last time
Related information the infotainment system was started, a search is
• System updates (p. 531) performed. No search is performed if a software
installation is in progress. An icon in the down-
• Downloading, updating and uninstalling apps
(p. 489) load application's button System updates
shows how many updates are available. A tap on
the button shows a list of updates that can be
installed in the car. For more information and
answers to common questions regarding function
and to download certain system updates, go in to
For system updates to be possible, the car must
be connected to the Internet, see section "Online
car".
Searching for software updates is activated when
the car is supplied from the factory.
}}
|| NOTE Note that only the download can be cancelled,

when the installation phase has started, this can-
Data download may affect other services that not be cancelled.
transmit data, e.g. Internet radio. If the effect
on other services is experienced as disruptive Background search for software
then the download can be interrupted. Alter- updates
natively, it may be appropriate to switch off or The function can be deactivated via the centre
interrupt other services. display:
NOTE 2. Press System Download Centre.
An update can be interrupted when the igni-
3. Deselect Auto Software Update.
tion is switched off and the car is left.
If an update is available, the message New
However, the update does not have to be
completed before the car is left, this is software updates available is shown in the
because the update is resumed the next time centre display's status bar. A tap on the message
the car is used. starts a download application in the home view's
bottom subview. As soon as the download appli-
cation has started, an icon in the download appli-
Update all system software cation's button System updates shows how
– Select Install all at the bottom of the list. many updates are available.
If no list is desired, then Install all can be
Related information
selected at the System updates button instead.
Update individual system software • Downloading, updating and uninstalling apps
programs (p. 489)
– Select Install for the software required. • Remote updates (p. 531)
Cancelling the download
– Tap on X in the activity indicator that has
replaced the button Install at the start of the
download.
Raise the car

When raising the car it is important that the car
jack or the workshop/garage jack is fitted to the
intended points on the car’s underbody.
For cars with level control*, air suspension, if fit-

ted, must be switched off before the car is raised.
Switch off the function via the centre display:
2. Press My Car Suspension .
3. Select Disable Leveling Control.
NOTE
Volvo recommends only using the jack that
belongs to the car model in question. If a jack
is selected other than the one recommended
by Volvo, follow the instructions supplied with
the equipment.
The normal car jack is only designed for occa-
sional, short-term use, such as when chang-
ing a wheel after a puncture. If the car is to be
jacked up more often, or for a longer time
than is required just to change a wheel, use
of a garage jack is recommended. In this
instance, follow the instructions for use that
come with the equipment.
}}
||
The triangles in the plastic cover indicate the locations of the lifting points (marked in red).
If the car is raised with a workshop jack, it must
be positioned under one of the four lifting points.
Ensure that the workshop jack is positioned so
that the car cannot slide off the jack. Make sure
the jack plate is equipped with a rubber pad so
that the car will be stable and not be damaged.
Always use axle stands or similar.
Related information
• Jack* (p. 523)
Opening and closing the bonnet NOTE

The bonnet can be opened using the handle in
If the warning symbol is lit or the warning sig-
the passenger compartment and a handle under
nal is heard despite the bonnet being closed
the bonnet.
properly, contact an authorised Volvo work-
Open the bonnet shop.
Close the bonnet

1. Push the bonnet down until it starts to fall
from its own weight.
2. When the bonnet stops against the lock
catch, push the bonnet to close it completely.
Sweep from left to right in the opening under
the bonnet, move the handle up and to the WARNING
side to release the bonnet from the bonnet
Risk of crushing! Ensure that the closing path
lock's catch and lift the bonnet. under the bonnet is not obstructed, otherwise
Warning - bonnet not closed there is a risk of personal injury.
When the bonnet is released, the warn-
Pull the handle near the foot pedals to ing symbol and the graphics in the
release the bonnet from its fully closed posi- driver display will light up and an
WARNING
tion. acoustic reminder will sound. If the car Check that the bonnet locks properly when
starts rolling, an acoustic warning signal will closed. The bonnet must engage at both
repeat. sides audibly.
For more information on graphics, see section

"Door and seatbelt reminder".
}}
535
|| Related information Engine compartment overview

• Engine compartment overview (p. 536) The overview shows some service-related com-
• Door and seatbelt reminder (p. 61) ponents.
Bonnet completely closed.
WARNING
Never drive with an open bonnet!
If there are any signs that the bonnet is not
properly closed whilst driving, stop immedi-
ately and close it.
536
WARNING Engine oil

An approved engine oil must be used in order
Remember that the radiator fan (located at
the front of the engine compartment, behind that the recommended service intervals can be
the radiator) may start or continue to operate applied.
automatically for up to approx. 6 minutes after
the engine has been switched off.
Always have the engine cleaned by a work-
shop - an authorised Volvo workshop is rec-
ommended. There is a risk of fire if the engine
is hot.
The appearance of the engine compartment may differ WARNING

depending on model and engine variant. The ignition system works at a very high and
Coolant expansion tank hazardous voltage. The car's electrical system
must always be in ignition position 0 when
Reservoir for brake fluid (located on the driv- work is being performed in the engine com-
er's side) partment.
Volvo recommends:
Washer fluid filler pipe7 Do not touch the spark plugs or ignition coil
when the car's electrical system is in ignition
Central electrical unit position II or when the engine is hot.
Air filter
Related information
Engine oil filler pipe • Opening and closing the bonnet (p. 535)
• Topping up coolant (p. 540)
• Checking and filling with engine oil
(p. 539)
7 Fill the washer fluid at regular intervals, e.g. when refuelling. }}
537
|| IMPORTANT texts. Certain variants have both systems. Contact

a Volvo dealer for more information.
In order to fulfil the requirements for the
engine's service intervals all engines are filled Change the engine oil and oil filter in accordance
with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil with the intervals specified in the Service and
at the factory. The choice of oil has been Warranty Booklet.
made very carefully with regard to service life, Using oil of a higher than specified grade is per-
starting characteristics, fuel consumption and mitted. If the car is driven in adverse conditions,
environmental impact. Volvo recommends using an oil of a higher grade
An approved engine oil must be used in order than the one specified.
that the recommended service intervals can
Related information
be applied. Only use a prescribed grade of oil
for both filling and oil change, otherwise there
• Checking and filling with engine oil
(p. 539)
is a risk of the service life, starting characte-
ristics, fuel consumption and environmental • Adverse driving conditions for engine oil
impact of the car being affected. (p. 586)
If engine oil of the prescribed grade and vis- • Engine oil — specifications (p. 585)
cosity is not used, engine related components
may become damaged. Volvo Car Corporation
disclaims any liability for any such damage.
Volvo recommends that oil changes are car-
ried out at an authorised Volvo workshop.
Volvo uses different systems for warning of low/

high oil level or low oil pressure. Certain engine
variants have an oil pressure sensor, and then the
driver display's warning symbol for low oil pres-
sure is used. Other variants have an oil
level sensor, when the driver is informed via the
driver display's warning symbol and display
538
Checking and filling with engine oil IMPORTANT

The oil level is detected with the electronic oil
If this symbol is shown together
level sensor.
with a message about low oil level,
such as Engine oil level low
Refill 1 litre for example, then only
fill the volume specified, e.g. 1 litre (1 quart).
WARNING
Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust manifold
due to the risk of fire.
Graphics for oil level in the centre display.
Check the oil level The oil level is checked using the electronic oil
level gauge in the centre display when the engine
is switched off.
Filler pipe8.
The oil level should be checked regularly.
In some cases, oil may need to be topped up
between service intervals.
NOTE
No action with regard to engine oil level needs to
be taken until a message is shown in the driver 1. Open the Car status app from the app view The system cannot directly detect changes
display. in the centre display. when the oil is filled or drained. The car must
have been driven approx. 30 km (approx.
2. Press Status to show the oil level.
20 miles) and have been stationary for
WARNING 5 minutes with the engine switched off and
If this symbol is shown together on level ground before the oil level indication
with the message Engine oil level is correct.
Service required, visit a workshop
- an authorised Volvo workshop is
recommended. The oil level may be too high.
8 Engines with electronic oil level sensor do not have a dipstick. }}
539
|| NOTE Topping up coolant

The coolant cools the internal combustion
If the right conditions for measuring the oil
engine to the correct operating temperature. The
level (time after engine shutdown, the car's
heat that is transferred from the engine to the
inclination, outside temperature, etc.) are not
coolant can be used to heat the passenger com-
met, then the message No value available
partment.
will be shown in the centre display. This does
not mean that there is something wrong in When topping up the coolant, follow the instruc-
the car's systems. tions on the packaging. Never top up with water
only. The risk of freezing increases with both too
Related information little and too much coolant concentrate.
• Engine oil (p. 537) If there is coolant under the car, if there is cool-
ant smoke, or if more than 2 litres have been Coolant expansion tank, left-hand drive car.
• Engine oil — specifications (p. 585)
filled, always call for recovery to avoid the risk of
engine damage due to a defective cooling sys-
(p. 586)
tem when attempting to start the car.
• Car status (p. 528) WARNING
Coolant can be very hot. If the coolant
requires topping up when the engine is at
operating temperature, unscrew the expan-
sion tank cap slowly to gently release the
overpressure.
540
Screw off the cap in the plastic cover. IMPORTANT

Screw off the cap on the expansion tank and • A high content of chlorine, chlorides and
top up with coolant. The coolant level must other salts may cause corrosion in the
not exceed the yellow MAX mark inside the cooling system.
expansion tank. • Always use coolant with anti-corrosion
Reinstall the parts in reverse order. agent as recommended by Volvo.
• Ensure that the coolant mixture is 50%
water and 50% coolant.
Grip the hatch's handle and lift/jiggle the • Mix the coolant with approved quality
hatch from the plastic cover. water. In the event of any doubt about
water quality, used ready-mixed coolant in
Screw off the cap on the expansion tank and
accordance with Volvo recommendations.
top up with coolant. The coolant level must
not exceed the yellow MAX mark inside the • When changing coolant/replacing cool-
expansion tank. ing system components, flush the cooling
system clean with approved quality water
Reinstall the parts in reverse order. or flush with ready-mixed coolant.
• The engine must only be run with a well-
filled cooling system. Otherwise, tempera-
Coolant expansion tank, right-hand drive car. tures that are too high may occur result-
ing in the risk of damage (cracks) in the
cylinder head.
Related information
• Coolant — specifications (p. 587)
541
Servicing the climate control system Related information Bulb replacement

The air conditioning system must only be serv- • Volvo service programme (p. 528) The bulb in the halogen headlamp can be
iced and repaired by an authorised workshop. replaced by the driver.
Troubleshooting and repair Halogen headlamps are not available for all
The air conditioning system contains fluorescent models and markets. Contact a Volvo dealer for
tracing agents. Ultraviolet light must be used dur- more information.
ing leak detection. An LED9 type lamp must be replaced by a work-
Volvo recommends that you contact an author- shop. An authorised Volvo workshop is recom-
ised Volvo workshop. mended.
Cars with R134a refrigerant NOTE

For information about bulbs not covered in
WARNING this article, contact a Volvo dealer or a certi-
The air conditioning system contains pressur- fied Volvo service technician.
ised refrigerant R134a. This system must only
be serviced and repaired by an authorised
workshop. The dipped beam bulb becomes accessible when
the headlamp's round rubber cover is removed.
Cars with R1234yf refrigerant Contact a workshop10 if faults occur in other
lamps. This also applies to the bulbs for reversing
WARNING
The air conditioning system contains pressur-
ised refrigerant R1234yf. In accordance with
SAE J2845 (Technician Training for Safe
Service and Containment of Refrigerants
Used in Mobile A/C System), service and
repair of the refrigerant system must only be
performed by trained and certified technicians
in order to ensure the safety of the system.

542
lights. If a fault occurs in LED11 lamps, the entire Lamps, front (car with halogen Lamps, rear
lamp unit usually must be replaced. headlamps)
WARNING
The car's electrical system must be in ignition
position 0 when replacing bulbs.
IMPORTANT
Never touch the glass part of the bulbs with
your fingers. Grease from your fingers is
vaporised by the heat, coating the reflector
and then causing damage.
Position lamps (LED11)
Indicator
NOTE Direction indicator (LED)
If an error message remains after the broken Daytime running lights/position lamps
Position lamps (LED)
bulb has been replaced then we recommend Main beam
visiting an authorised Volvo workshop. Fog lamp (LED)
Dipped beam
Reversing lamps (LED)
NOTE Front fog lamps/cornering lights* (LED11)
Brake light (LED)
Outside lighting such as headlamps and rear
lamps may temporarily have condensation on Brake light - central, high-level (LED)
the inside of the lens. This is normal, all exte-
rior lighting is designed to withstand this. Related information
Condensation is normally vented out of the • Replacing the dipped beam bulb (p. 544)
lamp housing when the lamp has been
switched on for a time. • Replacing the main beam lamp (p. 545)
11 LED (Light Emitting Diode) }}
• Replacing daytime running light bulb/posi- Replacing the dipped beam bulb 5. Press in the connector.
tion lamp bulb, front (p. 545) The dipped beam bulb in halogen headlamps 6. Refit the headlamp's round rubber cover.
• Replacing the front direction indicator bulb can be replaced by the driver.
(p. 546) Related information
• Bulb specifications (p. 546) IMPORTANT • Bulb replacement (p. 542)
• Ignition positions (p. 403) Never touch the glass part of the bulbs with • Bulb specifications (p. 546)
your fingers. Grease from your fingers is
vaporised by the heat, coating the reflector
and then causing damage.
Left-hand headlamp.
1. Detach the headlamp's round rubber cover.
2. Unplug the connector from the bulb.
3. Detach the bulb by pushing it gently upwards
and pulling it straight out.
4. Fit a new bulb in the socket. The bulb's guide
pin must be aimed straight upwards.
544
Replacing the main beam lamp 5. Fit the bulb in the socket and turn downward. Replacing daytime running light
The main beam lamp in halogen headlamps can bulb/position lamp bulb, front
Related information
be replaced by the driver. The bulb for the daytime running light/position
• Bulb replacement (p. 542)
lamp in halogen headlamps can be replaced by
IMPORTANT • Bulb specifications (p. 546) the driver.
Never touch the glass part of the bulbs with
your fingers. Grease from your fingers is NOTE
vaporised by the heat, coating the reflector The bulb for the daytime running light/posi-
and then causing damage. tion lamp is easier to access if the main beam
bulb is detached. The main beam bulb is fitted
diagonally above the daytime running light
bulb/position lamp bulb. Detach the main
beam bulb by rotating its bulb holder upwards
and then pulling straight out.
Left-hand headlamp.
1. Detach the bulb by turning the bulb holder
upward and then pulling straight out.
2. Carefully prize the plastic cover at the con-
nector's lock lug so that the lock lug relea- Left-hand headlamp.
ses.
1. Pull the bulb holder for the daytime running
3. Unplug the connector from the bulb. light bulb/position lamp bulb straight out.
4. Replace the bulb. 2. Detach the bulb by pulling it straight out.
}}
545
|| 3. Replace the bulb. Replacing the front direction Bulb specifications

4. Fit the bulb holder into the socket and press indicator bulb The specifications apply to bulbs in halogen
it into place. The direction indicator bulb in halogen head- headlamps. Contact a workshop12 if faults occur
lamps can be replaced by the driver. in other lamps.
5. If the main beam bulb's bulb holder has been
removed, fit it into the socket and screw in. Before the bulb can be replaced, the plastic Function WA Type
cover over the headlamp must be removed; see
Related information the section "Bulb replacement". Dipped beam 55 H7
• Bulb specifications (p. 546) Main beam 65 H9
Front direction indicators 24 PWY24W
daytime running lights/ 21/5 W21/5W
position lamps, front
A Watt
Related information
Left-hand headlamp.
1. Press the catches together and pull the bulb
holder straight out.
2. Replace with a new bulb holder with bulb.
3. Fit the bulb holder into the socket and press
it into place.
Related information
• Bulb specifications (p. 546)
546
Wiper blades in service position are not on. Service mode is activated/deactivated Related information
The windscreen wiper blades must be in service via the function view: • Replacing a wiper blade (p. 548)
position (vertical position) when, for example, Press the Wiper Service • Filling washer fluid (p. 549)
they are being replaced. Position button. The light indi- • Overview of the centre display (p. 33)
cator in the button illuminates
when the service position is • Windscreen and headlamp washers (p. 146)
activated. Upon activation, the
wipers move to standing
straight up. To deactivate the
service mode, press Wiper Service Position
again. The light indicator in the button extin-
guishes when the service position is deactivated.
The wiper blades also exit service position if:

• Windscreen wiping is activated.
• Windscreen washing is activated.
Wiper blades in service position. • Rain sensor activated.
In order to change, clean or lift the wiper blades • The car is driven away.
(e.g. for scraping off ice from the windscreen)
they must be in service position. IMPORTANT
If the wiper arms in service position have
IMPORTANT been folded up from the windscreen, they
must be folded back down onto the wind-
Before placing the wiper blades in the service
screen before the activation of wiping, wash-
position, make sure that they are not frozen
ing or the rain sensor, as well as before driv-
down.
ing. This is to avoid scraping the paint on the
bonnet.
Activating/deactivating service mode
Service mode can be activated/deactivated when
the car is stationary and the windscreen wipers
547
Replacing a wiper blade 4. Slide in the new wiper blade until the lock Replacing the wiper blade, rear window
The wiper blades sweep water away from the button engages.
windscreen and rear window. Together with the 5. Angle the blade in towards the arm until a
washer fluid they clean the windows and ensure click sound is heard. The blade is then no
visibility for driving. Windscreen and rear window longer in the removal position and can be
wiper blades can be replaced. moved again.
Replacing a windscreen wiper blade 6. Check that the wiper blade is firmly installed.
7. Fold the wiper arm back towards the wind-
screen.
1. Fold out the wiper arm.

2. Grip the inner section of the blade (by the
arrow).
3. Turn anticlockwise to use the blade's end
position against the wiper arm as a lever to
detach the blade more easily.
1. Fold up the wiper arm when it is in service 4. Press the new wiper blade into place. You
position. should hear a click. Check that it is firmly
The wiper blades are different lengths. installed.
2. Set the wiper blade in removal position by
angling it out from the arm until a click sound 5. Lower the wiper arm.
can be heard. NOTE
The wiper blades are different lengths. The IMPORTANT
3. Press and hold the lock button located
blade on the driver's side is longer than on
on the wiper blade mounting and at the Check the blades regularly. Neglected main-
the passenger side.
same time pull the blade straight out par- tenance shortens the service life of the wiper
allel with the wiper arm. blades.
548
Related information Filling washer fluid Prescribed grade: Washer fluid recommended
• Wiper blades in service position (p. 547) Washer fluid is used for cleaning the headlamps by Volvo - with frost protection during cold
weather and below freezing point.
• Cleaning the exterior (p. 567) as well as the windscreen and rear window.
Washer fluid with antifreeze must be used when
the temperature is under the freezing point. IMPORTANT
Use Volvo genuine washer fluid or equivalent
with a recommended pH of between 6 and 8,
in working dilution (e.g. 1:1 with neutral
water).
IMPORTANT
Use washer fluid with antifreeze when the
temperature is below freezing to avoid freez-
ing in the pump, reservoir and hoses.
Volume:
Filling of washer fluid takes place in the reservoir • Cars with headlamp washing: 5.5 litres.
with a blue cap. The reservoir is used for wind- • Cars without headlamp washing: 3.5 litres.
screen washer, rear window washer and head-
lamp washers* Related information
• Windscreen and headlamp washers (p. 146)
NOTE • Opening and closing the bonnet (p. 535)
When approx. 1 litre of washer fluid remains
in the reservoir the message Washer fluid
Level low, refill is shown in the driver display
together with the symbol .
Starter battery WARNING

The electrical system is single-pole and uses the
chassis and engine casing as a conductor. • The battery can generate oxyhydrogen
gas, which is highly explosive. A spark can
The starter battery is used to start up the electri- be formed if a jump lead is connected
cal system and drive the starter motor as well as incorrectly, and this can be enough for
other electrical equipment in the car. the battery to explode.
The starter battery should be replaced by a • Do not connect the jump leads to any
workshop13. fuel system component or any moving
part. Be careful of hot engine parts.
The car has a voltage-regulated AC alternator.
• The battery contains sulphuric acid, which
The starter battery is a 12 V AGM battery can cause serious burns.
(Absorbed Glass Mat), designed for the carbon Positive charging point
• If sulphuric acid comes into contact with
dioxide reducing functions Start/Stop and regen- eyes, skin or clothing, flush with large
erative charging, and to support the functionality Negative charging point
quantities of water. If acid splashes into
of the car's different systems. the eyes - seek medical attention imme-
The service life and function of the starter battery diately. IMPORTANT
is influenced by factors such as the number of • Never smoke near the battery. When charging the starter battery and the
starts, discharging, driving style, driving condi-
support battery, only use a modern battery
tions, climatic conditions etc.
When connecting an external starter battery or charger with controlled charging voltage. Fast
• Never disconnect the starter battery when battery charger, use the car's charging points in charging function must not be used since it
the engine is running. the engine compartment. The battery terminals may damage the battery.
• Check that the cables to the starter battery on the car's starter battery in the cargo area must
are correctly connected and properly tight- not be used.
ened. During charging, both the starter battery and the
support battery are charged.
550
IMPORTANT NOTE
If the following instruction is not observed The life of the battery is shortened if it
then the energy saving function for infotain- becomes discharged repeatedly.
ment may be temporarily disengaged, and/or
The life of the battery is affected by several
the message in the driver display about the
factors, including driving conditions and cli-
starter battery's state of charge may be tem-
mate. Battery starting capacity decreases
porarily inapplicable, following the connection
gradually with time and therefore needs to be
of an external starter battery or battery
recharged if the car is not used for a longer
charger:
time or when it is only driven short distances.
• The negative battery terminal on the car's Extreme cold further limits starting capacity.
starter battery must never be used for
To maintain the battery in good condition, at
connecting an external starter battery or The starter battery is located in the cargo area.
least 15 minutes of driving/week is recom-
battery charger - only the car's negative The following table shows specifications for the
mended or that the battery is connected to a
charging point may be used as the starter battery.
battery charger with automatic trickle charg-
grounding point.
ing.
A battery that is kept fully charged has a Battery
maximum service life. H7 AGM
Voltage (V) 12
Cold start
capacityA - CCAB 800
(A)
Size , L×W×H 315×175×190
(mm) (12.4×6.9×7.5 inches)
Capacity (Ah) 80
A According to EN standard.
B Cold Cranking Amperes.
}}
551
|| Volvo recommends entrusting battery replace- Symbols on the batteries

ment to an authorised Volvo workshop. There are information and warning symbols on
the batteries. Avoid sparks and naked
IMPORTANT flames.
When replacing the starter battery or support
battery, a battery of AGM14 type must be fit-
ted. Use protective goggles.
IMPORTANT Risk of explosion.
If the starter battery is replaced, make sure

you replace it with a battery with the same
cold starting capacity and type as the original Further information in the
battery (see the label on the battery). owner's manual for the car.
Must be taken for recycling.

NOTE
The starter battery's container size must be
consistent with the dimensions for the origi- Store the battery out of the
nal battery. reach of children.
NOTE
An expended starter battery or support bat-
Related information tery must be recycled in an environmentally
• Symbols on the batteries (p. 552) safe manner since it contains lead.
The battery contains corro-
• Using jump starting with another battery sive acid. Related information
(p. 406) • Starter battery (p. 550)
14 Absorbed Glass Mat.
552
Support battery Voltage (V) 12 Temporarily reduced Start/Stop function due to

Cars with Start/Stop function, in addition to the high current take-off means:
Cold start capacityA -
starter battery, are equipped with a support bat- 170 • The engine auto-starts without the driver lift-
tery. CCAB (A) ing his/her foot from the foot brake pedal.
Cars with the Start/Stop function are equipped 150×90×130 The support battery normally requires no more
with two 12 V batteries - one extra powerful Size, L×W×H (mm) (5.9×3.5×5.1 service than the normal starter battery. A work-
starter battery for starting and one support bat- inches) shop should be contacted in the event of ques-
tery that helps during the Start/Stop function's tions or problems - an authorised Volvo workshop
Capacity (Ah) 10 is recommended.
starting sequence.
A According to EN standard.
B Cold Cranking Amperes.
IMPORTANT
If the following instruction is not observed
IMPORTANT
then the Start/Stop function may temporarily
When replacing the starter battery or support cease to work after the connection of an
battery, a battery of AGM15 type must be fit- external starter battery or battery charger:
ted.
• The negative battery terminal on the car's
starter battery must never be used for
NOTE connecting an external starter battery or
battery charger - only the car's negative
• The higher the current take-off in the car,
charging point may be used as the
the more the alternator must be working
grounding point.
The support battery is located in a box next to the strut and the batteries charging = Increased
tower. fuel consumption.
The following table shows specifications for the • When the capacity of the starter battery
support battery. has fallen below the lowest permissible
level then the Start/Stop function is dis-
engaged.
15 Absorbed Glass Mat. }}
553
|| NOTE Fuses Location of central electrical units

All electrical functions and components are pro-
If the starter battery has been discharged so
tected by a number of fuses in order to protect
much that the car has no normal electrical
the car's electrical system from damage by short
functions and the engine is then jump-started
circuiting or overloading.
with an external battery or a battery charger,
the Start/Stop function will continue to be
activated. If the Start/Stop function then
WARNING
auto-stops the engine shortly after, there is a Never use a foreign object or a fuse with an
great risk that engine auto-start will fail due amperage higher than that specified when
to insufficient battery capacity, because the replacing a fuse. This could cause significant
damage to the electrical system and possibly
battery has not had the opportunity to lead to fire.
recharge.
If the car has been jump-started, or if there is If an electrical component or function does not
insufficient time to charge the battery with a Central electrical unit locations in a left-hand
work, it may be because the component's fuse drive car. In a right-hand drive car the central
battery charger, the recommendation is to was temporarily overloaded and failed. If the
temporarily deactivate the Start/Stop function electrical units under the glovebox change sides.
same fuse fails repeatedly then there is a fault in
until the battery has been recharged by the the circuit. Volvo recommends contacting an Engine compartment
car. In an outside temperature of approx. authorised Volvo workshop for checking.
+15 °C (approx. 60 °F), the battery needs to Under the glovebox
be charged for at least 1 hour by the car. In a
Cargo area
lower outside temperature, the charging time
may increase to 3-4 hours. The recommenda-
tion is to charge the battery using an external Related information
battery charger. • Replacing a fuse (p. 555)
Related information
• Using jump starting with another battery
(p. 406)
• Symbols on the batteries (p. 552)
554
Replacing a fuse
All electrical functions and components are pro-
tected by a number of fuses in order to protect
the car's electrical system from damage by short
circuiting or overloading.
Changing
1. Look in the fuse diagram to locate the fuse.
2. Pull out the fuse and check from the side to
see whether the curved wire has blown.
3. If this is the case, replace it with a new fuse
of the same colour and amperage.
WARNING
Never use a foreign object or a fuse with an
amperage higher than that specified when
replacing a fuse. This could cause significant
damage to the electrical system and possibly
lead to fire.
Related information
• Fuses (p. 554)
• Fuses under glovebox (p. 559)
• Fuses in cargo area (p. 563)
555
Fuses in engine compartment

Fuses in the engine compartment protect engine
and brake functions, amongst other things.
556
On the inside of the cover there are tweezers that Function Function
AA AA
facilitate the procedure for the removal and fitting
of fuses. Vacuum regulators; Valve; Valve 7.5 Starter motor Shunt
The fuse box also provides space for several for output pulse (diesel)
Fuel filter heater (diesel) 30
spare fuses. Engine control module; Actuator; 20
Throttle unit; EGR valve (diesel); - -
Positions
Position sensor for turbo (die-
On the inside of the cover is a label that shows - -
sel); Valve for turbocharger (pet-
the location of the fuses.
rol)
• Fuses 1-13, 18-30, 35-37 and 46-54 are of - -
the "Micro" type. Engine Control Module (ECM) 5
- -
• Fuses 31-34 and 38-45 are of the "MCase" - -
type and should be replaced by a work- - -
shop16. Solenoids (petrol); Valve; Ther- 10
mostat for engine cooling sys- - -
Function AA tem (petrol); EGR cooling pump
(diesel); Glow control module - -
- -
(diesel)
12 V socket in tunnel console, 15
- - Control module for spoiler roller 5 front
cover; Control module for radia-
- - 12 V socket in tunnel console, 15
tor roller cover; Relay coils for
by legroom for second seat row
Ignition coils (petrol); Spark 15 output pulse (diesel)
plugs (petrol) 12 V socket in cargo area* 15
Lambda-sond, front; Lambda- 15
Solenoid for engine oil pump; 15 sond, rear (petrol) - -
Solenoid clutch A/C; Lambda Engine Control Module (ECM) 20
sond, centre (petrol); Lambda Left-hand headlamp, certain 15
sond, rear (diesel) Starter motor 40 variants of LEDB
16 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. }}
|| Function AA Function AA Function AA

Right-hand headlamp, certain 15 Control unit for brake system 40 Left-hand headlamp 7.5
variants of LEDB (ABS pump)
Left-hand headlamp, certain 15
- - - - variants of LEDB
Heated windscreen* left-hand Shunt Heated windscreen* right-hand Shunt Accelerator pedal sensor 5
side side
A Ampere
Supplied when the ignition is 5 B LED (Light Emitting Diode)
Heated windscreen* left-hand 40
side switched on: Engine control
Related information
module; Transmission compo-
Headlamp washers* 25 nents; Electric steering servo;
• Replacing a fuse (p. 555)
Central electronic module; Con- • Fuses under glovebox (p. 559)
Windscreen washers 25
trol module for brake system • Fuses in cargo area (p. 563)
Transmission control module 15 - -
Horn 20 Right-hand headlamp 7.5
Siren* 5 Right-hand headlamp, certain 15
variants of LEDB
Control module for brake system 40
(valves, parking brake) - -
Windscreen wipers 30 - -
Rear window washer 25 Module for controlling battery 5

engagement
Heated windscreen* right-hand 40
side Airbags 5
Parking heater* 20
Fuses under glovebox

Fuses under the glovebox protect, amongst
other things, the 230 V socket, displays and
door modules.
}}
559
||
On the inside of the cover there are tweezers that The fuse box in the engine compartment also
facilitate the procedure for the removal and fitting provides space for several spare fuses.
of fuses.
560
Positions Function AA Function AA

• Fuses 1, 3-21, 23-36, 39-53 and 55-59 are
of the "Micro" type. Module for start knob and for park- 5 Controls lighting; Interior lighting; 7.5
ing brake control Dimming of interior rearview mir-
• Fuses 2, 22, 37-38 and 54 are of the
"MCase" type and should be replaced by a ror*; Rain and light sensor*; Keypad
Steering wheel module for heated 15
workshop17. in tunnel console, by legroom for
steering wheel*
rear seat*; Power front seats*; Con-
Function AA - - trol panels in rear doors
- - - - Control module for driver support 5

functions
230 V socket in tunnel console, by 30 - -
legroom for second seat row* Panorama roof with sun blind* 20
- - 5
- - Head-up display*
Control module for climate control 10 Passenger compartment lighting 5
Movement detector* 5
system
Media player 5 Steering lock 7.5 - -
Driver display 5 Diagnostic socket OBDII 10 Display in roof console (Seatbelt 5

reminder/Indicator for airbag on
Keypad in centre console 5 Centre display 5 the front passenger seat)
Sun sensor 5 - -
Fan module for climate control sys- 40
tem, front Humidity sensor 5
- -
USB HUB 5
- - Door module in right-hand rear 20
door
Steering wheel module 5
Fuses in cargo area 10
|| Function AA Function AA
Control module for online con- 5 Door module in left-hand front door 20
nected car: Control module for
Volvo On Call Control module for suspension 20
(active chassis)*
Door module in left-hand rear door 20
- -
Audio control module (amplifier) 40
(certain variants) Sensus control module 10
- - - -
Module for multi-band antenna 5 - -
Modules for seat comfort (mas- 5 Door module in right-hand front 20

sage) front* door
- - - -
Rear window wiper 15 TV* (certain markets) 5
Control module for fuel pump 15 Primary fuse for fuses 53 and 58 15
- - A Ampere
- - Related information
Seat heating, driver's side front 15
Seat heating, passenger side front 15 • Fuses in cargo area (p. 563)
Coolant pump 10
- -
Fuses in cargo area

Fuses in the cargo area protect, amongst other
things, power seats*, airbags and seatbelt ten-
sioners.
}}
||
The central electrical unit is located on the right-hand side.

On the inside of the cover there are tweezers that The fuse box in the engine compartment also
facilitate the procedure for the removal and fitting provides space for several spare fuses.
of fuses.
564
Positions Function AA Function AA

• Fuses 13-17 and 21-36 are of the "Micro"
type. Towbar control module* 40 - -
• Fuses 1-12, 18-20 and 37 are of the
Seatbelt pretensioner module, 40 Control module for airbags and 5
"MCase" type and should be replaced by a
right-hand side seatbelt tensioners
workshop18.
Internal relay coils 5 - -
Function AA
Control module for reduction of 15 Seat heating left-hand side rear* 15
Rear window defroster 30
nitrous oxides (diesel)
- -
- - Module for detecting foot move- 5
ment* (for opening the power oper- Blind Spot Information (BLIS)*: 5
Compressor for air suspension* 40
ated tailgate) control module, exterior reversing
Lock motor for backrest on rear 15 sound
Alcohol lock 5
right-hand side - -
- -
- -
Seatbelt pretensioner modules 5
Towbar control module* 25
Lock motor for backrest on rear 15
Actuator for exhaust gases (petrol, 5
left-hand side Power driver seat* 20 certain engine variants)
- -
Seatbelt pretensioner module, left- 40 - -
Control module for reduction of 30 hand side
All Wheel Drive (AWD) control 15
nitrous oxides (diesel) Parking camera* 5 module*
Power operated tailgate* 25
- - Seat heating right-hand side rear* 15
Electrically operated front passen- 20
- - - -
ger seat*
- - A Ampere
• Fuses under glovebox (p. 559)
566
Cleaning the exterior • Wash using a sponge, car shampoo and NOTE
The car should be washed as soon as it plenty of lukewarm water.
Outside lighting such as headlamps and rear
becomes dirty. This means that the car is easier • Clean the wiper blades with a lukewarm soap
lamps may temporarily have condensation on
to clean since the dirt does not attach as firmly. solution or car shampoo.
the inside of the lens. This is normal, all exte-
It also reduces the risk of scratches and keeps
• Dry the car using a clean, soft chamois or a rior lighting is designed to withstand this.
the car fresh. Wash the car in a car wash with oil water scraper. If you avoid allowing drops of Condensation is normally vented out of the
separator. Use car shampoo. water to dry in strong sunlight, you reduce lamp housing when the lamp has been
Handwashing the risk of water drying stains which may switched on for a time.
The following steps are good to remember when need to be polished out.
washing the car: • After the car has been washed, tar from
IMPORTANT
asphalt may remain. Use tar remover to get
• Avoid washing the car in direct sunlight. This
rid of the last spots after the car has been • Make sure that the panoramic roof and
can cause the detergent or wax to dry and
washed. sun visor are closed before washing the
have an abrasive effect.
car.
• Remove bird droppings from the paintwork
WARNING • Never use polishing agent with abrasive
as soon as possible. Bird droppings contain
Always have the engine cleaned by a work- properties on the panoramic roof.
chemicals that affect and discolour paintwork
very quickly. For example, use soft paper or shop. There is a risk of fire if the engine is hot. • Never use wax on the rubber mouldings
sponge soaked in plenty of water. An author- around the panoramic roof.
ised Volvo workshop is recommended for the IMPORTANT
removal of any discoloration.
Dirty headlamps have impaired functionality. IMPORTANT
• Wash the underbody, including wheel hous- Clean them regularly, e.g. when refuelling. Remember to remove dirt from the drain
ings and bumpers.
Do not use any corrosive cleaning agents but holes in the doors and in the sills after wash-
• Rinse the entire car until the dissolved dirt
use water and a non-scratching sponge ing the car.
has been removed so as to reduce the risk of
instead.
scratches from washing. Do not spray directly
onto the locks. Automatic car wash
An automatic car wash is a simple and quick way
• If necessary, use cold degreasing agent on of washing the car, but it cannot reach every-
very dirty surfaces. Note that in this case, the where. Washing the car by hand is recommended
surfaces must not be hot from the sun.
}}
567
|| to achieve a good result, or to supplement auto- 5. Switch off the engine by turning the start WARNING
matic car washes with washing by hand. knob in the tunnel console clockwise. Hold
the knob in place at least 4 seconds. Always test the brakes after washing the car,
including the parking brake, to ensure that
NOTE > The car is ready for the automatic car moisture and corrosion do not attack the
wash. brake linings and reduce braking perform-
The car must only be washed by hand over
the first few months. This is because the paint ance.
is more delicate when it is new. IMPORTANT
• Before washing the car, make sure that Wiper blades
the automatic rain sensor is deactivated, Asphalt, dust and salt residue on wiper blades, as
IMPORTANT well as insects, ice etc. on the windscreen, impair
otherwise there is the risk of it starting
Before driving the car into an automatic car and damaging the wiper arms. the service life of wiper blades.
wash, deactivate the functions for automatic
braking when stationary and automatic park-
• Make sure that the door mirrors are When cleaning, set the wiper blades in service
retracted, any auxiliary lamps secured, position.
ing brake application. If these functions are antennas retracted or removed, otherwise
not deactivated, the brake system will jam they risk being damaged by the auto-
when the car is stationary and the car will not
NOTE
matic car wash.
be able to move. Wash the wiper blades and windscreen regu-
larly with a lukewarm soap solution or car
High-pressure washing shampoo. Do not use any strong solvents.
In car washes where the car is towed through
When using high-pressure washing, use sweep-
with rolling wheels, the following applies:
ing movements and make sure that the nozzle
1. Drive into the automatic car wash.
Exterior plastic, rubber and trim
does not come closer than 30 cm to the surface
of the car. Do not spray directly onto the locks. components
2. Deactivate the function for Automatic brak- A special cleaning agent available from Volvo
ing when stationary using the switch in the Testing the brakes dealers is recommended for the cleaning and
tunnel console. Lightly depress the brake pedal now and then care of coloured plastic parts, rubber and trim
3. Deactivate the function for automatic appli- when driving long distances in rain or slush. The components, e.g. glossy trim mouldings. When
cation of parking brake via the centre dis- heat from the friction causes the brake linings to using such a cleaning agent the instructions
play's top view. warm up and dry. Do the same thing after starting must be followed carefully.
in very damp or cold weather. Avoid washing the car with detergent with a pH
4. Move the gear lever to position N.
value below 3.5 or above 11.5. This can cause
discolouration of anodised aluminium compo-
568
nents*, as illustrated. We advise against use of IMPORTANT Polishing and waxing

abrasive polishing agents, as illustrated. Polish and wax the car if the paintwork is dull or
Avoid washing the car with cleaning agent
to give the paintwork extra protection. The car
with a pH value lower than 3.5 or higher than
does not need to be polished until it is at least
11.5. This may result in discolouration of ano-
one year old. However, the car can be waxed
dised aluminium parts such as roof rack and
during this time. Do not polish or wax the car in
around the side windows.
direct sunlight, the surface being polished
Never use metal polishing agent on anodised should be a maximum of 45 °C (113 °F).
aluminium parts, this can result in discoloura-
tion and destroy the surface treatment. • Wash and dry the car thoroughly before you
begin polishing or waxing. Clean off asphalt
and tar stains using tar remover or white spi-
Rims rit. More stubborn stains can be removed
Only use rim cleaning agent recommended by using fine rubbing paste designed for car
Volvo. paintwork.
Parts that should be washed using a cleaning agent with
a pH value between 3.5 and 11.5.
Strong rim cleaning agents can damage the sur- • Polish first with a polish and then wax with
face and cause stains on chrome-plated alumi- liquid or solid wax. Follow the instructions on
nium rims. the packaging carefully. Many preparations
IMPORTANT
contain both polish and wax.
Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic and Related information
rubber. • Polishing and waxing (p. 569)
IMPORTANT
When using degreasant on plastic and rubber, • Wiper blades in service position (p. 547)
Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic and
only rub with light pressure if it is necessary. • Automatic braking when stationary (p. 432) rubber.
Use a soft washing sponge. • Using the parking brake (p. 429)
When using degreasant on plastic and rubber,
Polishing glossy trim mouldings could wear • Gear positions for automatic gearbox only rub with light pressure if it is necessary.
away or damage the glossy surface layer. (p. 408) Use a soft washing sponge.
Polishing agent that contains abrasive must • Rustproofing (p. 570) Polishing glossy trim mouldings could wear
not be used. away or damage the glossy surface layer.
Polishing agent that contains abrasive must
not be used.
}}
|| IMPORTANT Rustproofing Cleaning the interior

The car has effective protection against corro- Only use cleaning agents and car care products
Only paint treatment recommended by Volvo
sion. recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and
should be used. Other treatment such as pre-
treat stains at once for best results. Vacuuming
serving, sealing, protection, lustre sealing or Anti-corrosion protection for the body consists of is important prior to using cleaning agents.
similar could damage the paintwork. Paint- modern metallic protective coatings on the sheet
work damage caused by such treatments is metal, a high-quality painting process, corrosion-
not covered by Volvo warranty.
IMPORTANT
protected and minimised metal overlap, and
shielding plastic components, abrasion protection • Certain items of coloured clothing (e.g.
and supplemental rust inhibitor in exposed areas. dark jeans and suede garments) may
Related information
This combination guarantees that the body will stain the upholstery. If this occurs, it is
• Cleaning the exterior (p. 567)
important to clean and treat these parts
remain free from corrosion problems over time. In
• Paint damage (p. 573) the chassis, exposed components of the wheel of the upholstery as soon as possible.
• Repairing paint damage (p. 573) suspension are made of corrosion-resistant cast • Never use strong solvents such as
aluminium. washer fluid, pure petrol or white spirit to
clean the interior, since this may damage
Inspection and maintenance the upholstery as well as other interior
The car's anti-corrosion protection normally materials.
requires no maintenance, but a good way to fur-
ther reduce the risk of corrosion is to keep the • Never spray the cleaning agent directly
car clean. Strong alkaline or acidic cleaning solu- onto components that have electrical but-
tions must always be avoided on glossy trim com- tons and controls. Wipe them instead
ponents. Any stone chips should be rectified as using a moistened cloth containing the
soon as they are discovered. cleaning agent.
• Sharp objects and Velcro may damage
Related information the fabric upholstery.
• Paint damage (p. 573) Fabric upholstery and ceiling upholstery
Never scrape or rub a stain since this risks
destroying the upholstery. Never use strong stain
removers since this risks destroying the colour of
the upholstery.
570
Leather upholstery* Protecting the leather upholstery IMPORTANT

Volvo's leather upholstery is treated to preserve 1. Apply a small amount of leather protective
its original appearance. agent to a cloth and then apply it to the Do not use solvent that contains alcohol
leather in light circular motions. when cleaning the glass for the driver display.
Leather upholstery is a natural product that
changes and acquires a beautiful patina over 2. Allow to dry for about 20 minutes.
time. Regular cleaning and treatment are Seatbelts
Protecting the leather upholstery makes it more Use water and a synthetic detergent. A special
required in order that the properties and colours resistant to the stresses from the sun's UV radia-
of the leather shall be preserved. Volvo offers a textile cleaning agent is available from Volvo
tion. dealers. Ensure that the seatbelt is dry before
comprehensive product – Volvo Leather Care Kit/
Wipes – for the cleaning and treatment of leather allowing it to retract.
Leather steering wheel
upholstery which, when used in accordance with Leather needs to breathe. Never cover the Inlay mats and floor mat
the instructions, preserves the leather's protective leather steering wheel with protective plastic. We Remove inlaid carpets for separate cleaning of
coating. recommend Volvo Leather Care Kit/Wipes for the floor carpet and the inlaid carpets. Use a vac-
To achieve best results, Volvo recommends cleaning the leather steering wheel. First remove uum cleaner to remove dust and dirt. Each inlay
cleaning and application of the protective cream dirt, dust, etc. with a damp sponge or cloth and a mat is secured with pins.
one to four times per year (or more if required). neutral soapy solution.
Remove the inlay mat by taking hold of the inlay
Volvo Leather Care Kit/Wipes is available from
mat at each pin and lifting the mat straight up.
Volvo dealers. IMPORTANT
Fit the inlay mat in place by pressing it in at each
Cleaning the leather upholstery Sharp objects, e.g. rings, can damage the
pin.
1. Apply the leather cleaner to a damp sponge leather on the steering wheel.
and squeeze until a foam is created.
WARNING
2. Use the sponge on the stain in a circular Interior plastic, metal and wood parts
A fibrillated fibre or microfibre cloth, lightly mois- Only use one inlaid mat at each seat, and
motion. check before setting off that the mat by the
tened with water, available from Volvo dealers, is driver's seat is firmly affixed and secured in
3. Thoroughly dampen the stain using the
recommended for cleaning interior parts and sur- the pins so that it does not get caught adja-
sponge, allow the sponge to absorb the stain
faces. cent to and under the pedals.
without scrubbing.
Do not scrape or rub stains. Never use strong
4. Wipe the stain with a soft cloth and allow the A special textile cleaner is recommended for
stain removers.
leather to dry thoroughly stains on the floor mat after vacuuming. Floor
mats should be cleaned with agents recom-
}}
mended by Volvo dealers.
|| Related information Cleaning the centre display IMPORTANT

• Cleaning the centre display (p. 572) Dirt, stains and grease from fingers can affect
The microfibre cloth used to clean the centre
the centre display's performance and readability.
display must be free from sand and dirt.
Clean the screen frequently with a microfibre
cloth.
IMPORTANT
When cleaning the centre display, only use
gentle pressure on the screen. Heavy pres-
sure can damage the screen.
IMPORTANT
Do not spray any liquid or caustic chemicals
directly on the centre display. Do not use win-
dow cleaning agent, other cleaning agents,
aerosol spray, solvents, alcohol, ammonia or
cleaning agent containing abrasive.
Home button for the centre display. Never use abrasive cloths, paper towels or tis-
1. Turn off the centre display with a long press sue paper, these can scratch the centre dis-
on the home button. play.
2. Wipe the screen with the microfibre cloth
supplied or use another microfibre cloth of Related information
equivalent quality. The screen should be • Cleaning the interior (p. 570)
wiped with a clean and dry microfibre cloth • Overview of the centre display (p. 33)
with small circular movements. If necessary,
lightly moisten the microfibre cloth with clean
water.
3. Activate the display with a short press on the
home button.
572
Paint damage Touching up minor paintwork damage Repairing paint damage

Paint is an important part of the car's rustproof- To avoid the onset of rust, damaged paintwork When repairing paint damage, the car must be
ing and should therefore be checked regularly. should be rectified immediately. clean, dry and have a temperature of over 15 °C.
The most common types of paintwork damage
are stone chips, scratches, and marks on the NOTE
edges of wings, doors and bumpers.
When repairing the paintwork, it must be
Colour code clean and dry and at a temperature of at least
The colour code label is located on the car's door 15°C.
pillar and becomes visible when the right-hand
rear door is opened. Materials that may be needed
• Primer19 - a special adhesive primer in a
spray can is available for e.g. plastic-coated
bumpers.
• Basecoat and clearcoat - available in spray
cans or as touch-up pens/sticks20.
1. Apply a piece of masking tape over the dam-
• Masking tape.
aged surface. Then remove the tape to
• fine sand paper19. remove any loose paint.
If the damage is down to the metal, use of a
NOTE primer is appropriate. In the event of damage
When paint is repaired the surface must be to a plastic surface, an adhesive primer
clean and dry. The temperature of the surface should be used to give better results - spray
Exterior colour code should be at least 15 °C (60 °F). into the lid of the spray can and brush on
thinly.
Any secondary exterior colour code
Related information
It is important that the correct colour is used. • Repairing paint damage (p. 573)
• Type designations (p. 576)
• Rustproofing (p. 570)
19 If required.
20 Follow the instructions that are included with the package for the touch-up pen/stick. }}
573
|| 2. Before painting, gentle polishing using a very

fine polishing agent may be carried out
locally if required (e.g. if there are any uneven
edges). The surface is cleaned thoroughly
and left to dry.
3. Stir the primer well and apply using a fine
brush, a matchstick or similar. Finish off with
a basecoat and clearcoat once the primer
has dried.
For scratches, proceed as described above, but
mask around the damaged area to protect the
undamaged paintwork.
Touch-up pens and spray paints are available
from Volvo dealers.
NOTE
If the stone chip has not penetrated down to
the meal and an undamaged layer of paint
remains in place, fill in with base coat and
clear coat as soon as the surface has been
cleaned.
Related information
• Paint damage (p. 573)
574
SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
Type designations
The decals in the car contain information such
as chassis number, type designation, colour
code, etc.
Label location
Knowing the car's type designation, vehicle iden-

tification and engine numbers can facilitate all
contact with an authorised Volvo dealer regarding
the car and when ordering spare parts and
accessories.
576
SPECIFICATIONS
Decal for type designation, vehicle identifica- Decal A/C system for cars with refrigerant Decal for engine code and the engine's serial
tion number, permissible maximum weights and R134a. number.
code designation for exterior colour and date of
manufacture. The decal is positioned on the door
pillar, and will be visible when the right-hand rear
door is opened.
Label for parking heater. Label for engine oil.
Decal A/C system for cars with refrigerant

R1234yf.
}}
577
SPECIFICATIONS
|| NOTE
It is not intended that the decals illustrated in
the owner's manual should be exact replicas
of those in the car. They are included to show
their approximate appearance and locations
in the car. The information that applies to your
particular car can be found on the decal on
the car.
Decal for gearbox type designation and serial

Related information
number.
• Air conditioning — specifications (p. 588)
Decal for the car's identification number - VIN

(Vehicle Identification Number).
Further information on the car is presented in the
registration document.
578
SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions
Measurement of car length, height, etc. can be
read in the table.
Dimensions mm inches Dimensions mm inches Dimensions mm inches

A Ground clearanceA 207 8.2 G Load height 776 30,6 I Rear track 1657B 65,2B
B Wheelbase 2865 112,8 H Front track 1653B 65,1B 1653C 65,1C
C Length 4688 184,6 1649C 64,9C 1659D 65,3D
D Load length, floor, 1746 68,7 1655D 65,2D 1673E 65,9E

folded seat 1668E 65,7E J Load width, floor 1010 39,8
E Load length, floor 960 37,8 K Width 1902 74,9
F Height 1658 65,3
}}
579
SPECIFICATIONS
|| Dimensions mm inches
L Width including door 2117 83,3
mirrors
M Width including folded- 1999 78,7
in door mirrors
A For kerb weight + 2 people. Varies slightly depending on tyre
dimension, chassis alternative, etc.).
B Applies to cars with 17/19 inch wheels.
C Applies to cars with 20 inch wheels.
D Applies to cars with 21 inch wheels.
E Applies to cars with 22 inch wheels.
580
SPECIFICATIONS
Weights NOTE
Max. gross vehicle weight, etc. can be read on a
The documented kerb weight applies to cars
label in the car.
in the standard version - i.e. a car without
Kerb weight includes the driver, the fuel tank extra equipment or accessories. This means
90% full and all fluids. that for every accessory added the loading
capacity of the car is reduced correspondingly
The weight of passengers and accessories, and by the weight of the accessory.
towball load (when a trailer is hitched) influence
the load capacity and are not included in the kerb Examples of accessories that reduce load
weight. capacity are the different equipment levels
(e.g. Kinetic, Momentum, Summum), as well
Permitted max. load = Gross vehicle weight - as other accessories such as towbar, load
Kerb weight. carrier, space box, audio system, auxiliary The decal is positioned on the door pillar, and will be
lamps, GPS, fuel-driven heater, safety grille, visible when the right-hand rear door is opened.
carpets, cargo cover, power seats, etc. Max. gross vehicle weight
Weighing the car is a certain way of ascer- Max. train weight (car+trailer)
taining the kerb weight of your own particular
car. Max. front axle load
Max. rear axle load

WARNING
Equipment level
The car's driving characteristics change
depending on how heavily it is loaded and Max. load: See registration document.
how the load is distributed.
Max. roof load: 100 kg.
Related information
• Towing capacity and towball load (p. 582)
581
SPECIFICATIONS
Towing capacity and towball load Max. weight braked trailer

Towing capacity and towball load for driving with
a trailer can be read in the tables. NOTE
The use of a stabiliser hitch on the towing
bracket is recommended for trailers heavier
than 1800 kg.
Engine Engine codeA Gearbox Max. weight braked trailer (kg) Max. towball load (kg)
T5 AWD B4204T23 Automatic 2400 110

D4 AWD D4204T14 Automatic 2400 110
D5 AWD D4204T23 Automatic 2400 110
A The engine code, component number and serial number can be found on the engine.
IMPORTANT
When driving with a trailer, it is permitted to
exceed the vehicle's gross vehicle weight
(including towball load) by a maximum of 100
kg, provided that speed is limited to 100
km/h (62 mph). National legal requirements
for the vehicle combination, such as speed,
etc. must be observed.
582
SPECIFICATIONS
Max. weight unbraked trailer

Max. weight unbraked trailer (kg) Max. towball load (kg)
750 50
Related information
• Driving with a trailer (p. 448)
• Trailer Stability Assist* (p. 450)
SPECIFICATIONS
Engine specifications NOTE

Engine specifications (power, etc.) for each
Not all engines are available in all markets.
respective engine alternative can be found in the
table below.
Engine Engine codeA Output Output Torque No. of cylinders

(kW/rpm) (hp/rpm) (Nm/rpm)
T5 AWD B4204T23 187/5500 254/5500 350/1500–4800 4
T5 AWD B4204T20 183/5500 249/5500 350/1500-4500 4
T6 AWD B4204T27 235/5700 320/5700 400/2200-5400 4
D4 AWD D4204T14 140/4250 190/4250 400/1750-2500 4
D5 AWD D4204T23 173/4000 235/4000 480/1750-2250 4
Related information
• Coolant — specifications (p. 587)
584
SPECIFICATIONS
Engine oil — specifications

Engine oil grade and volume for each respective
engine alternative can be read in the table.
Volvo recommends:
Engine Engine codeA Oil grade Volume, incl. oil filter

(litres)
T5 AWD B4204T23 Castrol Edge Professional V 0W-20 or VCC RBS0-2AE 0W-20 approx. 5.6
T5 AWD B4204T20 approx. 5.6
T6 AWD B4204T27 approx. 5.6
D4 AWD D4204T14 Castrol Edge Professional V 0W-20 or VCC RBS0-2AE 0W-20 approx. 5.2
D5 AWD D4204T23 approx. 5.2
Related information
(p. 586)
• Checking and filling with engine oil (p. 539)
• Engine oil (p. 537)
585
SPECIFICATIONS
Adverse driving conditions for IMPORTANT

engine oil
In order to fulfil the requirements for the
Adverse driving conditions can lead to abnor-
engine's service intervals all engines are filled
mally high oil temperature or oil consumption.
with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil
Below are some examples of adverse driving
at the factory. The choice of oil has been
conditions.
made very carefully with regard to service life,
Check the oil level more frequently for long jour- starting characteristics, fuel consumption and
neys: environmental impact.
• towing a caravan or trailer An approved engine oil must be used in order

that the recommended service intervals can
• in mountainous regions
be applied. Only use a prescribed grade of oil
• at high speeds for both filling and oil change, otherwise there
• in temperatures colder than -30 °C or hotter is a risk of the service life, starting characte-
than +40 °C. ristics, fuel consumption and environmental
impact of the car being affected.
The above also apply to shorter driving distances
at low temperatures. If engine oil of the prescribed grade and vis-
cosity is not used, engine related components
Choose a fully synthetic engine oil for adverse
may become damaged. Volvo Car Corporation
driving conditions. It provides extra protection for
disclaims any liability for any such damage.
the engine.
Volvo recommends that oil changes are car-
Volvo recommends:
ried out at an authorised Volvo workshop.
Related information
• Engine oil (p. 537)
586
SPECIFICATIONS
Coolant — specifications Transmission fluid — specifications Brake fluid — specifications

Prescribed grade: Coolant recommended by Under normal driving conditions, the transmis- The medium in a hydraulic brake system is
Volvo mixed with 50% water1, see the packag- sion fluid does not need to be changed during called brake fluid, and it is used to transfer pres-
ing. Consult a Volvo dealer if unsure. its service life. However, it may be necessary in sure from e.g. a brake pedal via a master brake
adverse driving conditions. cylinder to one or more slave cylinders, which in
To prevent health risks, do not mix different types
turn act on a mechanical brake.
of glycol. Automatic gearbox
Prescribed transmission fluid: AW1 Prescribed grade: Volvo Original Dot 4 class 6
or equivalent.
NOTE
It is recommended that brake fluid is changed
or filled by an authorised Volvo workshop.
Related information
• Engine compartment overview (p. 536)
1 Water quality must fulfil the standard STD 1285.1.
587
SPECIFICATIONS
Fuel tank - volume Air conditioning — specifications Decal for R1234yf

The fuel tank's filling capacity can be read in the The car's climate control system uses a freon-
table below. free refrigerant, either R1234yf or R134a
depending on market. Information about which
Engine Litres refrigerant the car's climate control system uses
(approx.) is printed on a decal located on the inside of the
bonnet.
Petrol: T6 AWD 71
(B4204T27) Prescribed grades and volumes of fluids and
lubricants in the air conditioning system can be
D5 AWD
read in the tables below.
(D4204T23)
other 60 A/C decal
Decal for R134a
Diesel: 60
Related information
• Opening/closing the fuel filler flap and refu-
elling (p. 439)
588
SPECIFICATIONS
Symbol explanation R1234yf WARNING Evaporator

Symbol Meaning The air conditioning system contains pressur-
ised refrigerant R134a. This system must only IMPORTANT
Caution
be serviced and repaired by an authorised The A/C system's evaporator must never be
workshop. repaired or replaced with a previously used
evaporator. A new evaporator must be certi-
Cars with refrigerant R1234yf fied and labelled in accordance with SAE
Mobile air conditioning system
(MAC) Weight Prescribed grade J2842.
650 g R1234yf
Related information
Lubricant type • Servicing the climate control system (p. 542)
WARNING • Type designations (p. 576)
The air conditioning system contains pressur-
ised refrigerant R1234yf. In accordance with
A trained and certified technician is SAE J2845 (Technician Training for Safe
required in order to service the Service and Containment of Refrigerants
mobile air conditioning system Used in Mobile A/C System), service and
(MAC) repair of the refrigerant system must only be
performed by trained and certified technicians
Flammable refrigerants in order to ensure the safety of the system.
Compressor oil
Volume Prescribed grade
Refrigerant
125 ml (4.23 fl. oz.) PAG SP-A2
Cars with refrigerant R134a
Weight Prescribed grade
700 g (1.54 lbs) R134a
589
SPECIFICATIONS
Fuel consumption and CO2 • Economical driving (p. 443)

emissions
Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions can be
negatively impacted by a number of factors.
Examples of causes of increased fuel consump-

tion include:
• If the car is equipped with extra equipment
that affects its weight.
• Driving style.
• If the customer chooses wheels other than
those mounted as standard on the basic ver-
sion of the model, as this could increase roll-
ing resistance.
• High speed causes increased air resistance.
• Fuel quality, road and traffic conditions,
weather and the condition of the car.
A combination of the examples above could
increase consumption considerably.
NOTE
Extreme weather conditions, driving with a
trailer or driving at high altitudes in combina-
tion with fuel quality are factors that consider-
ably increase the car's fuel consumption.
Related information
590
SPECIFICATIONS
Approved tyre pressures NOTE

Approved tyre pressures for each engine alterna-
All engines, tyres or combinations of these
tive can be found in the table.
are not always available in all markets.
Engine Tyre size Speed Load, 1-3 persons Max. load ECO pressureA
(km/h) Front Rear Front Rear Front/rear
(kPa)B (kPa) (kPa) (kPa) (kPa)
235/65 R17 0 - 160C 230 230 270 270 270

235/60 R18
235/55 R19
All engines
255/45 R20 160+D 250 250 270 270 -
255/40 R21
265/35 R22
Temporary Spare Tyre max. 80E 420 420 420 420 -
A Economical driving.
B In certain countries the "bar" unit is used alongside the SI unit "Pascal": 1 bar = 100 kPa.
C 0 - 100 mph
D 100+ mph
E max 50 mph
Related information
591
SPECIFICATIONS
Performance
Top speed can be read in the table below.
Engine Engine codeA Top speed

(km/h) (mph)
T5 AWD B4204T23 220 137
T6 AWD B4204T27 230 140
D4 AWD D4204T14 205 127
D5 AWD D4204T23 220 137
NOTE
If there are no performance data then they
are available in the accompanying supple-
ment.
Related information
• Engine specifications (p. 584)
592
ALPHABETICAL INDEX ALPHABETICAL INDEX
setting the time interval 296 Alarm 257

1, 2, 3 ... standby mode 298 automatic re-arming 259
4WD 425 temporary deactivation 298 deactivation 259
Additional heater (Auxiliary heater) 209 reduced alarm level 257
Adjusting the steering wheel 130 Alcohol lock 402

A Aerial Allergy and asthma inducing substances. 179
A/C (Air conditioning) 184 location 234 All Wheel Drive, (AWD) 425
ABS Airbag 63 All Wheel Drive (AWD) 425

anti-lock brakes 425 Activating/deactivating 65 Android Auto 473
driver's side 63 settings 475
ACC – Adaptive cruise control 290, 301
passenger side 63, 65
Accessories and extra equipment 23 Apple CarPlay 471, 472
Airbag, see Airbag 63
Active bending lights 138 Applications
Air conditioning 184 settings 173
Active main beam 135
Air conditioning, fluid Approach lighting 144
Active Park Assist 393 volume and grade 588
function 393 Apps 456
Air conditioning system 176, 180 download, update and uninstall 489
Limitations 397
repair 542
operation 394 Assistance at risk of collision 371
Symbols and messages 400 Air distribution 191
Audio and media 456
Air vents 191, 193
Active Yaw Control 271 Audio settings 457, 483
change 192
Adapting driving characteristics 270, 418 defrosting 188 media 469
Adaptive Cruise Control 290, 301 Recirculation 191 phone 483
change cruise control functionality 303 table of options 195 play media 463
fault tracing 302 Text message 481
Air quality 178, 179
function 290 allergies and asthma 179 Auto climate control 183
managing speed 294, 295 passenger compartment filter 179 Automatic brake 432
overtaking 300 after collision 428
Air recirculation 191
radar sensor 322
593
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Automatic car washes 567 Bluetooth

connect 468
C
Automatic engine stop
auto-stop 414 connect car to Internet 484 Camera sensor 346
phone 477 Camera unit 332
Automatic gearbox 408
settings 483
oil 587 Car care 567
trailer 448 Bonnet, opening 535 Leather upholstery 571
Automatic relocking 237 Book service and repair 528 Car functions
Automatic speed limiter 279, 280, 281 Brake assist in centre display 47
after collision 428 Cargo area 219
Auxiliary heater 209
Brake fluid electrical socket 214
AWD, All Wheel Drive 425
grade 587 lighting 143
Brake functions 425 mounting points 221
protective net 224
Brake light 140
B Cargo cover 222
Brakes 425
Backrest Anti-lock braking system, ABS 425 Cargo grille 226
front seat, adjusting 119, 120, 122 automatic when stationary 432 Car holiday 437
rear seat, lowering 126 brake assist system, BAS 427 Car key battery low 252
Bag holder 221 brake light 140
Car modem
Battery 406, 550 brake system 425
connect car to Internet 484
jump starting 406 emergency brake lights 427
settings 488
maintenance 550 handbrake 428, 429, 431
Car status 528
overload 437 Brake system
Tyre pressure 509
start 550 fluid 587
support 553 Car upholstery 570
bulbs, specifications 546
symbols on the battery 552 Car washing 567
warning symbols 552 Catalytic converter
BLIS 349, 351 Recovery 454
CD player 467
594
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
central locking 239 Cleaning Collision warning system

Centre display automatic car wash 567 Pedestrian detection 340
change settings 46 car washing 567 Radar sensor 322
cleaning 572 centre display 572 Colour code, paint 573
climate control 181 Fabric upholstery 570
Combined instrument panel 88
Keyboard 49, 53 rims 569
settings 92
messages 105 seatbelts 571
upholstery 570 Compass 152
operation 36, 40
calibration 153
overview 33 Clean Zone Interior Package 179
symbols in status bar 45 Condensation in headlamps 567
Climate control 176, 180
Checking the engine oil level 539 auto-regulation 183 Controls lighting 132
Checking the level 423 centre display 181 Coolant 587

experienced temperature 177 Coolant, filling 540
Child safety 71
fan control 187
Child safety locks 256 Cooling system
Parking 200
overheating 436
Child seat 71 rear seat 182
i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points 78 sensors 177 Cornering lights 139
lower mounting points 74 temperature control 185 Corner Traction Control 271
positioning/fitting 71 voice control 117 Cover
table for location 76 zones 176 cargo area 222
table of i-Size 82 Climate control system Crash, see Collision 56
table of ISOFIX 79 Refrigerant 588
Upper mounting points 74 Cross Traffic Alert – CTA 352, 353, 354
Clock, adjustment 97
City Safety in crossing traffic 342 Cruise control 282, 283
CO2 emissions 590 deactivate 286
City Safety with evasive manoeuvre 343
Collision 56, 58, 63, 69 managing speed 283, 284
City Safety with obstructed evasive temporary deactivation 285
Collision warning 336
manoeuvre 345
CTA – Cross Traffic Alert 352, 353, 354
City Safety™ 336, 339, 340, 346, 348
Cyclist detection 340
595
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
CZIP (Clean Zone Interior Package) 179 Distance Warning 287, 288
Limitations 289
E
Door mirrors 149 ECO mode 421
D automatic dimming 150 Economical driving 421, 443

resetting 150 ECO pressure 506, 591
DAB Radio 461
Drive-E Electrical socket 214
Data Environmental philosophy 25
recording 22 Electrical system 550
Driver Alert Control 363
Data link connector 23 Electric parking brake 428
operation 364
low battery voltage 431
Daytime running lights 134 Driver display
Emergency equipment
Deadlock 241 application menu 103
first aid kit 524
deactivation 241 messages 105
warning triangle 523
Defrosting 188 Driver performance 164
Emergency puncture repair 512, 516
Diesel 441 Driver profile 169, 171, 172 action 513
run out of fuel 442 edit 171 inflating the tyres 516
Diesel particle filter 443 select 170 rechecking 513
Digital radio (DAB) 461 Drivetrain Emergency puncture repair kit 513
Gearbox 407 location 512
Dimensions 579
Towing bracket 447 Driving overview 513
cooling system 436 sealing fluid 512
dipped beam 134
with a tailer 448 Emissions of carbon dioxide 590
Dipstick, electronic 539
Driving economy 443 Engine
Direction indicator 141
Driving in water 435 deactivate 405
Direction indicators 141 overheating 436
Driving mode 418
direction of rotation 505 start 404
Driving with a trailer
Start/Stop 414
Disengaging the gear selector inhibitor 412 towball load 582
towing capacity 582 Engine braking, automatic 434
Display lighting 132
596
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Engine compartment massage 122

coolant 540
F memory function 121
Engine oil 537 Fan multi-function control 122
overview 536 Air distribution 192 FSC, ecolabelling 32
Engine drag control 271 Air vents 193
Fuel 440, 441
Control 187
Engine oil 537, 586 fuel consumption 590
adverse driving conditions 586 Fault tracing for the camera sensor 333
fuel gauge 97
filter 537 Ferry transport 423
Fuelling
grade and volume 585 First aid 524 filling 439
Engine oil, filling 539 First aid kit 524 Fuel tank
Engine specifications 584 Flooded road 435 volume 588
Engine temperature Fluids, capacities 549, 588 Fuel vapour 440
high 436
Fluids and oils 587, 588 Fuse box 554
Environment 25
Fog lamp Fuses
Error messages front 138 changing 555
Adaptive Cruise Control 305 rear 139 General 554
see Messages and symbols 305, 320 in cargo area 563
Foot brake 425, 427
Error messages in BLIS 356 in engine compartment 556
Four-C 423
Ethanol content under glovebox 559
Front seat
maximum 10 percent by volume 441
Climate control 181
External dimensions 579 Fan 187
heating 197 G
Temperature 185 Gearbox 407
Ventilation 198 automatic 408
Front seat, manual 119 manual 410
Front seat, power 120, 122 Gear positions
adjusting seat 120, 124 automatic gearbox 408
597
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Gear selector inhibitor 412 Heating Individual drive mode 418

Gear shift indicator 410 seats 197 Inflatable curtain 68
steering wheel 199
Glass Inflatable Curtain 68
Windows 188
laminated/reinforced 32 Information display 88, 92
Height adjustment 423
Glovebox 218 Infotainment system (Audio and media) 456
High engine temperature 436
Gracenote® 466 Instrument lighting 132
Hill descent control 434
Gross vehicle weight 581 Instrument overview
Hill Descent Control 434
GSI - Gear selector assistance 410 left-hand drive car 84
Hill start assist right-hand drive car 85
Hill Start Assist (HSA) 431
Instruments and controls 84, 85
Hill Start Assist 431
H IntelliSafe
HomeLink® 158 Driver support 28
Handbrake 428, 429
Home safe light duration 144 Interior Air Quality System 179
Hazard warning flashers 140
Horn 129 Interior lighting 141
HDC 434
Interior rearview mirror 151
Headlamp beam automatic dimming 151
height adjustment 132
I Intermittent wiping 145
Headlamp control 131
IAQS (Interior Air Quality System) 179 Internet, see Internet-connected car 484
Headlamp levelling of headlamps 132
IC (Inflatable Curtain) 68 Internet-connected car
head restraint 125 book service and repair 528
ID, Volvo 23
Heated washer nozzles 147 system updates 531
Ignition position 403
Heater 207 iPod®, connection 468
auxiliary heater 209 Immobiliser 255
ITPMS - Indirect Tyre Pressure Monitoring
parking heater 208 Immobilizer
System 507, 509, 510, 511
Immobiliser 255
Indicator symbols 93
598
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) 365, 368, 369 direction indicators front 546
J main beam 545
Leather upholstery, washing instructions 571
Jack 523 Limitations for Driver Alert Control 365
License agreement 491
Journey statistics 164 Limp home 407
Lifting tool 523
Jump starting 406 Loading
Lighting
active bending lights 138 General 219
approach lighting 144 load retaining eyelets 221
K automatic lighting, passenger compart- long load 220
ment 142 Loading hooks 221
Kerb weight 581
Automatic main beam 135 Load retaining eyelets
Key 172, 230, 233, 237 bulbs, specifications 546 cargo area 221
Keyboard 49, 53 controls 131, 141
Lock
Keypad in the steering wheel 129 controls lighting 132
locking 235, 239
cornering lights 139
Key tag 230 unlocking 235, 239
daytime running lights 134
dipped beam 134 Lockable wheel bolts 520
display lighting 132 Lock confirmation 237
L fog lamp 138 Locking/unlocking
headlamp levelling 132 tailgate 242, 244
Labels home safe lighting 144
location of 576 Low battery voltage
instrument lighting 132
Battery 437
Laminated glass 32 in the passenger compartment 141
main beam 135 Lowering the rear section 220
Lamps 542
trailer 449 position lamps 133 Low speed control 433
rear fog lamp 139
Lane assistance
operation 368 Lighting, bulb replacement 542
daytime running lights/position lamps
Lane assistance – Lane Keeping Aid
front 545
(LKA) 365, 368, 369
dipped beam 544
599
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
M N P
Main beam 135 Net PACOS (Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch) 65
Maintained climate comfort 200 cargo area 224 Paddle on the steering wheel 129
start/shut-off 204 Paintwork
maintenance colour code 573
Rustproofing 570 O damage and touch-up 573
Manual gearbox 410 octane rating 441 Panorama roof
Max. roof load 581 opening and closing 155
Oil, see also Engine oil 585, 586
pinch protection 158
Media player 463 Oil level low 539 sun blind 154
compatible file formats 475
Online car 484 ventilation position 155
voice control 116
book service and repair 528 PAP - Active Park Assist 393
Messages and symbols connect car 484
Adaptive Cruise Control 305 Park Assist 378, 381, 383
no or poor connection 487
Collision Warning with Auto Brake 348 function 378, 380
system updates 531
Messages in BLIS 356 Park assist camera 384, 386, 389, 391
Options/accessories 19
settings 388
Messages in displays 105 Output 584
manage 107 Park assist camera's limitations 389
outside temperature gauge 96
saved 108 Park assist lines for Park assist camera 386
Overheating 436, 448
Meters Parking brake 428, 429, 431
fuel gauge 97 Overtaking Assistance 300
Parking climate 200
Metric, Imperial, US 96 Owner's manual 19 Symbols and messages 206
ecolabelling 32
Mileage 161 Parking heater 208
in centre display 15, 16
Misting Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch 65
Owner information 14
condensation in headlamps 567 Passenger compartment filter 179
Owner’s Manual in mobile 18
Mobile phone, see Phone 478 Passenger compartment heater (Parking
Mood lighting 143 heater) 208
600
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Passenger compartment interior 212 Preconditioning 200 Rear seat

electrical socket 214 start/shut-off 201 Climate control 181, 182
Sun visor 219 Timer 202 Fan 187
tunnel console 212 Protective grille 226 head restraint 125
Passenger compartment lighting heating 197
Pump up tyre 516
automatic 142 lowering the backrest 126
Puncture 512 Temperature 185
Petrol grade 441
Rearview and door mirrors
Phone 477
compass 152, 153
Calls 480, 482
connect 478
Q door 149
electrically retractable 150
text message 481 Queue Assist 307, 313, 320
heating 188
voice control 116 Queue assistance 307, 313, 320 interior 151
Pilot Assist 307, 311, 313, 314, 315,
rear window
317, 319, 320
heating 188
overtaking 300
R Washers 147
Pinch protection, panorama roof 158 Wiper 147
PIN code 488 Radar sensor 290, 322
Recommendations during driving 437
Limitations 324
Pocket park assist - PAP 393 Recommendations for loading 219
Radar unit 322
Polishing 569 Recovery 454
Radio 458
Position lamp 133 Red Key 233
change and search for radio station 458
Power operated tailgate 247, 250 DAB 461 Refrigerant 542
Power panorama roof 154 settings 462 climate control system 588
voice control 116 Refuelling 439
Power save mode 437
Rain sensor 145 Regeneration 443
Power seat 120, 122
Raising the car 533
Power windows 148 Remote control, HomeLink®
resetting 149 Raising the rear section 220 programmable 158
601
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Remote control immobiliser 255 Sensus Navigation 359

S
Remote control key 172, 230, 233, 237 Service position 547
battery replacement 252 Safety 56
Service programme 528
connect to driver profile 172 pregnancy 56
Set time interval 288
detachable key blade 245 Safety mode 69
loss 230 start/movement 70 Settings 165
range 232 Categories 166
Sealing fluid 512
Resetting 169
Remote control key system, type approval 260 Seat, see Seats 119 settings menu 165
Remote updates 531 Seatbelt 58 system settings 168
Resetting, trip meter 163 buckle/unbuckle 60 Side airbag 68
Resetting the door mirrors 150 pregnancy 56
Side Impact Protection System 68
seatbelt reminder 61
Resetting the power windows 149 SIM card 488
seatbelt tensioner 59
Restore settings 173 SIPS (Side Impact Protection System) 68
Seatbelt, see Seatbelts 58
Retractable power door mirrors 150 Skidding 438
Seatbelt reminder 61
Retractable towing bracket 445 Ski hatch 222
Seatbelt tensioner 59
Road run-off protection 373 slippery driving conditions 438
Seats
Road sign information 357 heating 197 Soot filter 443
Limitations 362 manual front seat 119 spare wheel 520
operation 358, 360, 361 memory function front seat 121
Speed camera 361
Roll Stability Control 270 power front seat 120, 122
Ventilation 198 Speed limiter 275, 279
Roof load, max. weight 581
whiplash protection 57 deactivation 278
RSC (Roll Stability Control) 270 getting started 276
sensors
Run out of fuel temporary deactivation 277
Air quality 179
diesel 442 Speed ratings, tyres 525
Climate control 177
Rustproofing 570 Spin control 271
Sensus
connection and entertainment 29
602
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Stabiliser Stickers
trailer 450 location of 576
T
Stability and traction control system 271, 273 Stone chips and scratches 573 Tailgate
operation 272 Locking/unlocking 242, 244
Stop/start function 414
opening/closing with foot movement 250
Stability system 271 Storage spaces 212 power 247, 250
Stains 570 glovebox 218
Temperature
Start/Stop 414, 416 tunnel console 212
Control 185
function and operation 414 Sun blind experienced 177
the engine does not stop 416 panorama roof 154
Temporary spare
Starting the engine 404 Sun visor 219 spare wheel 520
after collision 70 Support battery 553 Through-load hatch 222
Start the car 404 Switching off the engine 405 Tools 452, 522
Steering assistance at risk of collision 371 Switch off engine 405 Top speed 592
Steering assistance at risk of head-on colli- Symbols Towbar
sion 375 indicator symbols 93 foldable 445
Steering assistance at risk of rear-end col- Symbols and messages Towing 453, 454
lision 376 Adaptive Cruise Control 305
Towing bracket 444, 445
Steering force, speed related 270 centre display status field 45
specifications 447
Steering force level, see Steering force 270 Collision Warning with Auto Brake 348
parking climate 206 Towing capacity and towball load 582
Steering lock 406
Symbols and messages for Assistance at Towing eye 452
Steering wheel 129, 130
risk of collision 372 Traction control 271
heating 199
keypad 129 System Traffic information 462
paddle 129 updates 531 Trailer 450
steering wheel adjustment 130 cable 448
Steering wheel paddles 413 driving with a trailer 448
snaking 450
603
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Trailer stability assist 271, 450 Tyre pressure monitoring USB

Transmission 407 Calibrate 511 connect car to Internet 484
low tyre pressure 510 jack for connecting media 468
Transmission oil
grade 587 Tyre pressure table 591
Tread 506 Tyres 504
Tread depth 506, 521

direction of rotation 505 V
installation 519
Tread wear indicators 506 Vanity mirror
pressure 506, 591
lighting 142
Trip computer 161, 163, 164 puncture repair 512
removal 518 Ventilation 191, 192, 193
Trip meter 161
specifications 591 seats 198
Trip meter, resetting 163
storage 504 Vibration damper 444
Troubleshooting tread depth 521 Video 468, 469
Adaptive Cruise Control 302 tread wear indicators 506 settings 463
TSA - trailer stability assist 271, 450 tyre pressure monitoring 507
Voice control
Tunnel console 212 tyre pressure table 591
Climate control 117
winter tyres 521
Tunnel detection 134 map navigation 118
TV 470 phone 116
radio and media 116
Type approval U settings 115
radar system 328
remote control key system 260 Unit standard Voice recognition 113
Type designations 576 Trip computer 163 VOL marking 504
Tyre dimension 517, 525 Unknown car part 259 Volvo ID 23
Tyre load index 525 Unlocking

from the outside 235
Tyre monitoring 507
with key blade 246
Tyre pressure label 506
604
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Weights Windscreen wiper 145

W kerb weight 581 rain sensor 145
Warning lamp Wheel bolts 520 Winter driving 438
Adaptive Cruise Control 290 lockable 520 Winter tyres 521
stability and traction control system 271
Wheel change 517 Winter wheels 521
Warning lamps
Wheel rim, dimensions 524 Wiper blades
Airbags – SRS 95
alternator not charging 95 Wheel rims changing 548
Fault in brake system 95 cleaning 569 Service position 547
Low oil pressure 95 Wheels Wipers and washing 145
Parking brake applied 95 installation 519
seatbelt reminder 95 removal 518
starter battery not charging 95 snow chains 521
Warning 95 Wheels and tyres
Warning sound tyre load index and speed rating 525
Parking brake 431 whiplash protection 57
Warning symbols 95 Whiplash Protection System 57
Safety 56
WHIPS (Whiplash Protection System) 57
Warning triangle 523
Wi-Fi
Washer fluid 549 connect car to Internet 484
Washer nozzles, heated 147 delete network 488
Washers share internet connection, hotspot 486
Headlamps 146 technology and security 488
rear window 147 Windows and glass 32
washer fluid, filling 549 Windscreen
windscreen 146 heating 188
Waxing 569 projected image 110
Windscreen washing 146
605
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
606
TP 23035 (English Int.), AT 1717, MY18, Copyright © 2000-2017 Volvo Car Corporation

XC60 OwnersManual MY18 en-GB TP23035 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

XC60 OwnersManual MY18 en-GB TP23035 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

XC60 OwnersManual MY18 en-GB TP23035 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

OWNER'S MANUAL

There is a range of different options for finding

2 Applies for most markets. }}

Indicates what version of

All articles that have been

Open the digital owner's manual

Searching using categories 1. Press and then select Exterior/ Favourites

Using the search function

3 For certain mobile devices.

Information bered in the same way as the corresponding Images

Important information on Volvo ID

6 Available in certain markets.

|| Contributing to a better environment type of waste should be discarded - an author- Interior

Other examples of systems that help the driver Related information

1 Roll Stability Control

Sensus - online connectivity and Information when it is needed, where it

Sensus offers an intelligent interface and online

Head-up display* speed information and navigation* information. Driver display

12-inch driver display.

For more information about all functions/

The symbol is shown on the windows where the glass is

Overview of the centre display

10 The views are reversed for right-hand drive cars.

Procedure Execution Result

Procedure Execution Result

Drag apart Zooms in.

Drag together Zooms out.

Expanding a subview from default mode

Standard mode and expanded mode of a subview in the centre display.

– The subview can be closed in three different

Go back to the home view again by swiping from

Symbol Specification Audio source being played back.

Information sent to and from GPS.

2. Press Sound System Volumes.

Changing the appearance of the screen

Type of button Property Affects car function

|| The buttons' different modes

The function is deactivated when the LED indica-

Using the keyboard in the centre

Making entries with the keyboard

13 Applies to Asiatic languages. }}

|| Switching between different languages in Variants of a letter or character

Writing characters/words by hand Suggestions for characters/letters/word/ Writing characters/letters/words by hand

Area for writing characters/letters/words/

Safety WARNING Safety during pregnancy

Do not leave any objects on the floor behind or under

|| WARNING Related information Seatbelt

WHIPS and child seats

WARNING Seatbelt tensioner IMPORTANT

• Activating/deactivating the passenger air-

Press together the seat mounting and move

WARNING Door and seatbelt reminder

|| Seatbelt reminder Rear seat Related information

Airbags WARNING Driver and passenger airbags

1 The car is only equipped with knee airbag in certain markets. }}

|| process, including inflation and deflation of the WARNING WARNING

1 The car is only equipped with knee airbag in certain markets.

Label for passenger airbag WARNING Activating/deactivating the

ON - the airbag is activated and all front-fac-